Garmin | GTN™ 625 | Garmin GTN™ 625 GTN 625/635/650 Pilot's Guide

Garmin GTN™ 625 GTN 625/635/650 Pilot's Guide
Map
Traffic
Terrain
GTN 625/635/650
Pilot's Guide
Weather
Flight Plan
Procedures
Nearest
Waypoint Info
Services
Utilities
System
© 2011-2019
Garmin International, Inc. or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated,
downloaded or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin.
Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a
hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed
copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
This manual reflects the operation of system software v6.60 or later. Some differences in operation may be observed
when comparing the information in this manual to later software versions.
This part shall comply with Garmin Banned and Restricted Substances document, 001-00211-00.
Garmin®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries. Garmin
SVT™, Telligence™, and Smart Airspace™ are trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries. These
trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.
SkyWatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications.
© 2018 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio, Sirius, SXM and all related marks and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
All other marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such
marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
© 2018 SD® and SDHC logos are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC. All rights reserved.
Iridium® is a registered trademark of Iridium Communications, Inc. All rights reserved.
The term Wi-Fi® is a registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
United States radar data provided by NOAA; European radar data collected and provided by Meteo France.
For information regarding the Aviation Limited Warranty, refer to Garmin's website.
For aviation product support, visit flyGarmin.com.
April 2019
Printed in the U.S.A
Software License Agreement
Foreword
BY USING THE DEVICE, COMPONENT OR SYSTEM MANUFACTURED OR SOLD BY GARMIN ("THE
GARMIN PRODUCT"), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE FOLLOWING
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT. PLEASE READ THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY. Garmin Ltd. and its
subsidiaries ("Garmin") grants you a limited license to use the software embedded in the Garmin Product
(the "Software") in binary executable form in the normal operation of the Garmin Product. Title, ownership
rights, and intellectual property rights in and to the Software remain with Garmin and/or its third-party
providers. You acknowledge that the Software is the property of Garmin and/or its third-party providers
and is protected under the United States of America copyright laws and international copyright treaties.
You further acknowledge that the structure, organization, and code of the Software are valuable trade
secrets of Garmin and/or its third-party providers and that the Software in source code form remains a
valuable trade secret of Garmin and/or its third-party providers. You agree not to reproduce, decompile,
disassemble, modify, reverse assemble, reverse engineer, or reduce to human readable form the Software
or any part thereof or create any derivative works based on the Software. You agree not to export or reexport the Software to any country in violation of the export control laws of the United States of America.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
i
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated
upon the use of the terrain function. The GTN 6XX Terrain Proximity feature
is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of
surroundings during flight. Terrain Proximity is only to be used as an aid
for terrain avoidance and is not certified for use in applications requiring
a certified terrain awareness system. Terrain data is obtained from third
party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of
the terrain data.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory
in nature and should not be relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and
terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current aeronautical charts
for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
Direct-To
Proc
WARNING: The GTN 6XX has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or selftest capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although
unlikely, it may be possible for erroneous operation to occur without a fault
indication shown by the GTN 6XX. It is thus the responsibility of the pilot to
detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant
or correlated information available in the cockpit.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
WARNING: The altitude calculated by GPS receivers is geometric height
above Mean Sea Level and could vary significantly from the altitude
displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the output from the GDC 74A/B
Air Data Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never
be used for vertical navigation. Always use pressure altitude displayed by
pressure altimeters in the aircraft.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used
in the GTN 6XX system must be updated regularly in order to ensure that
the information remains current. Pilots using an outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
System
Messages
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for
primary navigation. Basemap data is intended only to supplement other
approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
ii
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
WARNING: Traffic information shown on the GTN 6XX is provided as an
aid in visually acquiring traffic. Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based
only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting traffic.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
WARNING: Never use datalinked weather to attempt to penetrate a
thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms,
and the Airman's Information Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding "by at
least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an intense
radio echo.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
WARNING: For safety reasons, GTN 6XX operational procedures must be
learned on the ground.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and
understand all aspects of the GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide. Thoroughly
practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations,
carefully compare indications from the GTN 6XX to all available navigation
sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings,
charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before
continuing navigation.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
iii
CAUTION: The United States government operates the Global Positioning
System and is solely responsible for its accuracy and maintenance. The
GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the GTN 6XX utilize GPS
as a precision electronic NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with
all NAVAIDs, information presented by the GTN 6XX can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
CAUTION: The GTN 6XX does not contain any user-serviceable parts.
Repairs should only be made by an authorized Garmin service center.
Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
FPL
Direct-To
CAUTION: The display lens has a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING
AMMONIA WILL HARM THE ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important
to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an eyeglass lens cleaner
that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
CAUTION: TFRs provided by datalink weather sources (i.e., FIS-B and
SiriusXM) are only advisory and do not replace a thorough preflight briefing
on TFR times and locations. Not all TFRs may be shown. To determine
accurate TFR information, verify with official sources, i.e., preflight planning
or flight service center.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including
screen images of the GTN bezel and displays, are subject to change and
may not reflect the most current GTN software. Depictions of equipment
may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
Nearest
Services/
Music
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Utilities
System
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth
defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in
accordance with California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions
or would like additional information, please refer to our website at
www.garmin.com/prop65.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
iv
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
NOTE: Canadian installations: In accordance with Canadian Radio
Specifications Standard 102 (RSS 102), RF field strength exposure to persons
from an antenna connected to this device should be limited to 60 V/m for
controlled environment and 28 V/m for uncontrolled environment.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi functions as the basis for ground
maneuvering. SafeTaxi functions do not comply with the requirements
of AC 120-76C and are not qualified to be used as an airport moving
map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi is to be used by the flight crew to orient
themselves on the airport surface.
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin
database-dependent avionics of the following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory
and advisory guidance and information related to the use of databases in
the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases obtained from Garmin
or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements
(DQRs) by virtue of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the
FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database at
flyGarmin.com.
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment
is required for compliance with established FAA regulatory guidance, but
does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to
operate in accordance with established AFM(S) and regulatory guidance
or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed
equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s
database exclusion list as discussed in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what
data may be incomplete. To see if an exclusion report exists for a specific
database, visit flyGarmin.com.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
v
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and
Jeppesen database alerts and consider their impact on the intended
aircraft operation. For a current list of aviation database alerts,
visit flyGarmin.com.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database,
visit flyGarmin.com.
Com/Nav
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies
related to database information. These discrepancies could come in the
form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles and
fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication
in the air or on the ground. To report an aviation database error,
visit flyGarmin.com.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: The GTN touchscreen may not respond to touch commands if
condensation or moisture accumulates on the touchscreen.
Wpt Info
Map
NOTE: Depending on software version and configuration, GTN features
and screen images may differ from those shown in this manual.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
vi
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
NOTE: This device complies with Part 15 of
the FCC limits for Class B digital devices. This
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate
radio frequency energy and, if not installed
and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. Furthermore, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful
interference, the user is encouraged to try
to correct the interference by relocating the
equipment or connecting the equipment to a
different circuit than the affected equipment.
Consult an authorized dealer or other qualified
avionics technician for additional help if these
remedies do not correct the problem.
To obtain accessories for your unit, please
contact your Garmin dealer.
Foreword
The display surface is coated with a special
anti-reflective coating which is very sensitive to
skin oils, waxes and abrasive cleaners. It is very
important to clean the lens using an eyeglass
lens cleaner which is specified as safe for
anti-reflective coatings and a clean, lint-free cloth.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
AC 90-100A Statement of Compliance.
The Garmin navigational unit meets the
performance and functional requirements
of FAA Advisory Circular (AC) 90-100A, U.S.
Terminal and En Route Area Navigation (RNAV)
Operations.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Operation of this device is subject to the
following conditions: (1) This device may
not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
vii
Foreword
Product Registration and Support
Getting
Started
Help us better support you by completing your online registration today!
Have the serial number of your product handy and visit flyGarmin.com.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Record of Revisions
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Part Number Revision Date
190-01004-03
A
02/04/11
B
03/16/11
C
11/29/12
D
02/28/13
E
03/25/13
F
08/26/13
G
08/01/14
H
10/17/14
J
07/2015
K
01/2016
L
09/2016
M
08/2017
N
08/2018
P
04/2019
Description
Initial release.
Update information.
Updates for software v3.0.
Updates for software v4.0.
Updates for software v4.10.
Updates for software v5.0.
Updates for software v5.10.
Updates for software v5.12.
Updates for software v6.00.
Updates for software v6.10.
Updates for software v6.20.
Updates for software v6.30.
Updates for software v6.50.
Updates for software v6.60.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
viii
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Table of Contents
Software License Agreement............................................................................... i
Product Registration and Support.................................................................... viii
Welcome ....................................................................................................... xxv
About This Guide............................................................................................ xxv
Electronic Document Features......................................................................... xxv
Conventions...................................................................................................xxvi
1
Getting Started.....................................................................................1-1
1.1
Model Descriptions............................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1
GTN 625................................................................................ 1-1
1.1.2
GTN 635................................................................................ 1-2
1.1.3
GTN 650................................................................................ 1-2
1.2 About This Pilot's Guide........................................................................ 1-2
1.2.1
Conventions........................................................................... 1-2
1.2.2
Using the Touchscreen............................................................ 1-2
1.3 Product Description............................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1
Datacard................................................................................ 1-3
1.3.2
Pilot Controls......................................................................... 1-4
1.4 Unit Power Up...................................................................................... 1-6
1.4.1
Start-Up Screens..................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2
Database Verification and Fuel Settings................................... 1-7
1.5 System Operation............................................................................... 1-10
1.5.1
Using the Touchscreen Key Controls...................................... 1-10
1.5.2
Setup Page........................................................................... 1-10
1.5.3
Dual GTN Installations.......................................................... 1-13
1.6 Direct-To Navigation........................................................................... 1-14
1.6.1
Direct-To a Waypoint............................................................ 1-14
1.6.2
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint........................................... 1-14
1.6.3
Direct-To a Nearest Airport................................................... 1-14
1.7 Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies........................................................... 1-15
1.8 Flight Planning................................................................................... 1-17
1.8.1
Creating a Flight Plan........................................................... 1-17
1.9 VFR and IFR Procedures...................................................................... 1-18
1.10 Dead Reckoning.................................................................................. 1-19
1.11 Default Navigation.............................................................................. 1-20
1.11.1
Configuring User Fields......................................................... 1-20
1.11.2
CDI (GTN 650 only).............................................................. 1-23
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
ix
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
1.11.3
OBS Function....................................................................... 1-23
1.12 FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry...................................................... 1-23
1.12.1
FastFind With Waypoint Info..........................................................1-23
1.12.2
FastFind With A Flight Plan................................................... 1-24
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
2
Com/Nav
2.1
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Audio and Transponder Controls
(Optional)..............................................................................................2-1
Transponder Operation.......................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1
Select Transponder.................................................................. 2-2
2.1.2
IDENT.................................................................................... 2-3
2.1.3
Transponder Mode................................................................. 2-3
2.1.4
VFR........................................................................................ 2-5
2.1.5
Selecting a Squawk Code....................................................... 2-6
2.1.6
GDL 88 ADS-B Reporting........................................................ 2-7
2.1.7
Extended Squitter Transmission............................................... 2-9
2.1.8
TCAS II Transponder Mode Controls........................................ 2-9
2.2 Marker Beacon Annunciations............................................................. 2-10
2.3 TelligenceTM Voice Command............................................................... 2-11
3
NAV/COM..............................................................................................3-1
3.1
3.2
3.3
Volume................................................................................................. 3-2
Squelch................................................................................................ 3-2
Com and Nav Frequency Window and Tuning........................................ 3-3
3.3.1
Com and Nav Frequency Finding............................................. 3-5
3.3.2
Simple Frequency Entry........................................................... 3-8
3.3.3
Adding a New User Frequency................................................ 3-9
3.3.4
Emergency Frequency........................................................... 3-11
3.3.5
Stuck Microphone................................................................ 3-12
3.3.6
Remote Frequency Selection Control..................................... 3-12
3.3.7
Reverse Frequency Look-Up.................................................. 3-12
3.4 Com Frequency Monitoring................................................................. 3-13
3.5 Nav (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope) Receiver
Operations.......................................................................................... 3-14
3.5.1
Ident Audio and Volume....................................................... 3-14
3.5.2
Nav Tuning Window.............................................................. 3-15
3.5.3
Nav Frequency Finding......................................................... 3-16
4
4.1
4.2
x
Flight Plans...........................................................................................4-1
Creating a New Flight Plan................................................................... 4-2
Active Flight Plan Page......................................................................... 4-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
4.2.1
Waypoint Options................................................................... 4-4
4.2.2
Airways................................................................................ 4-11
4.2.3
Load Hold at Waypoint......................................................... 4-14
4.2.4
Load Search and Rescue Pattern (Optional)........................... 4-16
Flight Plan Menu................................................................................ 4-23
4.3.1
Store Flight Plan................................................................... 4-24
4.3.2
Invert Flight Plan.................................................................. 4-24
4.3.3
En Route Vertical Navigation................................................. 4-25
4.3.4
Temperature Compensated Altitude...................................... 4-32
4.3.5
Parallel Track........................................................................ 4-33
4.3.6
Edit Data Fields.................................................................... 4-35
4.3.7
Flight Plan Catalog Route Options........................................ 4-36
4.3.8
Delete Flight Plan................................................................. 4-41
4.3.9
Preview Flight Plan............................................................... 4-43
Graphically Editing a Flight Plan.......................................................... 4-44
Import Flight Plans with Connext........................................................ 4-44
4.5.1
Operation............................................................................. 4-44
4.5.2
Potential Errors..................................................................... 4-46
Import Flight Plans with a Datacard.................................................... 4-48
4.6.1
Potential Errors..................................................................... 4-50
Direct-To................................................................................................5-1
Direct-To Navigation............................................................................. 5-1
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint............................................................ 5-3
Direct-To a Nearest Airport.................................................................... 5-4
Removing a Direct-To Course................................................................ 5-5
Direct-To Map Waypoint........................................................................ 5-6
Off-Route Direct-To Course................................................................... 5-7
Graphically Editing a Direct-To Route.................................................... 5-7
Direct-To a User-Defined Hold............................................................... 5-8
Direct-To a Search and Rescue Pattern.................................................. 5-9
Procedures............................................................................................6-1
Basic Approach Operations................................................................... 6-2
Selecting a Departure............................................................................ 6-3
Selecting an Arrival............................................................................... 6-6
Selecting an Approach.......................................................................... 6-9
Approaches with Procedure Turns........................................................ 6-13
Flying the Missed Approach................................................................ 6-13
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
xi
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
Flying an Approach with a Hold........................................................... 6-14
Flying a DME Arc Approach................................................................. 6-15
Radius-to-Fix (RF) Approaches............................................................. 6-16
Vectors to Final................................................................................... 6-16
ILS Approaches (GTN 650 Only).......................................................... 6-17
RNAV Approach Procedures................................................................ 6-18
6.12.1
Flying the LPV Approach....................................................... 6-19
6.12.2
Flying the LP Approach......................................................... 6-20
6.13 Visual Approach Procedures................................................................ 6-22
6.14 Points to Remember for All Procedures................................................ 6-24
6.15 Points to Remember for Localizer or
VOR-based Approaches....................................................................... 6-25
6.16 Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the
King KAP140/KFC225......................................................................... 6-26
7
Waypoint Info.......................................................................................7-1
7.1
7.2
Waypoint Selection............................................................................... 7-3
Airport.................................................................................................. 7-4
7.2.1
Info........................................................................................ 7-4
7.2.2
Preview.................................................................................. 7-5
7.2.3
Procedures............................................................................. 7-6
7.2.4
Runways................................................................................ 7-7
7.2.5
Frequencies............................................................................ 7-8
7.2.6
Weather (WX) Data................................................................ 7-9
7.2.7
NOTAM Pages........................................................................ 7-9
7.2.8
Helipads............................................................................... 7-10
7.2.9
Nearest VRPs........................................................................ 7-10
Intersection (INT)................................................................................ 7-11
VOR................................................................................................... 7-12
VRP.................................................................................................... 7-13
NDB................................................................................................... 7-14
User Waypoints................................................................................... 7-15
7.7.1
Select User Waypoint by Name............................................. 7-15
7.7.2
Select User Waypoint from a List........................................... 7-16
7.7.3
Edit User Waypoint............................................................... 7-16
7.7.4
Delete User Waypoint........................................................... 7-16
7.7.5
Delete All User Waypoints..................................................... 7-17
Create Waypoint................................................................................. 7-18
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7.8
xii
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.8.1
Mark On Target.................................................................... 7-19
7.8.2
Waypoint Location Based on LAT/LON ................................. 7-20
Waypoint Location Based on Two Radials.........................................7-21
7.8.3
7.8.4
Waypoint Location Based on Radial and Distance.............................7-22
7.9 Import User Waypoints (Datacard)....................................................... 7-23
8
Map.......................................................................................................8-1
8.1
Map Menu........................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.1
Map Overlays......................................................................... 8-4
8.1.2
Map Setup............................................................................. 8-9
8.1.3
Change User Fields............................................................... 8-29
8.1.4
Map Detail........................................................................... 8-32
Map Panning...................................................................................... 8-34
Map Controls...................................................................................... 8-36
8.3.1
Pan Map Mode.................................................................... 8-36
8.3.2
Create Waypoint................................................................... 8-36
8.3.3
Graphically Edit Flight Plan Mode......................................... 8-37
CDI (GTN 650 only)............................................................................ 8-41
OBS.................................................................................................... 8-41
Map Symbols...................................................................................... 8-43
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
SafeTaxi® .......................................................................................... 8-44
8.7.1
Using SafeTaxi® ................................................................... 8-44
8.7.2
Hot Spot Information............................................................ 8-45
8.7.3
SafeTaxi® Cycle Number and Revision................................... 8-45
8.8 Flight Plan Depiction........................................................................... 8-46
8.7
9
Traffic....................................................................................................9-1
9.1
9.2
9.3
Traffic Pop-Up....................................................................................... 9-1
Traffic Test............................................................................................ 9-2
TIS (Optional)....................................................................................... 9-3
9.3.1
TIS Symbology........................................................................ 9-4
9.3.2
Traffic Page............................................................................ 9-5
9.3.3
Displaying Traffic on the Traffic Page........................................ 9-6
9.3.4
Altitude Display...................................................................... 9-6
9.3.5
TIS Limitations........................................................................ 9-7
9.3.6
TIS Alerts................................................................................ 9-9
9.3.7
TIS System Status................................................................. 9-10
9.4 TAS (Optional).................................................................................... 9-12
9.4.1
TAS Symbology..................................................................... 9-13
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
xiii
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
9.5
Com/Nav
FPL
9.6
Direct-To
Proc
9.7
Wpt Info
Map
9.8
Traffic
Terrain
9.9
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9.4.2
Displaying and Operating Traffic
(TAS Systems)....................................................................................... 9-14
9.4.3
Altitude Display.................................................................... 9-15
9.4.4
Traffic System Status............................................................. 9-16
ADS-B Traffic....................................................................................... 9-17
9.5.1
Traffic Applications - SURF, AIRB, etc...................................... 9-19
9.5.2
ADS-B Traffic Menu.............................................................. 9-19
9.5.3
Rotorcraft Traffic Page Orientation......................................... 9-23
RYAN TCAD 9900BX with the GDL 88................................................. 9-24
9.6.1
Ryan TCAD Description......................................................... 9-24
9.6.2
Altitude Mode...................................................................... 9-25
9.6.3
TCAD Control Menu............................................................. 9-26
TCAD 9900B Operation...................................................................... 9-29
9.7.1
Select Local Barometric Pressure........................................... 9-30
9.7.2
Select Active Shield............................................................... 9-30
9.7.3
TCAD 9900B Traffic Menu.................................................... 9-30
TCAD 9900BX Operation.................................................................... 9-33
9.8.1
Select Local Barometric Pressure........................................... 9-33
9.8.2
Select Altitude Filter.............................................................. 9-34
9.8.3
TCAD 9900BX Traffic Menu.................................................. 9-34
TCAS II............................................................................................... 9-37
9.9.1
TCAS II Theory of Operation.................................................. 9-37
9.9.2
TCAS II with ADS-B............................................................... 9-39
9.9.3
TCAS II Alerts....................................................................... 9-40
9.9.4
TCAS II System Test.............................................................. 9-44
9.9.5
TCAS II Operation................................................................. 9-45
10 Terrain.................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Terrain Configurations......................................................................... 10-1
10.2 GPS Altitude for Terrain....................................................................... 10-2
10.2.1
GSL Altitude & Indicated Altitude.......................................... 10-2
10.3 General Database Information............................................................ 10-3
10.3.1
Database Versions................................................................ 10-3
10.3.2
HTAWS Database Requirements............................................ 10-3
10.3.3
Database Updates................................................................ 10-3
10.3.4
Terrain Database Areas of Coverage...................................... 10-4
10.3.5
Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage................................... 10-5
10.4 Terrain Proximity................................................................................. 10-6
xiv
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.4.1
Displaying Terrain Proximity.................................................. 10-7
10.4.2
Terrain Limitations................................................................ 10-9
10.5 Terrain Alerting ................................................................................ 10-10
10.5.1
Terrain Alerting Requirements............................................. 10-10
10.5.2
Terrain Alerting Limitations................................................. 10-10
10.5.3
Using Terrain Alerting......................................................... 10-11
10.5.4
Displaying Terrain Alerting Data.......................................... 10-11
10.5.5
Terrain Page....................................................................... 10-13
10.5.6
Terrain Alerts...................................................................... 10-15
10.5.7
Terrain System Status.......................................................... 10-20
10.6 TAWS-B (Optional)............................................................................ 10-21
10.6.1
TAWS-B Requirements........................................................ 10-21
10.6.2
TAWS-B Limitations............................................................ 10-21
10.6.3
Using TAWS-B.................................................................... 10-22
10.6.4
Displaying TAWS-B Data..................................................... 10-22
10.6.5
TAWS-B Page..................................................................... 10-24
10.6.6
TAWS-B Alerts.................................................................... 10-26
10.6.7
TAWS-B System Status........................................................ 10-33
10.7 HTAWS (Optional)............................................................................. 10-34
10.7.1
HTAWS Requirements......................................................... 10-34
10.7.2
HTAWS Limitations............................................................. 10-35
10.7.3
Power Up........................................................................... 10-35
10.7.4
HTAWS Page...................................................................... 10-36
10.7.5
HTAWS Symbols................................................................. 10-42
10.7.6
HTAWS Alerts..................................................................... 10-44
10.7.7
Pilot Actions....................................................................... 10-50
10.8 TAWS-A (Optional)........................................................................... 10-51
10.8.1
TAWS-A Requirements........................................................ 10-51
10.8.2
TAWS-A Limitations............................................................ 10-51
10.8.3
Displaying TAWS-A Data..................................................... 10-52
10.8.4
TAWS-A Page..................................................................... 10-53
10.8.5
TAWS-A Alerts.................................................................... 10-56
10.8.6
Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)............................................. 10-71
10.8.7
TAWS-A System Status....................................................... 10-72
10.8.8
TAWS-A Abnormal Operations............................................ 10-72
11 Weather..............................................................................................11-1
11.1 SiriusXM Weather Products (Optional)...................................................................... 11-2
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
xv
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11.1.1
Displaying SiriusXM Weather................................................ 11-3
11.1.2
Weather Legend................................................................... 11-4
11.1.3
Weather Map Orientation..................................................... 11-5
11.1.4
SiriusXM Product Age........................................................... 11-6
11.1.5
NEXRAD.............................................................................. 11-7
11.1.6
Echo Tops........................................................................... 11-12
11.1.7
Cloud Tops......................................................................... 11-13
11.1.8
Cell Movement................................................................... 11-14
11.1.9
SIGMETs and AIRMETs....................................................... 11-15
11.1.10 County Warnings................................................................ 11-16
11.1.11 Freezing Level.................................................................... 11-17
11.1.12 METARs............................................................................. 11-18
11.1.13 Cyclone.............................................................................. 11-19
11.1.14 Lightning............................................................................ 11-20
11.1.15 City Forecast...................................................................... 11-21
11.1.16 Surface Analysis................................................................. 11-22
11.1.17 Winds Aloft........................................................................ 11-23
11.1.18 Icing.................................................................................. 11-24
11.1.19 Turbulence......................................................................... 11-25
11.1.20 AIREP/PIREP....................................................................... 11-26
11.2 Stormscope® Weather....................................................................... 11-27
11.2.1
Stormscope (Optional)........................................................ 11-27
11.2.2
Clearing the Stormscope Page............................................ 11-29
11.2.3
Changing the Stormscope Display View............................... 11-29
11.2.4
Changing the Stormscope Data Mode................................. 11-30
11.2.5
Changing the Stormscope Data Display Range.................... 11-30
11.2.6
Displaying Stormscope Data on the Map Page..................... 11-30
11.3 Connext Weather.............................................................................. 11-31
11.3.1
Using Connext Satellite Weather Products........................... 11-32
11.3.2
Connext Weather Menu...................................................... 11-33
11.3.3
Connext Settings................................................................ 11-34
11.3.4
Register with Connext........................................................ 11-36
11.3.5
Connext Weather Product Age............................................ 11-38
11.3.6
TFRs................................................................................... 11-38
11.3.7
Precipitation (PRECIP) Data................................................ 11-39
11.3.8
Lightning............................................................................ 11-40
11.3.9
Infrared Satellite Data......................................................... 11-41
11.3.10 METARs............................................................................. 11-41
xvi
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.3.11 PIREPs............................................................................... 11-43
11.3.12 Winds Aloft........................................................................ 11-44
11.3.13 SIGMETs and AIRMETs....................................................... 11-45
11.4 FIS-B Weather................................................................................... 11-46
11.4.1
FIS-B Operation.................................................................. 11-49
11.4.2
FIS-B NEXRAD.................................................................... 11-50
11.4.3
FIS-B TFRs.......................................................................... 11-55
11.4.4
Cloud Tops......................................................................... 11-56
11.4.5
Lightning............................................................................ 11-56
11.4.6
FIS-B METARs..................................................................... 11-57
11.4.7
FIS-B SIGMETs and Textual AIRMETs................................... 11-58
11.4.8
Graphical AIRMETs............................................................. 11-59
11.4.9
Center Weather Advisory.................................................... 11-61
11.4.10 FIS-B Winds and Temperatures Aloft.................................... 11-62
11.4.11 Icing.................................................................................. 11-63
11.4.12 Turbulence......................................................................... 11-64
11.4.13 FIS-B PIREPs....................................................................... 11-65
12 Nearest...............................................................................................12-1
12.1 Select a Nearest Page......................................................................... 12-2
12.2 Nearest Airport................................................................................... 12-3
12.3 Nearest Intersection (INT)................................................................... 12-4
12.4 Nearest VOR....................................................................................... 12-5
12.5 Nearest VRP....................................................................................... 12-6
12.6 Nearest NDB....................................................................................... 12-7
12.7 Nearest User Waypoint........................................................................ 12-8
12.8 Nearest Airspace................................................................................. 12-9
12.9 Nearest ARTCC................................................................................. 12-11
12.10 Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS)................................................... 12-12
12.11 Nearest Weather Frequency (WX Freq)............................................... 12-13
13 Services/Music....................................................................................13-1
13.1 Music................................................................................................. 13-2
13.2 Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services......................................... 13-3
13.3 Music Operation................................................................................. 13-4
13.3.1
Browsing Channels and Categories....................................... 13-5
13.3.2
Selecting a SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel by Number....... 13-6
13.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume............................................ 13-7
13.3.4
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets.............................. 13-8
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
xvii
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
13.4 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver
Troubleshooting.................................................................................. 13-9
13.5 Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)................................................... 13-11
13.5.1
Status................................................................................ 13-11
13.5.2
Making a Phone Call.......................................................... 13-12
13.5.3
Answering a Phone Call..................................................... 13-13
13.5.4
Suppress Visuals................................................................. 13-14
13.5.5
Phone Volume.................................................................... 13-15
13.5.6
SMS Text Operation............................................................ 13-15
13.5.7
Position Reporting.............................................................. 13-18
13.5.8
Contacts............................................................................ 13-20
14 Utilities...............................................................................................14-1
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14.1 Vertical Calculator (VCALC)................................................................. 14-4
14.1.1
Target Altitude...................................................................... 14-6
14.1.2
Altitude Type........................................................................ 14-6
14.1.3
Vertical Speed (VS) Profile..................................................... 14-7
14.1.4
Target Offset........................................................................ 14-7
14.1.5
Before/After Target Waypoint................................................ 14-8
14.1.6
Target Waypoint................................................................... 14-8
14.1.7
Display VCALC Messages...................................................... 14-9
14.1.8
Restore VCALC Defaults........................................................ 14-9
14.2 Flight Timers..................................................................................... 14-10
14.3 RAIM Prediction................................................................................ 14-11
14.4 Trip Planning.................................................................................... 14-13
14.4.1
Point-To-Point Mode........................................................... 14-14
14.4.2
Flight Plan Mode................................................................ 14-17
14.5 Fuel Planning.................................................................................... 14-19
14.5.1
Point-To-Point Mode........................................................... 14-19
14.5.2
Flight Plan Mode................................................................ 14-22
14.6 DALT/TAS/Winds............................................................................... 14-24
14.7 Clean Screen Mode........................................................................... 14-27
14.8 Scheduled Messages......................................................................... 14-28
14.9 Checklists......................................................................................... 14-29
14.9.1
Checklists Menu................................................................. 14-29
14.9.2
Viewing Checklists............................................................. 14-30
15 System................................................................................................15-1
15.1 System Status..................................................................................... 15-3
xviii
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.1.1
Serial Number and System ID................................................ 15-4
15.1.2
Version Information.............................................................. 15-4
15.1.3
Database Information........................................................... 15-4
15.2 GPS Status.......................................................................................... 15-5
15.2.1
GPS Status Page................................................................... 15-5
15.2.2
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)........................ 15-8
15.2.3
Circle of Uncertainty............................................................. 15-9
15.2.4
GPS Faults............................................................................ 15-9
15.3 External LRUs................................................................................... 15-10
15.3.1
GDL 69 (and GDL 69A) Status............................................ 15-11
15.3.2
GDL 88 or GTX 345 Status................................................. 15-12
15.3.3
GSR 56 Status.................................................................... 15-14
15.4 Setup............................................................................................... 15-15
15.4.1
CDI Scale Selection............................................................. 15-16
15.4.2
Date/Time.......................................................................... 15-18
15.4.3
Nearest Airport Criteria....................................................... 15-19
15.4.4
Com/Nav Setup.................................................................. 15-20
15.4.5
Keyboard Format................................................................ 15-23
15.4.6
Crossfill.............................................................................. 15-24
15.5 Alerts Settings.................................................................................. 15-28
15.5.1
Arrival................................................................................ 15-28
15.5.2
Proximity............................................................................ 15-28
15.5.3
Airspace Alert Options........................................................ 15-29
15.6 User Fields........................................................................................ 15-30
15.7 Units Settings................................................................................... 15-33
15.7.1
Setup Units........................................................................ 15-33
15.7.2
Setting a User-Configured (Manual) Nav Angle................... 15-34
15.7.3
Position Format Selection.................................................... 15-36
15.8 Audio............................................................................................... 15-38
15.9 Backlight Settings............................................................................. 15-39
15.10 Connext Setup - GSR 56................................................................... 15-40
15.11 Connext Setup - Flight Stream 210 and 510...................................... 15-40
15.11.1 Operation........................................................................... 15-42
15.11.2 Pairing a Device.................................................................. 15-43
15.12 Connext Setup - Other Bluetooth Devices.......................................... 15-44
15.13 Voice Command............................................................................... 15-45
16 Messages............................................................................................16-1
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
xix
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
17 Symbols...............................................................................................17-1
17.1 Map Page Symbols............................................................................. 17-1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
17.7
17.8
17.9
SafeTaxi™ Symbols........................................................................... 17-2
Traffic Symbols.................................................................................... 17-2
Terrain Obstacle Symbols.................................................................... 17-5
HTAWS Obstacle Symbols................................................................... 17-6
Basemap Symbols............................................................................... 17-7
Map Tool Bar Symbols......................................................................... 17-8
Miscellaneous Symbols....................................................................... 17-9
Stormscope Symbols......................................................................... 17-10
18 Appendix.............................................................................................18-1
18.1 Glossary............................................................................................. 18-1
18.2 Database Information and Updates..................................................... 18-9
18.2.1
GTN Databases.................................................................... 18-9
Updating Databases with a SD Card......................................18-11
18.2.2
18.2.3
Updating Databases with a Flight Stream 510..................... 18-13
18.2.4
Database SYNC ................................................................. 18-15
18.2.5
Chart Streaming................................................................. 18-16
18.2.6
Database Troubleshooting Tips............................................ 18-17
18.3 Demo Mode..................................................................................... 18-18
18.4 Glove Qualification Procedure........................................................... 18-21
18.5 Telligence Voice Command Qualification
Procedure......................................................................................... 18-25
Index............................................................................................. Index-1
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
xx
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Welcome
Foreword
Welcome to the GTN era of navigation. The Garmin Touchscreen Navigator
(GTN) supports airway navigation and flexible flight planning, including arrival
and departure procedures and precision approaches. All of these advanced
features are easily accessed with an easy-to-use touchscreen display, another first
for general aviation. You can be confident in knowing that this product has been
designed to meet or exceed industry performance standards and is supported
through a global network of Garmin Aviation Distributors.
About This Guide
Take a little time to review the various sections of this guide to familiarize
yourself with it. First, read this section and the Getting Started section as an
introduction to quickly get you started with the GTN. The other sections are
not meant to necessarily be read in order, but provide detailed information
on the subject they contain as you need them. Do take the time to review the
information before using the product to assist you in getting the most out of
your avionics.
Generally, a feature will be described in a section that provides a brief
description, a graphic functional diagram, and step-by-step procedures. If read
cover-to-cover sequentially, the information may seem repetitive. The guide is
designed as a reference and learning tool where you will generally skip around
the document learning about a particular feature or function after becoming
familiar with the unit.
Electronic Document Features
Versions of this guide are saved in the Adobe Portable Document Format
(PDF) and have features that help the user navigate more easily through the
document. The cover icons, table of contents, and index are hyperlinks that will
take you directly to the selected item.
Versions of aviation products in PDF format are available at flyGarmin.com.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
xxi
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Conventions
The GTN display dynamically tailors the number and position of the controls
for each function and are engaged by merely touching them.
Touch: Touch the key with your finger.
Drag: Touch the list or location on the map with your finger. Continue lightly
holding your finger to the display surface and drag your finger in the
intended direction to scroll through the list or move the location on the
map.
In this pilot’s guide, key titles are noted by bold text. An image of the key
used will be shown to the left of a procedure. Keys are outlined areas on the
display. Figures in the guide will identify the available controls. A key may have
a name of a control, such as Enter, Terrain, or Back. A key may also be an
information field, such as a numeric value that can be changed.
Text Description of
Key Operation
Graphic of Key
Map
Traffic
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Terrain Map
Overlay key to toggle the view of terrain data.
Text Description
of Key Operation
Graphic of Key With
Numeric Value
Terrain
Weather
When the Fuel on Board value is selected, touch the Fuel on
Board key to display the Fuel on Board values.
List of Keys. Touch To Select.
Nearest
Scroll Bar Indicates More Selections
Available
Touch Finger to an Item in the List
and Drag Your Finger to View More
Selections
Selected Field Type
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Touching the Back key returns to the previous display. The
Cancel key cancels any information selected or entered and
returns to the previous display.
Index
xxii
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1
1.1
GETTING STARTED
Foreword
Model Descriptions
This guide covers the operation of the GTN 625, 635, and 650. In general, all
models will be referred to as the GTN 6XX, except where there are physical or
operational differences. The GTN 6XX units are approximately 6.25 inches wide
and 2.65 inches high. The display is a 600 by 266 pixel, 4.9 inch diagonal color
LCD with touchscreen controls. The units include one removable SD datacard
for the databases and software upgrades.
The GTN 6XX simplifies your workload with an easy-to-use touch panel that
provides a visual display of both controls and functions. The required controls
are displayed for the selected function. Keys on the display allow you to access
and control their functions by a simple touch on the interactive display.
The GTN 6XX can integrate a variety of avionics that will not only simplify
operation, but also save panel space. The GTN 625, 635, and 650 have their
own GPS/SBAS navigator and flight planning functions. The GTN 635 adds a
VHF Com radio, while the 650 adds VHF Com and VHF Nav radios. Selected
optional external equipment allows you to display and control active traffic
systems, SirusXM Entertainment Radio, SiriusXM Weather, and a Mode S
transponder directly from the GTN 6XX display, and more. When the optional
transponder is not installed, the area on the right side of the display will show a
line of navigation information instead of the transponder window.
1.1.1
GTN 625
The GTN 625 has a GPS/SBAS engine and is TSO-C146c certified for primary
domestic, oceanic, and remote navigation including en route, terminal, and
non-precision approaches, and approaches with vertical guidance, such as LPV
and LNAV/VNAV. The GTN 625 can simultaneously give aviators vital approach
information and weather and traffic data in relation to their position on a
large, color moving map display. Thanks to a high-contrast color display, the
information can be easily read from wide viewing angles even in direct sunlight.
Its color moving map features a built-in database that shows cities, highways,
railroads, rivers, lakes, coastlines, and a complete Jeppesen database. The
Jeppesen database (that can be updated with a front-loading datacard) contains
all airports, VORs, NDBs, Intersections, FSSs, Approaches, DPs/STARs, and SUA
information.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Pilots will enjoy the GTN 625 as a flexible and powerful navigator, especially
when it is coupled with traffic, lightning detection, and weather interfaces.
With the PC-based FDE prediction program, the GTN 625 may be used
for oceanic or remote operations. For the latest in graphic and text weather
information, the GTN 625 can interface to the SiriusXM Weather Service via the
Garmin GDL 69/69A datalink receiver.
1.1.2
GTN 635
The GTN 635 includes all of the features of the GTN 625, and also includes
a TSO’d airborne VHF communications transceiver.
1.1.3
GTN 650
The GTN 650 includes all of the features of the GTN 625, and also includes a
TSO’d airborne VHF communications transceiver and TSO’d airborne VOR/Localizer
and Glideslope receivers.
1.2
1.2.1
About This Pilot's Guide
Conventions
Bold text indicates a control. The small right knob is the smaller, inner knob
of the two concentric rotary knobs on the lower, right corner of the bezel. The
large right knob is the larger, outer knob.
Large, Outer Knob
Weather
Small, Inner Knob
Nearest
Figure 1-1 Large/Small Concentric Knobs
Services/
Music
A graphic of a control on the side of the page refers to the control you should
use for the associated step as shown below.
Utilities
1.2.2
System
Messages
Symbols
Using the Touchscreen
Most of the controls are operated by touching the display. Highlighted icons
and keys may be simply touched to make a selection. A list of menu items
may be scrolled by touching the screen and retaining pressure while sliding
your finger up or down. Map displays may be panned by touching the screen
and retaining pressure while sliding your finger in the desired direction.
Pinch-to-zoom capability is available in software v6.20 or later.
Appendix
Index
1-2
You can return to the previous page or exit the current function
by touching the Back key.
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1.3
Quickly return to the Home page by pressing the HOME key.
Press and hold the HOME key to reach the Default Navigation
page.
Product Description
This section provides an overview of the GTN 6XX product and a quick look
at some important features. The GTN 6XX presents a full-color moving map
with navigation information to the pilot through a large-format display. Controls
are a combination of rotary knobs and push-keys on the bezel with the color
display providing information as well as a touchscreen controls. The GTN 6XX
has a 600 x 266 pixel, 4.9 inch diagonal LCD display.
Volume, Squelch
On/Off
Function Home
Keys
Page
Active Com/Nav
Frequency
HOME Key
Photo
Sensor
Datacard
Message
Annunciation
and Key
Locking
Screw
Annunciations
Dual Rotary Knob
Function Hints
Figure 1-2 GTN 650 Front Panel
1.3.1
Standby Com/Nav
Frequency
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Direct-To
Key
Traffic
Large and
Small Knobs
Terrain
Xpdr Panel
Controls (optional)
Weather
Nearest
Datacard
The GTN 6XX uses a Secure Digital (SD) card or Flight Stream 510 to load
and store various types of data. The datacard is required for Terrain, FliteChart,
and Chartview database storage and all database updates.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
NOTE: Do Not remove or insert the datacard while in flight. Ensure the
GTN 6XX is powered off before inserting or removing a datacard.
Messages
NOTE: For instructions on updating databases, refer to section 18.2.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-3
Foreword
1.3.1.1
Inserting a Datacard
1. Insert the datacard in the datacard slot (the label side of the
card should face the right edge of the display bezel).
2. To eject the card, gently press on the datacard to release the
spring latch.
1.3.2
Pilot Controls
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
The GTN 6XX controls have been designed to simplify operation of the
system and minimize workload and the time required to access sophisticated
functionality. Controls are located on the bezel and on the touchscreen display.
Controls are comprised of dual concentric knobs, volume/squelch knob, bezel
keys, and active touch areas on the display.
1.3.2.1
Volume/Squelch Knob
The Volume knob located in the top left corner of the bezel controls audio
volume for the selected Com radio or Nav receiver and other volume levels for
external audio input devices that are controlled via the GTN interface, if installed.
When the Com radio is active, press the Volume knob momentarily to disable
automatic squelch control for the Com radio. When the Nav radio is active, press
the Volume knob momentarily to enable/disable the ident tone for the Nav radio.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 1-3 Volume/Squelch Knob
1.3.2.2
Large/Small Concentric Knobs
The large right and small right knobs are used for data entry, such as in the
Waypoint or Direct-To functions, and to set the frequencies for the NAV/COM
radios in units so equipped.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 1-4 Large/Small Concentric Knobs
1.3.2.3
HOME Key
Pressing the HOME key displays the Home page, the main screen for
accessing the GTN features. Pressing and holding the HOME key will open the
Default Navigation page from any other page.
Index
Figure 1-5 HOME Key
1-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Page or Function Name
Foreword
Touch the Key to
Access the Function
Getting
Started
Touch Arrow or Touchscreen
and Drag Finger to Scroll
Screen for More Keys
Figure 1-6 Home Page On The GTN 650
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Navigation Information
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 1-7 Home Page On The GTN 625 Without Transponder
1.3.2.4
Wpt Info
Direct-To Key
Map
The Direct-To key provides access to the direct-to function, which allows you
to enter a waypoint and establishes a direct course to the selected destination.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 1-8 Direct-To Key
1.3.2.5
Nearest
Touchscreen Keys
Touchscreen keys are placed around the display. The keys vary depending on
the page selected. Touch the key to perform the function or access the described
information.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch to View Menu Items
Touch to View Messages
Messages
Touch to View Previous Page
Symbols
Touch to Select CDI Source
Touch to Toggle OBS
Appendix
Figure 1-9 Touchscreen Key Control Example (Default Navigation Page)
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
1-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
1.4
Unit Power Up
The GTN 6XX System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and
receives power directly from electrical buses. The GTN 6XX and supporting
sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, memory, external inputs, and outputs to ensure safe
operation.
1.4.1
Start-Up Screens
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed. All system
annunciations should disappear typically within the first 30 seconds after
power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become momentarily
illuminated on the GTN 6XX display bezel.
The splash screen displays the following information:
• Copyright
• Database List and System version
• Instrument Panel Self-Test
Currently installed database information includes valid operating dates,
cycle number, and database type. When this information has been reviewed for
currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Databases that are not current will be shown in amber.
During the startup process the user may be asked if they would like to update
to newer databases. Additional information on database updates can be found
in section 18.2.
The COM and NAV radios, transponder controls, and GDL 88 control panel
are displayed on the Start-Up screens. Some functions may be unavailable until
after the databases are verified.
Messages
Symbols
1 - Copyright
Appendix
2 - Software & Database
Versions & Dates
3 - Panel Self-Test
Figure 1-10 System Startup Pages
Index
1-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1.4.2
Database Verification and Fuel Settings
1. When the System and Database Version page appears, ensure
databases are current, then touch Continue.
Ensure
Required
Databases are
Present and
Current
Software and GPS
Engine Versions
Touch to
Continue to
Self-Test Page
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 1-11 System Startup Pages
2. When the Instrument Panel Self-Test and Fuel Setting page
appears, check to ensure that the CDI/HSI outputs and
other displayed data are correct on the external interfaced
equipment.
3. Touch each of the Fuel value keys and set the appropriate
values as desired. Fuel capacity units are selected on the
System - Units page.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Start-Up
Instrument
Panel Test
Conditions
Weather
Touch to Set
Current Fuel
Quantity
Touch to Set
Fuel Flow
Nearest
Touch to Continue
to Home Page
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 1-12 Instrument Panel Self-Test & Fuel Settings Page
NOTE: When the GTN is interfaced with a digital fuel computer the pilot
may not be able to manually edit the fuel flow and fuel on board data on
the Self-Test.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-7
4. When the Fuel on Board value is selected, touch the Full or Tabs
keys to display those values after they have been set.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to
Display Fuel
Full Capacity
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to
Display Fuel
Tabs Capacity
Touch to Set
Fuel Full or
Tab Capacity
Touch Keys
to Select Fuel
Capacity Values
Touch to Delete
Characters
Touch to
Accept Fuel on
Board Values
Selected Fuel on Board
Capacity
Figure 1-13 Fuel On Board Page
Proc
Wpt Info
5. Touch the Set Full/Tabs key to set the fuel values for Fuel
Full Capacity and Fuel Tab Capacity. After setting the fuel
values, touch the Back and then the Enter keys to return to
the Instrument Panel Self-Test page.
Map
Traffic
Touch to
Set Fuel Full
Capacity
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Set
Fuel Tab
Capacity
Touch to Return
to Fuel on
Board Display
Figure 1-14 Fuel Capacity Setup Page
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6. On the Instrument Panel Self-Test page, touch the Fuel Flow
key and then use the numeric keypad to set those values. Touch
the Enter key after selecting the Fuel Flow values.
Selected Fuel
Flow Value
Touch Keys
to Select Fuel
Flow Values
Touch to Delete
Characters
Touch to Cancel
Selection and
Return to
Previous Page
Touch to Accept
Fuel Flow Values
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 1-15 Fuel Flow Setup Page
Proc
7. After returning to the Instrument Panel Self-Test page and the
fuel values have been set, touch the Continue key to advance
to the Home page.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 1-16 Home Page
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
1.5
System Operation
1.5.1
Using the Touchscreen Key Controls
Except for the knobs, the HOME key, and Direct-To key on the bezel, the
controls for the GTN 6XX are located on the display and activated by touch.
Touchscreen Keys Touch to Toggle Activation
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Back to
Previous Page
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch to Zoom
In and Out
Figure 1-17 On-Screen Keys and Active Display Areas
Map
Traffic
1.5.2
Setup Page
Terrain
GTN 6XX system settings are managed on the System page. The
following settings can be changed:
Weather
• System Status
• GPS Status
Nearest
• External LRUs
Services/
Music
• Setup
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
• Alerts Settings
• User Fields
• Units Settings
• Audio
• Backlight
• Connext Setup
Appendix
Index
1-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GPS Status Page Information on
& SBAS Providers External LRUs
Foreword
View System
Status Values and
Software Versions
Select System
Setup Values
Set Alert Values
Set System
Units of
Measurement
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Select Audio
Settings
Set User Fields
Select
Connext Setup
Select Backlight
Setting
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 1-18 System Page
1.5.2.1
System Setup Values
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Setup.
Traffic
Terrain
Select CDI and ILS CDI Capture
Set Date/Time with Local Offset & Time Format
Weather
Set Nearest Airport Runway
Surface & Min Runway Length
Select Crossfill
Select Com Channel Spacing
Figure 1-19 System Setup Page
2. Touch the Date/Time key. Then, select the desired time format
and local offset after touching the Time Format (12 Hour,
24 Hour, and/or UTC) keys and selecting the local time offset
after touching the Local Offset key.
3. Touch the Com Channel Spacing key to toggle between
8.33 and 25.0 kHz channel spacing.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-11
4. For Nearest Airport filtering, touch the Runway Surface key
and select the desired type of surface that will appear in the
Nearest Airport list.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
5. Touch the Minimum Runway Length key to select the
minimum runway length allowed for the Nearest Airport.
Selecting 0 feet will show all airports regardless of runway
length.
Com/Nav
FPL
6. Touch the Crossfill key to enable or disable crossfill with a
second GTN unit.
Direct-To
7. Touch the CDI key. Then, elect the CDI and ILS CDI Capture
method with the Selected CDI and ILS CDI Capture keys.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
1.5.2.2
Traffic
Terrain
Units Settings Values
1. From the Home page, touch System.
Weather
2. Touch the Units key and then the desired item key. Select the
desired value.
Nearest
3. Continue to select the desired Units values and then touch the
Back or HOME key to exit.
Services/
Music
1.5.2.3
Alerts Settings Values
1. From the Home page, touch System and then Alerts.
Utilities
System
2. Set arrival alerting. Touch the Arrival key. Touch the Proximity
key and select the desired value.
Messages
Symbols
3. Touch the Airspace Alert Options key and select the desired
values for alerting.
Appendix
4. Continue to select the desired Alerts values and then touch
the Back or HOME key to exit.
Index
1-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1.5.3
Dual GTN Installations
Dual GTN units when connected in the aircraft may be set up to communicate
and share information by “Crossfilling” or synchronizing information between
the two units.
The following Crossfill information is always synchronized between both
GTN units:
• User Waypoints
• Flight Plan Catalog
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
• Alerts (traffic pop-up acknowledgement, missed approach waypoint
pop-up acknowledgement, altitude leg pop-up acknowledgement)
• External sensors (transponder status and commands, synchro heading)
Direct-To
Proc
• System setup:
Wpt Info
– User-defined NAV frequencies to store favorites
Map
– Date/Time convention
– Nearest airport criteria
Traffic
– Units (Nav angle, Fuel, Temperature)
Terrain
– User-defined COM frequencies to store favorites
– CDI Scale setting
Weather
– ILS CDI Capture setting
Nearest
This data is crossfilled only if crossfill is turned on by the pilot:
Services/
Music
• Active navigation (flight plan)
NOTE: In dual GTN installations with crossfill on, the OBS course will only
be updated in real time on the GTN that is receiving the new OBS course.
The course will be transferred to the other GTN when OBS is exited.
NOTE: There is an installer option to turn on a system message that will
be provided anytime crossfill is turned off to alert the pilot that flight plans
are not being crossfilled.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-13
Foreword
1.6
Direct-To Navigation
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1.6.1
FPL
Direct-To a Waypoint
1. Press Direct-To.
2. Touch the Waypoint tab and then select the characters for
the desired waypoint.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Pressing the Direct-To key to go to the Direct-To function
that allows you to quickly navigate from your present position
directly to a selected waypoint, flight plan waypoint, or nearest
airport.
OR
3. Touch Enter or press the small right knob. Text near the
small right knob indicates its current function.
Map
Traffic
1.6.2
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint
1. Press Direct-To.
Terrain
2. Touch the FPL tab and then the desired Flight Plan waypoint.
Weather
3. Touch Activate.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
1.6.3
System
Direct-To a Nearest Airport
1. Press Direct-To.
Messages
2. Touch the Nearest tab and then the desired airport from the
Nearest Airport list. Touch the Up or Down keys as needed
to show more of the list.
Symbols
3. Touch Activate or press the small right knob.
Appendix
Index
1-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1.7
Selecting Com/Nav Frequencies
Com Standby Editing Window
Standby Frequency Monitor Key
Frequency Transfer
(Flip/Flop) Key
Foreword
Standby Frequency Backspace Key
Active Com Frequency
Standby Com
Frequency
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Volume
and
Squelch
Com/Nav
Large and Small Knobs
(Frequency Adjust).
Press to Toggle Com
and Nav Functions.
Find
Frequency
Key
Numeric Keypad
Enter Key
Figure 1-20 Com Radio Frequency Selection Page
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
To switch between Com and Nav frequency selection
Tuning control normally remains in the Com window and will return after 30
seconds of inactivity. If you wish to select a NAV frequency, press the small right
knob momentarily to make the Nav window active for editing. The Standby Nav
frequency will be highlighted briefly to indicate that it is active for editing. The
standby frequency in blue is active for editing by the large and small right
knobs.
Method 1: Select a Nav/Com frequency using the small and large right rotary
knobs
1. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megahertz
(MHz) value. For example, the “119” portion of the frequency
“119.30.”
2. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kilohertz
(kHz) value. For example, the “.30” portion of the frequency
“119.30.”
3. Touch the Com or NAV window to flip/flop the Active and
Standby frequencies. You can also press and hold the small
right knob to transfer the standby frequency to the active
window.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-15
Foreword
Method 2: Select a Nav/Com frequency using the numeric keypad
1. Touch the Standby window. A pull down keypad will appear
with the current Standby frequency highlighted.
Getting
Started
2. Touch the numeric keys to add the desired values and touch
Enter to accept the displayed value and place it into the
Standby window.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
3. Touching the XFER key will place the selected frequency directly
into the Active window.
FPL
To transfer the standby frequency to the active frequency
Direct-To
1. Touch the Active (top) frequency window.
Proc
Airport Identifier and Type Shown
for the Selected Frequency
Wpt Info
The "+" Sign Indicates More Stations
Associated with this Frequency
Map
Figure 1-21 Com Radio Frequency Windows (Touch Active to Flip/Flop)
Traffic
2. Each touch of the Active window will flip/flop the Active and
Standby frequencies.
Terrain
3. The identifier and frequency type will be shown for the selected
Com and Nav frequencies for the nearest stations that are in
the database when the unit is receiving a valid position input.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Active Com Frequency
(Touch to Flip/Flop)
Standby Com Frequency
Remote Frequency Selection Control
On units configured for remote Com frequency Recall, pressing the remote
recall switch will load the next preset Com frequency into the unit’s Standby
frequency window. The remote recall switch can be pressed multiple times to
scroll the entire preset frequency list through the Standby frequency box (the list
will “wrap” from the bottom of the list back up to the top, skipping any empty
preset positions).
The standby frequency isn’t activated until a Com FLIP/FLOP switch (either
bezel-mounted or remote (COM RMT XFR) is pressed. Remote Frequency Selection
only functions on units configured for a remote Com Frequency recall switch.
Appendix
NOTE: Frequencies must be stored in the User Frequency List prior to
utilizing the remote channel select switch.
Index
1-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1.8
Flight Planning
1.8.1
Creating a Flight Plan
Foreword
1. From the Home page, touch the Flight Plan key. The Active
Flight Plan page will be displayed.
2. If there is already an Active Flight Plan, touch Menu and then
the Delete and OK keys to clear the existing flight plan. If
there is not an Active Flight Plan, continue to the next step.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
3. Touch Add Waypoint. Use the alphanumeric keypad to select
the Waypoint Identifier for the first leg in your flight plan and
then touch Enter.
4. Touch the next Waypoint Identifier field. Use the alphanumeric
keypad to select the Waypoint Identifier for the first leg in your
flight plan and then touch Enter.
5. Continue entering waypoints to complete the flight plan.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
6. Touch the Menu key and then touch Store.
Terrain
Weather
7. The screen will now display the Flight Plan Catalog and
show the new flight plan. Flight plan names are listed by the
Departure and Destination waypoints.
NOTE: The destination waypoint is the last airport in the flight plan.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-17
Foreword
1.9
VFR and IFR Procedures
Getting
Started
Visual approaches and IFR procedures (SIDs, STARs, and instrument
approaches) are available using the PROC (Procedures) key.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Select a Visual or Instrument Approach
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page.
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Approach key and then touch the Airport key to
select the desired airport if it is not present.
3. Touch the Approach key, if necessary. Select the desired
approach.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
4. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the
desired transition. Visual approaches do not have selectable
transitions.
Wpt Info
5. Touch the Load Approach key to load the approach at the
end of the active flight plan. The Active Flight Plan page will
be displayed.
Map
Traffic
6. Or, touch the Load APPR & Activate key for the flight plan
to go Direct-To the selected transition or provide guidance on
the final approach course for vectored or visual approaches.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1.10
Dead Reckoning
Foreword
Dead reckoning is a feature that enables the GTN to provide limited
navigation using the last known position and speed after a loss of GPS
navigation while on an active flight plan.
CAUTION: Navigation using dead reckoning is only an estimate and
should not be used as the sole means of navigation. Use other means of
navigation, if possible.
Dead reckoning becomes active after a loss of GPS position while navigating
using an active flight plan and the flight phase is either En Route (ENR) or
Oceanic (OCN).
“DR” will be overlayed on the ownship icon. The To/From flag is removed
from the CDI. The Dead Reckoning annunciator (DR) appears on the lower
left side of the map display and will replace ENR or OCN when a GPS position
is unavailable and the unit is in Dead Reckoning mode. All external outputs
dependent on GPS position are flagged.
Terrain will be noted as not available and new terrain advisory pop-ups
will not occur. Traffic and StormScope information will not be shown on the
Map page, but will continue to be available on their own dedicated pages. XM
weather will still be available on the Map page.
Dead Reckoning mode will continue until GPS position is restored, when GPS
navigation is restored Dead Reckoning mode is exited. The DR annunciations
will be removed and GPS information will be used to compute navigation related
information for the current flight phase.
Dead Reckoning is only allowed in En Route and Oceanic phases of flight.
If the unit is in a Terminal or Approach phase of flight when Dead Reckoning
takes place, “No GPS Position” will be displayed on the map pages and all
navigation data will be dashed. If you are operating in Dead Reckoning mode
and a transition to Terminal or Approach phases of flight would occur from the
projected Dead Reckoning position, Dead Reckoning mode will be discontinued.
“No GPS Position” will be displayed on the map pages and all navigation data
will be dashed. For information about GPS faults, refer to section 15.2.4.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-19
Foreword
1.11
Getting
Started
The Default Navigation display provides a text display of basic navigation
functions.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to View Menu Items
Com/Nav
FPL
Default Navigation
Touch to View Messages
Touch to View Previous Page
Direct-To
Touch to Select CDI Source Touch to Toggle OBS
Figure 1-22 Touchscreen Key Control Example (Default Nav Page)
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
1.11.1
Configuring User Fields
The Configure User Fields selection allows you to configure the Data, Function,
and Page field type shown in each of the fields of the default Navigation page.
The information shown in each field may be selected from a list after Configure
User Fields is selected.
1. While viewing the Default Navigation page, touch the Menu
key.
Weather
2. Touch the Configure User Fields key.
Nearest
Touch to Configure
the User Fields
Services/
Music
Touch Restore the
Default User Fields
Figure 1-23 Default Navigation Menu
Utilities
3. Touch the desired user field key to choose the information
type. A list of information types will be displayed.
System
Messages
Symbols
Touch a Field to Change
the User Field
Appendix
Index
Figure 1-24 Default Nav Page User Field Selection
1-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the Data, Function, or Page keys to select the
information types.
Getting
Started
Field Type List
Touch to Select
Data Field
Selected Field
Type
Foreword
Slider Indicates More
Selections Available
Press Finger and Slide to
View More Selections
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 1-25 Map Data Field Type Selections
5. Touch the Up or Down keys or touch the display and drag
your finger to scroll through the list. Touch the desired item
to select it or touch the Back key to cancel selection.
Proc
Wpt Info
Data Field Type
ACTV WPT - Active Waypoint
B/D APT - BRG/DIS from Dest APT 1
BRG - Bearing to Current Waypoint
DIS - Distance to Current Waypoint
DIS to Dest - Distance to Destination 2
DTK - Desired Track
ESA - Enroute Safe Altitude
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
ETA at Dest - ETA at Destination
ETE - Estimated Time Enroute
ETE to Dest - ETE to Destination
Fuel Flow - Total Fuel Flow
GS - GPS Ground Speed
GSL - GPS Altitude
Generic Timer - Timer Display
Direct-To
MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude
NAV/COM - Active NAV/COM FREQ
OAT (static) - Static Air Temperature
OAT (total) - Total Air Temperature
RAD ALT - Radar Altimeter
Time - Current Time
Time to TOD - Time to Top of Descent
TKE - Track Angle Error
TRK - Track
Trip Timer - Timer Display
VOR/LOC - Tuned VOR/LOC Info
VSR - Vertical Speed Required
Wind - Wind Speed and Direction
XTK - Cross Track Error
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Table 1-1 Data Field Types of Information
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Note 1:
B/D APT is the straight line distance.
Note 2:
Dist to DEST is the distance along the flight plan.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-21
NOTE: Data Field Types that use the term Destination refer to the final
destination in the flight plan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
NOTE: ETE to Destination is not available when a procedure is loaded and
there are waypoints in the Enroute section of the flightplan.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Function Field Type
Com/Nav
CDI - Course Deviation Indicator
Flap Override - Flap Override 1
GPWS Inhibit - GPWS Inhibit 1
G/S Inhibit - G/S Inhibit 1
HTAWS RP Mode - HTAWS RP Mode 2
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend Button
On Scene - "On Scene" Mode Toggle
TAWS Inhibit - TAWS Inhibit
Gen Timer - Generic Timer Control
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Table 1-2 Function Field Types of Information
Wpt Info
Map
Note 1:
With TAWS-A enabled
Note 2:
With HTAWS enabled
Page Field Type
Traffic
DFLT NAV - Default Navigation
Flight Plan - Flight Plan Page
Map - Map Page
Nearest - Nearest Page
NEAR APT - Nearest Airport Page
PROC - Procedures Page
Approach - Approach Page
Arrival - Arrival Page
Departure - Departure Page
Services - Services Page
Traffic - Traffic Page
Terrain - Terrain Page
Utilities - Utilities Page
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Checklist - Checklist Page
Fuel PLAN - Fuel Planning Page
SCHED MSG - Scheduled Messages
Trip PLAN - Trip Planning Page
VCALC - VCALC Page
User FREQ - User Frequencies
WPT INFO - Waypoint Information
Weather - Weather Page
CNXT WX - Connext WX Page
FIS-B WX - FIS-B Weather Page
Stormscope - Stormscope Page
SiriusXM WX - Sirius XM WX Page
OFF - Do Not Display Page Field
Table 1-3 Page Field Types of Information
Appendix
Index
1-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1.11.2
CDI (GTN 650 only)
Foreword
Refer to the CDI section in the Map chapter for details.
1.11.3
Getting
Started
OBS Function
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Refer to the OBS section in the Map chapter for details.
1.12
FastFind Predictive Waypoint Entry
Com/Nav
FastFind provides the pilot with a shortcut to the nearest waypoint with an
identifier that starts with the typed letters. As a result, the GTN can predict the
pilot's entry within as little as one key press.
FastFind predictions are shown in the top right-hand corner of the keypad
display. Touching the FastFind field will select the predicted waypoint. If the
FastFind prediction is not what the pilot is looking for, keep typing until the
desired waypoint is displayed.
1.12.1
FastFind With Waypoint Info
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
1. Use the alphanumeric keypad to begin selecting characters
for the desired waypoint.
Selected Wpt
Characters
FPL
Predicted Wpt
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 1-26 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KP Selected
Selected Wpt
Characters
Nearest
Predicted Wpt
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 1-27 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KPA Selected
System
2. After selecting the desired waypoint, touch the FastFind key.
Messages
Complete
Wpt Selection
Touch to Select
Displayed Wpt
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 1-28 Select Characters for FastFind to Predict a Waypoint - KPAE Selected
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
1-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
1.12.2
FastFind With A Flight Plan
When creating a new flight plan or searching for a waypoint, the GTN
will search for waypoints closest to the current GPS position. When adding
waypoints in the middle of the flight plan, the GTN will search halfway between
the previous and next waypoints. When adding waypoints at the end of the
flight plan, the GTN will search for waypoints closest to the last waypoint in the
flight plan.
1. When the aircraft is located in KSLE, and the last waypoint in
the flight plan is "DRK," the GTN will search for waypoints
nearest "DRK."
2. Typing K, will result in "KPRC" being displayed as the FastFind
prediction because it is the nearest waypoint to "DRK" that
starts with "K."
Selected Wpt
Characters
Map
Traffic
Predicted Wpt
Figure 1-29 Using FastFind to Predict a Waypoint in a Flight Plan
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2
AUDIO AND TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
(OPTIONAL)
Foreword
Getting
Started
The GTN 6XX can perform as the control and display for a transponder
(such as one of the GTX family of transponders) or display marker beacon
annunciations from an audio panel (such as the GMA 35 or GMA 350). Contact
your dealer for more information.
2.1
Transponder Operation
NOTE: The transponder control panel on the GTN will only contain the
Ground key when the GTN is interfaced with a GTX 33/330 with software
versions prior to 8.00.
NOTE: Starting the GTN with a Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard in the
slot may cause the control panel to be temporarily unavailable on the
start-up screens during unit power up.
Active
Transponder
Selection
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Squawk Code
Backspace Key
Terrain
VFR Squawk
Code (1200) Key
Weather
Reply
Annunciation
Nearest
Active XPDR,
Code and
Mode Display
Services/
Music
Utilities
Enter Key
Mode Key
Com/Nav
FPL
The GTN 6XX will operate as a control head for remotely connected optional,
compatible transponders.
Squawk Code
Window
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Context Sensitive
Instructions for
Rotary Knob
System
Messages
Figure 2-1 XPDR Control Display
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
2-1
Foreword
Mode
Active XPDR
Getting
Started
Com/Nav
1200
Figure 2-2 XPDR Functional Diagram
FPL
Direct-To
VFR
Standby
Ground
On
Altitude Reporting
XPDR 1
XPDR 2
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Ident
2.1.1
Select Transponder
1. Touch the XPDR window and then touch the XPDR key to
select the desired transponder.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Selected Transponder
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 2-3 Select the Active Transponder
Weather
2. Touch the XPDR 2 selection to activate Transponder 2. Touch
the XPDR 1 selection to activate Transponder 1.
Nearest
Active Transponder
Services/
Music
Utilities
Active Transponder
System
Messages
Figure 2-4 Active Transponder Indication
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2.1.2
IDENT
1. Touch the IDENT key once to reply with an identifying squawk
code.
2. The IDENT key will show a green ID in the bottom right corner
of the key to indicate active Ident.
2.1.3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Transponder Mode
Com/Nav
1. Touch the Mode key to allow selection of the transponder
mode.
FPL
Selected Transponder
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
Transponder Mode
Figure 2-5 Transponder Mode Selection
Traffic
2. Touch the Up/Down keys or touch the display and drag the
display up or down to view the available selections.
Transponder Modes
Touch the Up/Down
Keys or Drag Display
to View Modes
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 2-6 Transponder Mode Choices
3. Touch the desired Transponder mode to select it and then
touch the Enter key.
2.1.3.1
Terrain
Weather
Selected
Transponder Mode
Standby Mode Selection Not Shown
Map
Standby
1. Touch the Mode key and select Standby and then touch the
Enter key to place the transponder into Standby mode.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
2-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Active XPDR and
IDENT Disabled
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Transponder Operation
Standby Mode
Figure 2-7 Transponder Mode Standby Indication
FPL
2. The transponder will still be powered, but will not transmit
information. The active transponder indication and Ident
annunciation will be grayed to show they are disabled.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
2.1.3.2
Map
Ground
1. Touch the Mode key and select Ground (GND) and then touch
the Enter key to place the transponder into Ground mode.
Traffic
Terrain
Active XPDR and
IDENT Enabled
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Transponder Operation
Ground Mode
Figure 2-8 Transponder Mode Ground Indication
Utilities
2. Mode S replies will be allowed in Ground mode.
System
NOTE: The transponder control panel on the GTN will only contain the
Ground key when the GTN is interfaced with a GTX 33/330 with software
versions prior to 8.00. With all other GTX software versions, the transponder
will automatically transition out of airborne mode.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
2.1.3.3
Index
2-4
On
1. Touch the Mode key and select ON and then touch the Enter
key for Mode A operation.
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Active XPDR and
IDENT Enabled
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Transponder Operation
On Mode
Figure 2-9 Transponder Mode ON Indication
FPL
2. The transponder is on and will transmit its squawk code when
interrogated.
2.1.3.4
Getting
Started
Altitude Reporting
1. Touch the Mode key and select Altitude Reporting (ALT) and
then touch the Enter key for Mode C operation.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Active XPDR and
IDENT Enabled
Terrain
Weather
2.1.4
Transponder Operation
Altitude Reporting Mode
Figure 2-10 Transponder Mode Altitude Reporting Indication
Nearest
2. The transponder will be on and will transmit its squawk code
and altitude when interrogated. An "ALT" annunciation will
appear when the squawk code is transmitted.
Utilities
Services/
Music
VFR
System
Messages
Touch the VFR key to set the VFR squawk code (1200).
Symbols
VFR (1200) Transponder
Squawk Code
Appendix
Figure 2-11 Transponder VFR Squawk Code
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
2-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
2.1.5
Selecting a Squawk Code
The selected squawk code will always be in use. As you change a squawk
code, the original code will be used until you are finished selecting the new code.
Squawk Code
1200
7500
7600
7700
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Table 2-1 XPDR Special Squawk Codes
Direct-To
1. Touch the transponder squawk code window at the right side
of the display.
Proc
2. The XPDR page will be displayed. The Squawk Code value will
be active for selection for use by the active Transponder.
Wpt Info
3. Touch the numeric keypad, or use the rotary knobs, to select
the desired Squawk Code.
Map
4. Then, touch Enter.
Traffic
Squawk Code Window
Terrain
Squawk Code Backspace Key
Active XPDR
Weather
Nearest
Description
Default VFR code in the USA
Hijacking
Loss of Communications
Emergency
Numeric Keypad
Enter Key
Services/
Music
Figure 2-12 XPDR Squawk Code Selection Display
Utilities
5. The selected Squawk Code will be shown in the XPDR window
on the right side of the display.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2.1.6
GDL 88 ADS-B Reporting
Foreword
The GDL 88 is a remote-mount ADS-B transceiver that sends ADS-B out
messages to ATC and other aircraft and communicates ADS-B In data to
panel-mounted avionics for the display of traffic and weather. Reference the
GDL 88 Pilot Guide for a full description of GDL 88 functions. When a GTN is
interfaced to a GDL88 transceiver for ADS-B Out functions the GTN can control
some aspects of the ADS-B Out message and the GTN may provide position
information to the GDL88. The display and control of the information sent
depends on the equipment installed and how it is configured by the installer.
Some installations allow control by the pilot of the information sent, while
others do not.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
The Anonymous Mode, when armed, will replace the identifying information
in the ADS-B Out message with a temporary randomized number for privacy
while the position information will still be provided. The call sign will be sent as
"VFR." To enable Anonymous Mode, the Squawk Code must be set to the VFR
code (based on the GDL 88 configuration) and the Anonymous key must be
selected.
Proc
Viewing the ADS-B Control Panel Without Integrated Transponder Control
Terrain
1. Touch the Transponder window to view the ADS-B control
panel.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Altitude
Reporting
Status
Utilities
Touch to View ADS-B
Control Panel
Current Flight ID
System
Messages
Figure 2-13 ADS-B Control Panel
2. Touch the ADS-B window again to return to the previous
display.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
2-7
Foreword
Viewing the ADS-B Control Panel With Integrated Transponder Control
1. Touch the Transponder window and then the MENU key to
view the ADS-B control panel.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select
Flight ID
Touch to Toggle
Anonymous Mode
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 2-14 ADS-B/Transponder Control Panel
Direct-To
2. Touch the Anonymous Mode key to toggle arming the
Anonymous mode.
Proc
3. Touch the Flight ID key to manually set the Flight ID. Use the
key pad to select the desired Flight ID and then touch Enter.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 2-15 Flight ID Entry
NOTE: Changing the flight ID while in anonymous mode wouldn't actually
change the flight ID because a randomized ID is being broadcast. If the
ANONYMOUS key is armed, change the squawk code to the VFR code to
activate Anonymous mode.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2.1.7
Extended Squitter Transmission
When interfaced with a compatible transponder, the GTN can act as a control
for the Extended Squitter functions. When “Enable ES” is selected, the GTX
turns on Extended Squitter (ES) transmissions.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Enter
Flight ID
Touch to Toggle
Extended Squitter
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 2-16 Transponder Menu With Extended Squitter Capability
1. While viewing the Transponder (XPDR) page, touch the Menu
key and then the Enable ES key to toggle Extended Squitter
Off and On.
2. Touch the Flight ID key and use the keypad to select a Flight
ID and then touch Enter.
3. After selecting a Flight ID, the selected value will be shown in
the Flight ID key.
2.1.8
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
TCAS II Transponder Mode Controls
Weather
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.30 and later.
The GTN can control the modes of a TCAS II system through a GTX 3000.
The TA Only and TA/RA modes are added to the transponder control panel.
Selecting TA Only or TA/RA will command the TCAS into the selected mode.
Depending on the aircraft configuration (e.g., on ground), the TCAS may stay
in a different mode.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch to Select
TCAS II Mode
Figure 2-17 TCAS II Transponder Control Panel
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
2-9
NOTE: The XPDR/TCAS Mode on the Transponder Control Panel always
shows the pilot-selected mode and does not necessarily correspond with
the traffic system if it is in a lower mode due to other constraints. The active
mode is shown in the radio bar next to the transponder squawk code.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
XPDR/TCAS Mode
Selection
TA/RA
TA Only
Altitude Reporting
On
Standby
Transponder
Mode
Altitude Reporting
Altitude Reporting
Altitude Reporting
On
Standby
Available TCAS II
Modes
TA/RA or TA Only
TA Only
Standby
Standby
Standby
Table 2-2 Transponder and TCAS II Modes
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
2.2
Marker Beacon Annunciations
When connected to a compatible audio panel, a visual annunciation of marker
beacons will be shown on the display when the aircraft flies over a marker beacon.
The annunciation will appear in the lower left of the display.
Current Beacon
Terrain
Icon (Standard)
Icon (Blink)
Blink Interval
Inner Marker
250 ms
Middle Marker
333 ms
Nearest
Outer Marker
750 ms
Services/
Music
The marker beacon alternates between the standard icon and the blink icon at
the blink interval corresponding to the current beacon.
Weather
Table 2-3 Marker Beacons
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2.3
TelligenceTM Voice Command
Foreword
Garmin's Telligence Voice Command voice recognition feature allows the
pilot (and optionally copilot) to control the GTN 6XX connected to a GMA
350 using spoken commands. To activate Voice Recognition, push and hold
the Push-to-Command (PTC) switch while speaking a command. When the
Push-to-Command switch is released, the GTN 6XX and/or the audio panel will
respond.
If a command is understood by the GMA, a positive acknowledgement chime
will be played, and the relevant information will be displayed to reflect the change
(if applicable). The pilot should verify that the correct response has occurred.
If a command is not understood by the GMA or the GTN is unable to complete
the requested action, a negative acknowledge tone will be played. The pilot should
repeat the command by using the Push-to-Command switch, or by manually
using the GTN 6XX touch screen. In the event of any abnormal Voice Recognition
operation, the front panel controls and touch screen may be used to override Voice
Recognition and manually control the GTN 6XX.
NOTE: If Telligence Voice Command malfunctions and needs to be disabled,
remove power to the GMA 350 audio panel. This will force the audio panel
into the fail-safe mode. The pilot will be able to communicate using the
COM 2 radio only.
The available voice recognition commands are listed in the GTN 6XX/7XX
Telligence Voice Command Guide, P/N 190-01007-50.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
2-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
2-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3
NAV/COM
Foreword
(GTN 650 NAV/COM AND GTN 635 COM ONLY)
The GTN 650 features a digitally-tuned VHF Com radio and digitally-tuned
Nav/localizer and glideslope receivers. The GTN 635 has a Com radio only. The
Com radio operates in the aviation voice band, from 118.000 to 136.975 MHz,
in 25 kHz steps (default). For European operations, a Com radio configuration
of 8.33 kHz steps is also available.
Com Standby Editing Window
Frequency Monitor Key
Frequency Transfer
(Flip/Flop) Key
Numeric Keypad
Proc
Wpt Info
Large and Small Knobs
(Frequency Adjust)
Press to Toggle Com
and Nav Functions
Enter Key
Figure 3-1 Nav/Com Controls
Find
Xfer
Traffic
Weather
Nearest
Recent
Nearest - Filter - Com - Nav
Services/
Music
Airport
VOR
Flight Plan
User
Map
Terrain
Keypad
Monitor
Com/Nav
Direct-To
Frequency Monitor
Annunciation
Find
Frequency
Key
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
FPL
Backspace Key
Active Com Frequency
Standby Com
Frequency
Volume and
Squelch
On/Off Knob
Getting
Started
Utilities
System
Airport
FSS
ARTCC
Messages
Symbols
Figure 3-2 Nav/Com Functional Diagram
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3.1
Volume
Com radio volume is adjusted using the Volume knob. Turn the Volume
knob clockwise to increase volume, or counterclockwise to decrease volume.
The level will be maintained until changed.
1. Turn the Volume knob to set the Com volume.
Com/Nav
Percent of
Maximum Volume
FPL
Graphic Scale Showing Volume
Figure 3-3 Com Volume Setting
Direct-To
2. A bar graph showing the relative volume level will indicate the
selected level and will disappear a few seconds after releasing
the Volume knob.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
3.2
Squelch
The Com radio features an automatic squelch to reject many localized noise
sources. You may override the squelch function by pressing the Volume knob.
This facilitates listening to a distant station or setting the desired volume level.
To override the automatic squelch, press the Volume knob momentarily.
Press the Volume knob again to return to automatic squelch operation. A “SQ”
indication appears above the active Com frequency window in the upper left
corner of the display when automatic squelch is overridden.
Nearest
Com Control Text
Receive Annunciation
Services/
Music
Active Com Frequency
(Touch to Flip/Flop)
Utilities
Messages
Turn to Select kHz
Turn to Select MHz
Figure 3-4 Com Controls
Symbols
Index
Standby Com
Frequency
Com Volume and
Squelch Control
System
Appendix
Squelch Annunciation
While receiving a transmission, an “RX” indication appears in the Com
frequency window to the immediate right of “Com.” A “TX” indication appears
at this location while you are transmitting.
3-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3.3
Com and Nav Frequency Window and Tuning
Communication frequencies are selected by using the large and small right
knobs or by touching the value in the standby Com or Nav frequency field and
using the displayed keypad. The standby frequency always appears below the
active frequency. The active frequency is the frequency currently in use for
transmit and receive operations.
Once a frequency is selected in the standby field, it may be transferred to the
active frequency by touching the active frequency field.
NOTE: The Com window is normally active for adjustment, unless the NAV
window is made active by pressing the small right knob. The active state
automatically returns to the Com window after 30 seconds of inactivity.
To select a Com or Nav frequency using the small and large right knobs:
1. If the tuning cursor is not currently in the frequency window,
press the small right knob momentarily. The Standby
frequency will be highlighted to indicate that it is active for
editing.
2. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megahertz
(MHz) value. For example, the “118” portion of the frequency
“118.30.”
3. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kilohertz
(kHz) value. For example, the “.30” portion of the frequency
“118.30.”
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
To select a Com or Nav frequency using the numeric keypad:
1. Touch the Standby window.
Utilities
2. A keypad will appear with the current Standby frequency
highlighted.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Frequency
Transfer (Flip/
Flop) Key
Frequency
Monitor Key
Com Standby
Editing Window
Backspace - Frequency
Clear Key
Frequency Monitor
Annunciation
Find Frequency
Key
FPL
Numeric Keypad
Direct-To
Enter Key
Figure 3-5 Com Standby Frequency Numeric Keypad
Proc
Frequency
Transfer
(Flip/Flop)
Key
Wpt Info
Map
Nav Standby
Editing Window
Backspace Frequency Clear Key
Find
Frequency
Key
Traffic
Terrain
Numeric Keypad
Weather
Figure 3-6 Nav Standby Frequency Numeric Keypad
Nearest
3. Touch the numeric keys to add the desired values and touch
Enter to accept the displayed value and place it into the
Standby frequency window.
Services/
Music
Utilities
4. Touching the XFER key will place the selected frequency directly
into the Active frequency window.
System
Messages
Enter Key
To make the standby frequency the active frequency:
1. Touch the active frequency (top) window.
Symbols
2. The Active (top) and Standby frequencies will flip/flop.
Appendix
Index
3-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3.3.1
Com and Nav Frequency Finding
Foreword
The GTN 635 (Com) and 650 (Com and Nav) frequency finding feature
allows you to quickly select any displayed database Com or Nav frequency
as your standby frequency. The following are some examples of selecting
frequencies from some of the main GPS pages.
To select a Com or Nav frequency for a User created frequency, Recent selected
frequency, Nearest airport, or from your Flight Plan:
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key.
Categories for User, Recent, Nearest, and Flight Plan are
available.
Touch to Select
Recent Freq List
Touch to Select
Nearest Freq List
Touch to Select
Fpl Freq List
Touch to Select
User Freq List
Figure 3-7 Com Nearest Frequencies
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
2. Touch Recent, Nearest, Flight Plan, or User. A list of the
selected frequency types will be displayed.
Terrain
Weather
3. Touch the desired frequency to select it and place it into the
Standby window.
3.3.1.1
Find Recent Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Recent key. A list
of the recently selected frequencies will be displayed.
Selected
Frequency
Category
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch Frequency
from Recent List
to Select Standby
Frequency
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 3-8 Recent Com Frequency List
2. Touch the desired frequency to select it and place it into the
Standby window.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-5
Index
Foreword
3.3.1.2
Getting
Started
Find Nearest Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Nearest key. A list
of the nearest airport Com frequencies will be displayed.
Select a
Frequency
Category
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Frequencies
for Nearest
Airport
Com/Nav
Range and
Bearing to
Airport
FPL
Figure 3-9 Com Nearest Airport Frequency
Direct-To
2. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to show the available frequencies.
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch a Frequency Key
to Place tt in the Standby
Window
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 3-10 Nearest Airport Multiple Frequency List
3. Touch the Filter key to filter the Nearest List by Airports, FSS, or
ARTCC.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 3-11 Nearest Com Frequency List
Messages
4. Touch the desired Frequency List. Then, touch the desired frequency
to load it into the Standby window.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5. Some frequencies will have more information detail available.
Touch the key that shows "More Information."
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch for More
Information
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 3-12 More Information Is Available For Some Frequencies
6. More detailed information is shown on the display. Touch the
frequency key to load it into the Standby window.
Touch To Insert
Into Standby
Window
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 3-13 More Frequency Detail
3.3.1.3
Find Flight Plan Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the Flight Plan key.
A list of Com or Nav frequencies associated with the active
flight plan will be displayed.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Flight Plan
Airport
Information
Touch to Select
From List of
Frequencies
Utilities
System
Figure 3-14 Flight Plan Frequency List
Messages
2. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to show the available
frequencies, if present.
Symbols
3. Touch the desired frequency to select it and place it into the
Standby window.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-7
Foreword
3.3.1.4
Find User Frequencies
1. While viewing the Find results, touch the User key. A list of
User-created frequencies will be displayed.
2. Touch the desired frequency to load it into the Standby window.
3.3.2
Simple Frequency Entry
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Frequencies can now be entered on the GTN without the leading one
and/or trailing zero(s). As a result, the pilot can now touch “2,” “1,” and “5” for
121.50. If a number is pressed that is not valid for the cursor location, the pilot
is presented with a confirmation pop-up upon selecting the typed frequency.
Frequency entry can be accomplished by typing every digit in the frequency or
by leaving off the leading one and/or trailing zero(s). The frequency that will be
entered is always displayed in the cursor window.
1. Touch the Standby frequency field and then touch the 2 key.
Map
Traffic
Figure 3-15 Simplified Frequency Entry Without Leading Number
2. Touch the 7 key.
Terrain
Weather
Figure 3-16 Second Frequency Number
Nearest
3. Touch the 2 key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 3-17 Final Frequency Without Trailing Number
System
4. Touch Enter.
Messages
Symbols
Entered Frequency Value
Appendix
Figure 3-18 Completed Frequency Entry
Index
3-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3.3.3
Adding a New User Frequency
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key on the
left side of the display.
2. Touch the User key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3. Touch the Add User Frequency key.
Com/Nav
Add User Frequency
FPL
Direct-To
User Frequency List
When Present
Proc
Figure 3-19 Add New User Frequency
Wpt Info
4. The Add New User Frequency information window will now
be displayed. Touch the Name key to select a name for the
User frequency.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
User Frequency Name
User Frequency Value
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 3-20 Add New User Frequency Detail Window
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-9
5. Touch the lower part of the display to select the desired
range of characters. Select the characters from the selected
alphanumeric range for the desired name. Touch the Enter
key to accept the displayed Name.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
User Frequency
Name
Com/Nav
Alphanumeric
Keypad
Selected Range
FPL
Backspace
Alphanumeric
Keypad Overview
Direct-To
Figure 3-21 Select a Name for the New User Frequency
6. Touch the Frequency key and select the characters from
the keypad for the desired frequency. Touch the Enter key to
accept the displayed frequency.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
User Frequency
Value
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 3-22 Select a Frequency Value for the New User Frequency
7. Touch the Enter key to accept the displayed name and
frequency. The new User Frequency will be added to the list.
The list can store up to 15 user frequencies.
Nearest
Services/
Music
User Frequency Name
Utilities
User Frequency Value
System
Touch to Edit
User Name and/or
Frequency Value
Messages
Symbols
Figure 3-23 Completed New User Frequency
Appendix
Index
3-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8. Touch the Name or Frequency keys to edit the displayed
name or frequency, if desired.
Touch to Edit User
Frequency Name
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Edit User
Frequency Value
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Delete
User Frequency
Direct-To
Figure 3-24 Edit The User Frequency
3.3.4
FPL
Emergency Frequency
Proc
The GTN 635 or 650 emergency frequency select provides a quick method
of selecting 121.50 MHz as the active frequency in the event of an in-flight
emergency. The emergency frequency select is available whenever the unit is on,
regardless of GPS or cursor status, or loss of the display.
To quickly tune and activate 121.50, press and hold volume
knob or the external remote Com flip-flop key for
approximately two seconds.
NOTE: Pressing and holding the remote Com FLIP/FLOP key for
approximately two seconds, on units so configured, will lock the COM
board, preventing further changes in Com frequency until the Com board is
unlocked, by pressing the remote Com FLIP/FLOP key again for two seconds.
The following message will notify the pilot that the Com board has been
locked: “COM LOCKED TO 121.5 MHZ. HOLD REMOTE COM TRANSFER
KEY TO EXIT.”
NOTE: Under some circumstances if the Com system loses communication
with the main system, the radio will automatically tune to 121.50 MHz for
transmit and receive regardless of the displayed frequency.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
3.3.5
Whenever the GTN 635 or 650 is transmitting, a “TX” indication appears
in the Com window. If the push-to-talk key on the microphone is stuck or
accidentally left in the keyed position, or continues to transmit after the key is
released, the Com transmitter automatically times out (or ceases to transmit)
after 30 seconds of continuous broadcasting. You will also receive a “Com pushto-talk key stuck” message as long as the stuck condition exists.
3.3.6
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Remote Frequency Selection Control
On units configured for remote Com frequency Recall, pressing the remote
recall switch will load the next preset Com frequency into the unit’s Standby
frequency box. The remote recall switch can be pressed multiple times to scroll
the entire preset frequency list through the Standby frequency box (the list will
“wrap” from the bottom of the list back up to the top, skipping any empty preset
positions).
The standby frequency isn’t activated until a Com flip-flop switch (either
remote- or bezel-mounted) is pressed. Remote Frequency Selection only functions
on units configured for a remote Com Frequency recall switch.
NOTE: For software prior to v5.00, frequencies must be stored in the User
Frequency List prior to utilizing the remote channel select switch.
Terrain
Weather
Stuck Microphone
3.3.7
Reverse Frequency Look-Up
When the Reverse Frequency Look-Up feature is enabled in System-Setup,
the identifier and frequency type will be shown for the selected Com and Nav
frequencies for the nearest stations that are in the aviation database when the
unit is receiving a valid position input. Station Identifiers with a “+” sign will
have more stations associated with this frequency than just the type displayed.
Identifier and Type Shown
for the Selected Frequency
System
The “+” Sign Indicates More
Stations Associated with this
Frequency
Messages
Symbols
Figure 3-25 Reverse Frequency Look-Up
Appendix
NOTE: It can take up to 2 minutes for the RFL frequency to change after
crossing the half way point when flying from one airport to another that
both use the same frequency.
Index
3-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3.4
Com Frequency Monitoring
Foreword
The Frequency Monitoring function allows you to listen to the Standby
frequency in the Com radio, while monitoring the Active frequency for activity.
1. Touch the MON key to listen to the standby frequency. A small
“MON” annunciation is displayed to the right of the Standby
frequency. A green bar will show on the MON key. When
the Active frequency receives a signal, the unit will switch
automatically to the Active frequency and then switch back to
the standby frequency when activity ceases.
Frequency
Monitor Key
Com Standby
Editing Window
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Frequency Monitor
Annunciation
Proc
Frequency Transfer
(Flip/Flop) Key
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 3-26 Com Frequency Monitoring
2. The Monitor function is deactivated when you touch the MON
key again and the green bar is extinguished.
NOTE: The Com radio Monitoring function is different than the Monitor
function of the Audio Panel.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
3.5
Nav (VOR/Localizer/Glideslope) Receiver
Operations
The GTN 650 includes digitally-tuned Nav/localizer and glideslope receivers
with the desired frequency selected on the Nav window, along the top right-hand
side of the display. Frequency selection is performed by pressing the small right
knob to activate Nav Standby frequency editing and then turning the small and
large right knobs or keypad to select the desired frequency.
FPL
Nav Control Text
Active Nav
Frequency
Standby Nav
Frequency
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 3-27 Nav Frequency Window
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
3.5.1
Nav ident is enabled by pressing the Volume knob when the Nav window is
active. When Nav ident is enabled, the ID annunciation will appear in the active
Nav window and Morse code tones will be heard. When the Nav function is
enabled, the Nav Standby channel window will highlight briefly and then turn
to blue text. The Nav Standby frequency will be active for editing for about 30
seconds before the Com Standby frequency becomes active for editing.
Nav Ident is Active
Services/
Music
Nav Standby Channel Highlighted to
Indicate it is Active for Frequency Selection
Utilities
System
Messages
Ident Audio and Volume
Figure 3-28 Nav Standby Frequency Window is Active
Nav audio volume is adjusted using the Volume knob. Turn the Volume
knob clockwise to increase volume, or counterclockwise to decrease volume.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3.5.2
Nav Tuning Window
Foreword
Nav frequencies are selected with the tuning cursor in the standby Nav
frequency field, and using the small and large right knobs to dial in the desired
frequency. The keypad may also be used for frequency entry after touching
the Standby window. The standby frequency always appears below the active
frequency. The active frequency is the frequency currently in use. The GTN will
automatically decode Morse code and display the Ident for the active frequency
above it. The RFL (reverse frequency lookup) Identifier is displayed below the
frequency and is only dependent on GPS position and database information.
NOTE: Tuning is normally active in the Com window, unless placed in the
Nav window by pressing the small right knob. When the tuning cursor is
in the Nav window, it automatically returns to the Com window after 30
seconds of inactivity. The active frequency in either window cannot be
accessed directly — only the standby frequency is active for editing.
To select a VOR/localizer/ILS frequency:
2. Turn the large right knob to select the desired megaHertz
(MHz) value. For example, the “117” portion of the frequency
“117.80.”
3. Turn the small right knob to select the desired kiloHertz
(kHz) value. For example, the “.80” portion of the frequency
“117.80.”
4. Touch the Nav active (top) frequency to make the standby
frequency.
Nav Frequencies will
Automatically Decode Morse
Code and Display the Ident
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 3-29 Automatic Nav Frequency Ident Decoding
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Com/Nav
System
5. The Active (top) and Standby frequencies will switch.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Map
1. Touch the small right knob momentarily to make the Nav
Standby frequency value active for editing. The window will
be highlighted momentarily.
Nav Frequencies in the Database
Will Display the Ident Based on
GPS Position
Getting
Started
Index
3-15
Foreword
3.5.3
Nav Frequency Finding
Getting
Started
The GTN 650’s frequency finding feature allows you to quickly select any
displayed database Nav frequency as your standby frequency.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
To select a Nav frequency for a User created frequency, Recent selected
frequency, Nearest airport, or from your Flight Plan:
1. While viewing the numeric keypad touch the Find key at the
bottom of the display. Categories for User, Recent, Nearest,
and Flight Plan are available.
Com/Nav
FPL
2. Touch the User, Recent, Nearest, or Flight Plan key.
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Select
Recent Freq List
Touch to Select
Nearest Freq List
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
Flight Plan
Freq List
Touch to Select
User Freq List
Map
Figure 3-30 Find Nav Frequency Group
Traffic
3. Touch the desired Nav frequency to select it and place it into
the Nav Standby window.
Terrain
Active Nav
Frequency Key
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch Freq
Key to Select
for Standby
Nav Frequency
Touch to Filter
Nearest List
Nearest Nav
Frequency List
Touch Up/Down
Keys or Drag
Slider to Scroll
Frequency List
Utilities
System
Figure 3-31 Nearest Airport Nav Frequency List
Messages
OR
Symbols
4. Touch the Filter key to narrow the list by category, such as
Airport and VOR, and then select a given frequency.
Appendix
Index
3-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 3-32 Nearest Nav Frequency List
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
3-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
3-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4
FLIGHT PLANS
Foreword
The GTN 6XX lets you create up to 99 different flight plans, with up to 100
waypoints in each flight plan. The Flight Plan function is accessed by touching
the Flight Plan key on the Home page. The Flight Plan function allows you to
create, store, edit, and copy flight plans.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Menu
Active FPL
Waypoint
Options
Activate Leg
Insert Before
Insert After
Load Procedures*
Load SAR**
Hold at Waypoint
Load Airway***
Waypoint Info
Remove
Catalog
Store
Delete
Preview
Parallel Track
Invert
VNAV
Temperature
Compensation
Edit Data Fields
Add Waypoint
Direct-To
Select Waypoint
Find
Recent
Nearest
Flight Plan
User
Search by Name
Search by City
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
* "Load Procedures" is shown for airports
** "Load SAR" is only shown when the Search and Rescue feature is enabled by the installer
*** "Load Airway" is shown for waypoints on a published airway
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-1 Flight Plan Functional Diagram
Nearest
NOTE: Navigation is provided for fixed wing aircraft above 30 kts and for
rotorcraft above 10 kts.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-1
Foreword
4.1
Creating a New Flight Plan
NOTE: If a flight plan that includes a procedure that has been modified
by the pilot is saved into the flight plan catalog, the GTN cannot check the
accuracy of that procedure when that flight plan is used on a later flight. It
is recommended that flight plans with modified procedures not be saved
in the flight plan catalog.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. From the Home page, touch Flight Plan.
FPL
Touch to Remove
Waypoint
Direct-To
Touch to Add
Waypoint
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 4-2 Create New Flight Plan
2. If there is already an Active Flight Plan, touch Menu and then
the Delete and OK keys to delete the existing active flight
plan.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Delete
Flight Plan
Weather
Nearest
Figure 4-3 Delete Existing Flight Plan
Services/
Music
Utilities
A single waypoint may be deleted by touching the waypoint
and then touching the Remove key.
Selected Waypoint
System
Messages
Touch to Remove
Waypoint
Symbols
Figure 4-4 Remove Single Existing Waypoint
Appendix
Index
4-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select a waypoint identifier
with the alphanumeric keypad. Then, touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Selected Waypoint Identifier
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Display
Waypoint
Categories
Com/Nav
Selected
Character Range
Touch to Select
Character Range
Figure 4-5 Select a Waypoint for the New Flight Plan
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
4. Touch the Add Waypoint key and select the waypoint
identifier with the keypad for the next waypoint. Touch Enter.
Wpt Info
OR
Map
5. Touch Find, select a category, and then select the waypoint
identifier with the keypad. Touch Enter.
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Select
Waypoint Category
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 4-6 Select a Waypoint Category for Selecting Flight Plan Waypoints
Utilities
6. Continue adding waypoints as needed.
7. Touch Menu and then touch Store to store the flight plan
in the Catalog. The screen will now display the Flight Plan
Catalog and show the new flight plan. Flight plans are listed
by the Departure and Destination waypoints.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
4.2
Active Flight Plan Page
The Active Flight Plan page provides information and editing functions for
the flight plan currently in use for navigation. Once you have activated a flight
plan, the Active Flight Plan page shows each waypoint for the flight plan, along
with the Desired Track (DTK), Distance (DIST) for each leg and Cumulative
Distance (CUM). The data fields are user-selectable and may be changed to
display Cumulative Distance (CUM), Distance (DIST), Desired Track (DTK),
En Route Safe Altitude (ESA), or Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA).
DIST Between Legs*
Direct-To
Proc
DTK Between Legs*
Origin and Destination Waypoints
Flight Plan Menu Options
Active Leg Navigation
Wpt Info
Parallel Track Active
Map
Up/Down Keys to Scroll FPL
Figure 4-7 Active Flight Plan Page
Traffic
Terrain
* The field types may be changed using the Edit Data Fields function in the
Flight Plan page Menu.
Weather
4.2.1
Waypoint Options
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired
flight plan waypoint. The Waypoint Options menu opens.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Waypoint Options
for KLAX
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 4-8 Active Flight Plan Wpt Options
Symbols
2. Touch one of the options to perform the selected action. Cancel
the option selection by touching the Back key.
Appendix
Index
4-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.2.1.1
Activate Leg
The Activate Leg option allows you to change the active leg of a flight plan.
1. On the Waypoint Options menu, touch the desired TO waypoint
and then the Activate Leg key to select the TO waypoint as
the active leg for navigation.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Current Leg
FPL
Current TO Wpt
Direct-To
Touch to Select as
New TO Wpt and
to Activate Leg
Proc
Figure 4-9 Active Flight Plan Activate Leg Option
2. Touch the OK key to set the selected leg as the Active Leg, or
Cancel to not select it.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch Cancel
to Cancel the
Operation and
Return to the Flight
Plan View
Terrain
Touch OK to
Activate Leg
Figure 4-10 Active Flight Plan Activate Leg Option
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
4.2.1.2
Insert Before
The Insert Before option allows you to insert a new waypoint into the active
flight plan before the selected waypoint.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Option will Insert New
Waypoint Before this
Selected Flight Plan
Waypoint
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Insert Before Option
Was Selected
Proc
Figure 4-11 Active Flight Plan Insert Waypoint Before Option
Wpt Info
Map
2. Touch the Insert Before key to select a new waypoint before
the selected waypoint.
Traffic
3. Select a waypoint identifier with the alphanumeric keypad.
Terrain
Weather
Choose New
Waypoint to Insert
Before Selected Flight
Plan Waypoint
Nearest
Figure 4-12 Use the Alphanumeric Keypad to Select Waypoint to Insert Before
Services/
Music
4. Then, touch Enter to confirm the selection or touch Cancel
to cancel any changes. The new flight plan will be shown.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
New Waypoint Inserted
Before Selected
Flight Plan Waypoint
Figure 4-13 New Waypoint Is Inserted Before the Selected Waypoint
Appendix
Index
4-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Selected Flight Plan
Waypoint
New Flight Plan
Waypoint
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 4-14 Flight Plan Before and After New Waypoint Inserted
4.2.1.3
FPL
Insert After
The Insert After option allows you to insert a new waypoint into the active
flight plan after the selected waypoint.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options list will be displayed.
2. Touch the Insert After key to select a new waypoint after the
selected waypoint.
3. Select a waypoint identifier with the alphanumeric keypad.
Then, touch Enter to confirm the selection, or touch the
Cancel key to cancel the operation and return to the Waypoint
Options window.
4.2.1.4
Along Track Offsets
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.50 and later.
Nearest
An along track (ATK) represents a temporary lateral position (or checkpoint)
relative to an existing waypoint in the flight plan. Offset distance values range
between 1 nm and 200 nm, and may be specified in 1 nm increments.
Unlike database waypoints, ATKs indicate a temporary route fix in the flight
plan. Once created, their position remains fixed until deleted by the pilot.
Subsequent changes to the flight plan do not update the ATK's position.
ATKs appear in flight plan route depictions on the Active Flight Plan and
Map pages.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-7
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
ATK Identifier
And Distance from
Reference Waypoint
Com/Nav
Reference Waypoint
FPL
Figure 4-15 ATK Inserted Before Reference Waypoint
Direct-To
Inserting the ATK before the selected waypoint results in a negative offset
value. Inserting it after the selected waypoint results in a positive value. The
flight plan allows multiple entries.
Proc
Selecting Before
Automatically Assigns
a Negative Value
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-16 Along Track Offset Keypad
Weather
Once entered, offset distances are not editable. If the offset requires
adjustment, delete the existing ATK from the flight plan, and then create a new
ATK with the correct offset distance.
Nearest
Map indications include a dedicated icon and an identifier label.
The identifier label denotes the adjacent waypoint's ID and offset
distance from the specified ATK.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Offset Identifier
Label
Messages
Symbols
ATK Icon
Appendix
Figure 4-17 ATK Indications on Map Page
Index
4-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
To create an ATK:
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, select a waypoint.
The Waypoint Options menu opens.
2. Touch the Along Track key.
3. Specify an offset distance using the controls on the keypad.
4. Select Before or After to place the ATK before or after the
reference waypoint.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
5. Touch Enter.
Direct-To
To create an ATK for an altitude constraint:
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, select an altitude
constraint. The VNAV Options menu opens.
2. Touch the Along Track key.
Proc
Wpt Info
3. Specify an offset distance using the controls on the keypad.
Map
4. Select Before or After to place the ATK before or after the
reference waypoint.
Traffic
5. Touch Enter and then Save.
Terrain
Weather
4.2.1.5
Nearest
Remove
The Remove option allows you to remove the selected waypoint from the
active flight plan.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options menu opens.
2. Touch Remove and then OK.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
4.2.1.6
Load Procedures
The Load Procedure selection from the Waypoint Options will start the
Procedures function. Refer to the Procedures section for complete information.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options menu opens.
2. Touch the Load Procedures key to go to the Procedure
function for adding procedures to the selected flight plan.
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Select
a Departure
Proc
Touch to Select
an Arrival
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
an Approach
Figure 4-18 Load Procedures Wpt Option
Map
NOTE: In software v5.13 and earlier, for some procedures, due to very
small position differences in the database, consecutive flight plan legs do
not match up. The total effect on navigational guidance is negligible. The
LOC BC 13 at KSLE via UBG shown below is an example of this.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Procedure Flight Plan
Leg Discrepancy
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-19 Procedure Flight Plan Leg Position Difference
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.2.1.7
Waypoint Info
The Waypoint Info option allows you to view information about the selected
waypoint. Refer to the Waypoint Info section for complete information.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options menu opens.
2. Touch the WPT Info key to view information about the selected
waypoint.
Distance & Bearing to Airport
from Current Position
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Airport Identifier,
City, & Type
Proc
Airport
Information
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-20 Active Flight Plan Wpt Info
Traffic
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan page.
4.2.2
Airways
Terrain
Weather
Airways may be added as legs in flight plans with any waypoint that is part
of an airway, such as a VOR.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired Airway entry
waypoint in the flight plan. The Waypoint Options menu opens.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch VOR Entry Wpt
to Insert Airway
Messages
Symbols
Figure 4-21 Active Flight Plan with VOR Entry Wpt
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-11
2. Touch the Load Airway key to select an airway for the selected
entry waypoint.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Insert
Airway
FPL
Figure 4-22 Select Load Airway from the Waypoint Options
Direct-To
3. Touch the desired airway to select it.
Proc
Touch to Insert
Selected Airway
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 4-23 Select an Airway from the List
4. Scroll through the list and touch the desired exit point from
the airway.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch to Select
Exit Waypoint
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-24 Select an Exit Waypoint for the Airway
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5. Confirm the airway information and then touch Load to insert
the selected airway into the flight plan. If changes are desired,
touch the Airway or Exit Waypoint keys to select alternate
choices.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Change
Selected Airway
Com/Nav
Touch to Change
Selected Exit
Waypoint
Entry
Waypoint
Touch for
Map Preview
of Airway
Waypoints
Touch to Load
Airway Into FPL
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 4-25 Airway Information
6. Touch the Preview key to view the airway waypoints and map
preview of the airway.
Map Preview
of Airway
Waypoints
Airway
Waypoint List
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Load
Airway into FPL
Weather
Figure 4-26 Airway Preview
7. After loading the airway, it is inserted into the flight plan. The
airway waypoints are shown below the Airway key on the
display. Touch the airway to make any changes.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Entry Waypoint
Touch to Edit
Selected Airway
System
Messages
Selected Airway
Waypoints
Symbols
Figure 4-27 Airway Waypoints in the Flight Plan
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-13
8. Touch the Airway key to display the Airway Options. Make
the desired choice or touch Back.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Collapse
Airway Waypoint View
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select New or
Change Current Airway
Com/Nav
Touch to Remove
Airway From Flight Plan
FPL
Figure 4-28 Airway Options
9. Touch the Collapse All Airways key to collapse the list of
points along the airway. Touch the Collapse All Airways key
again to toggle the display of airway detail back on.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
4.2.3
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Load Hold at Waypoint
4.2.3.1
Hold at Waypoint
Holding patterns may be added to existing waypoints within the flight plan.
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options menu opens.
Weather
Waypoint Options
for Selected Wpt
Nearest
Services/
Music
Hold at Wpt
Option Selected
Option Will Hold
at Selected Wpt
Utilities
Figure 4-29 Active Flight Plan with Hold At Waypoint Option
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2. Touch the Hold at WPT key to open the Hold at Waypoint
dialog window.
Touch to Select
Course Direction
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
Turn Direction
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select
Hold Course
Touch to Select
Leg Length Type
Touch to Use
Selections to
Create Hold at
the Selected Wpt
Touch to Preview
Selected Hold
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Select Leg Length
Touch to Select EFC Time
Figure 4-30 Creating a User-Defined Hold
3. Touch the Course key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and the Enter key to select the inbound or outbound course.
4. Touch the Direction key to select between Inbound or
Outbound for the course direction.
5. Touch the Turn key to select between Left or Right for the turn
direction.
6. Touch the Leg Type key to select between Time or Distance
for the leg type.
7. Touch the Leg Time or Leg Distance key to display the
keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the length
of the leg.
8. Touch the Expect Further Clearance (EFC) key to display the
keypad. Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the Expect
Further Clearance time for a reminder.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
9. Touch the Load Hold key to add the hold into the flight plan.
System
4.2.3.2
Removing a Hold
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Hold to be removed.
The Hold Options window is displayed.
2. Touch the Remove key.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
3. Touch the OK key in response to “Remove Holding Pattern?” The holding
pattern is removed. To cancel the request, touch the Cancel key.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-15
Index
Foreword
4.2.4
NOTE: This optional feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
Getting
Started
NOTE: Turn smoothing may result in SAR coverage being different than
intended. The flight crew should always verify that the SAR pattern created
conforms to the specific mission requirements.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Load Search and Rescue Pattern (Optional)
Search and Rescue Patterns may be added to existing waypoints within
the active flight plan. Only one SAR pattern can exist in the active flight plan.
Loading another SAR pattern into the active flight plan when one already exists
will remove the first SAR pattern.
Each pattern has a default initial track. When the pilot changes the initial
track on a SAR pattern, that change becomes the default initial track the next
time the SAR pattern is accessed within the GTN. The pilot can always change
the initial track when creating a SAR pattern in the flight plan.
NOTE: Flight plans cannot be stored in the catalog if they contain a SAR
pattern.
Map
Traffic
1. On the Active Flight Plan page, touch the desired waypoint in
the flight plan. The Waypoint Options menu opens.
Terrain
Waypoint
Options List
for USR002
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Option will Initiate
SAR Pattern from
this Wpt
SAR Option
is Selected
Utilities
Figure 4-31 Active Flight Plan with Load SAR Option
System
2. Touch the Load SAR key to open the Search and Rescue
Patterns page.
Messages
Appendix
3. Touch the SAR Pattern key to select between Parallel Track,
Sector Search, Expanding Square, or Orbit for the SAR pattern
type. The available patterns can be configured by the installer
and all of the listed pattern types may not be available.
Index
4. Touch the Preview key to open a preview of the selected
pattern.
Symbols
4-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5. Confirm the SAR pattern information and then touch the Load
Pattern key to load selected pattern to the active flight plan
or touch the Load Pattern & Activate key to load selected
pattern to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial
waypoint.
6. The SAR pattern waypoints are shown below the SAR key on
the display. Touch the SAR Pattern key to make any changes.
Touch to Edit
Selected Pattern
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Selected SAR
Pattern Wpts
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 4-32 SAR Pattern Waypoints in the Flight Plan
7. Touch the SAR key to display the Search & Rescue Options.
Make the desired choice or touch the Back key.
Touch to Collapse
SAR Pattern
SAR Key
SAR Pattern
Detail Shown
Touch to Edit SAR
Pattern Parameters
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Insert Wpt
Before SAR Wpts
Weather
Touch to Remove
SAR Pattern
Nearest
Figure 4-33 Search & Rescue Options
8. Touch the Collapse Search Pattern key to collapse the list of
the points along the SAR pattern. Touch the Collapse Search
Pattern key again to toggle the display of SAR pattern detail
back on.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
SAR Pattern
Collapsed
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 4-34 SAR Pattern Collapsed in Flight Plan
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
4.2.4.1
Creating a Parallel Track Pattern
The Parallel Track SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows the
initial track for the length of the first parallel track leg. A 90° turn in the initial
turn direction leads to the spacing leg with a length equal to the track spacing.
Another 90° turn leads to the second parallel track leg. The turns at the end
of the second parallel track leg are in the opposite direction as the previous
parallel track leg. The parallel track pattern terminates once the desired number
of parallel track legs have been flown. The default initial track for the Parallel
Track Pattern is True North.
Touch to Select
Leg Length
Direct-To
Touch to Select
Track Spacing Distance
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Select
Initial Track
Selected Initial Wpt
Touch to Select
SAR Pattern Type
Touch to Select
Initial Turn Direction
Touch to Preview
Selected Pattern
Touch to Select
Number of Legs
Touch to Load
Selected Pattern to
the Active FPL and
go Direct-To the First
Wpt in the Pattern
Touch to Load Selected Pattern
to the Active Flight Plan
Figure 4-35 Search and Rescue Parallel Track Pattern Page
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-36 Parallel Track Search Pattern
System
Messages
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Parallel Track as the
pattern type.
Symbols
2. Touch the INIT TRK key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the initial course.
3. Touch the INIT Turn key to select between Left or Right as
the initial turn direction.
Appendix
Index
4-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the Leg Length key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the length of the parallel track legs.
5. Touch the TRK SPCNG key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the desired spacing between the parallel
track legs.
6. Touch the Leg Count key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the desired number of parallel track legs.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
7. Touch the Preview key to open a preview of the selected
pattern.
FPL
8. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
Direct-To
OR
Proc
9. Touch the Load PTRN & Activate key to load selected pattern
to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial waypoint.
4.2.4.2
Foreword
Creating a Sector Search Pattern
Map
The Sector Search SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows the
initial track for the desired leg length. A 60° turn in the initial turn direction is
followed by another leg with the desired leg length, another 60° turn, and then
a leg back to the initiating waypoint. The next sector starts with a leg continuing
on the same course outbound from the initiating waypoint and is followed by
the same sequence of legs and turns. The third sector follows the same pattern.
The default initial track for the Sector Search Pattern is True North.
Touch to Select Leg Length
Selected Initial Wpt
Touch to Select
SAR Pattern Type
Touch to Select
Initial Turn Direction
Touch to Preview
Selected Pattern
Wpt Info
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Select
Initial Track
Utilities
Touch to Load
Selected Pattern to
the Active FPL And
Go Direct-To the First
Wpt in the Pattern
System
Touch to Load Selected Pattern
to the Active Flight Plan
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 4-37 Search and Rescue Sector Search Pattern Page
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-19
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 4-38 Sector Search Pattern
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Sector Search as the
pattern type.
FPL
Direct-To
2. Touch the INIT TRK key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the initial course.
Proc
3. Touch the INIT Turn key to select between Left or Right as
the initial turn direction.
Wpt Info
Map
4. Touch the Leg Length key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the length of the parallel track legs.
Traffic
5. Touch the Preview key to open a preview of the selected
pattern.
6. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
Terrain
Weather
OR
Nearest
7. Touch the Load PTRN & Activate key to load selected pattern
to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial waypoint.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
4.2.4.3
Creating an Expanding Square Pattern
The Expanding Square SAR pattern starts at the initial waypoint and follows
the initial track for a distance equal to the track spacing. All turns in the expanding
square pattern are in the initial turn direction. All legs in the expanding square
pattern are separated by the track spacing distance. The default initial track for
the Expanding Square Pattern is 090°T.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Touch to Select Track Spacing Distance
Selected Initial Wpt
Touch to Select
SAR Pattern Type
Touch to Select
Initial Turn Direction
Touch to Preview
Selected Pattern
Foreword
Touch to Select
Initial Track
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
Number of Legs
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Load
Selected Pattern to
the Active FPL and
Go Direct-To the First
Wpt in the Pattern
Touch to Load Selected Pattern
to the Active Flight Plan
Figure 4-39 Search and Rescue Expanding Square Pattern Page
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-40 Expanding Square Search Pattern
Traffic
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Expanding Square as
the pattern type.
2. Touch the INIT TRK key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the initial course.
3. Touch the INIT Turn key to select between Left or Right as
the initial turn direction.
4. Touch the TRK SPCNG key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the desired spacing between the parallel
track legs.
5. Touch the Leg Count key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the desired number of legs.
6. Touch the Preview key to open a preview of the selected
pattern.
7. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
OR
8. Touch the Load PTRN & Activate key to load selected pattern
to the active flight plan and go direct-to the initial waypoint.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-21
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
4.2.4.4
Creating an Orbit Pattern
The Orbit SAR pattern is a fixed radius turn around the specified center
waypoint. Automatic waypoint sequencing will be suspended while flying the
orbit pattern.
Touch to Select Radius
Selected Initial Wpt
Touch to Select
SAR Pattern Type
Touch to Select
Initial Turn Direction
Touch to Preview
Selected Pattern
Touch to Load
Selected Pattern to
the Active FPL and
Go Direct-To the First
Wpt in the Pattern
Touch to Load Selected Pattern
to the Active Flight Plan
Figure 4-41 Search and Rescue Orbit Pattern Page
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-42 Orbit Search Pattern
Nearest
1. Touch the SAR Pattern key and select Orbit as the pattern
type.
Services/
Music
Utilities
2. Touch the INIT Turn key to select between Left or Right as
the turn direction.
System
3. Touch the Radius key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and Enter to select the radius of the orbit pattern.
Messages
4. Touch the Preview key to open a preview of the selected
pattern.
Symbols
5. Touch the Load Pattern key to load selected pattern to the
active flight plan.
Appendix
OR
6. Touch the Load PTRN & Activate key to load selected pattern
to the active flight plan and go direct-to the first waypoint in
Index
4-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
the pattern.
4.3
Foreword
Flight Plan Menu
The Flight Plan menu provides access to functions to manage your flight
plans. The functions included are: View Catalog, Store Flight Plan, Delete Flight
Plan, Preview Flight Plan, Parallel Track, Invert Flight Plan, and Edit Data Fields.
Touch the Menu key to access Flight Plan menu options.
Touch to View
List of Stored
Flight Plans
FPL
Touch to Edit the
Active Flight Plan
Information Fields
Touch to Invert
the Active
Flight Plan
Touch to Adjust
AltitudeTemperature
Compensation
Touch to View a
Map and a List
of Waypoints
for the Active
Flight Plan
Touch to View
VNAV Profile Page
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Delete the
Active Flight Plan
Touch to Store the
Active Flight Plan
Getting
Started
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Add Parallel
Track Course Offsets
Terrain
Figure 4-43 Flight Plan Menu
Weather
Menu
Catalog
Store
Delete
Preview
Route Options
Activate
Invert & Activate
Preview
Edit
VNAV
Copy
Delete
VS Target
Flight Path Angle
VNAV Enabled
Nearest
Parallel
Track
Invert
Direction
Offset
Activate
Destination
Temperature
Services/
Music
Edit
Data
Fields
Utilities
Column 1
Column 2
Column 3
Restore
Defaults
System
Messages
Symbols
Temperature
Compensation
TEMP at DEST
Appendix
Index
Figure 4-44 Flight Plan Menu Functional Diagram
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
4.3.1
Store Flight Plan
A flight plan must be saved to the Catalog to be used in future flights. The
Store Flight Plan function will save the Active Flight Plan to the Catalog.
NOTE: If a flight plan that includes a procedure that has been modified
by the pilot is saved into the flight plan catalog, the GTN cannot check the
accuracy of that procedure when that flight plan is used on a later flight. It
is recommended that flight plans with modified procedures not be saved
in the flight plan catalog.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu
key. The Flight Plan menu opens.
Direct-To
2. Touch the Store key to store the current Active Flight Plan into
the Catalog. The flight plan will be named by the beginning
and ending waypoints.
Proc
Wpt Info
3. When a duplicate flight plan is created, the Store key will not
be available and the flight plan will be saved with a numeral
at the end of the destination waypoint.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Original Flight Plan
Weather
Duplicate Flight Plan
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 4-45 Duplicate Flight Plan Naming
4.3.2
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Invert Flight Plan
NOTE: Inverting a flight plan removes all ATKs.
This option allows you to reverse the active flight plan and use it for navigation
guidance back to your original departure point. The original flight plan stored in
the catalog is not affected.
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu
key. The Flight Plan menu opens.
2. Touch Invert.
4-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3.3
En Route Vertical Navigation
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.50 and later.
The vertical navigation (VNAV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during
the descent phase of flight. Guidance is based on altitude constraints associated
with lateral waypoints in the active flight plan.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Functions:
• Presents vertical path guidance to the descending path as either a line
joining two waypoints with specified altitudes or a linear deviation from the
desired path (i.e., the vertical angle from the specified waypoint or altitude)
• Integrate vertical waypoints into the active flight plan
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
• Support both manual and autopilot coupling
4.3.3.1
Wpt Info
VNAV Requirements
• Enablement by the installer
Map
• A baro-corrected altitude source
If en route vertical navigation is not enabled, the GTN provides a single
waypoint vertical calculator. For more information, refer to section 14.1.
For installation details related to en route vertical navigation, consult the AFMS.
4.3.3.2
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
VNAV Limitations
The GTN allows you to create a vertical navigation path with multiple altitude
constraints in the flight plan. These altitudes are removed when the flight plan
is stored in the flight plan catalog.
Most flight plan waypoints may be assigned an altitude constraint for use in
vertical navigation.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Exceptions include:
• Flight plan legs containing headings
Messages
• Flight plan legs that terminate at an altitude (e.g., a climb to 1,800 ft before
making a turn and proceeding direct to fix)
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-25
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4.3.3.3
VNAV Profile Page
Active vertical navigation profile information displays on the VNAV Profile
page. This page is accessible from both the Flight Plan Menu and the Utilities
page.
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Toggle
VNAV On or Off
Touch to Select
Flight Path Angle
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Select
Target Vertical Speed
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 4-46 VNAV Profile Page
To enable VNAV guidance:
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch Menu.
Terrain
2. Select VNAV. The VNAV Profile page opens.
Weather
3. Touch VNAV Enabled.
Nearest
Services/
Music
To disable VNAV guidance, touch VNAV Enabled again.
Disabling vertical navigation:
Utilities
• Invalidates required vertical speed, time to Top of Descent (TOD)/Bottom of
Descent (BOD), and vertical deviation data
System
• Removes vertical deviation and required vertical speed indications from the
PFD
Messages
VS Required,Time to TOD/BOD,
and Vertical Deviation fields
display dashes when VNAV is off
Symbols
Appendix
VNAV automatically re-enables when the pilot initiates a Direct-To.
Index
4-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3.3.4
Altitude Constraints
Foreword
NOTE: Altitude constraints loaded from the database are jet altitudes.
Some adjustment may be necessary for other types of aircraft. For the
adjustment procedure, refer to the published chart.
Depending on the specific instance, altitude constraints are either manually
entered into the Active Flight Plan page, or automatically retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database.
Constraint values display in MSL or flight level (FL). Constraints at airports
may be specified as MSL or AGL.
White Text Only
(No Constraint)
Cyan Text with Restriction
Bars and Pencil Icon
(Modified Constraint)
Cyan Text with Snowflake Icon
(Constraint with Temperature
Compensated)
Figure 4-47 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
The system automatically uses altitudes loaded with arrival and approach
procedures (up to and including the FAF) for computing vertical deviation
guidance. These values, accompanied by an altitude restriction bar(s), display
in cyan. The position of the value (above or below the bar, or between two
bars) denotes the required aircraft altitude relative to that constraint. Dual values
annunciate when the aircraft needs to cross between two altitudes.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Cross At or Above
5,000 ft
Cross At or Below
5,000 ft
System
Messages
Symbols
Cross At 5,000 ft
Cross Between
5,000 ft and 6,000 ft
Appendix
Figure 4-48 Altitude Constraint Examples
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
4-27
Foreword
Indication
Color
Getting
Started
• Estimate of aircraft altitude as it passes over the
navigation point
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• Absence of bar(s) indicates it is not a potential
constraint
White
• Altitude retrieved from navigation database
Com/Nav
FPL
• Bar above and/or below the value indicates constraint
type
Direct-To
• Altitude is for reference only. Not for use in
determining vertical guidance
• Altitude designated for use in determining vertical
guidance
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Cyan
Traffic
Weather
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
• Pencil icon indicates manual designation or manual
data entry
• Constraint invalid
• System cannot use altitude to determine vertical
guidance
Terrain
Nearest
Description
• Altitude calculated by system
Table 4-1 Altitude Constraint Color Conventions
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to exceed the maximum flight
path angle (6° downward) or maximum vertical speed (-4,000 fpm)
• It results in a TOD behind the aircraft's current position
• It is within a leg type that does not support altitude constraints
• It is added to a waypoint past the FAF
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
The altitude restriction from the database displays when the following three
conditions are present.
Getting
Started
1. A pilot-specified altitude constraint is deleted
2. Navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral waypoint
3. A predicted altitude is not available
Once added to the flight plan, an altitude constraint may be modified or
deleted using the controls in the VNAV Options menu. Select a value in the ALT
column to display available options.
Selection
Type
Altitude
Data Entry
Revert
Constraint
Remove
Constraint
Foreword
Function
• Opens a list of available constraint types
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
• Options: At, At or Above, At or Below, and Between
• Opens a keypad. Specify an altitude value for the selected
constraint type
Wpt Info
• Unit options: MSL, AGL, and Flight Level
• Returns a modified altitude constraint to its original published
value
• Removes the VNAV designation from the altitude
• Value remains displayed for reference purposes. It is no longer
used to compute vertical guidance
• Removing the VNAV designation from an altitude may
invalidate other displayed altitudes or cause them to change
after recalculation
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Table 4-2 Altitude Constraint Options
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-29
Foreword
To designate a waypoint altitude for use with vertical guidance:
1. Select a waypoint altitude constraint.
2. Touch Save.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
The altitude color changes to cyan, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
To enter or modify an altitude constraint:
1. Select an altitude constraint.
2. Touch Type and select the constraint type.
Direct-To
3. Select the altitude data key. Enter an altitude constraint value
using the keypad. Touching Flight Level enters the value as
a flight level.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
4. Touch Enter to accept the altitude.
Traffic
5. Touch Save.
Terrain
Weather
To delete an altitude constraint:
1. Select an altitude constraint.
2. Touch Remove Constraint.
Nearest
3. Confirm the request by selecting OK.
Services/
Music
Utilities
To return a modified altitude constraint to its original database value:
1. Select an altitude constraint containing the pencil icon.
2. Touch Revert Constraint.
System
3. Confirm the request by selecting OK.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-30
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3.3.5
VNAV Direct-To
The VNAV Direct-To function creates a vertical navigation path from the
aircraft's current position and altitude to a selected waypoint's location and
altitude. By removing any VNAV constraints between the aircraft and the selected
waypoint, it allows the pilot to fly the lateral flight plan in a continuous descent
and reach the waypoint at the specified altitude.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
To initiate a VNAV Direct-To:
1. Select an altitude constraint.
FPL
2. Touch VNAV Direct-To.
Direct-To
3. Confirm the request by selecting OK.
4.3.3.6
Transition to Approach
Proc
Function availability dependent on installer configuration. For more
information, refer to the AFMS.
Approach Type
Transition to Approach
Enabled
Transition to Approach
Not Enabled
VNAV Response
• Vertical path attempts a smooth transition from
en route to approach vertical guidance
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
• Aircraft intercepts with approach guidance from
below the glidepath/glideslope
• En route VNAV terminates at the waypoint prior
to the FAF on approaches with vertical guidance
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
• En route VNAV terminates at the FAF (LNAV only)
Table 4-3 VNAV Approach Response
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-31
Foreword
4.3.4
NOTE: GTNs and TXi displays use only one destination airport temperature
for calculating compensated altitudes. Changing the temperature on one
of these units automatically recalculates the value across all connected
GTNs and GDUs.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Temperature Compensated Altitude
A temperature compensation function calculates loaded approach altitudes
based on the pilot-specified destination temperature. Once the pilot enters a
destination temperature, the system increases the approach altitudes accordingly.
4.3.4.1
Temperature Compensation Requirements
• A destination airport is present in the active flight plan
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
• GDU 700( )/1060 for access via PFD Minimums menu
4.3.4.2
Setting Temperature Compensated Altitude
Temperature compensation controls are accessible from two locations:
• Destination Temperature Compensation window
Traffic
• Minimums menu (PFD only)
Terrain
Snowflake Icon
Indicates Temperature
Compensated FAF
Altitude.
Uncompensated
FAF Altitude
Weather
Touch to
Enable/Disable
Temperature
Compensation
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-49 Destination Temperature Compensation Window
To activate temperature compensated altitude:
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch Menu.
2. Touch TEMP COMP. The Destination Temperature
Compensation pop-up opens.
3. Touch Temperature Compensation.
Messages
Symbols
4. Touch TEMP at DEST and specify the destination airport
temperature.
Appendix
Index
Touch to Enter
Destination
Temperature
The temperature compensated FAF altitude displays in magenta.
4-32
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3.5
Parallel Track
Foreword
NOTE: En route vertical navigation is unavailable while the parallel track
function is active.
Parallel track allows you to create a parallel course offset of 1 to 99 NM to
the left or right of your current flight plan. After setting a parallel track to your
current flight plan, a magenta parallel track line will be drawn offset from the
original by the selected distance. The original course line will be drawn in gray.
The aircraft will navigate to the parallel track course line and external CDI/HSI
guidance will be driven from the parallel track.
When you reach the end of the flight plan, a message will state, “Parallel
offset terminating in X seconds.” The message will be given when the aircraft
reaches the offset distance from the end of the parallel track. This will give the
pilot sufficient time to intercept the original course.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 4-50 Parallel Track Description
Symbols
NOTE: In software v6.21 and earlier, graphically editing a flight plan cancels
the parallel track function.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-33
NOTE: Certain leg types (such as approach) or leg geometries (changes in
desire track greater than 120 degrees), combined with large offset values
do not support parallel track. Default direction and offset values may result
in the status indicating that parallel track is not supported. The user must
enter the desired parallel track offset and distance to determine whether
that flight plan, combined with the offset and distance, support parallel
track.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Parallel Track key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Set
PTK Distance
Touch to Set
PTK Direction
Touch to Activate
PTK Settings
PTK Status
Wpt Info
Figure 4-51 Parallel Track Selection
Map
2. Touch the Direction key to toggle the Parallel Track to be Left
or Right of the current Flight Plan.
Traffic
3. Touch the Offset key to select the Parallel Offset from the
current Flight Plan. Select the desired distance on the numeric
keypad. Touch Enter when finished.
Terrain
Weather
4. Touch the Activate key. A magenta "-P" indication will appear
to the right of the waypoint name on the Active Flight Plan
page.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Active FPL Leg
Utilities
System
PTK Active Symbol
Messages
Figure 4-52 Parallel Track Shown in the Active Flight Plan Page
5. To deactivate Parallel Track, while viewing the Active Flight
Plan touch the Menu key. With the Flight Plan Menu displayed,
touch the Deactivate PTK key.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-34
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3.6
Edit Data Fields
Foreword
The Active Flight Plan page shows each waypoint for the flight plan, along
with the Desired Track (DTK), Distance (DIS) for each leg, and Cumulative
Distance (CUM). Data fields are user-selectable and may be changed to display:
ALT - Altitude
ESA - En Route Safe Altitude
CUM - Cumulative Distance
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
DIS - Distance
ETE - Estimated Time En route
DTK - Desired Track
FPA - Flight Path Angle
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
When configured for VNAV, the GTN automatically selects the altitude data
field for the first column.
DTK Between Legs
DIS Between Legs
Proc
Wpt Info
Origin and Destination
Waypoints
Map
Current Flight
Plan Leg
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-53 Flight Plan Data Fields
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Edit Data Fields key.
Touch to Select
Field Types
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Current
Field Types
System
Touch to
Restore Original
Default Types
Messages
Figure 4-54 Flight Plan Edit Data Fields Page
Symbols
2. Touch one of the field keys to select from the list.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-35
Foreword
Getting
Started
Selected Field Type
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 4-55 Flight Plan Data Fields List
Com/Nav
3. Touch the Up or Down keys, or touch and drag the list, as
needed to scroll through the list. Touch the desired Field Type
to set it for the selected field.
FPL
4. Continue as desired for the other fields.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
4.3.7
Flight Plan Catalog Route Options
The Flight Plan Catalog allows you to create, edit, activate, delete and copy
flight plans. The catalog can hold up to 99 flight plans of up to 100 waypoints
each. Flight plans are named by the Departure and Destination waypoint.
Any time you activate a flight plan, a copy of the flight plan is automatically
transferred to Active Flight Plan page and overwrites any previously active flight
plan.
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Catalog key. The list of currently stored flight plans
will be displayed.
Terrain
Weather
Flight Plan
Catalog Total
Nearest
Flight Plan
Name
Services/
Music
Flight Plan
Comment
Utilities
Touch Up/Down
Keys to Scroll List
Touch to Create New Catalog Route
(Flight Plan)
System
Messages
Figure 4-56 Flight Plan Catalog
Symbols
2. Touch a flight plan to display the Route Options.
Appendix
Index
4-36
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Flight Plan
Route Options
Selected
Flight Plan
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 4-57 Flight Plan Catalog Route Options
Com/Nav
3. Touch the Route Option key for the desired option to act on
the selected flight plan.
4.3.7.1
Catalog Route Option - Activate
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Activate key and then touch OK. The selected flight
plan will be activated.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-58 Touch OK to Replace the Existing Active Flight Plan
Nearest
3. The Active Flight Plan page will now be displayed.
4.3.7.2
Services/
Music
Catalog Route Option - Invert & Activate
Utilities
NOTE: Inverting a flight plan removes all ATKs.
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Invert & Activate key and then touch OK. The
selected flight plan will be inverted and activated.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-37
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 4-59 Touch OK to Invert and Activate the Selected Flight Plan
3. The Active Flight Plan page will now be displayed.
FPL
Direct-To
4.3.7.3
Proc
Wpt Info
Catalog Route Option - Preview
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Preview key. A map view of the flight plan and
list of the waypoints will be displayed.
Map
Traffic
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Flight Plan
Map Preview
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-60 Flight Plan Preview
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog.
Nearest
Services/
Music
4.3.7.4
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Catalog Route Option - Edit
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Edit key. The flight plan will be displayed. Make
any changes necessary by touching the desired waypoint and
using the Waypoint Options.
Appendix
Index
4-38
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Selected Waypoint
Touch to Edit
Flight Plan
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 4-61 Use Waypoint Options to Edit the Selected Flight Plan
Com/Nav
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog.
FPL
4.3.7.5
Catalog Route Option - Copy
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
2. Touch the Copy key. You will be prompted to copy the selected
flight plan. Touch OK to create the flight plan copy.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-62 Flight Plan Catalog Route Copy Option
Nearest
3. A copy of the selected flight plan will now be listed. If any
changes are required for the copy, it can be used as a starting
point for a similar flight plan. Use the Edit Route option to
make the desired changes.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Duplicate Copy of
Selected Flight Plan
Symbols
Figure 4-63 Copied Flight Plan
Appendix
4. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
4-39
Foreword
4.3.7.6
Getting
Started
Catalog Route Option - Delete
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog page, touch the desired
flight plan to select it. The Route Options menu will be
displayed.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected
Waypoint
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Delete
Flight Plan
Figure 4-64 Select Flight Plan from the Catalog to Delete
2. Touch the Delete key and then touch OK.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-65 Delete the Selected Flight Plan from the Catalog
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-40
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3.8
Delete Flight Plan
Foreword
There are three ways to delete a flight plan.
Getting
Started
1. Remove a selected flight plan from the catalog.
2. Remove all flight plans from the catalog.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3. Remove all waypoints from the active flight plan.
4.3.8.1
Delete Flight Plan from Catalog
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the View Catalog key. The list of currently stored flight
plans will be displayed.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
2. Touch one of the flight plans to select it.
Wpt Info
Map
Selected
Waypoint
Touch Delete to
Remove the Waypoint
from the Catalog
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-66 Select a Flight Plan from the Catalog
3. Touch Delete and then the OK key. The selected flight plan
will be removed from the Catalog.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-67 Delete a Flight Plan from the Catalog
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-41
Foreword
4.3.8.2
Delete All Flight Plans from Catalog
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 or later.
Getting
Started
1. While viewing the Flight Plan Catalog, touch the Menu key
to open the Flight Plan Catalog Menu.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to
Delete All
Flight Plans
Pending
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch to Delete All
Catalog Flight Plans
Map
Figure 4-68 Flight Plan Catalog Menu
2. Touch Delete All to remove all flight plans in the catalog.
Traffic
3. Touch Delete Pending to remove all flight plans pending
preview in the catalog.
Terrain
Weather
4.3.8.3
Nearest
Services/
Music
Delete Active Flight Plan
1. While viewing the Active Flight Plan page, touch the Menu
key, and then the Delete Flight Plan key.
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 4-69 Delete a Flight Plan from the Active Flight Plan
Symbols
2. Touch OK to clear the waypoints from the Active Flight Plan.
The flight plan will not be removed from the Catalog.
Appendix
Index
4-42
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4.3.9
Preview Flight Plan
The Preview Flight Plan function provides a summary of a flight plan. A
preview of the Active Flight Plan can be selected from the Flight Plan Menu's
Preview Flight Plan key or selecting a flight plan from the catalog and choosing
Preview from the Route Options menu.
4.3.9.1
Previewing the Active Flight Plan
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Preview key. A preview of the Active Flight Plan
will be shown.
Current Aircraft
Position on
Current Leg of
Active Flight Plan
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Foreword
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map View
of Flight
Plan Legs
Map
Current Dest
Waypoint
Figure 4-70 Active Flight Plan Preview
Traffic
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Active Flight Plan page.
Terrain
Weather
4.3.9.2
Previewing a Flight Plan in the Catalog
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key, and
then the Catalog key. The list of currently stored flight plans
will be displayed.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
2. Touch the desired flight plan. The Route Options will now be
displayed.
System
3. Touch the Preview key to display a preview of the selected
flight plan.
Messages
4. Touch the Back key to return to the Flight Plan Catalog.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-43
Foreword
4.4
Getting
Started
The Active Flight Plan may be edited graphically on the Map page. Refer to
section 8.3.3 for details.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4.5
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: Flight plans over 99 waypoints long are truncated at 99 waypoints
and the last waypoint in the imported/uploaded flight plan may not be the
destination airport.
Proc
Wpt Info
NOTE: Flight plan information and user waypoints included as part of a
flight plan will not necessarily retain their names when the flight plan is
transferred from the portable device to the GTN via a Flight Stream device.
Whenever a User Waypoint is imported, it is compared to the existing User
Waypoint catalog. If it matches locations with an existing User Waypoint, the
waypoint will utilize the name saved in the GTN for that waypoint. If there is
not a location match, the waypoint is imported but without the name label
that the import software may have used. Therefore all new User Waypoints
will come in as USR### where the number is the lowest open User Waypoint
slot in the catalog.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Utilities
System
Messages
Import Flight Plans with Connext
When the GTN is interfaced with a compatible Flight Stream device, flight
plans can be wirelessly imported into the GTN from supported Apps (i.e.,
Garmin Pilot). The imported flight plans can then be activated or stored to the
flight plan catalog once they are previewed by the pilot.
Direct-To
Services/
Music
Graphically Editing a Flight Plan
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later.
4.5.1
Operation
On the portable device, select the option to send a flight plan to the GTN.
The GTN MSG key will appear and begin to flash.
1. Pressing the MSG key will open the message page with a
message regarding the flight plan import and a key showing
how many flight plans are ready to preview.
Symbols
Touch To Preview
Flight Plan
Appendix
Figure 4-71 Flight Plan Import Message
Index
4-44
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2. Touch the New FPL key to open the flight plan preview page
when only one flight plan is imported, or the flight plan catalog
when more than one flight plan is imported.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 4-72 Preview for Single Flight Plan Import
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-73 Catalog for Multiple Flight Plan Import
Traffic
3. Selecting a flight plan in the catalog that is "Pending Preview"
will slide out a menu to preview or delete the flight plan.
Once the flight plan has been previewed and then stored
or activated, the other Route Options in the menu will be
available.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 4-74 Route Options by Selecting Flight Plan with Pending Review
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-45
Foreword
Getting
Started
4.5.2
Potential Errors
If the GTN is unable to import a flight plan due to errors in the flight plan or
a full catalog, the pilot will be alerted with a system message.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 4-75 Flight Plan Import Error Messages
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
If an imported flight plan contains any errors, pop-up messages will be
displayed alerting the pilot of the issues and the resulting changes to the flight
plan.
When the imported flight plan is too long, the GTN will truncate the flight
plan to the correct length. The pilot should be aware that waypoints are missing
from the end of the flight plan, including the destination waypoint.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 4-76 Pop-Up Message Reporting Flight Plan Errors
When the imported flight plan contains waypoints (non-user waypoints),
procedures, or airways that are not found in navigation database, the GTN will
replace those waypoints with locked (lockd) waypoints. These locked waypoints
must be resolved prior to activating the flight plan to provide navigation along
the flight plan.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-46
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
When more than one error occurs during the flight plan import, the pilot
will need to cycle through the errors by touching the Next key on the pop-up.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 4-77 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Waypoints
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-78 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Procedure
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 4-79 Pop-Up Message Reporting Unknown Airway
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-47
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4.6
Import Flight Plans with a Datacard
Flight plans can be created on a computer using compatible flight planning
software and saved to the datacard to be imported into the GTN. The imported
flight plans can then be activated or stored to the flight plan catalog once they
are previewed by the pilot.
NOTE: Flight plans over 99 waypoints long are truncated at 99 waypoints
and the last waypoint in the imported/uploaded flight plan may not be the
destination airport.
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later.
Direct-To
NOTE: The flight plan file format used by the GTN is different than the file
Proc
format used by the GNS 400W/500W Series navigators.
1. While viewing the Flight Plan page, touch the Menu key and
then the Catalog key to display the Flight Plan Catalog.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch to Import
Flight Plan
Figure 4-80 Catalog for Datacard Flight Plan Import
Services/
Music
2. An Import key will be present in the menu bar when flight
plans are present on the datacard. Touch the Import key to
open a pop-up with a list of the file names of the flight plans
on the datacard.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-48
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Touch to Import
Flight Plan from
Datacard
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 4-81 Flight Plan To Import From Datacard
Com/Nav
3. Select the desired flight plan to import.
4. Press Store to save the flight plan to the catalog. Press
Activate to make the imported flight plan the active route.
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Make
the Imported
Flight Plan the
Active Route
Touch to Store to
Save Flight Plan
to the Catalog
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 4-82 Route Options For Datacard Flight Plan Import
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-49
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
4.6.1
Potential Errors
If the GTN is unable to import a flight plan due to errors in the flight plan or
a full catalog, the pilot will immediately be alerted with a pop-up.
1. Touch OK at the prompt to continue.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 4-83 Flight Plan Import Fault
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 4-84 Flight Plan Import Fault - Catalog Full
2. If an imported flight plan contains any errors, pop-up
messages will be displayed alerting the pilot of the issues
and the resulting changes to the flight plan. These pop-ups
are presented the first time that the flight plan is viewed on
the Flight Plan Preview page.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
When the imported flight plan is too long, the GTN will truncate
the flight plan to the correct length. The pilot should be aware
that waypoints are missing from the end of the flight plan.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 4-85 Flight Plan Import Issue - Flight Plan Too Long
Index
4-50
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. When the imported flight plan contains waypoints (non-user
waypoints), procedures, or airways that are not found in
navigation database, the GTN will replace those waypoints
with locked waypoints. These locked waypoints must be
resolved prior to activating the flight plan.
When more than one error occurs during the flight plan import,
the pilot will need to cycle through the errors by touching the
Next key on the pop-up.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 4-86 Flight Plan Import Issue - Flight Plan Contains Unknown Waypoints
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 4-87 Flight Plan Import Issue - Unknown Procedure Removed From Flight Plan
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 4-88 Flight Plan Import Issue - Unknown Airway Removed From Flight Plan
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
4-51
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
4-52
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5
DIRECT-TO
Foreword
The GTN 6XX Direct-To function can quickly set a course to any waypoint.
If the pilot selects Direct-To to a waypoint that is in the flight plan, waypoint
sequencing in the flight plan will resume upon reaching that waypoint. If the
pilot selects Direct-To for a waypoint that is not in the flight plan, the flight
plan will no longer be active but remains available. There are some fixes within
procedures for which if a Direct-To is selected then the approach will not be
active. For example, if you activate a Direct-To course to a waypoint between
the FAF and the MAP and go Direct-To to that waypoint then approach guidance
will not become active.
5.1
Direct-To Navigation
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
1. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 5-1 Direct-To Wpt Page
2. Select Waypoint, FPL, or NRST APT from the Direct-To
window by touching the desired tab.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
3. If a specific course is necessary, touch the Course To key.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
5-1
4. Use the numeric keypad to select the course and then touch
the Enter key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Backspace
Key
Selected
Course
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Numeric
Keypad
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 5-2 Direct-To Course Selection
5. Touch the desired waypoint and touch the Activate key or
press the small right knob.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Waypoint
Tab
Traffic
Waypoint
Detail
Touch to Select a
Specific Course
Activate Direct-To
Course
Press Small Knob to
Activate Direct-To Wpt
Terrain
Figure 5-3 Direct-To Selection
Weather
6. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To
course.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5.2
Direct-To a Flight Plan Waypoint
Foreword
The Direct-To selection is not available for all flight plan entries. Some
flight plans entries including holds and course reversals cannot be selected for
Direct-To. Instead, select the associated waypoint for the Direct-To function.
1. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Touch the FPL tab on the left side of the Direct-To window.
FPL
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Flight Plan Tab
Direct-To
Touch Waypoint
Key to Select
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 5-4 Direct-To Flight Plan Leg Selection
3. Touch the leg of your flight plan you want to use. The Direct-To
Waypoint page will display information about the selected flight plan
waypoint.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Select a
Specific Course
Waypoint Tab
Waypoint Detail
Touch to Activate
Direct-To Nav to
this Waypoint
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 5-5 Selected Direct-To Flight Plan Leg
4. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to
activate the selection.
Utilities
System
5. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To
course.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
5-3
Foreword
5.3
Direct-To a Nearest Airport
1. Press the Direct-To key on the lower right side of the unit.
Getting
Started
2. Touch the NRST APT tab on the left side of the Direct-To
window. The nearest 25 airports within 200 NM will be listed.
The airport at the top of the list is the nearest airport. To review
the other nearest airports, touch the Up and Down keys to
scroll through the list.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch List and Drag
Finger to Scroll List
Direct-To
Nearest Airport List
Proc
Wpt Info
Arrows Indicate More
Items on the List
Nearest Tab
Figure 5-6 Direct-To Nearest Airport Selection
Map
3. Touch the desired airport to select it. The selected airport will
be displayed in the Waypoint page.
Traffic
Terrain
Direct-To Waypoint
Weather
Activate Direct-To
Course
Nearest
Press Small Knob to
Activate Direct-To Wpt
Figure 5-7 Selected Direct-To Nearest Airport
Services/
Music
4. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to
activate the selection.
Utilities
System
Messages
5. The Map page will now be displayed with the new Direct-To
course.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5.4
Removing a Direct-To Course
Foreword
When a Direct-To course is cancelled, the previously active flight plan will be
reactivated and the nearest leg to the aircraft position will become the active leg.
If there was no active flight plan, after cancelling the Direct-To course the aircraft
will continue with the current heading.
1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Waypoint
Touch to Remove
the Direct-To
Course
Getting
Started
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 5-8 Remove the Direct-To Course
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Remove key.
Map
3. Navigation will now return to the active flight plan.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
5-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
5.5
A Direct-To course may be set to any waypoint selected on the Map page. The
waypoint is selected by touching an item such as an airport, VOR, or NDB or
any other location. Touching the map page at any place not having an existing
location name will create a waypoint with the name “MAPWPT.” Touching the
Direct-To key will automatically insert the selected waypoint as the Direct-To
waypoint.
1. On the Map page, touch the map at the location intended to
be the Direct-To waypoint.
FPL
Direct-To
2. Press the Direct-To key on the right side of the unit.
Waypoint Tab
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Direct-To Map Waypoint
Direct-To Waypoint Name
Touch to Remove
the Direct-To
Course
Touch to Activate
the Direct-To
Course
Traffic
Figure 5-9 Touch the Map to Create a MAPWPT as the Direct-To Course Destination
Terrain
3. Touch the Activate key or press the small right knob to
activate the selection.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5.6
Off-Route Direct-To Course
Foreword
An off-route Direct-To course may be selected by uding the Waypoint tab,
NRST Apt tab, or selecting a waypoint on the map.When an off-route Direct-To
course is activate, the existing active flight plan will be deactivated. The original
active flight plan and waypoint sequencing is reactivated when the Direct-To
courese is removed.
Direct-To Waypoint
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Flight Plan
Data is Cleared
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 5-10 Active Flight Data is Removed When a Direct-To Course is Activated
Wpt Info
5.7
Graphically Editing a Direct-To Route
Direct-To routes may be edited graphically on the Map page the same as a
regular flight plan. Refer to section 8.3.3 for details.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
5-7
Foreword
5.8
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
Getting
Started
NOTE: Any time a user hold is changed with the Direct-To key, upon pressing
the "Activate the Direct-To Hold" key, navigation guidance will be given back
to the holding fix and the new hold re-initiated.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To a User-Defined Hold
A user-defined hold can be created as part of a Direct-To to any waypoint.
Automatic waypoint sequencing will be suspended during the hold.
1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page.
Direct-To
Direct-To Wpt
Proc
Touch to Select
Specific Course
Wpt Info
Touch to Create Hold
at Direct-To Wpt
Map
Figure 5-11 Create Hold at Direct-To Waypoint
2. Touch the Hold key. The Direct-To Hold page is displayed.
Traffic
Touch to Select Direction
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Select
Specific Course
Touch to Select
Turn Direction
Touch to Select
EFC Time
Touch to Accept
Hold Parameters
Touch to Select
Leg Length Type
Touch to Preview
Selected Hold
Touch to Select Leg Length
Figure 5-12 Entering Direct-To Hold Parameters
Utilities
3. Touch the Course key to open the keypad. Use the keypad
and the Enter key to select the inbound or outbound course.
4. Touch the Direction key to select between Inbound or
Outbound for the course direction.
5. Touch the Turn key to select between Left or Right for the turn
direction.
6. Touch the Leg Type key to select between Time or Distance
for the leg type.
7. Touch the Leg Time or Leg Distance key to display the keypad.
Use the keypad and the Enter key to select the length of the leg.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
5-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8. Touch the EFC key to display the keypad. Use the keypad and
the Enter key to select the Expect Further Clearance time for
a reminder.
9. Touch the Load Hold key to accept the hold parameters and
return to the Direct-To page.
Direct-To Wpt
Hold Pattern Course
Figure 5-13 Direct-To Page with Hold Selected
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Specified Course
to Direct-To Wpt
Touch to Activate
Direct-To Course
and Hold
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
10. Touch the Hold Activate key or press the small right knob
to activate the selection.
5.9
Foreword
Direct-To a Search and Rescue Pattern
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
A search and rescue pattern can be created as part of a Direct-To to a flight
plan, off-route, or map waypoint. Creating a SAR pattern as part of an off-route
Direct-To will insert the SAR pattern waypoints at the end of the En Route
portion of the active flight plan.
1. Press the Direct-To key to display the Direct-To page.
Direct-To Wpt
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Selectic
Specific Course
System
Touch to Load Selected
SAR Pattern to Direct-To
Messages
Symbols
Figure 5-14 Create SAR Pattern at Direct-To Waypoint
2. Touch the SAR key. The Direct-To Search and Rescue Patterns
page is displayed.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
5-9
Touch to Select SAR Pattern Type
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Selected
Initial Wpt
Touch to Select
Initial Track
Touch to Select
Touch
to Select
Initial Turn
Number of Legs
Direction
Touch to Select
Touch to Preview
Track Spacing
Selected Pattern
Distance
Touch to Select Leg Length
Touch to Load Selected SAR Pattern to Direct-To
Figure 5-15 Direct-To Search and Rescue Pattern Page
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 5-16 Direct-To Search and Rescue Preview
Map
3. Touch the SAR Pattern key to select between Parallel Track,
Sector Search, Expanding Square, or Orbit for the SAR pattern
type. The available patterns can be configured by the installer
and all of the listed pattern types may not be available. Refer to
section 4.2.4 for more details on configuring each pattern type.
4. Touch the Preview key to open a preview of the selected
pattern.
5. Confirm the SAR pattern information and then touch the Load
Pattern key to accept the SAR parameters and return to the
Direct-To page.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Specified Course
to Direct-To Wpt
Direct-To Wpt
Touch to Activate
Direct-To Course
and SAR Pattern
Selected SAR
Pattern Type
System
Messages
Figure 5-17 Direct-To Page with SAR Pattern Selected
Symbols
6. Touch the SAR Activate key or press the small right knob
to activate the selection.
Appendix
Index
5-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6
PROCEDURES
Foreword
The GTN 6XX allows you to fly non-precision and precision approaches to
airports with published instrument approach procedures. The system can also
provide visual approach guidance to most airports.
The Procedures page is displayed by touching the PROC key on the Home
page. The Procedures page provides access to approaches, departures and
arrivals. Selections are also shown to: Activate Approach, Vectors to Final, and
Activate Missed Approach.
NOTE: Baro-corrected altitude is not required by the GTN unit to
meet the requirements of TSO-C146c; however, to take full advantage
of the GTN unit's capabilities, an optional baro-corrected altitude
source is recommended for (1) automatic sequencing of altitude leg
types, and (2) en route vertical navigation. If the GTN does not receive
baro-corrected altitude data, altitude leg types require manual sequencing,
and en route vertical navigation is not available.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
6.1
Basic Approach Operations
The GTN 6XX provides lateral and, when appropriate, vertical guidance for
visual and GPS/RNAV approaches. The moving map pages can also be used as
an aid to situational awareness for ILS, VOR, and NDB approaches (and nonprecision localizer-based approaches), but the appropriate radio navigational aid
MUST be used for primary approach course guidance for non-GPS approaches.
Approaches designed specifically for GPS are often very simple and don’t
require overflying a VOR or NDB. Currently, many non-precision approaches
have “GPS overlays” to let you fly an existing procedure (VOR, VOR/DME, NDB,
etc.) more accurately using GPS.
Many overlay approaches are more complex (in comparison to GPS-only
approaches). The GTN 6XX displays and guides you through each leg of the
approach — automatically sequencing through each of these legs, up to the
missed approach point (MAP). Approaches may be flown “as published” with
the full transition — using any published feeder route or initial approach fix
(IAF) — or may be flown with a vectors-to-final transition.
Phase of flight annunciations are provided on the bottom of the display
indicating the current mode of flight.
Procedures are arranged around the existing flight plan in the following
order: Departure, En Route, Arrival, and Approach. For example, Departure
waypoints are inserted before the En Route waypoints in the flight plan and
Arrival waypoints are inserted between the En Route waypoints and the
approach waypoints. Always verify that the transition waypoints between each
phase are correct.
Utilities
System
Departure
Messages
Airport
Departure
Runway
Transition
Preview
Load Departure
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-2
Arrival
Airport
Arrival
Transition
Runway
Preview
Load Arrival
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Approach
Airport
Approach
Transition
Channel/ID
Preview
Load Approach
Activate Approach
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Figure 6-1 Procedures Functional Diagram
Foreword
Annunciation
Description
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance (LPV) approach. Fly to LPV
minimums.
Localizer Performance using published LP minima. Advisory vertical guidance is
provided. Fly to LP minimums.
Localizer Performance with no vertical guidance. Fly to LP minimums.
Advisory visual approach with vertical guidance based on advisory terrain
avoidance calculations. CDI scaling is identical to LPV approaches.
Lateral Navigation and Vertical Navigation (LNAV/VNAV) approach. Fly to
LNAV/VNAV minimums.
GPS approach using published LNAV minima. Advisory vertical guidance is
provided. Fly to LNAV minimums.
Lateral Navigation approach. Fly to LNAV minimums.
Missed Approach indicates the system is providing missed approach integrity and
CDI full-scale deflection ±0.3 NM.
En route, CDI full-scale deflection is 2.0 NM or current CDI scale selection,
whichever is smaller.
Terminal, CDI full-scale deflection is 1.0 NM or current CDI scale selection,
whichever is smaller.
LP +V
LP
VISUAL
L/VNAV
LNAV+V
LNAV
MAPR
ENR
TERM
DPRT
OCN
LOW ALT
(lower window)
Departure, indicates the system is using non-precision approach integrity.
CDI full-scale deflection is 0.3 NM.
Oceanic, CDI full-scale deflection is 2.0 NM.
For LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, or LPV approaches, the LOW ALT annunciation
indicates the aircraft’s estimated height is lower than the Final Approach
Waypoint height by approximately 50 meters. This annunciation will not be active
when TAWS is operational.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Table 6-1 Phase of Flight Annunciations
6.2
Utilities
Selecting a Departure
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight
plan. Only one departure can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure
is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight plan, the new
departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a
departure, the transition waypoint, and a runway.
NOTE: Vector-only departures are not available in the Procedures database
as the GTN 6XX cannot provide navigational guidance on vectored legs.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-3
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page and then touch the
Departure key to display the Departure list.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Show
Departure List
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 6-2 Select Departure
2. If necessary, touch the Airport key and enter the departure
airport. Touch the key for the desired Departure.
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: Advisory climb altitudes for SIDs may not match charted altitudes.
Do not rely solely on GTN advisory altitudes.
Wpt Info
3. Touch the key for the desired Transition.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Select
Desired Departure
Transition
Weather
Figure 6-3 Selecting a Departure Transition
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the key for the desired Runway, if necessary.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
Desired Departure
Runway
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 6-4 Selecting a Departure Runway
NOTE: If the selected runway is depicted as RW10B, for instance, this
means both runways 10L and 10R.
5. After selecting the runway, the Departure page will be
displayed.
Touch to Select
Airport
Touch to Select
Departure
Touch to Select
Transition
Touch to Load
Departure
Touch to Select
Runway
Touch to Preview
Departure
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 6-5 Result of Selecting a Departure
Terrain
6. Touch the Preview key to view the Departure.
Weather
Nearest
Sequence List
for the Selected
Departure
Departure
Diagram
Services/
Music
Touch to Load
Departure
Utilities
Figure 6-6 Previewing a Departure
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-5
7. Touch the Load Departure key. The Active Flight Plan page
will be displayed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Change
or Remove
Departure
Touch to Edit
Waypoint
Com/Nav
Touch to Edit
Waypoint
Figure 6-7 Flight Plan View of the Selected Departure
FPL
Scroll to View
Flight Plan with
Departure
Waypoints
8. Remove a departure or select a new one by touching the
Departure key and selecting the desired choice.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
6.3
Selecting an Arrival
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport with
a published arrival procedure. Only one arrival can be loaded at a time in a
flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by
selection of an arrival, the transition waypoint, and a runway.
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page to display the
Procedures page and then touch the Arrival key to display
the Arrival page.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Display
Arrival Page
Utilities
System
Figure 6-8 Procedure Page
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2. If necessary, touch the Airport key to select a new airport.
Touch the Arrival key to display the Arrival list for the selected
airport.
Touch to Display
Arrival List for the
Selected Airport
Touch to Select
Airport
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 6-9 Arrival Page
Direct-To
3. Touch the desired Arrival from the Arrival list for the selected
airport.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to Select
Arrival
Figure 6-10 Select from Arrival List
Traffic
Terrain
4. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the
desired transition.
Touch to Select
Transition
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 6-11 Select from Transition List
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-7
5. Touch the key for the desired Runway, if necessary. The
completed Arrival page will be displayed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Select
Airport
Touch to Display
Arrival List for the
Selected Airport
Touch to Select
Transition
Touch to Display
Runway List for the
Selected Arrival
FPL
Touch to Preview
Arrival Wpt List and Map
Direct-To
Touch to Load Arrival into
the Active Flight Plan
Figure 6-12 Completed Arrival Page
Proc
NOTE: If the selected runway is depicted as RW10B, for instance, this
means both runways 10L and 10R.
Wpt Info
6. Touch the Preview key. A preview of the Arrival and the
Sequence List will be displayed.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Sequence List
for the Selected
Arrival
Arrival Diagram
Touch to Load
Arrival
Weather
Figure 6-13 Arrival Map Preview and Sequence List
Nearest
7. Touch the Load Arrival key to insert the arrival into the flight
plan. The Active Flight Plan page will be displayed.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch to Select
or Remove
Arrival
Messages
Scroll to View
Flight Plan
with Departure
Waypoints
Touch to Edit
Waypoint
Symbols
Figure 6-14 Flight Plan With Arrival Loaded
NOTE: If using Descent VNAV, verify that the altitudes for the selected
procedure match the charted altitudes and are appropriate for the airframe
type.
Appendix
Index
6-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6.4
Selecting an Approach
Foreword
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach
is loaded when another approach is already in the active flight plan, the new
approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by selection of an
approach, the transition waypoint, and a runway.
NOTE: In software v6.21 and later, the pilot may load an alternate
approach during a missed approach procedure. The GTN retains all
missed approaches in the flight plan.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
1. Touch the PROC key on the Home page. The Approach, Arrival,
and Departure fields will be dashed until a selection is made.
Touch to Select
Departure
Touch to Select
Arrival
Touch to Select
Approach
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 6-15 Procedures Selection Window
2. Touch the Approach key on the Procedures page to select
an approach for the destination airport. Confirm that the
intended airport is shown or touch the Airport key and select
the desired airport.
NOTE: If using Descent VNAV, verify that the altitudes for the selected
procedure match the charted or ATC cleared altitudes and are appropriate
for the airframe type.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch to Select
Approach
Touch to Select
Airport
Touch to Select
Channel ID
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 6-16 Selecting an Approach
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-9
3. Touch the Approach key on the Procedures-Approach page
and then touch the key for the desired approach. Selections
are listed according to approach type: instrument first, visual
second.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Select
Approach
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 6-17 Selecting an Approach from the List
4. After selecting the approach for the destination airport, the
approach overview will be displayed.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Select
Airport
Touch to Select
Approach
Terrain
Touch to Select
Transition
Touch to Select
Channel/ID
Weather
Touch to Preview
Approach
Touch to Activate
Approach
Touch to Load Approach
Figure 6-18 Selected Approach Overview
Nearest
Services/
Music
5. Touch the Transition key and then touch the key for the desired
transition. The selected Transition will be shown in white on
the Procedure page Approach diagram. Unselected Transitions
will be shown in gray.
Utilities
System
Selected
Transition
Messages
Drag Finger on
List to View List or
Touch Up/Down
Keys to Scroll List
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 6-19 Select Approach Transition
Index
6-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6. If desired, touch the Channel/ID key, then use the numeric
keypad to select the channel number, and then touch the Enter
key. The Channel and ID are typically loaded automatically if
they are present.
NOTE: As an alternate means of loading an approach, the Channel ID key
allows you to select the channel ID for a SBAS approach for the current
destination. The channel ID for the SBAS approach is available from an
approved approach chart. If duplicate numbers are available for a channel,
a list will be available where you may select the desired approach.
7. Touch the Preview key.
Sequence List
for Selected
Transition
Approach
Diagram
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Unselected
Transition
Proc
Selected
Transition
Wpt Info
Touch to Activate
Approach
Figure 6-20 Selected Approach Preview
Map
Traffic
8. Touch the Load Approach key. The Active Flight Plan page
will be displayed. The approach waypoints are placed at the
end of the flight plan and the unit will automatically sequence
to them after the en route waypoints.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
v5.13 and Earlier or v6.50 and Later
v6.00 Through v6.41
If you build your flight plan with the
destination airport at the end and then
load an approach procedure, you will
navigate all the way to the destination
airport before joining the procedure.
Be sure when LOADING and not
ACTIVATING an approach procedure
that the route to be flown is correct.
If you build your flight plan with the
destination airport at the end and
then load an approach procedure, the
destination airport will be removed from
the end of the flight plan. If the leg to
the destination airport is the active leg
when loading an approach procedure,
you will navigate all the way to the
destination airport before joining the
procedure. Be sure when LOADING and
not ACTIVATING an approach procedure
that the route to be flown is correct.
Direct-To
Proc
Table 6-2 Loading and Activating an Approach
Wpt Info
9. Touch the Load APPR & Activate key, which makes the active
leg Direct-To the selected transition waypoint, or for Vector
approaches to activate a leg that is an extended final approach
course. You can also "activate" the selected procedure on the
Procedures page, if the approach is not activated on this page.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
NOTE: When re-activating an approach, the decision as to whether a hold
is inserted at the IAF or not is assumed to be the same as the first time
the approach was activated, regardless of current aircraft position. If the
pilot wishes to have the hold inserted or removed from the procedure, the
procedure must be re-loaded or activated from the PROC-Approach page.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6.5
Approaches with Procedure Turns
Foreword
The procedure turn portion of an approach is stored as one of the legs of
the approach. For this reason, the GTN 6XX unit requires no special operations
from the pilot — other than flying the procedure turn itself — beyond what is
required for any other type of approach. Roll steering is provided to aircraft with
compatible autopilots.
NOTE: The steering provided for the procedure turn does not guarantee
that the aircraft will stay within charted procedure turn boundaries. As
such the crew will need to ensure that the approach is flown within the
confines of the charted procedure.
6.6
Flying the Missed Approach
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Upon reaching the Missed Approach Point, the GTN 6XX unit continues to
give guidance along an extension of the final course segment (FAF to MAP) until
you manually initiate the missed approach procedure (as mentioned in reference
to the “SUSP” advisory).
NOTE: If the unit is not configured for a CDI key, then the “activate GPS missed
approach” will only resume automatic waypoint sequencing. The user must
switch to GPS navigation, if desired, by using their external source selection
method (this is typical an EFIS system).
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
1. When the MAP is reached, a pop-up will appear.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 6-21 Pop-Up Upon Reaching the MAP
Messages
2. Touch the Remain Suspended key to continue with
sequencing suspended or touch Activate GPS Missed
Approach for guidance to the Missed Approach Hold Point.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
The Activate GPS Missed Approach function is the same for the on screen
controls or a remote switch. Activating the missed approach prior to the MAP
can be accomplished on either the Flight Plan or Procedures pages. If using the
Flight Plan page, the approach banner must be touched to display the Approach
Options where Activate Missed Approach can be selected.
Touch the Approach
Banner to Display the
Approach Options
Touch the Desired
Option
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 6-22 Approach Option Selection on the Flight Plan Page
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch the Approach
Banner to Display the
Approach Options
Touch the Desired
Option
Figure 6-23 Approach Option Selection on the Procedures Page
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Once an option is selected, the GTN will continue to provide guidance along
the final approach course. Upon reaching the MAP, the unit will automatically
sequence to the first leg of the missed approach. This is used when a pilot needs
to execute the missed approach prior to reaching the MAP.
6.7
Flying an Approach with a Hold
Upon activating an RNAV GPS approach, you are given the option to skip
any non-required holding patterns during the initial transitions of the approach.
The Default NAV page and Flight Plan page displays a timer or distance, as
appropriate, during the holding pattern. Use this timer or distance to fly the
outbound portion of the holding pattern. (The holding pattern is displayed on
the Map page and indicated as the active leg on the Default NAV and Active
Flight Plan pages.)
Index
6-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
NOTE: If you need to lose extra altitude or speed by going around the holding
pattern again, touch SUSP to manually suspend waypoint sequencing BEFORE
crossing the holding waypoint the second time. If you’ve already passed this
waypoint, re-activate the holding pattern.
As you cross the MAP, a “SUSP” annunciation will appear, indicating that
automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended at the MAP. A “from”
indication is displayed on the CDI and Default NAV page, but course guidance
along the final approach course continues.
6.8
Flying a DME Arc Approach
Approaches that contain DME arcs are supported by the GTN. The GTN will
provide guidance (left / right) relative to the arc. If you wish to activate the DME
arc leg manually, the aircraft must be near the arc, as shown in the shaded area
below.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 6-24 DME Arc Example
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-15
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
6.9
Radius-to-Fix (RF) Approaches
RF legs associated with RNAV RNP 1.0 non-AR (Approval Required)
approaches are supported by the GTN in v6.00, or later, when approved by the
installation.
• AC 90-101A defines RF leg as “a constant radius circular path, around a
defined turn center, that starts and terminates at a fix. An RF leg may be
published as part of a procedure.”
Com/Nav
FPL
• Flying the RF leg of an approach is similar to flying a DME arc approach.
All GTN annunciations and indications are identical whether flying DME
arcs or RF legs with the GTN.
Direct-To
• RF legs may have a larger or smaller radius than DME arcs.
Proc
• Unlike DME arcs, RF legs are not based on a VOR.
Wpt Info
• Refer to the aircraft AFMS for specific details regarding RF legs for a
specific aircraft.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
6.10
Vectors to Final
With “Vectors-To-Final” (VTF) selected, the CDI needle remains off center
until you’re established on the final approach course. With the approach
activated, the Map page displays an extension of the final approach course in
magenta (remember, magenta is used to depict the active leg of the flight plan)
and “vtf” appears as part of the active leg on the Map page (as a reminder that
the approach was activated with vectors-to-final).
Services/
Music
NOTE: In software v5.13 and earlier, once VTF is activated all waypoints in
the approach prior to the FAF are removed.
Utilities
NOTE: In software v6.00 and later, all waypoints along the final approach
course, including waypoints before the FAF, are included in the flight plan and
the final approach course to the FAF is activated.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6.11
ILS Approaches (GTN 650 Only)
Foreword
Precision ILS approaches can be performed with the built-in VLOC (VOR/
localizer/glideslope) receivers. The GPS receiver can be used for guidance prior
to reaching the final approach fix, but once there, the proper frequency must
be selected on the VLOC window (right side of screen) and the CDI output set
to “VLOC.”
1.2NM
1.2NM
15NM
GPS
VLOC
OC
VL
to rea
a
h
itc his
Sw n t
o
i
t
Au with
VLOC
2NM
MANUAL
FAF
GPS
The GTN 6XX can be set to automatically
switch the external CDI output from GPS to
VLOC as you intercept the final approach
course (if used with a KAP140/KFC225
autopilot, you will need to manually enable
outputs. Refer to the instructions in the
"Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the King
KAP140/KFC225" section). When the ILS
approach is activated and the correct ILS
frequency is active in the VLOC window, the
GTN 6XX automatically switches to VLOC
within 1.2 NM left or right of the final
approach course. This switch can take place
anywhere from 2.0 to 15.0 NM from the
FAF.
The illustration shows multiple locations
along the approach path and the CDI
selection that you can expect: GPS or VLOC.
Within the area of the shaded box, the
automatic switch from GPS to VLOC should
occur.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
NOTE: If you attempt to intercept the approach course at a distance less
than 2.0 NM from the FAF, the GTN 6XX does not automatically switch
the CDI to VLOC. In this case, touch the CDI key to manually switch from
GPS to VLOC.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-17
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
The automatic switch from GPS to VLOC is not immediate, but instead occurs
gradually to prevent abrupt CDI changes when coupled to an autopilot. The CDI
selection can also be changed manually by touching the CDI key.
6.12
RNAV Approach Procedures
The GTN 6XX allows for flying LNAV/VNAV, LNAV, LNAV +V, LPV, LP, and
LP +V approaches according to the published chart.
Phase of flight
Annunciation
L/VNAV
Description
Minimums
Lateral Navigation/Vertical Navigation. RNAV nonprecision approach with vertical guidance.
Published LNAV/
VNAV minimums.
Published LNAV
minimums.
Proc
LNAV
Lateral Navigation. RNAV non-precision approach.
Wpt Info
LNAV + V
Lateral Navigation with Advisory Vertical
Guidance. RNAV non-precision LNAV approach
with advisory vertical guidance. The glidepath
is typically denoted by a light dashed line on
the vertical profile (Jeppeson only) with an
associated glidepath angle (usually in the 3.00
degree range) and is provided to assist the pilot
in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath,
similar to an ILS glideslope.
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
(LPV) approach.
RNAV precision approach.
LP indicates Localizer Performance with no
vertical guidance.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
LPV
Nearest
Services/
Music
LP
Utilities
LP +V
System
Messages
LP +V indicates Localizer Performance with
advisory vertical guidance. This annunciation
is available in software v6.00 and later. This
advisory guidance follows the same nature as
set by the LNAV +V as shown above.
Published LNAV
minimums.
Published LPV
minimums.
Published LP
minimums.
Published LP
minimums.
Table 6-3 RNAV Approach Annunciations
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6.12.1
Flying the LPV Approach
1. Within 31 NM of the destination, the GTN switches from en
route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions
from 2.0 to 1.0 NM, full scale deflection.
2. As you approach the IAF, a waypoint message appears on the
bottom of the screen.
3. As the distance (DIST) to the IAF approaches zero, the message
is replaced by a turn advisory that counts down 10 seconds
prior to the turn.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
4. As you approach the FAF, the GTN will begin to automatically
rescale in an angular fashion. This will allow the LPV approach
to be flown in an identical fashion to a standard ILS. At
2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened from 1.0 NM to
the angular full scale deflection (typically the angular full-scale
deflection is 2.0°, but will be as defined for the approach).
Direct-To
5. Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF, the unit will check the
required Horizontal Alarm Limit (HAL) and Vertical Alarm Limit
(VAL) to ensure the GPS position integrity is within limits to
complete the LPV precision approach. In the event the HAL
or VAL limits are exceeded, the approach will be downgraded
to a non-precision approach indicated by “LNAV” on the
moving map, a message that the approach is downgraded
(“APPROACH DOWNGRADE - GPS approach downgraded. Use
LNAV minima.”), and the glideslope indicator will be flagged.
You may continue the approach using LNAV non-precision
minimums if there are LNAV minimums for this approach. In
the rare event the GPS integrity cannot meet the non-precision
HAL limits, the unit will send a message to the pilot to abort
the approach (“ABORT APPROACH - GPS approach no longer
available.”). The unit will revert to terminal limits to support
navigation to the missed approach when the message is
acknowledged. After the aircraft has passed the FAF, a loss of
WAAS integrity will cause the approach to abort instead of
downgrade.
Map
Proc
Wpt Info
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
6. Capture the glideslope as you would an ILS glideslope.
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-19
7. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences to the MAP
(e.g., “RW31,” the runway threshold). With the needle on the
external CDI (or HSI) centered, fly toward the MAP, observing
the altitude minimums published on the approach plate.
8. When viewing the Map page, you’ll note that the final course
segment is displayed in magenta (the active leg of the flight
plan always appears in magenta).
9. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint message appears on
the bottom of the screen.
10. Once the unit crosses the MAP (defined as the runway end
waypoint), sequencing will be suspended. Prepare the aircraft
for missed approach operation. Touch the Unsuspend key to
sequence to the Missed Approach procedure.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11. Fly the guidance provided by the unit to the MAHP and hold.
6.12.2
Flying the LP Approach
An LP approach is flown similarly to an LNAV approach, except the precision
is greater as it utilizes the SBAS accuracy. It has similar lateral accuracy as an LPV
approach. Angular scaling is similar to a localizer approach. Most LP approaches
have step down altitudes associated with them. The approach still results in an
MDA and missed approach point.
If the approach is indicated as LP +V, advisory vertical guidance will be
provided. This does not change how the approach should be flown, and the
pilot is still responsible for descending to the correct altitude at each step down.
The approach still results in an MDA and missed approach point.
1. Within 30 NM of the destination, the GTN switches from en
route mode to terminal mode and the CDI scale transitions
from 2.0 to 1.0 NM, full scale deflection.
2. As you approach the IAF, a turn direction message appears on
the bottom of the screen.
3. As the distance (DIST) to the IAF approaches zero, the message
is replaced by a time to turn advisory that counts down 10
seconds prior to the turn.
4. As you approach the FAF, the GTN will begin to automatically
rescale in an angular fashion. This will allow the LP approach to
be flown in the same fashion as a standard localizer approach.
At 2.0 NM from the FAF, CDI scaling is tightened from up to
either 2° or 0.3 NM, full scale deflection, whichever is smaller.
6-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
5. Sixty seconds prior to reaching the FAF, the GTN will check
the required Horizontal Alarm Limit (HAL) to ensure the
GPS position integrity is within limits to complete the LP
non-precision approach. In the event the HAL limits are
exceeded, the approach will be downgraded, when available,
indicated by “LNAV” on the moving map, otherwise the
approach will be aborted. A message will note that the
approach is downgraded and the NAV indicator will be
flagged until the message is viewed. You may continue the
approach using LNAV non-precision minimums if there are
LNAV minimums for this approach. In the rare event the GPS
HAL limits cannot meet non-precision limits, the GTN will notify
the pilot with a message to abort the approach. The GTN will
revert to terminal limits of 1.0 NM to support navigation to the
missed approach. If the approach is indicating an LP +V, it is
possible that the advisory vertical guidance could be removed
without annunciation due to the vertical guidance not being
within tolerances. This does not constitute a downgrade, and
the approach can still be flown to LP minimums.
6. As you cross the FAF, the destination sequences to the MAP.
With the needle on the external CDI (or HSI) centered, fly
toward the MAP, observing the altitude minimums dictated
by the approach plate.
7. When viewing the Map page, you’ll note that the final course
segment is displayed in magenta (the active leg of the flight
plan always appears in magenta).
8. As you approach the MAP, a waypoint message (“Arriving at
Waypoint”) appears on the bottom of the screen.
9. At the MAP initiate the missed approach, if necessary. Once
the GTN crosses the MAP, sequencing will be suspended.
Prepare the aircraft for missed approach operation. Touch
the Unsuspend key to sequence to the Missed Approach
procedure.
NOTE: For missed approaches with heading legs, fly manually until the
first active course leg is reached.
10. Fly the guidance provided by the GTN to the MAHP and hold.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-21
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
6.13
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.30 and later. Not all airports
in the database support visual approaches.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Visual Approach Procedures
The GTN generates visual approaches, providing advisory horizontal and
optional vertical guidance for the selected runway. Advisory guidance aids in
the performance of a stabilized approach and ensures the aircraft is in line with
the destination runway.
There are three different methods for loading and activating visual approaches.
Method 1: Select the Visual key on the map. When the aircraft is within 10
NM of the destination airport the Visual key displays. For information about
key configuration, refer to "Visual Approach Selector".
Wpt Info
Destination
Airport
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Load
Visual Approach
for Destination
Airport
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 6-25 Visual Approach Key Flying Near Destination
Method 2: Select the Visual key located on the left edge of the screen. This
key appears when a visual approach supported airport is selected on the map
during pan mode.
Touch to Load
Visual Approach
for Selected
Airport
Selected
Airport
Messages
Symbols
Figure 6-26 Visual Approach Key When Selecting Airport
Appendix
Index
6-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
For both methods, pressing the Visual key prompts a list of available visual
approaches. Once selected, the visual approach immediately loads and becomes
active.
Method 3: Visual approaches load from the PROC – Approach page or the
Airport Info - Procedures tab (similar to published instrument approaches). For
information on how to use this page, refer to section 6.4.
After a visual approach loads, a confirmation pop-up prompts, detailing
the glidepath angle (GPA) and threshold crossing height (TCH) when vertical
guidance is available. When unavailable it reads, “NO VERTICAL GUIDANCE."
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Vertical Guidance Available
Map
Vertical Guidance Unavailable
Traffic
Figure 6-27 Visual Approach Configuration Pop-up
The availability of vertical guidance advisories for visual approaches is
dependent on terrain and obstacle obstructions along the approach path.
If no known obstructions are within the approach path, vertical guidance is
provided to a maximum distance of 28 NM from the runway. If there are known
obstructions further than 3 NM, but within the 28 NM maximum distance from
the runway along the approach, vertical guidance is limited to the approach path
portion after crossing the known obstructions. This is indicated by the shortened
magenta line on the map after loading the approach. If obstructions are within
3 NM to the runway, along the approach path, advisory vertical guidance is not
provided. Lateral guidance is always provided for visual approaches.
Published data is used to determine the visual approach GPA and TCH for
the selected runway. If no published data is available, the default is 3° GPA and
50 FT TCH.
NOTE: If the GTN does not have a valid terrain database, advisory vertical
guidance is not available for visual approaches.
NOTE: Only external CDI/VDI displays provide vertical deviation indications.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-23
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
6.14
Points to Remember for All Procedures
• The GTN 6XX Map page is designed to complement your printed approach
plates and vastly improve situational awareness throughout the approach.
However, you must always fly an approach as it appears on the approach plate.
• The active leg (or the portion of the approach currently in use) is depicted
in magenta on the Map page. As you fly the approach, the GTN 6XX
automatically sequences through each leg of the approach unless “SUSP”
appears at the annunciation bar at the bottom of the display. “SUSP”
indicates that automatic sequencing of approach waypoints is suspended on
the current leg and normally appears at holding patterns and upon crossing
the missed approach point (MAP), for Climb to Altitude legs, and for Hold
to Altitude legs.
• For roll steering autopilots: roll steering is terminated when approach mode
is selected on the autopilot and is available once the missed approach is
initiated.
• If Vectors-to-Final is activated while on the “FROM” side of the FAF, automatic
waypoint sequencing is suspended and the SUSP annunciation will appear.
Automatic waypoint sequencing will resume once the aircraft is on the “TO”
side of the FAF and within full-scale deflection.
• For all procedures, make sure to check the runway, transition, and all
waypoints.
• Most legs are “TO” legs on which the TO/FROM flag on the CDI indicates
“TO” and the Distance field on the flight plan decreases as you navigate
along the leg. However, some procedures include legs which are “FROM”
legs. On these legs, the TO/FROM flag on the CDI indicates “FROM” and the
Distance field on the flight plan increases as you navigate the leg. “FROM”
legs are typically found on procedure turns and on some missed approach
procedures.
CAUTION: Not all autopilots will follow guidance when on a heading leg
using NAV, GPSS, or APR mode on the autopilot. Heading legs for procedures
can be identified by “HDG XXX°” in white on the Flight Plan page, as well
as the procedure chart indicating that the aircraft must fly a particular
heading. Certain autopilots will revert to a “Roll Only” or “Wings Level”
mode on these leg types and the pilot must engage the heading (HDG)
mode of the autopilot and set the heading bug appropriately in order to
use the autopilot on these legs.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
6.15
Points to Remember for Localizer or
VOR-based Approaches
Foreword
• The default factory setting allows the CDI output to automatically switch
from the GPS receiver to the LOC receiver. This may be changed to manual
in some installations. If the “ILS CDI Selection” setting is changed to
“Manual,” you must determine when to select “GPS” or “VLOC” guidance
during the approach. Remember, “VLOC” is required for the final course
segment from the Final Approach Fix (FAF) to the MAP.
NOTE: Installations with certain autopilots, such as the KAP 140 and
KFC225, do not allow automatic ILS CDI switching.
NOTE: GPS phase of flight annunciations (LPV, ENR, etc.) are not applicable
to the external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
• If the CDI output has not automatically switched from GPS to ILS upon
reaching the FAF, you must manually switch to the VLOC receiver by
touching the CDI key. Verify that “VLOC” is displayed.
• Automatic switching of CDI output is available for ILS, localizer, SDF and
LDA approaches. Automatic CDI switching is not available for backcourse
approaches or VOR approaches.
• When flying an approach with the autopilot-coupled, you must monitor
system functions at all times and verify that the autopilot and external CDI
(or HSI) switch to the VLOC receiver with sufficient time to capture and
track the approach course. Switching to “VLOC” late in the approach may
not provide the autopilot enough time to respond and intercept the approach
course prior to the FAF (depending upon the performance characteristics of
your autopilot and aircraft).
• When an ILS or VOR approach is first selected or executed, the frequency
is automatically checked. If the frequency is incorrect, you will receive a
message and you must place the correct ILS or VLOC frequency in the
active frequency field.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
6-25
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• When flying a localizer-based approach (other than backcourse) with
automatic CDI switching enabled:
1. “GPS” guidance may be used while flying outbound and on
the initial portion of the procedure turn.
2. “VLOC” guidance is used on the remainder of the approach
from the time you turn inbound on the procedure turn.
Com/Nav
3. The localizer frequency must be active to use “VLOC” guidance
at the MAP.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
• When flying a localizer-based approach with automatic CDI switching
disabled:
1. You may select “VLOC” guidance at any point on the approach
prior to reaching the FAF.
2. The localizer frequency must be active to use “VLOC” guidance.
6.16
Enabling Autopilot Outputs for the
King KAP140/KFC225
Autopilot outputs for the King KAP140/KFC225 autopilots are activated
manually by the pilot after being prompted during the approach procedure. After
enabling outputs, the GTN 6XX will provide guidance information consistent
with what the autopilot expects (i.e., angular CDI scaling and glideslope capture
for an LPV or other vertically guided GPS approach).
Nearest
Touch to Activate
Autopilot Outputs
Prompt to Activate
Autopilot Outputs
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 6-28 Prompt To Activate Autopilot Outputs
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
6-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7
WAYPOINT INFO
Foreword
The Waypoint Info function allows you to view information about the selected
waypoint. The Waypoint Info page can be reached from the Home page, selected
from a flight plan, or selected from the Nearest page.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch the
Key to Display
Waypoint Type
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 7-1 Waypoint Info Page
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-1
System
Messages
Traffic
Select VRP
Preview
Proc
Wpt Info
Select NDB
Preview
Nearest
Utilities
Appendix
7-2
Preview
Comment
Position Type
Lat/Lon
Lat/Lon
Radial/Radial
Ref Wpt - Rad
Radial/Dist
Ref Wpt - Rad - Dis
Temporary?
Create
Edit
Delete
User Wpt Import
View All
Direct-To
Name
FPL
Name
Com/Nav
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
NOTAMs
Weather
Select VOR
Preview
Frequency
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Wx Data
Metars
Forecast
TAF
Services/
Music
Select INT
Preview
Getting
Started
Runways
Runway
PCL
Frequencies
Info
Preview
Procedures
Foreword
Map
Terrain
Symbols
Figure 7-2 Waypoint Info Functional Diagram
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.1
Waypoint Selection
Foreword
1. Touch the Waypoint Info key and then touch the desired
waypoint type (Airport, INT, VOR, etc).
Getting
Started
2. Touch the waypoint identifier.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3. The waypoint identifier selection page will be shown and the
waypoint identifier field will be active for selection. Touch the
required keys on the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired
waypoint identifier and then touch the Enter key.
Backspace Key
Clears Wpt
Ident
Active Keypad
Range
Airport Identifier
Find Key Displays
Waypoint Search
Touch Enter
After Selecting
Ident
Selected
Keypad Range
Figure 7-3 Waypoint Ident Selection
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
4. The selected waypoint will be the selected Airport Identifier.
Selected Airport
Identifier
Com/Nav
Terrain
Weather
Bearing and
Distance to
Selected Wpt
from Present
Position
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 7-4 Waypoint Ident Selection Result
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-3
Foreword
7.2
Getting
Started
The Airport page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed
information about the airport.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
7.2.1
Com/Nav
FPL
Airport
Info
The upper part of the page shows the airport identifier and type, name, city
and region, the latitude/longitude coordinates of the airport, and the bearing
(and direction arrow) and distance to the airport from your present position.
The center area shows the airport elevation, fuel availability, and time zone.
Direct-To
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the Airport key.
Proc
2. Touch the Info key to display available information for the
airport.
Wpt Info
Airport
Identifier,
City, & Type
Map
Traffic
Airport
Information
Terrain
Weather
Airport
Latitude/
Longitude
Figure 7-5 Waypoint Info Airport Page
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.2.2
Preview
Foreword
The Waypoint Info Airport Preview page provides detailed information about
the selected airport.
Getting
Started
1. Touch the Preview key to view a map of the airport and
surrounding area.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the Preview
map.
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch & Move Finger
While Pressing to
Pan Map
Direct-To
Airport Preview
Area Map
Touch to
Zoom
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 7-6 Waypoint Info Airport Map Page
3. You may touch the map window and while pressing the display
drag your finger to move the map view.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-5
Foreword
7.2.3
Procedures
1. Touch the Procedures key to view details about procedures
for the selected airport.
Getting
Started
Airport
Identifier
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch, Hold,
& Drag Up or
Down to Scroll
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Return
to Previous Page
Figure 7-7 Waypoint Info Airport Procedures Page
Direct-To
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional procedures,
as needed.
Proc
Wpt Info
3. Touch one of the procedure keys to select it for the Procedures
function.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Approach
Name & Type
Airport Identifier
(Touch to Change)
Approach Name
Touch to Select
Transition
Touch to Cancel
Approach
Selection
Nearest
Channel and ID
Touch to Preview Touch to Load Touch to Activate
Approach
Approach
Approach
Figure 7-8 Waypoint Info Airport Arrival Information
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.2.4
Runways
Foreword
Airport Identifier
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
Runway Number
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Runway Detail
Runway
Map
Com/Nav
FPL
Pilot-Controlled Lighting Frequency
Touch to Place in Standby
Figure 7-9 Waypoint Info Airport Runway Information Page
Direct-To
1. Touch the Runways key to view information about the
available runways for the selected airport. The runway
identifiers, surface type, lighting with Pilot Controlled Lighting
(PCL) frequency, runway size, and traffic pattern direction are
shown.
2. Touch the Runway key to select a runway from the list. Touch
the desired runway to select it.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 7-10 Waypoint Info Airport Runway Selection
System
3. Touch the PCL key to load the PCL frequency into the Com
Standby location.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-7
Foreword
7.2.5
Frequencies
1. Touch the FREQ key to view details about available frequencies
for the selected airport.
Getting
Started
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional frequencies,
as needed. A "C" symbol in a white circle will appear next to
frequencies that also function as the Common Traffic Advisory
Frequency (CTAF).
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
"C" Indicates CTAF
FPL
Direct-To
Airport Identifier,
City, & Airport Type
Proc
Frequency Name
Wpt Info
Touch for More
Information
Touch and
Drag to Scroll
Touch to
Scroll
Touch Frequency Key to
Load into Com Standby
Figure 7-11 Waypoint Info Airport Frequency List Page
Map
Traffic
3. Touch the Frequency key next to the frequency name to
load it as the Com or Nav standby frequency, depending on
frequency type.
Terrain
4. Some frequencies have more information available and will
indicate that below the frequency name.
Weather
Nearest
Touch Frequency
Key to Load into
Com Standby
Services/
Music
Additional
Frequency
Information
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 7-12 Waypoint Info Airport Frequency More Information
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.2.6
Weather (WX) Data
1. Touch the WX Data key on the Airport Waypoint Info page
to view textual METARs, City Forecast, and TAF weather
information available for the selected airport.
Airport Identifier
Touch and
Drag to Scroll
Weather
Information
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to
Scroll Pages
Direct-To
Figure 7-13 Waypoint Info Airport Weather Page
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the Weather
page information.
7.2.7
Foreword
Proc
Wpt Info
NOTAM Pages
1. Touch the NOTAMs key on the Airport Waypoint Info page to
view NOTAMs available for the selected airport.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 7-14 Waypoint Info Airport NOTAMs Page
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional information,
as needed.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-9
Foreword
7.2.8
Helipads
1. Touch the Helipads key on the Airport Waypoint Info page
to view any information available for the selected helipad.
Helipad information may not be complete or consistent due
to the data available from the 3rd party sources.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Helipad
Information
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 7-15 Helipad Waypoint Info
7.2.9
Nearest VRPs
Traffic
Terrain
1. Touch the NRST VRPs tab on the Airport Waypoint Info page
to view a list of the visual reporting points that are located
near the selected airport.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 7-16 Waypoint Info Airport NRST VRPs Page
System
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to view additional information,
as needed.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.3
Intersection (INT)
Foreword
The Intersection page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety
of detailed information about the intersection. The top left area of the page
displays the Intersection identifier and region. The top center area shows the
latitude/longitude coordinates of the Intersection and the bearing (with direction
arrow) and distance to the Intersection from your present position.
Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identifier key, entering
the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then
touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the
Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching the
desired waypoint from the list.
The center area of the page shows a map with the Intersection in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the Intersection
key.
Intersection
Identifier
Distance & Bearing to Intersection
from Current Position
Nearest VOR
Information
Touch to View
Intersection Area
Map
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Intersection
Latitude/
Longitude
Touch & Move
Finger While
Pressing to Pan Map
Getting
Started
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 7-17 Waypoint Info - Intersections
2. Touch Preview and then use the In and Out keys to zoom
in and out on the map. You may touch the map window and
while lightly pressing the display, drag your finger to move the
map view.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
7.4
VOR
The VOR page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed
information about the VOR. The top left area of the page displays the VOR
identifier, name, city and state, and region. The top center area shows the
latitude/longitude coordinates of the VOR and the bearing (with direction
arrow) and distance to the VOR from your present position. The top right
area shows the frequency in a key. Select another Waypoint by touching the
Waypoint Identifier key, entering the characters for the desired name with the
alphanumeric keypad, and then touching the Enter key. You may also search
through the list by touching the Find key and then choosing from the existing
list of waypoints by touching the desired waypoint from the list.
The center area of the page shows a map with the VOR in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the VOR key.
Wpt Info
VOR Identifier,
Symbol, & Name
Map
Distance & Bearing to VOR
from Current Position
Traffic
VOR Location
& Region
VOR Class
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
VOR Latitude/
Longitude
Nearest Airport
Information
Touch to View
VOR Area Map
Magnetic Variation
Services/
Music
VOR Frequency
Touch to Insert into Nav Standby
Figure 7-18 Waypoint Info - VORs
Utilities
Messages
2. Touch Preview and then use the In and Out keys to zoom
in and out on the map. You may touch the map window and
while lightly pressing the display, drag your finger to move the
map view.
Symbols
3. Touch the Frequency key next to load it as the Nav standby
frequency.
System
Appendix
Index
7-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.5
VRP
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 or later.
Getting
Started
NOTE: Visual Reporting Point database coverage is not available in all
regions.
The VRP (Visual Reporting Point) page of the Waypoint Info function
provides information about the VRP. The top area shows the latitude/longitude
coordinates of the VRP and the bearing (with direction arrow) and distance to
the VRP from your present position. Select another Waypoint by touching the
Waypoint Identifier key, entering the characters for the desired name with the
alphanumeric keypad, and then touching the Enter key. You may also search
through the list by touching the Find key and then choosing from the existing
list of waypoints by touching the desired waypoint from the list. The center area
of the page shows a map with the VRP in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the VRP key.
Distance & Bearing from
Current Position
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
VRP Identifier,
Symbol, & Name
Weather
VRP Location &
Region
VRP Lat/Lon
Nearest
Nearest Airport
Information
Services/
Music
Map Scale
Figure 7-19 Waypoint Info - Visual Reporting Point
Utilities
2. Use the In and Out keys to zoom in and out on the map. You
can touch the map window and while lightly pressing the
display, drag your finger to move the map view.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
7.6
NDB
The NDB page of the Waypoint Info function provides a variety of detailed
information about the NDB. The top left area of the page displays the NDB
identifier, name, city and state, and region. The top center area shows the
latitude/longitude coordinates of the NDB and the bearing (with direction arrow)
and distance to the NDB from your present position. The top right area shows
the frequency in a key.
Select another Waypoint by touching the Waypoint Identifier key, entering
the characters for the desired name with the alphanumeric keypad, and then
touching the Enter key. You may also search through the list by touching the
Find key and then choosing from the existing list of waypoints by touching the
desired waypoint from the list.
The center area of the page shows a map with the NDB in the center.
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the NDB key.
Map
NDB Identifier,
Symbol, & Name
Distance & Bearing to NDB
From Current Position
Traffic
Terrain
NDB Location
& Region
Weather
Marker
Description
NDB Latitude/
Longitude
Nearest Airport
Information
Nearest
Touch to View
NDB Area Map
Services/
Music
VOR Frequency
- Touch to Insert into Nav Standby
Figure 7-20 Waypoint Info for NDBs
Utilities
2. Touch Preview and then use the In and Out keys to zoom
in and out on the map. You may touch the map window and
while pressing the display lightly drag your finger to move the
map view.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.7
User Waypoints
Foreword
NOTE: User airport feature is available in software v6.50 and later.
In addition to the airport, VOR, NDB and intersection information contained in
the navigation database, the GTN 6XX allows you to store up to 1,000 user-defined
waypoints. The User Waypoint page displays the waypoint name (up to six characters
long), location, and elevation (user airports only).
To minimize nuisance terrain alerting when landing at airports not in the
navigation database, user waypoints may be configured as user airports. User
airports display on both the Waypoint Info and Nearest Airport pages.
Delete Waypoint
Distance & Bearing
to Wpt from
Current Position
Identifier, Symbol,
& References
Distance & Bearing
to Wpt from
Reference Wpt
View All Wpts
Edit Wpt
Touch to View
Area Map
Waypoints Used
Figure 7-21 Waypoint Info for a User Waypoint
7.7.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Select User Waypoint by Name
1. While viewing the User Waypoint page, touch the User
Waypoint Name.
2. Use the keypad to select the characters for the name and then
touch Enter.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-15
Foreword
7.7.2
Select User Waypoint from a List
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the User WPT
key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
2. Touch the View List key and then use the Up and Down
keys to view the waypoints on the list.
Com/Nav
User
Waypoint
List Name
FPL
User
Waypoint
List
User
Waypoint
Name
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 7-22 Waypoint Info User Waypoint List
Wpt Info
7.7.3
Edit User Waypoint
Map
1. Select the desired User Waypoint and touch the Edit key.
Traffic
2. Touch the key for the desired information and make changes
as needed.
Terrain
7.7.4
Delete User Waypoint
1. Select the desired User Waypoint and touch the Delete key.
Weather
2. Touch the OK key to confirm deleting the selected waypoint.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.7.5
Delete All User Waypoints
1. While viewing the Waypoint Info page, touch the User
Waypoint Key.
2. Touch the View List key and then touch the Menu key to
open the User Waypoints Menu.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Filter
Touch to Delete
Waypoints to Delete
All User Waypoints
Figure 7-23 User Waypoints Menu
Proc
3. Touch the Filter key to select which type of user waypoints
to delete: All, Basic, or Mark On Target.
4. Touch the Delete All key to delete all of the user waypoints.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
7.8
Create Waypoint
User waypoints are created from the Create User Waypoint page. To create a
new user waypoint, simply enter its name (identifier) and position, or reference
another waypoint by radial and distance.
Touch to Set as User Airport
Com/Nav
FPL
Waypoint Name
Waypoint
Comment
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to View
Area Map
Temporary
Waypoint
Touch to Set User
Airport Elevation
Touch to Setup
Ref Wpt
Figure 7-24 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint
Wpt Info
Map
1. From the Waypoint Info page, touch the Create Wpt key.
Traffic
2. Touch the User Identifier key.
Terrain
3. Use the keypad to type the waypoint name (up to six characters)
and then touch Enter.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Backspace
Key Clears
Wpt Name
User Waypoint
Name
Alphanumeric
Keypad for
Selected Range
Utilities
Touch Enter
After Creating
Name
Selected
Character Range
Figure 7-25 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Name
System
4. If desired, touch the Airport key to make the waypoint a user
airport.
Messages
Symbols
5. Touch the Comment key to add a short comment for the new
waypoint.
Appendix
6. Touch the Position key and then LAT/LON, Radial/
Radial, or Radial/Distance to assign the type. Refer to the
following instructions for more detail.
Index
7-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Touch to Select the
Desired Waypoint
Reference Type
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 7-26 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type
Com/Nav
7. If desired, touch the Temporary? key to create the waypoint
for only temporary use. Temporary waypoints will be removed
when the power is cycled.
8. For user airports, touch the Elevation key and specify airport
elevation.
9. When finished with all selections, touch the Create key to
create the new waypoint.
7.8.1
Mark On Target
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
NOTE: This feature is available in software v4.00 and later.
Traffic
If an external Mark On Target (MOT) switch is installed, pressing that switch
will result in the creation of a User waypoint called MOTxxx at the point in space
where the MOT switch was pushed. The waypoints are created in increasing
numeric order up to number 999, at which point they will start replacing
existing waypoints at the beginning of the list.
When a Mark on Target waypoint is created, it may not be immediately
visible on the moving map page because the ownship icon will be directly on
top of the waypoint. Creation of the waypoint can be verified by changing zoom
scales on the map or viewing the User Waypoints page.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-19
Foreword
7.8.2
Getting
Started
Waypoint Location Based on LAT/LON
1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position key
and then the LAT/LON key. Next, touch the latitude/longitude
value key.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Select Latitude/
Longitude Waypoint
Reference Type
FPL
Touch to Select Latitude/
Longitude Values
Direct-To
Figure 7-27 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Latitude/Longitude
2. The latitude/longitude coordinate values will be highlighted.
Touch the LAT or LON key to toggle selection of the hemisphere
values and highlight the selected value. The Large knob may
also be used for cursor movement and characters selected with
the Small knob. Use the Large knob to backspace or move
the cursor to the left.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Select
Hemisphere Value
Terrain
Touching the LAT Key Activates the Latitude
Hemisphere Value for the Selection
Touch to Toggle
Latitude/Longitude
Selection
Touch to Select
Numeric Values
Touch to Select
LAT/LON Format
Weather
Nearest
Figure 7-28 Waypoint Info - Set Latitude/Longitude Coordinates
Services/
Music
Messages
3. Touch the desired hemisphere keys to select the desired values.
After selecting the hemisphere value, the cursor will advance to
the first character of the adjacent numeric value for selection.
Even when the hemisphere values are highlighted, touching
a valid numeric key will always place the cursor at the first
numeric value.
Symbols
4. When finished with the latitude/longitude selections, touch
the Enter key.
Utilities
System
5. When finished with all selections, touch the Create key to
create the new waypoint.
Appendix
Index
7-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.8.3
Waypoint Location Based on Two Radials
1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position key
and then the Radial/Radial key.
Touch to Select
Radial/Radial Waypoint
Reference Type
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select
Radial Values
Touch to Select
Reference Wpts
Figure 7-29 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Radial/Radial
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
2. Touch a Ref Wpt key and use the alphanumeric keypad to
select the desired identifier.
3. Touch the upper Radial key and use the numeric keypad to
select the desired value.
Proc
Wpt Info
4. Touch the Enter key.
Map
5. When finished with all selections, touch the Create key to
create the new waypoint.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-21
Foreword
7.8.4
Waypoint Location Based on Radial and Distance
1. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Position key
and then the Radial/Distance key.
Getting
Started
Touch to Select Radial/Distance
Waypoint Reference Type
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Select
Distance Values
Touch to Select
Reference Wpts
Direct-To
Touch to Select
Radial Values
Figure 7-30 Waypoint Info - Create User Waypoint Type - Radial/Distance
Proc
Wpt Info
2. From the Create User Waypoint page, touch the Ref Wpt
key and use the alphanumeric keypad to select the desired
identifier.
Map
Traffic
3. Touch the Radial key and use the numeric keypad to select
the desired value.
Terrain
4. Touch the Distance key and use the numeric keypad to select
the desired value.
Weather
5. Touch the Enter key.
Nearest
Services/
Music
6. Touch the Create WPT key to save the new waypoint.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7.9
Import User Waypoints (Datacard)
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later.
The GTN can import user generated waypoints from a file on the datacard.
The created waypoints will be at the latitude and longitude specified in the file
with the specified name and comment. This function overwrites any existing
user waypoints with the same name.
When a user waypoint file is on the datacard, a key will be available on the
Waypoint Info page for importing user waypoints.
1. Insert a datacard with the User waypoints into the GTN.
2. From the Waypoint Info page, touch the Import Waypoints
key.
3. Touch OK to acknowledge the pop-up to import all of the user
waypoints in the file.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 7-31 Start User Waypoint Import
4. The pilot is informed of the status of the user waypoint import
via one of the following system messages.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
7-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Message
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoints were imported successfully.
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoint import failed.
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoint import failed. User waypoint
database is full.
USER WAYPOINT IMPORT - User
waypoints imported
successfully - existing waypoints reused.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Description
All user waypoints were imported
successfully.
User waypoint import failed due to
improper file format.
User waypoint catalog is full and the
requested user waypoints could not be
imported.
User waypoints imported and existing
waypoints are used instead of creating
duplicate waypoints. This occurs when
a waypoint to be imported is within
0.001° latitude and longitude of an
existing user waypoint (roughly a few
hundred feet, depending on latitude).
Table 7-1 User Waypoint Import Messages
For more detail on importing user waypoints, visit flyGarmin.com.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8
MAP
Foreword
The Map page is used to provide situational awareness in flight. The Map
page can display the following information:
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• Airports, NAVAIDS, airspace,
airways, land data (highways,
cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.)
with names
• Flight plan legs
• Wind direction and speed
• NEXRAD (or Precip) Weather (Opt.)
• Icons for enabled map features
• Terrain Overlay
• Aircraft icon (with the nose
representing present position)
• Traffic Overlay
• Nav range ring
• Track vector (software v6.20 or later)
• Topography scale
Com/Nav
• Topography data
FPL
Direct-To
• Fuel range ring (software v6.00 or later)
Proc
Wpt Info
Map Menu
Options
North Indicator
Map Orientation
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Back to
Previous Page
Nav Range Ring
Map Scale
Map
Aircraft Symbol
(Present Position)
Traffic
Range Keys
Touch to Zoom
In and Out
Terrain
Weather
Figure 8-1 Map Page Description
Nearest
NOTE: The electronic map is an aid to navigation and is designed to
facilitate the use of authorized government charts, not replace them.
Land and water data is provided only as a general reference. The accuracy
of the land and water data is not suitable for use as a primary source of
navigation and should only be used to supplement official government
charts and notices.
The following information describes the ownship symbol behavior
in a helicopter that does not have a source of magnetic heading
information connected to the GTN.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
When greater than 15 knots ground speed the map is oriented either
north up with ownship oriented to its current track or track up. When less
than 15 kts ground speed, the directional ownship icon is replaced with a
non-directional icon because it can't be determined if the rotorcraft is going
sideways or backwards. The map will continue to orient to the current track if
the map is selected for Track Up. If the map is oriented to track up, then below
5 kts ground speed the map orientation will "latch" to the last valid track prior
to the ground speed going below 5 kts. The map will reorient when the ground
speed again exceeds 5 kts. The position of the ownship icon over the map is
always the current GPS position of the aircraft.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Map Overlays
Graphically Edit FPL
Topo
Airways
Map Pointer - Create Wpt
Terrain
NEXRAD (or PRECIP)*
Stormscope*
Traffic*
Map Setup
Map
Aviation
Land
Airspace
Traffic*
Weather*
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Map User Fields
Utilities
Change User Fields
Restore Defaults
Map Detail
System
* Optional
Messages
Figure 8-2 Map Page Functional Diagram
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.1
Map Menu
The Map Menu provides the ability to modify and control the information
displayed on the Map page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
• Map Overlays are selected to overlay various types of information over the
base map.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• Map Setup modifies the display of other map features.
Com/Nav
• Map User Fields determines whether or not the fields in the corners of the
Map page are displayed and the data shown in each corner.
• Map Detail lets you control the amount of information displayed at different
map ranges.
• Restore Defaults lets you start all over again with the default values for Map
User Fields.
NOTE: Changes made in the Map Menu take effect immediately on the
map display.
1. From the Home page, touch Map to reach the Map page, and
then touch the Menu key.
Map Overlay
Selections
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Edit
Map Setup
Nearest
Touch and Drag
Finger to Adjust
Map Detail Level
Return Map
User Fields to
Default Values
Touch to Edit
Map User
Fields (Corners)
Figure 8-3 Map Menu
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
2. Touch the key for the desired option to access its settings.
Messages
3. Touch the Back key to return to the Map page. Any changes
made will be retained until changed.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
8.1.1
Map Overlays are layers of information that are referenced to geographic
location and are overlayed on the base map. A green bar will appear below
the Map Overlay key text when the overlay is selected, except for Airways and
NEXRAD.
NOTE: Map overlay keys do not turn on or activate equipment necessary
for the overlay to function. Map overlay keys may remain available even
if the information necessary for the overlay is not available. For example:
the Radar overlay key is available even if the radar is turned off.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: Map overlays for Stormscope or Traffic are prevented from
being overlaid on the main map without a heading source or while User
Navigation Angles are selected.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Map Overlays
8.1.1.1
Overlay Priority
The data overlayed on the map is displayed according the following priorities
(from highest to lowest):
1 - Traffic
2 - Ownship
3 - Flight Plan
10 - Cell Movement 19 - AIREPS
11 - Lightning
20 - City Forecast
12 - METARs
21 - Surface
Analysis
4 - TAWS Alerts
13 - Winds Aloft
22 - Airspace
5 - Stormscope
14 - SIGMETs
23 - Waypoints
6 - Obstacles
15 - AIRMETs
24 - Airways
7 - Fuel Range Ring 16 - Cyclone
25 - Turbulence
Warning
8 - TFRs
17 - County
26 - Icing Potential
Warning
9 - Freezing Levels 18 - PIREPs
27 - Echo Tops
Messages
28 - NEXRAD
29- Cloud Tops
30 - IR Satellite
31 - SafeTaxi
32 - Terrain
33 - Base Map
34 - Topo
Table 8-1 Data Overlay Priority
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.1.1.2
Topo
The Topo Data option selects whether the colored topographical features are
displayed. Traffic, Land Data, Terrain, and Obstacles will still be displayed even
with Topo Data turned off.
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch Map Overlays key, and
then the TOPO Map Overlay key to toggle the Topo setting.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Topo Map Overlay Off
Topo Map Overlay On
Figure 8-4 Topo Map Overlay Selections
Proc
2. When the Topo Map Overlay is toggled off, all topographic
color features are removed.
8.1.1.3
Airways
The Airways option allows you to select the airways that are shown on the
Map page. All, Low only, and High only Airways may be selected. When Off is
selected, airways will not be shown.
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch Map Overlays key,
and then the Airways Map Overlay key to select the Airways
viewed. Selections are: Off, Low, High, and All.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Low Airway
Utilities
High Airway
System
Messages
Figure 8-5 Airways Map Overlay
2. Low Airways are shown as gray lines. High Airways are shown
as green lines.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
8.1.1.4
Terrain
The Terrain Data option selects whether Terrain Data is shown on the Map
page. Terrain and NEXRAD weather may not be displayed at the same time.
Selecting one will disable the other. A Terrain icon will indicate that the Terrain
overlay has been selected. Terrain overlay colors may or may not be shown
depending on the altitude of the aircraft.
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch Map Overlays key, and
then the Terrain Map Overlay key to toggle the view of Terrain
data.
Red Terrain - At or
Within 100 ft below
Aircraft Altitude
Direct-To
Proc
Yellow Terrain - Between
100 ft and 1,000 ft below
current aircraft altitude
Wpt Info
Map
Icon Shows Terrain Overlay
is Active
Traffic
Figure 8-6 Terrain Map Overlay
2. The colors of the terrain are referenced to your aircraft altitude.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.1.1.5
NEXRAD (Optional)
The NEXRAD menu option allows the display of NEXRAD Precip weather
information overlayed on the Map page. Terrain and NEXRAD Precip weather
may not be displayed at the same time. Selecting one will disable the other.
NEXRAD Precip weather is an optional feature that requires the installation of
a GDL 69/69A, GDL 88, GTX 345, or GSR 56 and an appropriate Weather
subscription. Only one weather source can be displayed at a time (i.e., FIS-B
and XM cannot be displayed on the map simultaneously. Refer to the Weather
section for more detail.
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the NEXRAD Map Overlay
key to toggle the view of NEXRAD weather data.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
NEXRAD
Product Age
NEXRAD
Weather
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 8-7 NEXRAD Map Overlay
Traffic
8.1.1.6
Stormscope® (Optional)
The WX-500 Stormscope Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The Stormscope measures relative
bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports the
information to the display. Stormscope and XM Lightning are mutually exclusive.
NOTE: The Stormscope map overlay is only displayed if valid aircraft heading
information is available. Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed
description of the Stormcope WX-500.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-7
1. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Stormscope Map
Overlay key to show the menu for selecting a Stormscope radar
weather data display mode: Cell, Strike, Off, or Clear Strikes.
Touch the desired function.
2. Stormscope data displays on the Map page. Refer to section
11.2 for more details.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Icon Shows Stormscope
Overlay is Active
Figure 8-8 Stormscope Map Overlay
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
8.1.1.7
Traffic (Optional)
The Traffic Map Overlay option selects whether Traffic data is shown on the
Map page. A Traffic icon will indicate that the Traffic overlay has been selected.
Traffic may or may not be shown depending on the other aircraft's location and
equipment. Refer to section 9 for more detail.
While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Traffic Map Overlay key
to toggle the view of Traffic data.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Non-Threat
Traffic Indication
Currently 1,200 Ft
Above and Rising
Utilities
System
Messages
Icon Shows Traffic Overlay
is Active
Icon Shows Aircraft is Receiving TIS Traffic
from Ground Stations when a GDL 88 is
Connected (GTN software v5.11 or earlier)
Figure 8-9 Traffic Map Overlay
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Orientation
North Up Above
Visual APPR Sel
Auto Zoom
Auto Zoom Min
Auto Zoom Max
Track Vector Length
Altitude Constraints
Nav Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Fuel Reserve Time
Topo Scale
Point Obstacle Rng
Wire Obstacle Rng
Chart Color
Selected ALT Range Arc
Restore Defaults
Airport Range
SafeTaxi Diagrams
Runway Extensions
Intersection Range
NDB Range
VOR Range
VRP Range
User Waypoint Range
Airway Range
TFRs
Restore Defaults
Road Detail
City Detail
State/Province Names
River/Lake Detail
Restore Defaults
Smart Airspace
Show Airspaces
Class B/TMA Range
Class C/TCA Range
Class D Range
Restricted Range
MOA (Military) Range
Other/ADIZ Range
Restore Defaults
Range
Type
Restore Defaults
Weather Source
Cell Movement
METAR
Cloud Tops
Echo Tops
Lightning
Restore Defaults
8.1.2
Map Setup
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 8-10 Map Setup Functional Diagram
Index
8-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
The Map page is customized by selecting groups from the Map Menu. The
Map Menu groups include choices for Map, Aviation, Land, Airspace, Traffic,
and Weather groups depending on the installed equipment of a given aircraft.
Each group has a list of options that vary with the group.
1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key. Then, touch
the Map Setup key. The Map Setup page will be displayed.
Com/Nav
Map Setup
Group
FPL
Group
Options
Direct-To
Group Option
Details
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 8-11 Map Setup Page
Map
2. Touch the desired Map Setup Group tab (Map, Aviation, Land,
Airspace, Traffic, or Weather) to display the set of group options.
Traffic
3. Touch the desired group key. A list of options for the selected
group will be shown. (i.e., Map - Orientation, North Up Above,
Auto Zoom, etc.) Touch the Up or Down keys as needed to
scroll through the list.
Terrain
Weather
4. Touch the key for the selected option.
Nearest
5. Touch the Restore Defaults key to return to the original
default values for the selected option.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.1.2.1
Map
The Map option defines the behavior and display of information on the Map
page such as: Orientation, North Up Above, Auto Zoom, Nav Range Ring, Topo
Scale, Obstacle Range, and Restore Defaults. The default values are shown in bold
type.
Feature
Selection
North Up, Track Up, Heading Up
Off, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM,
North Up Above
100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM
Off, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM,10 NM,
Visual APPR Selector
15 NM,25 NM
Auto Zoom
Off, On
250 ft, 400 ft, 500 ft, 750 ft, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft,
0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5
Auto Zoom Min
NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM, 400 NM
250 ft, 400 ft, 500 ft, 750 ft, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft,
0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM,
Auto Zoom Max
7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM, 250 NM, 400 NM
Track Vector Length
OFF, 30 SEC, 60 SEC, 2 MIN, 5 MIN, 10 MIN, 20 MIN
Altitude Constraints
Off, Selected Only, Selected & Active, All
Nav Range Ring
Off, On
Fuel Range Ring
Off, On
Fuel Reserve Time
30 MIN, 45 MIN, 60 MIN, 90 MIN
Topo Scale
Off, On
Point Obstacle Range
Off, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM
Wire Obstacle Range
Off, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM
Selected ALT Range Arc Off, On
Restore Defaults
Returns values to original factory settings
Orientation
Table 8-2 Map Setup Map Options
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Map Orientation
The Map Orientation selection sets the orientation of the Map page. Selections
are North Up, Track Up, and Heading Up. A Map Orientation label is shown below
the North indicator (reference to True North) in the top left corner of the Map page.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected Orientation
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 8-12 Map Setup Map Orientation
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
North Up Above
The North Up Above option allows you to select the map range where at
and above the selected value the Map Orientation will automatically change
to North Up as a default. For example, with the 500 NM value selected in the
figure below, when the map range is 500 NM or more, the map orientation will
automatically become North Up.
Terrain
Selected North
Up Range
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 8-13 North Up Above Range Selection
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Visual Approach Selector
This option allows you to select the range at which the Visual Approach
Selector becomes active. When the aircraft is within a specified distance of the
destination airport, the Visual key automatically appears in the bottom left
corner of the map. Any values displaying in this area are obscured while the key
is active. To disable this feature, select OFF.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
For visual approach procedures, refer to section 6.13.
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Select
Visual Approach
for Destination
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 8-14 Visual Approach Key
Auto Zoom
With a valid flight plan, the Auto Zoom feature will automatically change the
Map page range depending on the distance to the next waypoint in the flight
plan. If enabled, it will also automatically zoom to the SafeTaxi zoom range
when the aircraft is on the ground. Auto Zoom can be overridden at any time by
manually zooming with the In and Out keys. The Auto Zoom Min selection sets
the minimum range that the display will Zoom in. The Auto Zoom Max value sets
the maximum range the display will Zoom out.
Auto Zoom is re-enabled once one of the following conditions is met:
• A waypoint is sequenced
• The aircraft transitions from “on ground” to “in air”
• A point is reached where the Auto Zoom range matches the manual override
range (known as auto-sync) and will be noted as “Auto” above the map
range value on the map page
• Auto Zoom is toggled off and back on in the Map Setup page
1. While viewing the Map Setup - Map selection, touch the Auto
Zoom key to toggle it On or Off.
2. When Auto Zoom is On the Auto Zoom Min and Max values
will be used.
NOTE: Rotorcraft use a Local Auto Zoom function where Auto Zoom will remain
at the 1,500 ft zoom scale until the rotorcraft is above 400 ft GSL or 40 kts.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-13
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Auto Zoom Min
Set the limit that the display will zoom in automatically.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected Minimum
Auto Zoom Range
Com/Nav
Figure 8-15 Map Setup Minimum Auto Zoom Range
FPL
Direct-To
Auto Zoom Max
Set the limit that the display will zoom out automatically.
Proc
Selected Maximum
Auto Zoom Range
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 8-16 Map Setup Maximum Auto Zoom Range
Traffic
Terrain
Track Vector
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 and later.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
When turned on, the track vector is depicted as a cyan line extending
from the nose of the aircraft in the direction of movement. The length of
the track vector represents the path the aircraft will follow if the present
speed and direction are maintained for the time configured in the Track
Vector Length setting.
Utilities
Track Vector
System
Messages
Figure 8-17 Track Vector
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Altitude Constraints
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.50 and later.
Enabling this feature displays altitude constraints from the flight plan. The
active constraint is the altitude to which VNAV is currently providing guidance.
For more information about altitude constraints, refer to section 4.3.3.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Active Altitude Constraint
FPL
Direct-To
To View a Constraint
Value, Select the
Associated Waypoint
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 8-18 Altitude Constraints
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-15
Foreword
Getting
Started
Nav Range Ring
When turned on, the Nav Range Ring option will show a ring with a compass
rose oriented to magnetic north around your present position on the Map page.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Nav Range Ring
Com/Nav
Current Position
Nav Range
Ring Range
FPL
Figure 8-19 Nav Range Ring
Direct-To
Fuel Range Ring
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.00 and later.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
When interfaced with a fuel computer, the GTN can display a fuel range ring
which shows an estimate of the remaining flight distance at the current fuel
consumption rate and ground speed. If either fuel quantity or fuel flow sensor
data is not received, the GTN will use the Fuel on Board or Fuel Flow values
on the Utilities – Fuel Planning page. If both fuel quantity and fuel flow are not
received by the GTN, the Fuel Range Ring will be removed. A dashed green
circle indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid yellow circle indicates
the total endurance range.
Weather
Total Endurance Range
Nearest
Total Endurance Time
Services/
Music
Time to Reserve Fuel
Range to Reserve Fuel
Utilities
System
Figure 8-20 Fuel Range Ring
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
TOPO Scale
The Topo Scale option selects whether the elevation scale for topographical
features on the Map page is displayed. The scale will be located on the left side
of the display.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 8-21 Map Page Topo Scale
Traffic
Point Obstacle Range
The Point Obstacle Range option selects whether the Point Obstacle Data is
shown on the Map page at and below the selected Point Obstacle range. Map
ranges above this value will not show the Point Obstacle Data. An obstacle with
an asterisk indicates a group of the same obstacle type.
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1,000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less
than 1,000 ft AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater
than 1,000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1,000 ft AGL)
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Table 8-3 Navigation Map Point Obstacle Icons by Elevation
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-17
Tower
Foreword
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Table 8-4 Obstacle Icon Types
Com/Nav
Color
None
FPL
White
Amber
Red
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Table 8-5 Fixed Wing Color Scheme for Obstacles and Wires
Map
Color
None
Traffic
White
Amber
Red
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Description
Lines are removed when they are more than 2,000 ft below the
aircraft.
Lines are white when they are within 2,000 ft below the aircraft.
Lines are amber when they are within 1,000 ft below the aircraft.
Lines are red when they are within 100 ft below or above the
altitude of the airplane.
Description
Lines are removed when they are more than 500 ft below the
rotorcraft.
Lines are white when they are within 500 ft below the rotorcraft.
Lines are amber when they are within 250 ft below the rotorcraft.
Lines are red when they are at or above the altitude of the
rotorcraft.
Table 8-6 Rotorcraft Color Scheme for Obstacles and Wires
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk. The color of the asterisks
is tied to the relative altitude of the highest obstacle in the group, not other
obstacles within that group. Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise
overlap.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1. While viewing the Map function, touch the Menu key.
Foreword
2. Touch the Map Setup key and then with the Map tab
highlighted drag the list down or use the Down key to show
the Obstacle Range.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Select
Obstacle Range
Figure 8-22 Map Setup For Obstacle Range
Direct-To
Proc
3. Touch the Point Obstacle Range key and select the maximum
range where obstacles will be displayed.
Wpt Info
Map
Selected Obstacle
Range
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 8-23 Select Obstacle Display Range
Nearest
Lighted
Obstacle
Services/
Music
Unlighted
Obstacle
Grouped
Obstacles
Utilities
Current
Position
System
Messages
Active Obstacle
Overlay Types *
Figure 8-24 Navigation Map Point Obstacles
*
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Symbols
The icon on the left shows that the point obstacle overlay is
active. The icon on the right shows that the wire obstacle overlay
is active. These icons are available in software v5.12 or later.
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-19
Appendix
Index
4. Touch an obstacle on the map and the elevation will be shown.
If there are nearby or overlayed objects (obstacle, airspace,
airport, etc), touch the Next key to step through the nearby
objects.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Detail at
Cursor Point
Com/Nav
Selected Obstacle
Info and Type
FPL
Touch to Step to
Next Nearby Obstacle
Selected
Obstacle
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 8-25 Point Obstacle Detail
5.
Wpt Info
Touch the Back key to return to the normal map view.
Map
Wire Obstacle Range
Traffic
The Wire Obstacle Range option selects whether the power lines are shown
on the Map page at and below the selected Wire Obstacle range. Map ranges
above this value will not show the Wire Obstacle Data.
Terrain
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later and requires
the use of obstacle databases that contain wire obstacle data.
Weather
Nearest
TAWS Alert
Services/
Music
Selected
Obstacle
Wire
Obstacle
Detail at
Cursor Point
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 8-26 Wire Obstacles
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Selected Altitude Range Arc
Foreword
NOTE: Requires a Garmin Display Unit (GDU). This feature is available
in software v6.60 and later.
Enabling the Selected ALT Range Arc setting places a cyan arc in front of the
aircraft symbol. This arc represents the location at which the aircraft is expected
to reach the selected altitude.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Selected ALT
Range Arc
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 8-27 Selected ALT Range Arc
Map
Traffic
Restore Defaults
Returns values to the original factory settings.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-21
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
8.1.2.2
Aviation
The Aviation group selection from the Map Setup page menu allows you
to customize the display of Active Flight Plan, Active Flight Plan Waypoints,
Airport size range, SafeTaxi information, Runway Extensions, Intersection/NDB
locations, VOR locations, Airspace Detail, and TFR icons on the Map page. The
feature will be shown at map ranges of the selected value and lower. The options
for each feature are shown in the following table. The default values are shown
in bold type.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Feature
Airport Range
Heliports (Optional)
Wpt Info
SafeTaxi Diagrams
Map
Runway Extensions
Traffic
Intersection Range
Terrain
NDB Range
Weather
VOR Range
Nearest
VRP Range
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
User Wpt Range
Airspace Detail
Airway Range
TFR
Restore Defaults
Selection
Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
75 NM, 100 NM, 150 NM
Off, On
Off, 1000 ft, 1500 ft, 2500 ft, 0.5 NM, 0.75 NM, 1 NM,
1.5 NM
Off, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM
Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM,
7.5 NM, 10 NM
Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM,
7.5 NM, 10 NM
Off, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM, 75 NM,
100 NM
Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM,
7.5 NM, 10 NM
Off, 0.75 NM, 1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM,
7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM,
75 NM, 100 NM
None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most
2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 8-7 Map Setup Aviation Options
Appendix
NOTE: The term “intersection range” means any GPS waypoint included
in the navigation database, and includes waypoints that may not be
intersections of two VOR radials.
Index
8-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Airport Size
Small
Medium
Large
Size Criteria
Longest runway length
is less than 5,000 feet,
unless it has a tower
frequency, in which case
it is a Medium Airport.
Longest runway length
is less than 8,100 feet
but greater than or
equal to 5,000 feet or
less than 8,100 feet and
has a tower frequency.
Longest runway length
is greater than or equal
to 8,100 feet.
Display Criteria
Foreword
Small airports and heliports are displayed
on the map when the Map Range is less
than or equal to 1/4 times the Airport
Range Setting.
Medium airports are displayed on the
map when the Map Range is less than
or equal to 1/2 times the Airport Range
Setting.
Large airports are displayed on the map
when the Map Range is less than or
equal to the Airport Range Setting.
8.1.2.3
Land
The Land Data option selects whether detailed land features, such as Freeways,
National Highways, Local Roads, Cities, States/Provinces, and Rivers/Lakes are
displayed. Topo features, traffic, terrain, and obstacles will still be displayed,
even with Land Data turned off. The options for each feature are shown in the
following table. The default values are shown in bold type.
Selection
None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most
None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most
Off, On
None, Least, Less, Normal, More, Most
Returns values to original factory settings
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Table 8-9 Map Setup Land Options
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
FPL
Map
NOTE: The Airport Range Setting of "Off" means airports are never displayed.
Heliports are displayed on the map page if the Heliport Display Setting is
"On" and the Map Range is less than or equal to 1/4 times the Airport
Range Setting.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Table 8-8 Airport Display Range Setting
Feature
Road Detail
City Detail
State/Province Names
River/Lake Detail
Restore Defaults
Getting
Started
Index
8-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
8.1.2.4
Airspace
The Airspace viewing range options select whether the Airspaces are shown
on the Map and at and below the selected map ranges. Smart Airspace selection
filters the display of airspace appropriate for aircraft altitude. The following
table depicts airspace features and map ranges. Default values are shown in
bold type.
Feature
Selection
Airspace Label Range Off, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50 NM
Smart Airspace
Show Airspaces
Wpt Info
Class B/TMA Range
Map
Class C/TCA Range
Traffic
Class A/D Range
Terrain
Restricted Range
Off, On
All, Below 18000 ft, Below 15000 ft, Below 12000 ft,
Below 9000 ft, Below 6000 ft, Below 3000 ft
Off, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50
NM, 75 NM, 100 NM
Off, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50
NM, 75 NM, 100 NM
Off, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50
NM, 75 NM, 100 NM
Off, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50
NM, 75 NM, 100 NM
Weather
Nearest
MOA (Military) Range
Services/
Music
Other/ADIZ Range
Utilities
Restore Defaults
Off, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50
NM, 75 NM, 100 NM
Off, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM, 15 NM, 25 NM, 40 NM, 50
NM, 75 NM, 100 NM
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 8-10 Map Setup Airspace Options
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Airspace Labels
The Airspace Label feature shows the United States airspace system altitude
limits up to a selected range.
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10 and later when configured
by the installer.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Airspace Labels - On
FPL
Airspace Labels - On
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 8-28 Display of Airspace Labels
Smart Airspaces
Wpt Info
Garmin’s Smart Airspace™ feature aids visual clarity on-screen by deemphasizing airspace that’s well above or below the aircraft’s current altitude.
The vertical separation is 1,000 feet at sea level and the vertical separation will
gradually increase to 2,000 feet until the aircraft reaches 10,000 feet. Anything
above 10,000 feet keeps the 2,000 feet vertical separation.
NOTE: Smart Airspace only changes the depiction of the airspace on the
moving map display. It does not alter the Airspace Alerts that can be set
on the System-Alerts portion of the system.
Smart Airspaces - Off
Smart Airspaces - On
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 8-29 Display of Smart Airspaces (Airspace Borders Grayed)
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-25
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
To control the display of European airway airspaces:
1. While viewing the Map Setup Airspaces option, touch the
Other/ADIZ Range key and select a value.
2. Select Off for the Other/ADIZ Range to turn off the display of
airway airspaces.
Airway Airspaces - On
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Airway Airspaces - Off
Airway Airspaces - On
Figure 8-30 Selecting the Display of European Airway Airspaces
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.1.2.5
Airway Range
The Airways viewing range option selects whether the Airways are shown on
the Map and at and below the selected map ranges for Low and High Airways.
When Off is selected, the information will not be shown.
1. While viewing the Map function, touch the Menu key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Map Setup key and then with the Aviation tab
highlighted drag the list down or use the Down key to show
the Airway Range.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
Airway Range
Map
Figure 8-31 Map Setup For Airway Range
Traffic
3. Touch the Airway Range key and select a range.
Terrain
Weather
Selected Airway
Display Range
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 8-32 Select Airway Display Range
Utilities
4. Touch the Airways key to select the desired Airways (Off, Low,
High, or All).
System
Messages
Low Airway
(Gray)
Symbols
High Airway
(Green)
Appendix
Figure 8-33 Navigation Map Airways
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
8-27
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
8.1.2.6
Traffic (Optional)
The Traffic group selection from the Map Setup Page Menu allows you to
customize the display of traffic on the Map page. The Traffic function requires
the installation of the appropriate traffic device. Only one traffic source can be
configured for the GTN and this traffic source will be overlaid on the main map.
Coverage follows the airplane. In the Navigation Map page setup you can select
the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown. Once outside of the
selected range, traffic will be decluttered. The default values are shown in bold
type.
Direct-To
Traffic Selection
Range
Proc
Traffic
Restore Defaults
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Display Result
1 NM, 1.5 NM, 2.5 NM, 4 NM, 5 NM, 7.5 NM, 10 NM,
15 NM, 25 NM
All Traffic, Alerts & Advisories, Alerts Only
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 8-11 Map Page Traffic Display Options
8.1.2.7
Weather (Optional)
The Weather group selection from the Map Setup page menu allows you to
customize the overlay of the available weather information on the Map page.
Weather is an optional feature that requires an external weather source, which
must be selected to allow the overlay.
Feature
Weather Source
Cell Movement
METAR
Cloud Tops
Echo Tops
Lightning
Restore Defaults
Selection
SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Table 8-12 Map Setup SiriusXM Weather Options
Appendix
NOTE: Map overlay keys may remain available even if the information
necessary for the overlay is not available. For example: the Radar overlay
key is available even if the radar is turned off.
Index
8-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Feature
Weather Source
METAR
IR Satellite
Lightning
Restore Defaults
Connext Settings
Selection
SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B
Off, On
Off, On
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Selectable Connext Settings
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Table 8-13 Map Setup Connext Weather Options
Feature
Weather Source
METAR
Restore Defaults
Direct-To
Selection
SiriusXM, Connext, or FIS-B
Off, On
Returns values to original factory settings
Proc
Wpt Info
Table 8-14 Map Setup FIS-B Weather Options
8.1.3
Map
Change User Fields
The Change User Fields selection allows you to configure the Data, Function,
and Page field type shown in each of the four corners of the Map page. The
information shown in each field may be selected from a list after Change User
Fields is selected.
1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 8-34 Map Menu
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-29
2. From the Map Menu screen, touch the Change User Fields
key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
Data Field
(TRK Currently Shown)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch to Select
Data Field
(DIS Currently Shown)
Touch to
Save any
Changes
FPL
Figure 8-35 Map Data Fields Selection
NOTE: Map Data Field Types that use the term "Destination" refer to the
missed approach point (if an approach is loaded) or the final airport in the
flight plan.
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: In software v5.13 and earlier, ETE to Destination is not available
when a procedure is loaded and there are waypoints in the En Route section
of the flight plan.
Wpt Info
Map
NOTE: Only the bottom right corner data field on the Map page can be
configured for a Page or Function. The other three corner data fields are
for Data items only.
Traffic
Terrain
3. Touch the corner data field key you want to select. Touch the
Data, Function, or Page keys to select the User Field type.
A list of information types will be displayed.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Select
Data, Function,
or Page
Field Type List
Touch To Select Data Field
Slider Indicates More
Selections Available
Press Finger and Slide to
View More Selections
Utilities
System
Figure 8-36 Map Data Field Type Selections
Messages
4. Touch the Up or Down keys or touch the display and drag
your finger to scroll through the list. Touch the desired item
to select it or touch the Back key to cancel selection.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-30
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Map Data Field Type
ACTV WPT - Active Waypoint
B/D APT - BRG/DIS from Dest APT 1
BRG - Bearing to Current Waypoint
DIS - Distance to Current Waypoint
DIS to Dest - Distance to Destination 2
DTK - Desired Track
ESA - Enroute Safe Altitude
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
ETA at Dest - ETA at Destination
ETE - Estimated Time Enroute
ETE to Dest - ETE to Destination
Fuel Flow - Total Fuel Flow
GS - GPS Ground Speed
GSL - GPS Altitude
Generic Timer - Timer Display
Foreword
MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude
NAV/COM - Active NAV/COM FREQ
OAT (static) - Static Air Temperature
OAT (total) - Total Air Temperature
RAD ALT - Radar Altimeter
Time - Current Time
Time to TOD - Time to Top of Descent
TKE - Track Angle Error
TRK - Track
Trip Timer - Timer Display
VOR/LOC - Tuned VOR/LOC Info
VSR - Vertical Speed Required
Wind - Wind Speed and Direction
XTK - Cross Track Error
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Table 8-15 Map Data Field Types of Information
Terrain
Note 1:
B/D APT is the straight line distance.
Note 2:
Dist to DEST is the distance along the flight plan.
Function Field Type
CDI - Course Deviation Indicator
Flap Override - Flap Override 1
GPWS Inhibit - GPWS Inhibit 1
G/S Inhibit - G/S Inhibit 1
HTAWS RP Mode - HTAWS RP Mode 2
OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend Button
On Scene - "On Scene" Mode Toggle
TAWS Inhibit - TAWS Inhibit
Gen Timer - Generic Timer Control
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Table 8-16 Map Function Field Types of Information
Note 1:
With TAWS-A enabled
Note 2:
With HTAWS enabled
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-31
Map Page Field Type
Foreword
Blackout Mode
DFLT NAV - Default Navigation
Flight Plan - Flight Plan Page
Map - Map Page
Nearest - Nearest Page
NEAR APT - Nearest Airport Page
PROC - Procedures Page
Approach - Approach Page
Arrival - Arrival Page
Departure - Departure Page
Backlight - Backlight Page
Services - Services Page
Traffic - Traffic Page
Terrain - Terrain Page
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Table 8-17 Map Page Field Types of Information
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Utilities - Utilities Page
Checklist - Checklist Page
Fuel PLAN - Fuel Planning Page
SCHED MSG - Scheduled Messages
Trip PLAN - Trip Planning Page
VCALC - VCALC Page
User FREQ - User Frequencies
WPT INFO - Waypoint Information
Weather - Weather Page
CNXT WX - Connext WX Page
FIS-B WX - FIS-B Weather Page
Stormscope - Stormscope Page
SiriusXM WX - Sirius XM WX Page
OFF - Do Not Display Page Field
8.1.4
Map Detail
The Map Detail feature allows four levels of decluttering to remove map
information. Level 0 shows the most detail and level 3 shows the least detail.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
0
Messages
1
2
3
Figure 8-37 Map Detail (Declutter) Levels
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-32
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1. While viewing the Map page, touch the Menu key.
2. While viewing the Map Menu, touch the Map Detail scale
and slide your finger to adjust the level. Features marked with
a • are shown at the indicated Map Detail (Declutter) Level.
Feature
0
River/Lake Names
1
2
3
Feature
0
1
2
•
TRSA
•
•
Land/Country Text
•
ADIZ
•
•
Large City
•
Alert Areas
•
•
Medium City
•
Caution Areas
•
•
Small City
•
Danger Areas
•
•
Small Town
•
Warning Areas
•
•
Freeways
•
Large Airports
•
•
•
Highways
•
Medium Airports
•
•
•
Roads
•
Restricted Areas
•
•
•
Railroads
•
Prohibited Areas
•
•
•
Political Boundaries
•
MOAs
•
•
•
User Waypoints
•
•
Runway Labels
•
•
•
VORs
•
•
Lightning Strike Data
•
•
•
3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
NDBs
•
•
NEXRAD Data
•
•
•
Intersections
•
•
Traffic Symbols
•
•
•
Class B Airspace
•
•
Traffic Labels
•
•
•
Class C Airspace
•
•
Water Detail
•
•
•
•
Class D Airspace
•
•
Active FPL Legs
•
•
•
•
Tower
•
•
Airways
•
•
•
•
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Table 8-18 Features Shown at Each Map Detail Level
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-33
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
8.2
Map Panning
In the Map page function, panning allows you to move the map beyond its
current limits without adjusting the map scale. The panning function is selected
by simply touching the Map display. The In and Out keys at the lower right
corner of the page control the map range. Touching the display momentarily
switches the display to Map Pan Mode. While in Map Pan Mode, touch the
display gently and drag your finger to pan around the map.
1. Touch the Map page display.
Pan Mode Annunciation and
Coordinates of Map Center
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Selected
Waypoint or
Item Info
Selected Airspace
or Wpt Highlighted
Aircraft Present
Position
Touch to Display
Next Item
Map
Touch to Edit Flight Plan
Traffic
Figure 8-38 Map Panning With Airspace Highlighted
Terrain
2. If you touch an item on the display (waypoint, airspace,
obstacle) there may be other items very close that are difficult
to see at a given zoom level. Touch the Next key to annunciate
and highlight the next item. Each touch of the Next key steps
to another item near the map pointer.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Next Nearest Item
Utilities
Touch to Display
Next Item
System
Nearest Item
Highlighted
Messages
Figure 8-39 Map Panning With Next Airspace Shown
Symbols
NOTE: It is possible that multiple airspaces can be stacked vertically and be
difficult to visually identify them. Touching the Next key will step through
the airspaces.
Appendix
Index
8-34
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Airspace Info (Item) key for more information
about the selected item. Touch the Back key to return to the
Map Panning display.
4. While pressing your finger gently against the display, drag your
finger across the display to scroll the display in the direction
of your finger movement. The map pointer crosshair location
is based on where your finger touches the display, but after
dragging your finger the map pointer will be centered on the
map when your finger is lifted from the display.
Pan Mode
Annunciation
Coordinates of
Map Pointer
Map Pointer
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 8-40 Map Panning With Map Pointer
Map
NOTE: Pressing the Direct-To key will use the map pointer location as the
destination.
Traffic
Terrain
5. Touch the Back key to return to the normal map display.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-35
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
8.3
Map Controls
While in the Map page function, several controls are available to manage the
view and display of information. The In and Out keys at the lower right corner
of the page control the map range. Touching the display momentarily switches
the display to Map Pan Mode.
While in any of the Map function pages, touching the display starts Pan
Mode. Options are available to create a waypoint at the map pointer position
and to graphically edit the flight plan.
8.3.1
Pan Map Mode
The Pan Map Mode allows you to move the map display to view the
surrounding area.
1. Touch the Map page display.
2. Refer to the description in section 8.2 for details on using
this feature. Touch the Back key to return to the normal Map
display.
Traffic
8.3.2
Terrain
The Create Waypoint function will create a User Waypoint at the map pointer
location when that location is not an already named object, such as an airport
or airspace.
1. In Pan Mode, touch the Create Waypoint key.
Weather
Nearest
Create Waypoint
2. Follow the directions in section 7-8.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 8-41 Create User Waypoint While Map Panning
Appendix
Index
8-36
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.3.3
Graphically Edit Flight Plan Mode
The Edit Flight Plan Mode allows making quick changes to the active flight
plan directly on the display. The process is simply touching the display to start
Map Pan Mode, touching the Graphically Edit FPL key, dragging the desired
leg to a new waypoint or airway, and touching the Done key. When graphically
editing the active flight plan leg, the active leg course and TO Waypoint will be
added to the flight plan as a Direct-To. At any point, a step may be removed by
touching the Undo key or the whole process ended by touching the Cancel key.
The Undo key will remove up to nine steps.
NOTE: It is not possible to graphically add an intermediate waypoint
between the current position and a direct-to waypoint unless that waypoint
is in the flight plan. Garmin recommends deleting any flight plan prior to
graphically editing a Direct-To waypoint.
8.3.3.1
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Adding a Waypoint Within an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
Current Active
Flight Plan
Touch to Return to
Map Display
Figure 8-42 Edit Flight Plan Mode
Foreword
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Map Pointer where
Display was Touched
Weather
Touch to Change
Flight Plan
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-37
2. Touch and hold the desired leg of the flight plan and drag the
flight plan leg to a new waypoint to add a waypoint to the
active flight plan. The leg may also be dragged to an airway.
The leg being edited will turn cyan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Current Active
FPL Waypoints
Intended New
Waypoint
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Touch to Return
to Map Display
Figure 8-43 Drag Selected Leg to New Waypoint
3. Touch the Done key to accept the new flight plan leg or Undo
to maintain the existing flight plan.
Proc
Wpt Info
New Active FPL Waypoint
Map
New FPL
Waypoint
Traffic
Active Flight Plan
Leg
Terrain
Touch to Accept
Changes to FPL
Touch to Undo Last Step
Figure 8-44 Completed Flight Plan with New Waypoint
Weather
Nearest
4. The aircraft will now navigate according to the new flight plan.
Services/
Music
Utilities
New Active
FPL Waypoint
System
Messages
Aircraft Position
Active Flight Plan Leg
Figure 8-45 Aircraft Navigates on Edited Flight Plan to New Waypoint
Symbols
NOTE: In software v6.21 and earlier, graphically editing a flight plan
cancels the parallel track function.
Appendix
Index
8-38
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.3.3.2
8.3.3.3
Adding a Waypoint to the End of an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
2. Touch a waypoint that you want to add to the end of the flight
plan.
3. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the
Map page.
Removing a Waypoint from an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
2. Touch waypoint, or airway, on the flight plan that you want
to remove.
3. Drag the flight plan line away from the waypoint, or airway,
and release the line. The waypoint will be removed from the
flight plan.
4. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the
Map page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-39
Foreword
8.3.3.4
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Creating a Flight Plan Without an Existing Flight Plan
1. Touch the Map page display. The Map Mode selection keys
will appear. Touch the Graphically Edit FPL key.
2. Touch a waypoint on the map to set the first waypoint in the
flight plan. If there are several nearby waypoints, touch the
desired waypoint to select it.
Com/Nav
Touch Desired
Waypoint
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 8-46 Select the Desired Waypoint From Multiple Waypoints
3. Touch a waypoint, or airway, on the map for the next waypoint,
or airway, in the flight plan. Continue adding waypoints, or
airways, as needed.
Wpt Info
Map
4. Touch the Done key to accept the changes and return to the
Map page.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-40
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.4
CDI (GTN 650 only)
Foreword
The GTN 650's CDI key is used to select data that is sent from the GPS or
VLOC receiver to the external CDI (or HSI). CDI selection is available on the
Default Navigation page. When the external CDI (or HSI) is connected to the
GPS receiver, “GPS” is shown on the annunciation bar. When the external CDI
(or HSI) is being driven by the VLOC receiver, “VLOC” appears instead.
NOTE: The VLOC receiver must be selected for display on the external
CDI/HSI for approaches which are not approved for GPS. Refer to the ILS
example "ILS Approaches (GTN 650 Only)" for more information.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: GPS phase of flight annunciations (LPV, ENR, etc.) are not applicable
to the external CDI (or HSI) when VLOC is active.
NOTE: The internal on-screen CDI information is based on GPS data and
cannot be used for primary navigation.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
NOTE: If the unit is not configured for a CDI key, then the “activate GPS missed
approach” will only resume automatic waypoint sequencing. The user must
switch to GPS navigation, if desired, by using their external source selection
method (this is typical an EFIS system).
1. The navigation source is shown in the center of the annunciation
bar at the lower part of the display.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
CDI Display
Services/
Music
Touch to Edit
FPL
Touch to Access
Map Page
Touch CDI
Key to Toggle
Navigation
Source
GPS Level
of Service
Navigation Source
Annunciation
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch OBS Key to
Toggle OBS Mode
Symbols
Figure 8-47 Navigation Source Selection
2. Touch the CDI key to toggle between sources.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-41
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
8.5
OBS
The OBS key is used to select manual or automatic sequencing of waypoints.
OBS selection is available on the Default Navigation page. Touching this key
selects OBS mode, which retains the current “active to” waypoint as your
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint (i.e., prevents sequencing
to the next waypoint). Touching the OBS key again returns to normal operation,
with automatic sequencing of waypoints. Whenever OBS mode is selected, you
may set the desired course To/From a waypoint using the pop-up window on the
GTN 6XX or with the external OBS selector on your HSI or CDI.
For leg types that do not support OBS, this key will be shown as a SUSP key.
This key will then also function as an Unsuspend key for legs that auto-suspend,
such as holds, missed approaches, etc.
NOTE: In dual GTN installations with crossfill on, the OBS course will only
be updated real time on the GTN that is receiving the new OBS course. The
course will be transferred to the other GTN when OBS is exited.
Wpt Info
Map
1. Touch the OBS key to enable the OBS function.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
OBS Heading
Nearest
Touch the OBS
Key to Enable
OBS Function
GPS Level
Of Service
Services/
Music
Active FPL Leg
OBS Function
Annunciation
Figure 8-48 OBS Course Selection
Utilities
2. Enter the desired OBS heading using the keypad and touch
Enter.
System
Messages
3. The OBS heading will be shown in the flight plan annunciation
above the CDI in the lower portion of the display. The OBS
function annunciation will show.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-42
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.6
Map Symbols
Various symbols are used to distinguish between waypoint types. The identifiers
for any on-screen waypoints can also be displayed. Special-use and controlled
airspace boundaries appear on the map, showing the individual sectors in the case
of Class B, Class C, or Class D airspace. The following symbols are used to depict
the various airports and NAVAIDs on the Map page.
Symbol
Description
Airport with hard surface
runway(s); Non-Serviced,
Primary runway shown
Airport with soft surface
runway(s) only, Non-Serviced
Restricted (Private) Airfield
Symbol
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Description
Airport with hard surface
runway(s); Serviced, Primary
runway shown
Airport with soft surface
runway(s) only, Serviced
Unknown Airport
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Heliport
NDB
Intersection
Locator Outer Marker
VOR
VOR/DME
VORTAC
DME
TACAN
TOD/BOD
User Waypoint
User Airport
Nearest
ATK
VRP
Services/
Music
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Table 8-19 Map Symbols
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-43
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
8.7
SafeTaxi®
SafeTaxi® is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when zooming
in on airports. The airport display on the map reveals runways with numbers,
taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent
features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges (zooming in). When the
aircraft location is within the screen boundary, including within SafeTaxi ranges,
an airplane symbol is shown on any of the navigation map views for enhanced
position awareness.
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting
taxiways and runways, and/or complex ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are
outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are
defined with a magenta circle or outline around the region of possible confusion.
Taxiway Identification
Map
Taxiway Detail
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Aircraft Position
Figure 8-49 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
8.7.1
Using SafeTaxi®
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi®
airport layout within the maximum configured range.
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to
taxiways, runways, and airport features. The nose of the ownship symbol, not
the center, depicts the current location of the aircraft.
NOTE: Do not use SafeTaxi functions as the basis for ground maneuvering.
SafeTaxi adoes not comply with the requirements of AC 120-76C and is not
qualified to be used as an airport moving map display (AMMD). SafeTaxi
is to be used by the flight crew to orient themselves on the airport surface
to improve pilot situational awareness during ground operations.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-44
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
8.7.2
Hot Spot Information
Foreword
Hot Spots can contain more information about the area that can be displayed
when shown. To view more information touch the Hot Spot on the moving map.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to View
Hot Spot Info
Hot Spot
Location
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 8-50 SafeTaxi Hot Spot Detail and Outline
8.7.3
Direct-To
SafeTaxi® Cycle Number and Revision
The SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available
for use after the expiration date. When turning on the GTN 6XX, the Power-up
page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
The Power-up page shows the SafeTaxi database is current when the “SafeTaxi
Expires” date is shown in white. When the SafeTaxi cycle has expired, the
“SafeTaxi Expires” date appears in yellow. The message “unknown” appears in
white if no SafeTaxi data is available on the database card.
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the
database cycle can also be found on the System - System Status page. SafeTaxi
information appears in white and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in
white when data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the
effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in white when data is current and in
yellow when expired. SafeTaxi REGION NOT AVAILABLE appears in white if
SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-45
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
8.8
Flight Plan Depiction
When a flight plan is present, it will be depicted on the GTN maps.
Flight plan leg colors are used to indicate past, active, or future flight plan
segments. A thin light gray line indicates a previous flight plan segment. A bold
magenta line indicates an active flight plan segment for which the navigator is
providing guidance. A bold white line indicates future flight plan segments.
Missed approach procedures are depicted with a thin white line to indicate that
they are an upcoming segment of the flight plan, but will not become navigable
without the pilot specifically activating the missed approach procedure.
Flight plan labels are white boxes with black borders and black text to
indicate they are fixes in the flight plan. If the waypoint is the ative waypoint in
the flight plan, the border and text are magenta.
All holding patterns and procedure turns are depicted with the same
coloration as all other flight plan segments. Entries are depicted with segmented
arrows to indicate which direction in which the course guidance will be given.
This is used for both hold entry and procedure turn course reversals. Once a
hold becomes active the entry guidance is removed from the map and only the
active hold is depicted.
Headings to fly are depicted as directional arrows with spaces between
them and the label "Vectors" or "MANSEQ" to indicate what the pilot might
expect while flying the heading depicted. "MANSEQ" is "Manual Sequencing"
abbreviated and denotes that the procedure is complete upon reaching that
heading and that no other guidance will be given from the navigator without
pilot interaction.
The following illustrates the flight plan segments as presented on the GTN
maps.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-46
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN provides guidance in the hold at WIGAN intersection.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 8-51 Active Hold
In this case the teardrop entry for the hold at WIGAN is being depicted.
Upon reaching the holding fix inbound, the entry arrows will be removed from
the map and the dotted holding pattern will become active with magenta arrows.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 8-52 Holding Pattern Entry
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-47
Foreword
The active flight plan leg is WARIC to WHATE as indicated by the magenta
line to the magenta labeled waypoint.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 8-53 Active and Future Flight Plan Segments
The active leg is the course to OCITY intersection. After OCITY the flight
plan depicts a turn to 100° for vectors.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 8-54 Active Leg to Vectors
Appendix
Index
8-48
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Previous legs are light gray, active leg is magenta.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 8-55 Exiting the Hold
The leg outbound from LOS is active and indicates a procedure turn. When
inbound from the procedure turn the inbound segment will become active and
LSO will still be the active waypoint.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 8-56 Active Procedure Turn
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-49
Foreword
A flight plan along T295 with previous, the active leg, and the future legs
depicted.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 8-57 Past, Active, and Future Flight Plan Segments
Active Heading Leg
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 8-58 Active Heading Leg (Vectors)
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-50
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Active Flight Plan Leg
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 8-59 Active Flight Plan Leg
Map
The active flight plan leg inbound to a holding pattern at WIGAN intersection.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 8-60 Active Flight Plan Leg Prior to Holding Pattern
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
8-51
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
8-52
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9
TRAFFIC
Foreword
The Traffic function displays available traffic information depending on
your installed equipment to assist in situational awareness. The features and
operation depend on the capabilities and options of each type of traffic system.
NOTE: The reference point for the ownship is the nose of the ownship
aircraft symbol (either miniature aircraft or triangle). The reference point
for all traffic icons is the center of the depicted traffic.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
1. From the Home page, touch the Traffic key.
Direct-To
2. Use the active areas on the display and the Menu options to
set up the Traffic display.
9.1
Wpt Info
Traffic Pop-Up
When the GTN 6XX is displaying any page (other than the Traffic page) and
a traffic alert becomes active, the Traffic Warning pop-up will be displayed.
NOTE: The traffic pop-up will not appear when your aircraft is on the
ground.
1. The traffic pop-up will appear on pages other than the Traffic
page when a traffic alert occurs.
Touch to Go
to Traffic Page
Traffic Location
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Services/
Music
Touch to Close
Pop-Up
Traffic Alert
Annunciation
Map
Nearest
Traffic Alert
Annunciation
Ownship Position
Proc
Figure 9-1 Traffic Pop-Up On the Map Page
Utilities
System
Messages
2. Touch the Go to Traffic key to view the Traffic page.
Symbols
OR
3. Touch the Close key to close the pop-up. The pop-up will
return if the traffic alert persists.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
9.2
Traffic Test
The Traffic Test function is only available on some traffic systems. The aircraft
must be on the ground and Traffic Status must be in Standby.
1. Touch the Test key to activate the test function in the Traffic
equipment.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch for Traffic
Test While in
Standby Traffic
Status
Test Traffic Status
Figure 9-2 Traffic Test Mode
Wpt Info
2. The unit will return to normal operation mode after the test
process is successfully completed.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.3
TIS (Optional)
Foreword
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory
use only. TIS is intended to help the pilot locate traffic visually. It is the
responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of
a TIS-capable terminal radar site. Aircraft without an operating transponder
are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS. Aircraft without
altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data
or climb descent indication.
NOTE: TIS and Traffic Advisory System (TAS) may not both be configured
at the same time.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
NOTE: GDL 88 equipped aircraft only: When the radio tower symbol is
crossed out, the aircraft is not a participant in the TIS-B system – i. e. not
visible to other TIS-B clients. The GDL 88 will, however, continue to receive
available TIS-B and FIS-B ground station up-links and continue to display
TIS-B and FIS-B data along with available ADS-B and ADS-R data.
Wpt Info
NOTE: Except for GDL 88 or GTX 345 equipped aircraft, TIS, and Traffic
Advisory System (TAS) may not both be displayed at the same time.
Terrain
NOTE: For more information about the GDL 88, refer to the
"GDL 88 ADS-B Transceiver Pilot’s Guide." For information about the
GTX 345, refer to the "GTX 335/345 Pilot's Guide."
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and
avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the Mode S transponder for the traffic data
link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated every
five seconds. The GTN 6XX displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5 NM
radius, from 3,000 feet below to 3,500 feet above the requesting aircraft.
7.0 NM
Map
Traffic
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
3,500 ft
Symbols
Appendix
3,000 ft
Index
Figure 9-3 TIS Coverage Volume (not to scale)
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
9.3.1
TIS Symbology
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using three different
symbols.
TIS Symbol
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Com/Nav
FPL
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Direct-To
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Proc
Table 9-1 TIS Traffic Symbols
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets
the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A
Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an
intruding aircraft is at greater than ±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is
beyond five NM. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is
indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of
the intruder.
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic
is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic information for which TIS is unable to
determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic page or in a banner on maps other than the Traffic Map page on which
traffic can be displayed.
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder
aircraft is displayed above/below the traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the
other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation appears
above the traffic symbol with a "+" sign; if below, the altitude separation appears
below. Altitude trend is displayed as an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than
500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic symbols for
aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation
or climb/descent information.
Always remember that TIS cannot alert you to the presence of aircraft that
are not equipped with transponders, nor can it alert you to aircraft that may be
nearby, but obscured from the ground surveillance radar by interfering terrain.
9-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.3.2
Traffic Page
Foreword
The Traffic Map Page is configured to show surrounding TIS traffic data in
relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude, without clutter from the
basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is
no valid heading.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
page. When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby
Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to Operating
Mode and the GTN 6XX begins to display traffic information.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Altitude Filter
Normal
Above
Below
Unrestricted
TRF Status
Map
Operate
Standby
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 9-4 Traffic Page Functional Diagram
Weather
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic Proximity
Advisory
Nearest
Heading
Annunciation
Range Rings
Ownship
Position
Traffic Mode Key
(Operate/Standby)
Altitude Filter
Traffic Direction
Proximity Advisory,
of Travel
1,200 ft Above and Climbing
Figure 9-5 Traffic Page
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-5
Foreword
9.3.3
Displaying Traffic on the Traffic Page
1. From the Home page, touch the Traffic key.
Getting
Started
2. Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
3. Touch the Traffic Status key to toggle between Operate and
Standby mode.
Com/Nav
FPL
9.3.4
Altitude Display
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Operate key to begin
displaying traffic. “Operate” is displayed in the Traffic Status
field.
Direct-To
Proc
2. The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change
the altitude filter value. Select the desired altitude filter by
touching the BELOW, NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED
keys. The selection is displayed in the Altitude mode field.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Selected
Altitude Filter
Slider Indicates
More Selections
are Available
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 9-6 Traffic Altitude Filter Page
System
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
Table 9-2 Displayed Traffic Range
9-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.3.5
TIS Limitations
Foreword
NOTE: This section on TIS Limitations is not comprehensive. Garmin
recommends the user review the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical
Information Manual, Section 1-3-5.
TIS is NOT intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not
relieve the pilot of responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not
be used for avoidance maneuvers during IMC or other times when there is no
visual contact with the intruder aircraft. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in VMC. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are provided for, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or
TIS advisory.
While TIS is a useful aid to visual traffic avoidance, it has some system
limitations that must be fully understood to ensure proper use. Many of these
limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. In other words, the
information provided by TIS will be no better than that provided to ATC. TIS
will only display aircraft with operating transponders installed.
TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode S radar, which is a “secondary
surveillance” radar similar to the Air Traffic Control Radar Beacon System
(ATCRBS). TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.
TIS is dependent on two-way, “line-of-sight” communication between the
aircraft and the Mode S radar. Whenever the structure of the client aircraft
comes between the transponder antenna (usually located on the underside of
the aircraft) and the ground-based radar antenna, the signal may be temporarily
interrupted. Other limitations and anomalies associated with TIS are described
in the AIM, Section 4-5-6.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Garmin is not responsible for Mode S
geographical coverage. Operation of the
ground stations is the responsibility of the
FAA. Refer to the Aeronautical Information
Manual for a Terminal Mode S Radar Site Map
covering the U.S.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-7
NOTE: TIS will be unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the U.S.,
particularly in mountainous regions. Also, when flying near the “floor” of
radar coverage in a particular area, intruders below the client aircraft may
not be detected by TIS.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
TIS information is collected one radar scan prior to the scan during which
the uplink occurs. Therefore, the surveillance information is approximately
five seconds old. In order to present the intruders in a “real time” position,
the TIS ground station uses a “predictive algorithm” in its tracking software.
This algorithm uses track history data to extrapolate intruders to their expected
positions consistent with the time of display in the cockpit. Occasionally, aircraft
maneuvering will cause this algorithm to induce errors in the display. These
errors primarily affect relative bearing information and traffic target track vector
(it will lag); intruder distance and altitude will remain relatively accurate and
may be used to assist in “see and avoid.” Some of the more common examples
of these errors follow:
• When client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the
tracking algorithm may report incorrect horizontal position until the
maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that crosses the client aircraft
course at a shallow angle (either overtaking or head on) and either aircraft
abruptly changes course within 0.25 NM, TIS may display the intruder on
the opposite side of the client than it actually is.
These are relatively rare occurrences and will be corrected in a few
radar scans once the course has stabilized.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.3.6
TIS Alerts
Foreword
When the number of Traffic Advisories (TAs) on the Traffic Map page increases
from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the bottom of the display, flashing for
5 seconds and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the
“Traffic” voice alert is generated only when the number of TAs increases. For
example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation are
generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice
alerts are generated. If a second TA appears on the display or if the number of
TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another voice alert is
generated.
A “Traffic Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service
becomes unavailable or is out of range.
Traffic may not be displayed in the radar coverage area due to the following:
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service.
Terrain
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the
TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
Weather
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and
out of range of an adjacent site.
Nearest
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the
coverage extends from about 3,000 feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and
obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
9.3.7
TIS System Status
The GTN 6XX performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If
TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby Mode on the ground or Operating
Mode in the air. If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map page. Contact a service center or Garmin
dealer for corrective action for a failure message.
Traffic Page
Annunciation
No Data
FPL
Direct-To
Failed
Proc
Unavailable
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Description
Data is not being received from the transponder
The transponder has failed
TIS is unavailable or out of range
Table 9-3 TIS Failure Annunciations
The Traffic mode is annunciated in the bottom left corner of the Traffic page.
When the aircraft is on the ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information
is displayed. The mode can be changed manually using the Traffic Status key.
Weather
Traffic
Status
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic On Map Page)
Services/
Music
TIS Operating
Operate
Utilities
TIS Standby
Standby
TIS Failed*
TIS Fail
Nearest
System
Traffic Display
Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
Messages
Symbols
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
Table 9-4 TIS Modes Shown on the Map Page
Appendix
Index
9-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
The annunciations that indicate the status of traffic information appear in a
banner at the bottom center of maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status
Banner
Annunciation
Foreword
Getting
Started
Description
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last
message).
Traffic Coast 9 SEC
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when
this message is displayed.
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60
seconds since last message).
Traffic Removed
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is
not displayed.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Table 9-5 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-11
Foreword
9.4
NOTE: TIS and Traffic Advisory System (TAS) may not both be configured
at the same time.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
TAS data comes from a TAS unit such as a Garmin GTS 800 or 820, Skywatch
497, KTA 810, or other unit.
Refer to the appropriate Traffic Advisory System’s Pilot’s Guides for a detailed
discussion of the respective traffic advisory system.
The type of traffic systems that is installed is described by the Traffic page
keys. If a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is configured, a TRF Status and ALT
Filter key will be displayed.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems
require transponders of other aircraft to respond to system interrogations.
If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may
be displayed intermittently, or not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
WARNING: The Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is intended for advisory use
only to aid the pilot in visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers
should be based solely upon TAS traffic information. It is the responsibility
of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
TAS (Optional)
A Traffic Advisory System (TAS) enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The TAS
also provides visual and aural traffic alerts including voice announcements to
assist in visually acquiring traffic.
When the TAS is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders
of intruding aircraft while monitoring transponder replies. The TAS uses this
information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and if reported, the altitude
and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The TAS then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of
Approach (CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory
(TA), visual and aural alerting is provided.
Index
9-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.4.1
TAS Symbology
Foreword
Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance
of other aircraft. TAS uses an on-board interrogator-processor to detect traffic.
Only aircraft with operating transponders will be detected. Traffic is displayed
according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol
Description
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Non-Threat Traffic
(intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1,200 ft vertical
separation)
Proximity Advisory (PA)
(intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1,200 ft vertical separation)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
(closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria)
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Traffic
Table 9-6 TAS Intruder Symbol Description
Terrain
Relative Altitude (1,200 ft Above)
Non-Threat Traffic
Weather
Vertical Trend Arrow (Climbing)
Figure 9-7 Intruder Type, Altitude, and Vertical Trend
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
9.4.2
Displaying and Operating Traffic
(TAS Systems)
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability
to switch from standby to operating mode on the ground is especially useful for
scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
Non-Threat
Traffic
Com/Nav
Traffic Proximity
Advisory
FPL
Range Rings
Direct-To
Proc
Traffic Status Key
(Operate/Standby)
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Altitude Filter
Ownship Position
Figure 9-8 Traffic Page
Wpt Info
Map
Heading
Annunciation
9.4.2.1
Switching from Standby Mode to Operating Mode
The Traffic page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s
current position and altitude without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is
always heading up unless no valid heading is received. The Traffic Status is
shown in the lower left corner and the Altitude Filter is shown in the lower right
corner.
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Traffic Status key
to select Operate.
2. To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic page, touch the
Traffic Status key to select Standby.
3. The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change
the altitude filter value.
4. Touch the Traffic Status key to place the system in the Standby
mode. Standby is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
Appendix
NOTE: Not all TAS systems can be set to “Standby” mode while in the air.
Index
9-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.4.2.2
Range Ring
Touching the In and Out keys will zoom in and out in preset steps depending
on the installed equipment as shown in the following table.
Traffic Device
Garmin GTS 800, Skywatch (SKY497
/SKY889)
Garmin GTS 820 and 850, Honeywell
KTA 810 TAS, KTA 910 TAS, KMH 820
IHAS, KMH 920 IHAS, and Avidyne TAS
620 (Ryan 9900BX)
Map Ranges
2 NM, 6 NM, 12 NM
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2 NM, 6 NM, 12 NM, 24 NM, 40 NM
FPL
Direct-To
Table 9-7 Available Traffic Range Ring Steps
9.4.3
Foreword
Proc
Altitude Display
Wpt Info
Changing the altitude display mode:
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Traffic Status key
to begin displaying traffic. “TAS OPERATING” is displayed in
the Traffic Status field.
2. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change the altitude filter
value. The filter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude. Select
the desired altitude filter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, or UNREST (unrestricted) keys. The selection is
displayed in the Altitude mode field.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Selected
Altitude Filter
Slider Indicates
More Selections
are Available
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 9-9 Traffic Altitude Filter Page
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-15
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Table 9-8 Displayed Traffic Range
Com/Nav
FPL
9.4.4
Traffic System Status
NOTE: Refer to the equipment documentation for information on the
self-test and operating modes.
Direct-To
Proc
The Traffic Status is indicated in the upper right corner of the Traffic page.
Wpt Info
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Page)
TAS Self-test Initiated
Test
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
TAS Operating
Operate
TAS Standby
Standby
TAS Failed
TAS Fail
Traffic Display
Enabled Icon
(Other Maps)
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Table 9-9 TAS Modes
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the
center of the Traffic page.
Traffic Page
Annunciation
No Data
Messages
Symbols
Data Failed
Appendix
Failed
Index
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the unit is
self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 9-10 TAS Failure Annunciations
9-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.5
ADS-B Traffic
Foreword
ADS-B technology is an important part of the FAA’s Next Generation Air
Transportation System (NextGen), allowing for enhanced safety, efficiency, and
the ability of the system to handle greater numbers of aircraft. ADS-B In allows
a properly-equipped aircraft to access FAA broadcast services such as TIS-B and
FIS-B. With ADS-B Out, the avionics transmit an aircraft’s precise location, as
well as specific information about that aircraft, to ground stations and other
aircraft.
If more than one target is occupying the same area of the screen, the GTN
will combine the two traffic targets into one traffic group. The group symbol
maintains the iconology of the highest priority traffic target in the group and
indicates a grouped symbol by the presence of an asterisk to the left of the
grouped traffic target.
Traffic targets displayed on the dedicated traffic page may be selected in
order to obtain additional information about a traffic target or to view all targets
in a grouped target. When a grouped target is selected, the Next key on the
dedicated traffic page will cycle through all targets located in close proximity to
where the screen has been touched.
ADS-B and TCAS
Status and Altitude
Filter
Proximity Advisory,
1,200 ft Above
and Climbing
Touch to View
Traffic Menu
Ownship
Icon
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Weather
Map
Orientation
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch for
Next Target
Selected Vector
Motion and Duration
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain
Selected
Traffic Info
Range Rings
Range Ring
Radius
Getting
Started
Utilities
Traffic Direction
of Travel
System
Figure 9-10 ADS-B Traffic Page
NOTE: The “Next” key on the dedicated traffic page will cycle through
all targets located in close proximity to where the pilot has touched the
screen.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-17
Symbol
Foreword
Getting
Started
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Com/Nav
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
FPL
Proximate Directional Traffic
Direct-To
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Proc
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Wpt Info
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Map
Directional Alerted Traffic
Traffic
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Terrain
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Weather
Directional Surface Vehicle
Nearest
Table 9-11 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Services/
Music
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on configuration
(cyan or white) and airborne/on-ground status of target (target is brown
when on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.5.1
Traffic Applications - SURF, AIRB, etc.
Foreword
The GTN ADS-B traffic display is capable of running in two “modes:” Airborne
Situational Awareness (AIRB) and Surface Situation Awareness (SURF).
AIRB is in operation in the en route environment, outside of five NM from and
1,500 feet above the nearest airport.
SURF is in operation within the terminal environment (within five NM and
less than 1,500 feet above field elevation). When SURF is running, and the
zoom scale on the traffic display is less than two NM, the airport environment
(including taxiways and runways) is displayed in addition to traffic. This is to
aid in situational awareness of runway occupancy/availability, etc.
Due to the varying precision of the data received via ADS-B, ADS-R, and
TIS-B, all traffic targets may not be depicted on the traffic display. Because higher
data precision is required for display in the SURF environment, some targets
eligible for AIRB will not be displayed while SURF is active. Individual eligibility
for AIRB and SURF is depicted in the selected traffic data on the Traffic page.
9.5.2
ADS-B Traffic Menu
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
The Traffic Menu allows control of the traffic information display.
Terrain
Select TCAS Status:
Operate and Standby
Weather
Touch to Perform
Traffic Test
Toggle ADS-B
Traffic Display
Select Altitude Filter
Normal, Above,
Below, Unrestricted
Select Motion Vector
Absolute, Relative, Off
Services/
Music
Utilities
Select Vector Duration: 30 sec,
1 min, 2 min, 5 min
System
Figure 9-11 ADS-B Traffic Menu
9.5.2.1
Nearest
ADS-B Display
Touching ADS-B Display toggles the display of ADS-B traffic and
ADS-B traffic alerting.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-19
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
9.5.2.2
TCAS Status
This shows the current status of the TCAS system. The modes reported by
the traffic device are “Operate” while in the air and “Standby” while on the
ground. This control allows the pilot to manually select the TCAS Status.
Touch the TCAS Status key to toggle the TCAS Status.
9.5.2.3
Test
The Traffic Test function is only available on some TAS traffic systems. The
aircraft must be on the ground and traffic system must be in Standby.
1. Touch the Test key to activate the test function in the Traffic
equipment.
2. The unit will return to normal operation mode after the test
process is successfully completed.
9.5.2.4
Motion Vector
When Absolute Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the
traffic targets depict the target reported track and speed over the ground. When
Relative Motion Vectors are selected, the vectors extending from the traffic targets
display how the traffic target is moving relative to your aircraft. These vectors are
calculated using the traffic targets track and ground speed and your aircraft’s track
and ground speed. These two values are combined to depict where the traffic target
is moving purely with respect to your aircraft and give a forecast of where the traffic
target will be, relative to your aircraft, in the near future.
Services/
Music
Selected Vector Type
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 9-12 Traffic Motion Vector Type Selection
Symbols
NOTE: Absolute motion vectors are colored either white or cyan. Relative
motion vectors are always green. The annunciation on the bottom of the
dedicated traffic page indicates which vector type is selected and their
length.
Appendix
Index
9-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
ADS-B and TCAS Status and Altitude Filter
Touch to View
Traffic Menu
Traffic Motion
Vector (White)
Selected
Vector Motion
and Duration
Map
Orientation
Selected
Traffic Info
Touch for
Next Target
Figure 9-13 Absolute Motion (White Vectors)
ADS-B and TCAS Status
and Altitude Filter
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Traffic Motion
Vector (Green)
Map
Orientation
Direct-To
Touch to View
Traffic Menu
Selected
Traffic Info
Proc
Selected
Vector Motion
and Duration
Touch for
Next Target
Map
Figure 9-14 Relative Motion (Green Vectors)
Motion Vector
Target
Wpt Info
Traffic
Target
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Ownship Icon
Ownship Icon
Motion Vector
Figure 9-15 Comparison of Absolute and Relative Motion Vectors With a Single Target
Motion Vector
Target
Target
Motion Vector
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Target
Motion
Vector
Ownship
Icon
Target
Motion
Vector
Ownship
Icon
Figure 9-16 Comparison of Absolute and Relative Motion Vectors With a Two Targets
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-21
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
9.5.2.5
Vector Duration
The Vector Duration selection sets the time that the vector will show the
calculated distance and direction of the traffic target. A longer duration will
result in a longer vector.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Selected Vector
Duration
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 9-17 Traffic Motion Vector Duration Selection
9.5.2.6
Map
Traffic
Terrain
2. Select the desired altitude filter by touching the BELOW,
NORMAL, ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection
is displayed in the Altitude mode field.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Altitude Filter
1. The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. Touch the Altitude Filter key to change
the altitude filter value.
Selected Altitude
Filter
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 9-18 Traffic Altitude Filter Page
Appendix
Index
9-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Table 9-12 Displayed Traffic Range
9.5.2.7
Com/Nav
On Scene Mode
FPL
When a GDL 88 (with software v3.00, or later) or GTX 345 is installed with
a GTN in a helicopter, the GTN provides controls for enabling/disabling “On
Scene” mode. “On Scene” mode decreases traffic alerts when operating near
other helicopters (e.g., news reporting).
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Menu key.
9.5.3
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
2. Touch the On Scene key to enable/disable On Scene mode.
Map
Rotorcraft Traffic Page Orientation
Traffic
NOTE: Rotorcraft Traffic Page Orientation functionality is available in
software v5.12 or later.
When flying at low speeds in a helicopter, heading may not always be closely
aligned with track (it could easily be up to 180 degrees different). If the GTN is
interfaced with a heading source, the ADS-B traffic page will remain fixed with
the ownship heading pointed up. However, if heading is not being received by
the GTN, the display of ADS-B traffic will be unavailable.
When one of the following conditions is true, the ADS-B traffic page will be
unavailable and a "Display Unavailable" banner will be displayed.
• Ownship directionality is invalid (no valid heading or track)
• GPS ground speed is less than 15 knots and ownship heading is not
available
While the traffic display is unavailable due to these conditions, traffic alerts
will be provided in a non-bearing textual form at the top of the traffic page.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-23
Foreword
9.6
RYAN TCAD 9900BX with the GDL 88
NOTE: When a TCAD is connected to a GTX 345, the available controls
will appear as described for TCAS in "ADS-B Traffic Menu"
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Ryan TCAD is a system that provides audio and visual alerts for traffic near
your aircraft. The information from this system can be interfaced through the
GTN series. Operating instructions and details on the modes of operation are
described in the Ryan TCAD operator’s handbooks.
FPL
• TCAS-like symbols are used in the 9900BX.
• Altitude modes are available (normal, look up, look down, unrestricted).
Direct-To
• Ranges are manually controlled for the current shield.
Proc
• Traffic display range selections:
-
Wpt Info
Map
9.6.1
Traffic
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Ryan TCAD Description
NOTE: Refer to the Ryan TCAD Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of
the Ryan TCAD System.
Terrain
Weather
Ryan 9900BX — 1 NM, 2 NM, 2 and 6 NM, 6 and
12 NM, and 12 and 24 NM.
The Ryan TCAD (Traffic and Collision Alert Device) is an on-board air traffic
display used to identify potential collision threats. TCAD computes relative altitude
and range of threats from nearby Mode C and Mode S-equipped aircraft. TCAD
will not detect aircraft without operating transponders or those that are beyond
radar coverage. TCAD, within defined limits, creates a “shield” of airspace around
the aircraft that detected traffic cannot penetrate without triggering an alert.
TA: Traffic Advisory. This is traffic with 500 feet, or less, of altitude separation
that is converging or maintaining altitude separation.
PA: Proximity Advisory. This is traffic with 500 feet of altitude separation that
is not a TA.
TRFC: Other traffic.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
ADS-B and
TCAD Status and
Altitude Filter
Touch to View
Traffic Menu
Touch Icon for Info
Map
Orientation
Selected
Traffic Info
Alerted Target,
1,200 ft Above
and Climbing
Range Ring
Radius
Touch for
Next Target
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Traffic Traffic Motion
Selected Vector
Annunciation
Motion and Duration
Vector
Figure 9-19 Traffic Page for Ryan TCAD with GDL 88
9.6.2
Foreword
Direct-To
Altitude Mode
The GDL 88 has four altitude display modes: Normal (±2,700 feet, Above
(-2,700 feet to +9,900 feet), Below (-9,900 feet to +2,700 feet), and Unrestricted
(±9,900 feet). The GDL 88 continues to track up to 30 intruder aircraft within its
maximum surveillance range, regardless of the altitude display mode selected.
The selected altitude display mode is displayed in the upper left-hand corner
of the Traffic page.
The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below,
Normal, Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the
“Displayed Traffic Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative
to ownship altitude. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the
Altitude Filter key to change the altitude filter value. Select
the desired altitude filter by touching the BELOW, NORMAL,
ABOVE, or UNRESTRICTED keys. The selection is displayed
in the Altitude mode field.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Selected Altitude
Filter
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 9-20 Traffic Altitude Filter Selection
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
9-25
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
Above
Unrestricted
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
Table 9-13 Displayed Traffic Range
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
9.6.3
TCAD Control Menu
The TCAD Control Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD Traffic
display.
Proc
Select TCAD
Control Menu
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 9-21 TCAD Traffic Menu
Traffic
1. While viewing the Traffic menu, touch the TCAD Control key.
Terrain
Select Field Elevation
Weather
Nearest
Set Traffic
Audio Volume
Services/
Music
Activate
Operation
Select Local Baro
Select Approach
Mode: Set,
Armed, or Active
Utilities
Select Ground Mode
Figure 9-22 TCAD Control Menu
System
2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.6.3.1
Traffic Audio
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Traffic Audio key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Lower
the Volume
Touch to Raise
the Volume
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
Figure 9-23 TCAD Traffic
2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Traffic Audio
level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value
and graphically with a bar graph.
3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu.
9.6.3.2
Field Elevation
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Field
Elevation key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Automatically
Select the Destination
Airport Field Elevation
Touch to Manually
Set Field Elevation
Figure 9-24 TCAD Traffic Field Elevation Selection
2. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch
the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation
for traffic reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation
value.
3. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the Field Elevation key.
4. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the field
elevation of the destination airport of the active flight plan for
traffic reporting.
NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the
elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination
airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a field
elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-27
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
9.6.3.3
Baro
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the BARO key
to manually select the barometric pressure.
2. Use the keypad to select the barometric pressure value.
3. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the BARO key.
9.6.3.4
Operate
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Operate
key to activate TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Operate key toggles TCAD traffic operation on
and off.
9.6.3.5
Ground Mode
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Ground
key to activate Ground Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Ground key toggles Ground Mode on and off.
9.6.3.6
Approach Mode
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Approach
key to activate Approach Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode on and
off.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.7
TCAD 9900B Operation
The TCAD 9900B provides a passive system that uses transponder replies
from other aircraft to acquire traffic information.
Map Orientation
Touch to View
Traffic Menu
Traffic Advisory
Altitude Separation
0 Feet, Steady
Altitude Separation
Altitude Separation
300 Feet Below,
Closing
Touch to Select
Barometric
Pressure
Touch to Select
Active Shield
Traffic
Annunciation
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Traffic, Separation
500 Feet, Opening
Wpt Info
Figure 9-25 Traffic Page for Ryan TCAD 9900B
Symbol
Imminent Traffic
Non-Imminent
Traffic
(Traffic within ±500 feet
AND 1.0 NM; OR no altitude
AND within 1.0 NM)
Foreword
Description
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Traffic Closing Vertically
Weather
Traffic Diverging Vertically
Nearest
Traffic not Closing or Diverging
Vertically
Services/
Music
Table 9-14 9900B TCAD Symbols
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-29
Foreword
9.7.1
Select Local Barometric Pressure
1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Baro key to select
the local barometric pressure.
Getting
Started
2. Use the keypad to select the values and touch Enter to save
the values.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
9.7.2
Select Active Shield
1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Active Shield key to
select the Active Shield values (Departure, Enroute, or Ground).
FPL
2. Touch the desired setting to save the values.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
9.7.3
TCAD 9900B Traffic Menu
The TCAD 9900B Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD Traffic
display.
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Menu key.
Traffic
Terrain
Select Approach
Mode: Set,
Armed, or Active
Set Traffic
Audio Volume
Select Shield Setup
Figure 9-26 TCAD 9900B Traffic Menu
Weather
2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings.
Nearest
Services/
Music
9.7.3.1
Utilities
System
Traffic Audio
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Traffic
Audio key.
Touch To Lower
The Volume
Touch To Raise
The Volume
Messages
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
Figure 9-27 TCAD Traffic Audio
Symbols
2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Traffic Audio
level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value
and graphically with a bar graph.
Appendix
Index
9-30
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu.
9.7.3.2
Foreword
Getting
Started
Shield Setup
The Shield Setup function allows you to select the Shield Type (mode of
operation) and the size of the shield volume that will provide alerts when
entered by aircraft.
Approach Shield Type
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the Approach Shield Type.
Touch to Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Automatically
Select the Destination
Airport Field Elevation
Touch to Manually
Set Field Elevation
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 9-28 TCAD 9900B Shield Setup for Approach
2. Touch the Field Elevation key.
3. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch
the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation
for traffic reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation
value.
4. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the Field Elevation key.
5. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the field
elevation of the destination airport of the active flight plan for
traffic reporting.
NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the
elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination
airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a field
elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-31
Foreword
En Route, Standard, or Terminal Shield Type
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the desired Shield Type: Enroute, Standard, or
Terminal.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Manually
Set Shield Height
Touch to Shield Range
Direct-To
Figure 9-29 TCAD 9900B Shield Setup for En Route, Standard, and Terminal
Proc
2. Touch the Shield Height key and use the keypad to select
the Shield Height value. The selected value will be shown in
the Shield Range key.
Wpt Info
3. Touch the Shield Range key and use the keypad to select
the Shield Range value. The selected value will be shown in
the Shield Range key.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
9.7.3.3
Weather
Nearest
Approach Mode
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Approach
key to activate Approach Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode between
Set, Armed, or Active.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-32
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.8
TCAD 9900BX Operation
The TCAD 9900BX provides an active system that interrogates other aircraft
to acquire traffic information.
Traffic Advisory Altitude
Separation 200 Feet
Out of Range Traffic
Altitude Separation 0 Feet
Com/Nav
Proximate Traffic,
Separation 500
Feet Below,
Descending
Touch to Select
Barometric
Pressure
Touch to Select
Altitude Filter
Direct-To
Wpt Info
Description
Traffic Advisory
Map
Traffic
Proximity Advisory
Terrain
(color may be configured as cyan)
Other Traffic
Weather
(color may be configured as cyan)
Out-of-Range Traffic Advisory
Nearest
Services/
Music
Table 9-15 9900BX (TCAS) Symbols
9.8.1
FPL
Proc
Figure 9-30 Traffic Page for Ryan TCAD 9900BX
Symbol
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Map
Orientation
Other Traffic
Altitude
Separation 700
Feet Above,
Ascending
Foreword
Select Local Barometric Pressure
Utilities
1. While viewing the TCAD display, touch the Baro key to select
the local barometric pressure.
System
2. Use the keypad to select the values and touch Enter to save
the values.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-33
Foreword
9.8.2
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Select Altitude Filter
The Altitude Filter limits the traffic displayed to the Below, Normal,
Above or Unrestricted altitude block as listed in the “Displayed Traffic
Range” table. The filter altitudes are relative to ownship altitude.
While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Altitude Filter key to
change the altitude filter value. Select the desired altitude filter by
touching the Normal, Above, Below, or Unrestricted keys. The
selection is displayed in the Altitude Filter field.
FPL
Selected Altitude Filter
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 9-31 Traffic Altitude Filter Selection
Traffic
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Displayed Traffic Range
-9,900 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 2,700 ft
-2,700 ft to 9,900 ft
All Traffic Shown
Table 9-16 Displayed Traffic Range
9.8.3
TCAD 9900BX Traffic Menu
The TCAD 9900BX Menu allows control over the settings for the TCAD
Traffic display.
1. While viewing the Traffic page, touch the Menu key.
Select Approach
Mode: Set, Armed,
or Active
Select Shield
Setup
Set Traffic
Audio Volume
Appendix
Toggle Ground
Mode On or Off
Figure 9-32 TCAD 9900BX Traffic Menu
2. Touch the desired key from the menu to make any settings.
Index
9-34
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.8.3.1
Traffic Audio
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Traffic Audio
key.
Touch to Lower
the Volume
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Raise
the Volume
Com/Nav
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
FPL
Figure 9-33 TCAD Traffic Audio
2. Touch the arrow keys to raise or lower the TCAD Traffic Audio
level. The selected volume will be shown as a percentage value
and graphically with a bar graph.
3. Touch the Back key to return to the TCAD Control menu.
9.8.3.2
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Shield Setup
The Shield Setup function allows you to select the Shield Type (mode of
operation) and the size of the shield volume that will provide alerts when
entered by aircraft.
Approach Shield Type
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the Approach Shield Type.
Touch to Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Automatically
Select the Destination
Airport Field Elevation
Touch to Manually
Set Field Elevation
2. Touch the Field Elevation key.
Symbols
3. With the Use DEST APT key deactivated (no green bar), touch
the Field Elevation key to manually select the Field Elevation
for traffic reporting. Use the keypad to select the elevation
value.
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
System
Messages
Figure 9-34 TCAD 9900BX Shield Setup for Approach
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Direct-To
9-35
Appendix
Index
4. Touch the Enter key to accept the selected value. The selected
value will be shown in the Field Elevation key.
5. Touch the Use DEST APT key to automatically use the field
elevation of the destination airport of the active flight plan for
traffic reporting.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
NOTE: Activating the Use DEST APT feature automatically uses the
elevation for the current destination airport for the TCAD. If no destination
airport is present in the GTN system, the TCAD will not receive a field
elevation and therefore not automatically enter approach mode.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
En Route, Standard, or Terminal Shield Type
1. While viewing the TCAD Control menu, touch the Shield Type
key and touch the desired Shield Type: Enroute, Standard, or
Terminal.
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
Shield Type:
Approach or
Standard
Map
Touch to Manually
Set Shield Height
Traffic
Touch to Shield
Range
Terrain
Figure 9-35 TCAD 9900BX Shield Setup for En Route, Standard, and Terminal
Weather
2. Touch the Shield Height key and use the keypad to select the
Shield Height value. The selected value will be shown in the
Shield Range key.
3. Touch the Shield Range key and use the keypad to select the
Shield Range value. The selected value will be shown in the
Shield Range key.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
9.8.3.3
Approach Mode
1. While viewing the Traffic menu, touch the Approach key to
activate Approach Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Approach key toggles Approach Mode between
Set, Armed, or Active.
9.8.3.4
Ground Mode
1. While viewing the Traffic menu, touch the Ground key to activate
Ground Mode TCAD traffic.
2. Touching the Ground key toggles Ground Mode between On and Off.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-36
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.9
TCAS II
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available with software v6.30 and later.
Getting
Started
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an
aid in visually acquiring traffic. Traffic avoidance maneuvers are based upon
TCAS II Resolution Advisories, ATC guidance, or positive visual acquisition
of conflicting traffic.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to
accurately depict all of the traffic information within range of the aircraft.
Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented
on the displays.
NOTE: If the installed TCAS II traffic system is not a GTS 8000, refer to
the applicable documentation for system-specific information.
A Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II), such as the
GTS 8000, improves flight safety by monitoring nearby airspace for aircraft flying
with operating transponders. The TCAS II system provides traffic information to
the displays. If separation from other aircraft is within certain limits, the system
issues Traffic Advisories (TAs) assisting the flight crew in the visual acquisition
of traffic, or Resolution Advisories (RAs) providing recommended vertical
guidance maneuvers to resolve traffic conflicts.
9.9.1
TCAS II Theory of Operation
When the TCAS II system is operating in TA/RA or TA Only Mode, the system
interrogates the transponders of other aircraft in the vicinity, and monitors for
their replies. Based on successive replies, the system tracks the range, bearing,
and (if reported) the altitudes of other aircraft. For each detected aircraft
transponder, the system calculates time to, and separation at, the closest point
of approach (CPA) around the potential collision area surrounding own aircraft.
Based on CPA time, own aircraft altitude, and selected TCAS II system mode,
the system determines if a TA or RA should be issued for a detected intruder.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-37
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Altitude
(Feet*)
0 - 1,000
TA Time to CPA
(Seconds)
20
1,000 - 2,350
2,350 - 5,000
5,000 - 10,000
10,000 - 20,000
20,000 and above
25
30
40
45
48
RA Time to CPA
(Seconds)
RA not issued below
1,000 feet
15
20
25
30
35
* System uses pressure altitude except when Radar Altitude is available. Radar Altitude takes
precedence over pressure altitude reporting.
Table 9-17 Altitude-based TCAS II TA/RA Alert Thresholds
The TCAS II system categorizes detected traffic into four groups of increasing
collision threat potential:
• Other Traffic (OT), displayed as a hollow white diamond, is not currently
a threat.
• Proximate Traffic (PT), displayed as a filled white diamond, is not
currently a threat, but is within 6 nm and ±1,200 feet of the own-aircraft
altitude.
• Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a filled yellow circle, indicates traffic is
within 20-48 seconds of a potential collision area. If a Traffic Map is shown,
and the TA traffic is beyond the selected map range, the system displays a
half-TA symbol at the edge of the map at the approximate relative bearing
of the TA traffic. If TA traffic subsequently meets the criteria for an RA, the
system will issue an RA.
• Resolution Advisory (RA), displayed as a filled red square, indicates
traffic is within 15-35 seconds of a potential collision area. If a Traffic
Map is shown, and the RA traffic is beyond the selected map range, the
system displays a half-RA symbol at the edge of the map positioned at the
approximate relative bearing to the RA traffic.
Appendix
Index
9-38
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Symbol
Description
Other Non-threat Traffic
Foreword
Getting
Started
Proximity Advisory
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Off-scale Traffic Advisory
Com/Nav
Resolution Advisory (RA)
FPL
Off-scale Resolution Advisory
Direct-To
Table 9-18 TCAS II Traffic Symbol Description
9.9.2
Proc
TCAS II with ADS-B
When the GTS 8000 TCAS II is in operating mode, it interrogates Mode-S
transponder data while automatically receiving ADS-B position and velocity
information directly from a comparably equipped aircraft target. The system
attempts to match (or “correlate”) the two surveillance data sources to increase
the preciseness of its target location. When a correlation is made, the system
displays the traffic information for the source determined to be the most
accurate. Any traffic that is not correlated (i.e., only detected by one system but
not the other) is also displayed for the flight crew. This may occur, for example,
if another aircraft is beyond the surveillance range of the TCAS II, but the
GTS 8000 is still receiving position and velocity information from other ADS-B
equipped aircraft. The traffic correlation feature improves the accuracy of the
traffic displayed, while reducing the occurrence of displaying a single target
twice.
Wpt Info
NOTE: Aircraft that are surveilled by ADS-B In only will not trigger a TCAS
resolution advisory.
Utilities
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-39
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
9.9.3
TCAS II Alerts
When the TCAS II unit issues a TA or RA, the following occur:
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation appears in the annunciator bar of the GTN,
flashes for 5 seconds and remains displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected
in the surveillance area.
- RA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are white text with red backgrounds.
Com/Nav
- TA ‘TRAFFIC’ annunciations are black text with yellow backgrounds.
FPL
- If a TA and RA occur simultaneously, only the red and white RA
‘TRAFFIC’ annunciation is shown.
Direct-To
Proc
• If the GTN is not displaying the traffic page, the system displays a traffic
alert pop-up.
Wpt Info
• During a TA event, the system issues a single “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert
each time the system detects a new TA threat.
Map
Traffic
• During an RA event, voice alert(s) provide vertical guidance to resolve the
traffic conflict.
- The Vertical Speed Indicator displays a range of vertical speeds to fly
to or avoid as applicable.
Terrain
- Additional voice alerts occur if the RA status changes and when the
aircraft is clear of the conflict.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
If the traffic system cannot determine the bearing of a Traffic or Resolution
Advisory, the alert will be displayed as a traffic alert banner outlined in the
following table:
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-40
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Traffic Alert Banner
RA X.X ± XX <UP> or <DN>
Description
• Warning banner displayed when system
unable to determine bearing of Resolution
Advisory (RA) and extreme pilot vigilance is
required.
• Banner indicates distance in nm and altitude
separation in hundreds of feet.
• If altitude trend is available, banner indicates
altitude trend up <UP> for climbing and
down <DN> for descending traffic.
• Caution banner displayed when system unable
to determine bearing of Traffic Advisory (TA)
and pilot vigilance is required.
TA X.X ± XX <UP> or <DN>
• Banner indicates distance in nm and altitude
separation in hundreds of feet.
• If altitude trend is available, banner indicates
altitude trend up <UP> for climbing and down
<DN> for descending traffic.
Table 9-19 TCAS II No-Bearing Alert Banners
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-41
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
9.9.3.1
Resolution Advisories
Resolution Advisories (RAs) are TCAS II recommended vertical guidance
maneuvers to be flown to resolve a traffic conflict. If the targeted threat
aircraft is also TCAS II equipped, the two traffic systems use Mode S data
link interrogations to generate complimentary responses to the RAs. During
an RA event, the system monitors the performance and status of the aircraft
response. It may command an increase/decrease vertical speed, and/or reverse
climb/descend commands until the aircraft is clear of the conflict.
RAs are categorized in two resolution types, preventive and corrective:
Preventive Resolutions
Preventive RAs are issued when the aircraft's present vertical speed will
resolve a traffic conflict. The system displays a range of vertical speed avoidance
limits. These limits are displayed to help the pilot from climbing or descending
into conflicting traffic.
Corrective Resolutions
Corrective RAs are issued when the aircraft's present vertical speed will
not resolve a traffic conflict. The VSI indicates a range of vertical speeds to be
avoided,while the current vertical speed appears in white with a red background.
For advisory, the VSI indicates a green “fly to” vertical speed range that needs
to be flown to resolve the RA conflict. In some cases, the TCAS II system logic
determines it will be necessary to cross through the intruder aircraft’s altitude to
resolve the traffic conflict.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
9-42
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
The following tables illustrate Preventive Advisories, Corrective Advisories,
and TCAS II Voice Alerts:
Preventive RA Type
Do Not Climb
Do Not Climb > 500 fpm
Do Not Climb > 1,000 fpm
Do Not Climb > 2,000 fpm
Do Not Descend
Do Not Descend > 500 fpm
Do Not Descend > 1,000 fpm
Do Not Descend > 2,000 fpm
Getting
Started
Required Vertical Speed (fpm)
<0
< 500
< 1,000
< 2,000
>0
> -500
> -1,000
> -2,000
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Table 9-20 Preventative RA Types with Required Vertical Speeds
Corrective RA Type
Climb
Crossing Climb
Crossing Maintain Climb
Maintain Climb
Reduce Descent
Descend
Crossing Descend
Crossing Maintain Descend
Maintain Descend
Reduce Climb
Foreword
Wpt Info
Required Vertical Speed (fpm)
1,500 to 2,000
Map
Traffic
1,500 to 4,400
Terrain
0
- 1,500 to - 2,000
Weather
-1,500 to -4,400
Services/
Music
0
Utilities
Nearest
Table 9-21 Corrective RA Types with Required Vertical Speeds
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-43
Alert Type
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
TA
Climb RA
Descend RA
Altitude Crossing Climb RA
Com/Nav
Altitude Crossing Descend RA
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Reduce Climb RA
Reduce Descend RA
RA Reversal to Climb RA
RA Reversal to Descend RA
Increase Climb RA
Increase Descent RA
Maintain Rate RA
Altitude Crossing, Maintain Rate RA
(Climb and Descend)
Preventive RA
RA Removed
Voice Alert
"Traffic, Traffic"
"Climb, Climb"
"Descend, Descend"
"Climb, Crossing Climb, Climb, Crossing
Climb"
“Descend, Crossing Descend, Descend,
Crossing Descend"
"Level Off, Level Off"
"Level Off, Level Off"
"Climb - Climb NOW, Climb - Climb
NOW"
"Descend - Descend NOW,
Descend - Descend NOW"
"Increase Climb, Increase Climb"
"Increase Descent, Increase Descent"
"Maintain Vertical Speed, Maintain"
"Maintain Vertical Speed, Crossing
Maintain"
"Monitor Vertical Speed"
"Clear of Conflict"
Table 9-22 TCAS II Voice Alerts
9.9.4
TCAS II System Test
The TCAS II system test is initiated from the traffic menu. During a TCAS
II system test, the system displays a traffic test pattern on the Traffic Page. A
Resolution Advisory (RA) alert annunciation will be displayed with the vertical
speed indicator indicating not to descend nor climb greater than 2,000 feet per
minute. The system test takes approximately eight seconds to complete.
Condition
System Test Passed
System Test Failed
Voice Alert
"TCAS Two System Passed"
"TCAS Two System Failed"
Table 9-23 GTS 8000 System Test Voice Alerts
Index
9-44
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9.9.5
TCAS II Operation
Foreword
To display TCAS II traffic, the system must be in TA ONLY or TA/RA Mode.
These modes can be accessed from the transponder control panel or the Traffic
Page Menu.
The Traffic Map is the principal map page for viewing TCAS II traffic data.
Traffic data is displayed in relation to the aircraft’s current position and altitude,
without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there
is no valid heading. The map range is adjustable from 2 to 40 nm. Its scale is
indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic operating mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the
upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 9-36 TCAS II Traffic Map Page
NOTE: The GTS 8000 TCAS II system automatically selects TA ONLY Mode
when the aircraft is below 1,000’ AGL. After landing, the GTS 8000
automatically selects STANDBY Mode. If the installed TCAS II traffic system
is not a GTS 8000, refer to the applicable documentation for system-specific
automatic traffic mode selections.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
9-45
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
9.9.5.1
Altitude Display
The flight crew can select the volume of airspace in which Other Non-Threat
and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs and RAs outside of these limits will always
be shown. This airspace can be selected by pressing the Altitude Filter button
on the traffic page.
Altitude Mode
Below
Normal
Above
Unrestricted
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Table 9-24 Displayed Traffic Range
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Displayed Traffic Range (feet)
-9,900 to 2,700
-2,700 to 2,700
-2,700 to 9,900
-9,900 to 9,900
9.9.5.2
Traffic System Status
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map
pane. If the traffic system fails, or is in test mode, an annunciation is shown in
the center of the Traffic Map.
Traffic
Operating Mode
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
TCAS II Self-Test Initiated
(TEST)
Traffic and Resolution
Advisory ( TA/RA)
Traffic Advisory Only
TCAS II System Standby
TCAS II System Failed
Traffic Page
Annunciation
Test
Traffic Page
Banner
Test Mode
TA/RA
N/A
TA Only
STBY
Fail
N/A
N/A
Failed or No Data
Table 9-25 TCAS II Modes
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
9.9.5.3
External Display
If an external traffic display is being controlled by the GTN, it will be
commanded to match the display settings on the GTN (traffic range and altitude
filter). In a dual GTN installation, GTN #1 will control the external display.
The traffic range on the external display will be set to the nearest range to the
selected range on the GTN.
Index
9-46
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10
TERRAIN
10.1
Foreword
Terrain Configurations
Getting
Started
NOTE: Obstacles are removed from the Terrain and TAWS pages at ranges
greater than 10 NM.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
During power-up of the GTN 6XX, the terrain/obstacle database versions are
displayed along with a disclaimer. At the same time, the Terrain system self-test
begins. A failure message is issued if the terrain test fails.
Com/Nav
Garmin provides the following terrain awareness solutions within the GTN
6XX environment.
Direct-To
Alerting functions are designed to increase situational awareness and help
reduce controlled flight into terrain (CFIT).
Proc
Terrain Type
(H)Terrain
Proximity
(H)Terrain
Alerting
HTAWS
TAWS-A
TAWS-B
Features
• Standard terrain function displaying relative elevations on
moving map
FPL
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
• Does not provide aural or visual alerts
• Basic terrain alerting function
Terrain
• Provides aural and visual alerts
Weather
• Does not meet TSO-C151c or TSO-C194 requirements for
certification
• Optional terrain alerting function for rotorcraft
Nearest
Services/
Music
• Satisfies TSO-C194 requirements for certification
• Optional TSO-C151c Class A terrain alerting system
Utilities
• Provides aural and visual alerts when terrain and obstacles are
within a given altitude threshold from the aircraft
• Optional TSO-C151c Class B terrain alerting system
• Provides aural and visual alerts
System
Messages
Symbols
Table 10-1 Terrain Configurations
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
10.2
GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. To require an accurate
3-D fix (latitude, longitude, altitude), a minimum of four operating satellites
must be in view of the GPS receiver antenna.
The terrain system uses GPS altitude and position data to:
• Create a 2-D image of surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft's
position and altitude
• Calculate the aircraft's flight path in relation to surrounding terrain and
obstacles
• Predict hazardous terrain conditions and issue alerts
10.2.1
GSL Altitude & Indicated Altitude
The GTN converts GPS altitude data to GSL altitude (i.e., the geometric
altitude relative to MSL) for use in terrain functions. All Terrain page depictions
and elevation indications are in GSL.
Variations between GSL altitude and the aircraft's corrected barometric
altitude (or indicated altitude) are common. As a result, Terrain page altitude
data may differ from current altimeter readings. Both GSL altitude and indicated
altitude represent height above MSL, but differ in accuracy and reliability.
Altitude Type
Nearest
Services/
Music
GPS Altitude for Terrain
GSL
Features
• Highly accurate and reliable geometric altitude source
• Does not require local altimeter settings to determine height
above MSL
• Not subject to pressure and temperature variations
Utilities
System
• Affected primarily by satellite geometry
• Barometric altitude source corrected for pressure variations
Messages
• Requires frequent altimeter setting adjustment to determine
height above MSL
Indicated
• Subject to local atmospheric conditions
Symbols
• Affected by variations in pressure, temperature, and lapse rate
Appendix
Table 10-2 GSL and Indicated Altitude Features
Index
10-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.3
General Database Information
Garmin TAWS and HTAWS use terrain and obstacle information supplied by
government and private sources. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to
confirm accuracy of the content. However, the displayed information should
never be understood as being all-inclusive. Pilots must familiarize themselves
with the appropriate charts for safe flight.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes
from government and private agencies. Garmin accurately processes and
cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee its accuracy or completeness.
10.3.1
HTAWS Database Requirements
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
To function properly, HTAWS requires the use of databases specific to
helicopters and HTAWS. The databases required are:
• 2.5 arc-second Terrain Database
• Helicopter Obstacle Database
• Helicopter Navigation Database
10.3.3
Getting
Started
Direct-To
Database Versions
The version and area of coverage of each terrain/obstacle database is shown
on the System-System Status page. Databases are checked for integrity at
power-up. If a database is found to be missing and/or deficient, the
TAWS/HTAWS system fails the self-test and displays the TAWS/HTAWS system
failure message.
10.3.2
Foreword
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Database Updates
Services/
Music
For information on how to update databases, refer to section 18.2.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
10.3.4
The fixed-wing terrain database provides worldwide coverage. The following
describes the area of coverage available in each helicopter terrain database.
Regional definitions may change without notice.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Terrain Database Areas of Coverage
Database
Americas - North
Americas - South
Atlantic - North
Proc
Atlantic - South
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Pacific - North
Pacific - South
Coverage Area
Latitudes: 0° to N90°
Longitudes: W180° to W30°
Latitudes: N30° to S90°
Longitudes: W180° to W30°
Latitudes: 0° to N90°
Longitudes: W30° to E90°
Latitudes: N30° to S90°
Longitudes: W30° to E90°
Latitudes: 0° to N90°
Longitudes: E60° to E180°
Latitudes: N30° to S90°
Longitudes: E60° to E180°
Table 10-3 Terrain Database Coverage
Terrain
NOTE: Because of higher resolution helicopter terrain data, the world-wide
data won't fit on the terrain database card. Therefore, data is regionalized.
If you have the wrong region database for your present position, then you
get the message that terrain is unavailable for the current location and a
crosshatched pattern on the terrain display.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.3.5
Obstacle Database Areas of Coverage
The following describes the area of coverage available in each database.
Regional definitions may change without notice.
Database
Coverage Area
Limited to the United States plus some areas of Canada, Mexico,
United States (US)
Caribbean, and the Pacific.
Alaska, Austria, Belgium, Canada*, Caribbean*, Czech Republic,
Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hawaii,
Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Mexico*, Netherlands,
US/Europe
Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovakia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland,
United Kingdom, United States
* Indicates partial coverage
Table 10-4 Obstacle Database Coverage
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
NOTE: It is very important to note that not all obstacles are necessarily
charted and therefore may not be contained in the Obstacle Database.
Obstacle databases created for GTN software v5.10 or later include all power
lines or only HOT lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed.
Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT) Lines are those power lines that are
co-located with other FAA-identified obstacles. The installed obstacle database
type can be verified on the System Status page. Power line data is available for
the contiguous United States as well as small parts of Canada and Mexico.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
10.4
Terrain Proximity
Garmin Terrain Proximity is a non-TSO-C151c-certified terrain awareness
system provided as a standard feature of GTN 6XX to increase situational
awareness and help reduce controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Terrain may be
displayed on the Map and Terrain pages.
Terrain Proximity uses information provided from the GPS receiver to
provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a Mean Sea Level (MSL)-based
altitude (GSL altitude) and is used to determine Terrain alerts. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject
to variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude
devices. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL
altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
Terrain Proximity utilizes terrain and obstacle databases that are referenced
to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS position and GSL altitude, Terrain
Proximity displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. In this manner, Terrain Proximity can
provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
Terrain Proximity requires the following to operate properly:
• The system must have a valid 3-D GPS position solution.
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
View
Symbols
Layers
Appendix
360
Arc
Flight Plan
Legend
Figure 10-1 Terrain Proximity Page Functional Diagram
Index
10-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.4.1
Displaying Terrain Proximity
Foreword
The Terrain page is in the Terrain function.
Getting
Started
1. Touch the Terrain key on the Home page.
Yellow Terrain is Between 100 ft and
1,000 ft Below the Aircraft Altitude
Heading Annunciation
Terrain Page Title
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Obstacles
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Range
Rings
FPL
Red Terrain is Above or
Within 100 ft Below the
Aircraft Altitude
Terrain Scale
Proc
Active Flight Terrain Type
Plan Leg
Figure 10-2 Terrain Page
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Menu key for options.
Selected View
Direct-To
Map
Flight Plan Selected to Show
Traffic
Touch to Select Display of
Terrain or Obstacle Legend
Figure 10-3 Terrain Menu Options
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-7
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.4.1.1
Terrain Page 120° Arc or 360° Rings
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360 or Arc keys from the Menu.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Com/Nav
2. Touch the 360º or Arc key.
FPL
Yellow Terrain is Between
100 ft and 1,000 ft Below
the Aircraft Altitude
Direct-To
Heading Annunciation
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Arc Range
Proc
120° Arc Outline
Red Terrain is
Above or Within
100 ft Below the
Aircraft Altitude
Wpt Info
Map
Terrain Scale
Terrain Type
Icon shows point obstacle
Icon shows wire obstacle
overlay is active (software
overlay is active (software
v5.12, or later)
v5.12, or later)
Figure 10-4 Terrain 120° Arc View
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
10.4.1.2 Display Flight Plan on Terrain Page
Select the display of the active flight plan on the Terrain page.
Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the display of the active
flight plan on or off.
10.4.1.3 Display Terrain or Obstacle Legend
Select the display of the Terrain or Obstacle Legend on the Terrain page.
Touch the Legend key to select the display of the Terrain or
Obstacle Legend.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.4.2
Terrain Limitations
Foreword
Terrain Proximity displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the
aircraft. The displayed alerts are advisory in nature only. Individual obstructions
may be shown if available in the database. However, all obstructions may not
be available in the database and data may be inaccurate. Terrain information
should be used as an aid to situational awareness. Never use this information for
navigation or to maneuver to avoid obstacles.
Terrain Proximity uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by
government sources. The displayed information should never be understood as
being all-inclusive.
NOTE: The data contained in the Terrain Proximity databases comes from
government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the
data but cannot guarantee its accuracy or completeness.
NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS-A, TAWS-B, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
functionality will be available via the Terrain page, depending on the installed
hardware and configuration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY are available
in software v4.00, or later. TAWS-A is available in software v5.00, or later.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-9
Foreword
10.5
Terrain Alerting
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain alerting functions increase situational awareness and help reduce
controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Visual and aural annunciations alert the
pilot when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from
the aircraft.
Com/Nav
10.5.1
Getting
Started
FPL
Terrain Alerting Requirements
• A valid terrain/obstacle database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
Direct-To
10.5.2
Proc
NOTE: The data contained in the databases comes from government
agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but
cannot guarantee its accuracy or completeness.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Terrain Alerting Limitations
Terrain alerting uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a
database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if
available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm
accuracy of the content.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.5.3
Using Terrain Alerting
During unit power-up, the terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed.
At the same time, the terrain system self-test begins, and one of the following
aural messages is generated:
Foreword
Getting
Started
• “Terrain System Test OK”
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• “Terrain System Failure”
Com/Nav
On the Map page, terrain and obstacles with heights greater than
200 feet Above Ground Level (AGL) display in yellow and red. The
GTN 6XX adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft altitude changes.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
View
360
Arc
Layers
Flight Plan
Legend
Terrain
Alerting
Terrain Alerting Inhibit
Test Terrain Alerting
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 10-5 Terrain Alerting Page Functional Diagram
10.5.4
Services/
Music
Displaying Terrain Alerting Data
Terrain uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles
alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes. The colors and symbols shown below are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and threat locations. Obstacles are removed when more than
2,000 ft below the aircraft.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-11
Foreword
Threat Location
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Getting
Started
Unlighted Obstacle
1000 ft
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Com/Nav
Figure 10-6 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
FPL
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Direct-To
< 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft
AGL
AGL
AGL
Proc
< 1,000
ft AGL
Threat
Location Terrain
Indicator Color
Wpt Info
Red
Map
Weather
Nearest
Obstacle Symbol
Traffic
Terrain
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
Yellow
White
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
1,000 ft
and 2,000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
System
Alert
Level
Terrain/
Obstacle at or
within 100 ft WARNING
(Red)
below current
aircraft
altitude
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
100 ft and
1,000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
Services/
Music
Utilities
Terrain/
Obstacle
Location
CAUTION
(Yellow)
Table 10-5 Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Messages
Tower
Symbols
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Appendix
Index
Table 10-6 Obstacle Icon Types
10-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap.
10.5.5
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid
heading. If orientation is not heading up, it will be track up. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the
radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range is adjustable with the In and Out keys
from 1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Terrain Page Layers
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Select Terrain View
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain Page
Terrain information is displayed on the Map and Terrain pages. The Terrain
page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and threat location data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Flight plan
information (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) included in the flight plan are
displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft
intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat location on the
Terrain page.
10.5.5.1
Foreword
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Select Displayed Layer
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Select Terrain Function
Messages
Figure 10-7 Terrain Menu
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the display of the active
flight plan.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-13
Foreword
Obstacles
Terrain Overlay
Getting
Started
Flight Plan
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain
Legend
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Alert
Annunciation
Icon shows point
obstacle overlay is active
(software v5.12 or later)
Figure 10-8 Flight Plan and Legend Shown On Terrain Page
Proc
3. Touch the Legend key and select a legend for display on the
Terrain page. Options include terrain, obstacle, and off.
Wpt Info
10.5.5.2
Map
Traffic
Icon shows wire
obstacle overlay is active
(software v5.12 or later)
Terrain Page View
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360º or Arc keys from the Menu.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Terrain
2. Touch the 360º or Arc key.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
10.5.5.3 Terrain Alerting Selections
An inhibit function allows you to manually inhibit aural terrain alerts. After
cycling power, terrain alerting functions will no longer be inhibited.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Messages
2. Touch the Terrain Inhibit key to toggle the inhibiting of terrain
alerts.
Symbols
3. Touch the Test Terrain key to perform an internal test of the
terrain alerting system. This function is not available when the
aircraft is in the air.
Appendix
Index
10-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.5.6
Terrain Alerts
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within
terrain alerting software algorithms. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations
are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Alert types are shown
in the Terrain Alerts Summary with corresponding annunciations and aural
messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the Terrain page. If the
page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears over the page being
viewed.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Blinking Message
Touch to Remove
Pop-Up and Remain
on Current Page
Alert Annunciation
Touch to Display
Terrain Page
Figure 10-9 Terrain Alert Pop-Up
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Touch the Go to Terrain key (accesses the Terrain page)
Traffic
Terrain
OR
Weather
Touch the Close key to remove the pop-up alert
Nearest
If the pilot takes no action, the pop-up will be removed when the alert is no
longer active.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-15
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
10.5.6.1 Terrain Alerting Colors and Symbology
Color and symbols are also associated with terrain alerts. The three alert
levels and their associated text coloring as well as any associated symbology are
shown in the following table.
Alert Level
Annunciator Text
Warning
White text on red
background
Caution
Black text on yellow
background
Informational
Black text on white
background
Direct-To
Proc
Alert Type
Map
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W)
Terrain
Weather
FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W)
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
FLTA Wire Warning
(ILI-W, RLC-W)
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C)
FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C)
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Example Visual Annunciation
Not Applicable
Table 10-7 Terrain Alert Colors and Symbology
Wpt Info
Traffic
Threat Location
Indicator
FLTA Wire Caution
(ILI-C, RLC-C)
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
10-16
Alert
Annunciation
Aural Message
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
"Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull
Up"
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
"Wire Ahead"
“Too Low, Terrain”
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Alert Type
Voice Call Out
(VCO-500)
Alert
Annunciation
Aural Message
Foreword
None
“Five-Hundred”
Getting
Started
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are
installation-dependent. Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Table 10-8 Alerts Summary
10.5.6.2
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Line Impact (ILI), and
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft is below
the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI, ILI,
and IOI alerts are accompanied by a threat location indicator displayed on the
Terrain page. The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is
calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table.
En Route
Terminal
Approach
Departure
Com/Nav
FPL
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC), Reduced Required Line
Clearance (RLC), and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts
are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come
within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and
Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC, RLC, and/or a ROC alert is
issued, a threat location indicator is displayed on the Terrain page.
Flight Phase
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet)
Level Flight
Descending
700
500
350
300
150
100
100
100
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Table 10-9 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
During final approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the
aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or
below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
10.5.6.3
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the
aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway.
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination
airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold
or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During
the final descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance,
and other parameters.
700
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
400
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
100
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance From Destination Airport (nm)
Figure 10-10 PDA Alerting Threshold
Terrain
Nearest
500
Runway 1
Threshold
Traffic
Weather
600
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion
should be used when inhibiting terrain alerts and the system should be enabled
when appropriate. When terrain alerting is inhibited, the alert annunciation
“TER INHB” is shown.
10.5.6.4
Inhibiting/Enabling PDA/FLTA Alerting
Inhibit mode deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and visual alerts. Pilots should
use discretion when inhibiting terrain alerts and always remember to enable
the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA alerts are disabled in the
inhibit mode. After cycling power, the terrain alerting function will no longer
be inhibited.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Toggle
Terrain Inhibit
Terrain
Inhibited
Annunciation
Figure 10-11 Terrain Alerting Inhibited Annunciation
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
FPL
2. Touch the Terrain Inhibit key to inhibit or enable terrain
alerting (choice dependent on current state). A green bar in
the key indicates the inhibit function is active.
Direct-To
10.5.6.5 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)
Terrain provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at
500 feet above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than
5 NM from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway threshold
elevation (if less than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this
altitude, the terrain system issues the aural alert message “Five-hundred.”
Wpt Info
10.5.6.6 Terrain Not Available Alert
Terrain requires a 3-D GPS position solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the position solution become degraded or if
the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation “TER N/A”
is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain page. The aural
message “Terrain Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is reestablished and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural
message “Terrain Available” is generated (when the aircraft is airborne).
10.5.6.7 Terrain Failure Alert
Terrain continually monitors several system-critical items such as database
validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not
available, the aural message “Terrain System Failure” is generated along with a
“TER FAIL” annunciation.
Proc
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-19
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.5.7
During power-up, the terrain system conducts a self-test of its aural and
visual annunciations. This test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is
issued at test completion. Terrain system testing is disabled when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Terrain System Status
Alert Type
Terrain Available
Alert
Annunciation
Aural Message
None
“Terrain Available”
None
Terrain System Test in Progress
Terrain System Test Pass
None
“Terrain System Test OK”
Terrain Not Available
Terrain N/A
None
Terrain Alerting is Disabled
“Terrain System Failure”
Terrain System Test Fail
Table 10-10 Terrain System Test Status Annunciations
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.6
TAWS-B (Optional)
Foreword
TAWS (Terrain Awareness and Warning System) is an optional feature to
increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain
(CFIT). TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and
obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft.
TAWS satisfies TSO-C151c Class B requirements for certification. Class B
TAWS is required for all Part 91 turbine aircraft operations with six or more
passenger seats and for Part 135 turbine aircraft operations with six to nine
passenger seats (FAR Parts 91.223, 135.154).
10.6.1
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
TAWS-B Requirements
• A valid terrain/obstacle database
Proc
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
10.6.2
Getting
Started
Wpt Info
Map
TAWS-B Limitations
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government
agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but
cannot guarantee its accuracy or completeness.
Traffic
Terrain
TAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the altitude of the aircraft.
Compliance with TAWS B alerts and warnings is MANDATORY. When a TAWS
B "pull up" annunciation is issued, the pilot is required to pull up.
Weather
TAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a database that
may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in
the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of
the content, per TSO-C151c.
Services/
Music
Nearest
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-21
Foreword
Getting
Started
10.6.3
Using TAWS-B
During unit power-up, the terrain/obstacle database versions are displayed.
At the same time, TAWS self-test begins, and one of the following aural messages
is generated:
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• “TAWS System Test OK”
Com/Nav
• “TAWS System Failure”
FPL
Direct-To
TAWS information can be displayed on the Map page. Terrain and obstacles
with heights greater than 200 feet Above Ground Level (AGL) are displayed
in yellow and red. The GTN 6XX adjusts colors automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
View
Terrain
Layers
Flight Plan
Legend
Layers
TAWS Inhibit
Test TAWS
Weather
Nearest
Figure 10-12 TAWS-B Page Functional Diagram
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
360
Arc
10.6.4
Displaying TAWS-B Data
TAWS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles
alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft
altitude changes. The colors and symbols shown below are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and threat locations. Obstacles are removed when more than
2,000 ft below the aircraft.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Threat Location
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Unlighted Obstacle
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
Foreword
Getting
Started
1000 ft
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Com/Nav
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Figure 10-13 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Threat
Location Terrain
< 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft Indicator Color
AGL
AGL
AGL
AGL
Obstacle Symbol
Red
Yellow
White
Terrain/
Obstacle
Location
FPL
Alert
Level
Proc
Terrain/
Obstacle at or
within 100 ft WARNING
below current
(Red)
aircraft
altitude
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
100 ft and
1,000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
CAUTION
(Yellow)
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
1,000 ft
and 2,000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Table 10-11 TAWS-B Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Tower
Direct-To
Messages
Power Line
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Table 10-12 Obstacle Icon Types
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap.
10.6.5
TAWS-B Page
TAWS information is displayed on the Map and Terrain pages. The TAWS
page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and threat location data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Flight plan
information (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) included in the flight plan are
displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft
intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat location on the
TAWS page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid
heading. If orientation is not heading up, it will be track up. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the
radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range is adjustable with the In and Out keys
from 1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
10.6.5.1
Terrain Page Layers
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Select Terrain View
Weather
Select Displayed Layer
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Select TAWS Function
Messages
Figure 10-14 Terrain Page TAWS-B Menu
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the display of the active
flight plan.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Obstacles
Terrain Overlay
Foreword
Flight Plan
Getting
Started
Terrain
Legend
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
TAWS-B Annunciation
Icon shows point obstacle
overlay is active (software
v5.12, or later)
Icon shows wire obstacle
overlay is active (software
v5.12, or later)
FPL
Figure 10-15 Flight Plan and Legend Shown On TAWS-B Terrain Page
10.6.5.2
Com/Nav
Direct-To
Terrain Page View
Select the 120º Arc or 360º rings overlay for the Terrain page with either the
360º or Arc keys from the Menu.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
2. Touch the 360º or Arc key.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
10.6.5.3 Terrain Page TAWS-B Selections
The TAWS selections allow you to inhibit aural TAWS alerts and to send a
request to the TAWS equipment to run its internal tests. After cycling power,
TAWS will no longer be inhibited.
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to toggle the inhibiting of TAWS
alerts.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-25
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Test TAWS Only Available
on Ground
TAWS Alerts
Inhibited
Figure 10-16 TAWS-B Alerts Inhibited Selected
FPL
3. Touch the Test TAWS key to test the TAWS system. This function
is not available when the aircraft is in the air.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
TAWS Test
Display
TAWS Test
Annunciation
Figure 10-17 TAWS-B Test Selected
10.6.6
TAWS-B Alerts
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within
TAWS software algorithms. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are
displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. TAWS alert types are
shown in the TAWS Alerts Summary with corresponding annunciations and
aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the TAWS page. If the TAWS
page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the page being viewed.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Touch to Remove
Pop-Up and Remain
on Current Page
TAWS Annunciation
Blinking Message
Foreword
Touch to Display
Terrain Page
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 10-18 Terrain Alert Pop-Up
Com/Nav
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Touch the Go to Terrain key (accesses the TAWS page)
FPL
OR
Direct-To
Proc
Touch the Close key to remove the pop-up alert
If the pilot takes no action, the pop-up will be removed when the alert is no
longer active.
10.6.6.1 TAWS-B Alerting Colors and Symbology
Color and symbols are also associated with TAWS alerts. The three TAWS
alert levels and their associated text coloring as well as any associated symbology
are shown in the following table.
Alert Level
Annunciator Text
Warning
White text on red
background
Caution
Black text on yellow
background
Informational
Black text on white
background
Threat Location
Indicator
Example Visual Annunciation
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Not Applicable
System
Table 10-13 TAWS-B Alert Colors and Symbology
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-27
Foreword
Alert Type
Getting
Started
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR-W)
FLTA Terrain Warning
(RTC-W, ITI-W)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Appendix
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
"Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire Ahead Pull
Up"
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
"Wire Ahead"
FLTA Wire Warning
(ILI-W, RLC-W)
FLTA Terrain Caution
(RTC-C, ITI-C)
FLTA Obstacle Caution
(ROC-C, IOI-C)
FLTA Wire Caution
(ILI-C, RLC-C)
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR-C)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR-C)
Voice Call Out
(VCO-500)
Aural Message
“Pull Up”
FLTA Obstacle Warning
(ROC-W, IOI-W)
Messages
Symbols
Alert
Annunciation
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Sink Rate”
None
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Five-Hundred”
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are
installation-dependent. Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with asterisks.
Table 10-14 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
Index
10-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.6.6.2 Excessive Descent Rate Alert
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide
notification when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an
excessive rate. The parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151c are shown
below.
6000
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Foreword
FPL
4500
E"
4000
NK
I
"S
3500
T
RA
Direct-To
Proc
3000
Wpt Info
2500
2000
Map
1500
"PULL UP"
1000
Traffic
500
0
Terrain
2000
4000
6000
8000
Descent Rate
10000
12000
Weather
Figure 10-19 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
Nearest
10.6.6.3
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC), Reduced Required Line
Clearance (RLC), and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts
are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come
within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and
Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC, RLC, and/or a ROC alert is
issued, a threat location indicator is displayed on the TAWS page.
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Line Impact (ILI), and
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft is below
the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI, ILI,
and IOI alerts are accompanied by a threat location indicator displayed on the
TAWS page. The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is
calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-29
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Flight Phase
Getting
Started
En Route
Terminal
Approach
Departure
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet)
Level Flight
Descending
700
500
350
300
150
100
100
100
Table 10-15 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
During final approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the
aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or
below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold.
10.6.6.4
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the
aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway.
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination
airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold
or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During
the final descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance,
and other parameters.
Weather
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
700
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
400
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
100
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance From Destination Airport (nm)
Figure 10-20 PDA Alerting Threshold
Symbols
Index
500
Runway 1
Threshold
Messages
Appendix
600
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion
should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when
appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation “TAWS INHB” is
shown.
10-30
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.6.6.5
Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-B PDA/FLTA Alerting
TAWS also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and
visual alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS and always
remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA
alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode. After cycling power, TAWS will no longer
be inhibited.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
TAWS Alerts
Inhibited
Direct-To
TAWS Inhibited
Annunciation
Proc
Figure 10-21 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled (TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
10.6.6.6
Map
2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice
dependent on current state). A green bar in the key indicates
the TAWS is inhibited.
Terrain
Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR)
Weather
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Take-Off alert (also referred to as
“Altitude Loss After Take-Off”) provides alerts when the system determines the
aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message
“Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a
pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing
from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
Traffic
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less
Messages
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110º
The NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151c are shown below.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-31
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Foreword
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Direct-To
Proc
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Wpt Info
Figure 10-22 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
Map
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Traffic
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Utilities
System
Sink Rate (FPM)
Messages
Figure 10-23 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-32
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.6.6.7 Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)
TAWS-B provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at
500 feet above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than
5 NM from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway threshold
elevation (if less than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this
altitude, TAWS-B issues the aural alert message “Five-hundred.”
10.6.6.8 TAWS-B Not Available Alert
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS position solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the position solution become degraded or if the
aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation “TAWS N/A”
is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B page. The
aural message “TAWS Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is
re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural
message “TAWS Available” is generated (when the aircraft is airborne).
10.6.6.9 TAWS-B Failure Alert
TAWS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database
validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not
available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is generated along with a
“TAWS FAIL” annunciation.
10.6.7
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual
annunciations. The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert is
issued at test completion. TAWS System Testing is disabled when ground speed
exceeds 30 knots.
TAWS Available
Alert
Annunciation
Aural Message
None
“TAWS Available”
“TAWS System Test OK”
TAWS Not Available
TAWS N/A
TAWS Alerting is Disabled
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Weather
Nearest
System
Messages
Symbols
None
TAWS System Test Fail
“TAWS System Failure”
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Appendix
Index
Table 10-16 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Com/Nav
Utilities
None
None
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Services/
Music
TAWS System Test in Progress
TAWS System Test Pass
Getting
Started
Terrain
TAWS-B System Status
Alert Type
Foreword
10-33
Foreword
10.7
NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY functionality will
be available via the Terrain page, depending on the installed hardware and
configuration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY are available in software
v4.00, or later.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
HTAWS (Optional)
Garmin’s Helicopter Terrain Awareness Warning System (HTAWS) is an
optional feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled
flight into terrain. Garmin HTAWS is TSO-C194 authorized. Units installed in
helicopters that do not have HTAWS installed will display HTerrain Proximity.
This is noted by the five color terrain scale which is appropriate to the low
altitude operating environment for helicopters.
HTAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and obstacles
are a hazard to the aircraft.
HTAWS Relative
Terrain Depiction
Map
Traffic
Rotorcraft
Ownship
Terrain
Figure 10-24 Map Page with Terrain
Weather
NOTE: HTAWS-enabled units can be identified by going to the Terrain
page and checking the lower right-corner for “HTAWS.”
Nearest
Services/
Music
10.7.1
HTAWS Requirements
• The system must have a valid 3D GPS position solution
• The system must have a valid terrain/obstacle database
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-34
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.7.2
HTAWS Limitations
Foreword
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases
comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately processes and
cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee its accuracy or completeness.
HTAWS displays terrain and obstructions relative to the flight path of the
aircraft. Individual obstructions may be shown if available in the database.
However, all obstructions may not be available in the database and data may be
inaccurate. Never use this information for navigation.
NOTE: Terrain databases do not consistently represent foliage. Some trees
may extend above HTAWS protection limits in some operating modes.
Terrain information is based on terrain elevation data contained in a database
that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain information should be used as an aid
to situational awareness. Never use it for navigation or to maneuver to avoid
terrain.
HTAWS uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the
content. However, the displayed information should never be understood as
being all-inclusive.
10.7.3
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Power Up
During power-up of the unit, the terrain/obstacle database versions are
displayed along with a disclaimer to the pilot. At the same time, HTAWS
self-test begins. HTAWS gives the following aural messages upon test completion:
• “HTAWS System Test, OK,” if the system passes the test
• “HTAWS System Failure,” if the system fails the test
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
A test failure is also annunciated visually for HTAWS, as shown in the HTAWS
Alert Summary table.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-35
Foreword
Getting
Started
10.7.4
HTAWS is shown on the Terrain page when HTAWS is available.
360º View
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
HTAWS Terrain
Colorization Overlay
Map
HTAWS
Annunciation
Icon shows point
obstacle overlay is active
(software v5.12, or later)
Figure 10-25
Direct-To
Wpt Info
Rotorcraft
Ownship
Terrain Legend
FPL
Proc
HTAWS Page
Icon shows wire
obstacle overlay is active
(software v5.12, or later)
Terrain/HTAWS Page
Terrain information, aircraft ground track, and GPS-derived MSL altitude are
displayed on the page. The “GSL” above altitude display in the top right corner
of the display reminds the pilot that altitude is GPS-derived.
The HTAWS page menu provides options to acknowledge caution alerts,
reduce protection, or inhibit alerting.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 10-26 HTAWS Terrain Menu
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-36
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.7.4.1 View Selection
The HTAWS page has two selectable view settings:
Foreword
360º View
Relative Terrain
Elevation Depiction
Terrain Legend
Rotorcraft Ownship
Figure 10-27 Terrain Page with HTAWS - 120° View
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
• 360˚ View—View from above aircraft depicting surrounding terrain on
all sides.
• Arc (120˚) View—View of terrain ahead of and 60˚ to either side of the
aircraft flight path.
NOTE: If a heading source is available the HTAWS page will be oriented
heading up. If no heading source is available the HTAWS page will be
oriented track up.
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Touch Arc or 360˚.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
2. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The
HTAWS page displays the selected view. Repeat step 1 to
select the alternate view, and press Back.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-37
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
10.7.4.2
HTAWS Inhibit
HTAWS provides an “inhibit mode.” This mode deactivates aural and
visual alerts when they are deemed unnecessary by the aircrew. Pilots should
use discretion when inhibiting the HTAWS system and always remember to
enable the system when appropriate. VCO’s are not inhibited in Inhibit Mode.
Refer to section 10.7.6 for more information on HTAWS alerts. When alerting
is inhibited, all FLTA aural and visual alerting is suppressed. HTAWS should
only be inhibited when in visual contact with terrain and when the pilot can be
assured of maintaining clearance from terrain and obstacles. When conducting
en route operations and operations from published airports and heliports,
HTAWS should be operated in Normal mode. HTAWS configured units will
always start up with HTAWS alerts uninhibited.
To inhibit HTAWS alerts:
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Wpt Info
Map
2. Touch HTAWS Inhibit. The green bar will show when HTAWS
Inhibit is active.
Traffic
Terrain
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The HTAWS
annunciation is displayed
alerts are inhibited. The
in the terrain annunciator field whenever HTAWS is inhibited.
Weather
Nearest
NOTE: When the ground speed is less than 30 knots HTAWS
will automatically display the "HTAWS INHB" annunciation. This
indicates that HTAWS is no longer providing protection.
Services/
Music
This automatic “HTAWS INHB” cannot be removed by menu option
selection. Menu selections for INHIBIT HTAWS and RP Mode remain
available when HTAWS is automatically inhibited due to ground speed.
If the pilot selects a mode on the menu while HTAWS is auto inhibited
because it is less than 30 knots then the unit will enter that mode once
ground speed exceeds 30 knots. Hence, the presence of these selections
on the Menu.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-38
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.7.4.3
External HTAWS Inhibit Control
An optional installation is allowed for providing an external HTAWS Inhibit
switch. Pressing the external HTAWS Inhibit switch toggles the HTAWS inhibit
on and off in the same manner as using the Terrain Menu selection.
10.7.4.4
Reduced Protection Mode
The Reduce Protection (RP) functionality allows operating with a reduction
in the alerting thresholds, and suppresses visual and aural annunciation of
caution alerts. Reduced protection allows low level operations and landings off
airport with a minimum number of alerts while continuing to provide protection
from terrain and obstacles. Reduced Protection should only be selected when
operating in visual contact with the terrain as alerting times are significantly less
than in normal mode. There is support for an external RP Mode switch and an
external Alert Acknowledge switch.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
To toggle protection:
Map
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
2. Touch the RP Mode key to toggle the RP mode on and off.
The green bar will show when RP mode is active.
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display. The “RP
Mode” annunciation is displayed in the terrain annunciator
field and in the lower right corner of the terrain page whenever
protection is reduced.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-39
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.7.4.5
HTAWS Manual Test
Garmin HTAWS provides a manual test capability which verifies the proper
operation of the aural and visual annunciations of the system prior to a flight.
To manually test the HTAWS system:
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Com/Nav
2. Touch the Test HTAWS key.
FPL
3. Touch Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
An aural message is played giving the test results:
• “HTAWS System Test, OK” if the system passes the test
• “HTAWS System Failure” if the system fails the test
Map
NOTE: HTAWS System Testing is disabled when in the air so as not to
impede HTAWS alerting.
Traffic
Terrain
10.7.4.6
HTAWS Legend
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Weather
Nearest
2. Touch the Legend key to select the Terrain Legend, Obstacle
Legend, or to turn off the legend.
Services/
Music
3. Press Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 10-28 HTAWS Terrain and Obstacle Legends
Index
10-40
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Color
Red
Orange
Yellow
Green
Black
Description
Terrain is more than 250 ft above the aircraft.
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft above the aircraft.
Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft below the aircraft.
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft.
Terrain is more than 500 ft below the aircraft.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Table 10-17 HTAWS Terrain Altitude Color Description
Red
FPL
Terrain is more than 250 ft
above the aircraft altitude
Direct-To
Aircraft Altitude +250 ft
Orange Terrain is between 250 ft and 0 ft
above the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
Yellow
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Green
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Black
Terrain more than 500 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Wpt Info
Aircraft Altitude -250 ft
Aircraft Altitude -500 ft
Map
Figure 10-29 HTAWS Terrain Altitude Colors and Symbology
10.7.4.7
Proc
Traffic
Flight Plan Overlay
1. While viewing the Terrain/HTAWS page, touch MENU.
Terrain
Weather
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to toggle the overlay of the active
flight plan on or off. The green bar will show when the Flight
Plan overlay is shown.
3. Press Back to return to the Terrain/HTAWS display.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-41
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.7.5
HTAWS Symbols
The symbols and colors in the following figures and table are used to represent
obstacles and the location of terrain threats on the HTAWS page. Each color is
associated with a height above terrain.
Obstacles are ALWAYS shown on the HTAWS page at 10 NM and below.
NOTE: If an obstacle or terrain cell and the projected flight path of the
aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest threat
location on the HTAWS Page.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Tower
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
Proc
Wpt Info
Table 10-18 Obstacle Icon Types
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-42
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Obstacle
< 1,000 ft > 1,000 ft < 1000 ft > 1000 ft Color Obstacle Location
AGL
AGL
AGL
AGL
Obstacle Symbol
Red
Yellow
White
Obstacle is at or
above current
aircraft altitude.
Obstacle is between
250 ft and 0 ft
below current
aircraft altitude.
Obstacle is 250 ft, or
more, below current
aircraft altitude.
Obstacles are
removed when more
than 500 ft below
the helicopter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Table 10-19 HTAWS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Terrain
Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red)
Weather
250 ft
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft
below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Nearest
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more,
below the aircraft altitude (White)
Services/
Music
Figure 10-30 HTAWS Obstacle Altitude Colors and Symbology
Threat Location Indicator
Utilities
Alert Level
WARNING (Red)
System
Messages
CAUTION (Yellow)
Symbols
Table 10-20 HTAWS Alert Coloring and Symbology
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-43
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
10.7.6
HTAWS Alerts
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within
HTAWS software algorithms. HTAWS alerts employ either a CAUTION or a
WARNING alert severity level. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations
are displayed. Aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Annunciations appear in a
dedicated field in the lower left corner of the display.
Annunciations are color-coded according to the HTAWS Alert Summary
table. Pop-up terrain alerts occur if an HTAWS alert is activated while not on the
HTAWS page. There are two options when an alert is active.
To acknowledge the pop-up alert and return to the currently viewed page:
Touch the Close key.
Proc
To acknowledge the pop-up alert and quickly access the HTAWS Page:
Touch the ENT key.
Wpt Info
NOTE: To further capture the attention of the pilot, HTAWS issues aural
(voice) messages that accompany visual annunciations and pop-up alerts.
For a summary of aural messages, refer to the HTAWS Alert Summary table.
Map
Traffic
NOTE: HTAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a
yellow background; HTAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as constant white
text on a red background.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10.7.6.1
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
The unit will issue terrain alerts not only when the aircraft altitude is below
the terrain elevation but also when the aircraft is projected to come within
minimum clearance values of the terrain. This alerting, called Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance (FLTA), is also provided for obstacles.
The FLTA functionality looks ahead of the aircraft using GPS position
information and the terrain and obstacle databases to provide alerts when
the predicted flight path does not clear the terrain or obstacle by the required
clearance. The amount of clearance required varies depending on position
relative to airports and heliports, in order to reduce the occurrence of nuisance
alerting.
Any threat locations are depicted on the display. There are 2 levels of severity
for FLTA alerts. They are cautionary (amber) and warning (red) in nature and are
described in further detail below.
10-44
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
FLTA CAUTION—Estimated potential impact in approximately 30 seconds after a caution
pop-up alert and annunciation. FLTA caution alerts are accompanied by the aural message
“Caution Terrain; Caution Terrain.” Similarly, a “Caution Obstacle; Caution Obstacle” alert
is also provided. The time to an alert can vary with conditions, therefore there is no guarantee
of a 30 second caution alert being issued.
FLTA WARNING— Warning pop-up alerts are issued 15 seconds prior to an estimated
potential impact in normal mode and approximately 10 seconds in RP Mode. FLTA warning
alerts are accompanied by the aural message “Warning- Terrain, Terrain” . Similarly, a
“Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle” alert is also provided. The time to an alert can vary with
conditions, therefore there is no guarantee of a 15/10 second warning alert being issued.
The alerts are annunciated visually through the annunciator status bar, a
pop-up alert box, and the red and yellow areas on the HTAWS page. The alerts
are annunciated aurally through a voice message indicating the potential threat,
such as “Caution - Terrain, Terrain” or “Warning - Obstacle, Obstacle.”
10.7.6.2
HTAWS Voice Call Out Aural Alert
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
The purpose of the Voice Call Out (VCO) aural alert messages are to provide
an advisory alert to the pilot that the aircraft is between 500 feet and 100 feet
above terrain in 100 foot increments. When the aircraft descends within the
selected distance from the terrain, the aural message for the selected height
above terrain is generated. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts
that accompany the aural message. HTAWS allows an additional 50 foot VCO
alert with radar altimeter input.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-45
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
10.7.6.3
The Voice Call Out (VCO) selection is available when HTAWS is installed. The
VCO functionality provides a voice annunciation of the aircraft’s height above
terrain or the nearest airport, heliport, runway, or helipad when that threshold
is first crossed. The available call outs include “Five Hundred” through “One
Hundred” in one hundred foot intervals. The voice call outs can be enabled
and disabled through the Voice Call Out selection option on the System - Audio
page.
NOTE: VCOs are available down to 100 feet above terrain when HTAWS is
installed and use GSL above terrain to generate call outs (no radar altimeter
required). If a radar altimeter is interfaced to the GTN, alerts are available
down to 50 feet and the height above terrain when the radar altimeter is
used to generate the call outs.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
HTAWS Voice Call Outs Selection
To select the voice call out choices in the System - Audio page, select the
Voice Call Outs selection item and then select the desired value.
1. From the Main page, touch System and then Audio.
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Voice Callouts key to view the Voice Callouts page.
Weather
Audio Volume Bar Graph
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Audio Volume
Numeric Value
Touch to Adjust
Audio Volume
Touch to View
Maximum
Voice Call Outs
Touch to Select
Alert Voice
Messages
Figure 10-31 Select Voice Callouts from the System Audio Page
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-46
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the MAX Voice Callout key to select the voice call
outs.
Touch to Set
Maximum Voice
Call Out Range
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Maximum Voice
Call Out Range
- None Selected
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 10-32 View the Maximum Voice Call Out Range (None Selected)
4. The values above the selected value will be disabled (Off).
Touch to Set
Maximum Voice
Call Out Range 200 ft Selected
Maximum Voice
Call Out Range 200 feet Selected
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 10-33 View the Maximum Voice Call Out Range (200 ft Selected)
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-47
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
10.7.6.4
HTAWS Not Available Alert
Garmin HTAWS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with
specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution become
degraded, or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
“HTAWS N/A” is shown in the annunciation window. When the GPS signal is
re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the “HTAWS
N/A” annunciation is removed.
10.7.6.5
HTAWS Failure Alert
HTAWS continually monitors several system-critical items, such as database
validity, hardware status, and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not
available, the aural message “HTAWS System Failure” is issued along with the
“HTAWS FAIL” annunciation.
10.7.6.6
HTAWS Alert Summary
The aural alert voice gender is configurable to be either male or female. Contact
your Garmin installer for further information on configuring the alert system.
HTAWS
Annunciation
Weather
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Description
None
“HTAWS System Failure”
HTAWS has failed
None
None
HTAWS has been
inhibited by the
crew, or the
aircraft ground
speed is below 30
knots (automatic
inhibiting).
None
“HTAWS Not Available”
HTAWS not
available.
“Caution - Terrain, Terrain”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Caution for
Terrain
“Warning - Terrain, Terrain”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Warning for
Terrain
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-48
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
HTAWS
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Description
Foreword
“Caution - Obstacle,
Obstacle”
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Caution for
Obstacle
Getting
Started
“Warning - Obstacle,
Obstacle”
None
None
“Wire Ahead”
"Wire Ahead Pull Up, Wire
Ahead Pull Up"
None
None
“Five Hundred”
“Four Hundred”
“Three Hundred”
“Two Hundred”
“One Hundred”
"Fifty"
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Warning for
Obstacle
Alerting
thresholds
are reduced.
Visual and aural
annunciation of
caution alerts
are suppressed.
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Caution for Wire.
Forward Looking
Terrain Avoidance
Warning for
Power Lines.
HTAWS provides
optional 500 ft
through 100 ft (in
100 ft increments)
altitude call
out alerts. An
additional value of
50 ft is available if
a radar altimeter
is installed.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Table 10-21 HTAWS Alert Summary
NOTE: HTAWS Caution Alerts are displayed as constant black text on a
yellow background; HTAWS Warning Alerts are displayed as constant white
text on a red background.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-49
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
10.7.7
Pilot Actions
If an HTAWS warning and associated aural are received, the pilot should
immediately maneuver the rotorcraft in response to the alert unless the terrain
or obstacle is clearly identified visually and determined by the pilot not to be a
factor to the safety of the operation.
A HTAWS caution alert indicates terrain or obstacle nearby. If possible
visually locate the terrain or obstacle for avoidance. A HTAWS warning alert
may follow a HTAWS caution unless the aircraft’s path towards the terrain or
obstacle is changed.
Direct-To
NOTE: Display of terrain and obstacles on the display is supplemental data
only. Maneuvering solely by reference to the terrain and obstacle data is
not recommended or authorized.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-50
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.8
TAWS-A (Optional)
Foreword
NOTE: TERRAIN, TAWS-A, TAWS-B, HTAWS, or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
functionality will be available via the Terrain page, depending on the
installed hardware and configuration. HTAWS or HTERRAIN PROXIMITY
are available in software v4.00, or later. TAWS-A is available in software
v5.00, or later.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government
agencies. Garmin accurately processes and cross-validates the data but
cannot guarantee its accuracy or completeness.
TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A) is an optional
feature to increase situational awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight
into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-A provides visual and aural annunciations when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft.
TAWS-A satisfies TSO-C151c Class A and TSO-92c requirements for
certification.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
TAWS-A Requirements
Traffic
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
Terrain
10.8.1
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
Weather
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs
• A valid radar altimeter
10.8.2
Nearest
TAWS-A Limitations
Services/
Music
TAWS-A uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government
sources. Terrain information is based on terrain elevation information in a
database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown if
available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm
accuracy of the content, per TSO-C151c. However, the displayed information
should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may be inaccurate.
Class A TAWS incorporates radar altimeter input with the GSL altitude to
provide a more accurate position reference when at lower altitudes for certain
alert types, and to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability in the
unlikely event of an airport, terrain or obstacle database failure.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-51
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
10.8.3
Displaying TAWS-A Data
TAWS-A uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and
obstacle (with a height greater than 200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts
relative to aircraft altitude. Depictions of obstacles more than 200 feet below the
aircraft are removed. Colors are adjusted automatically as the aircraft altitude
changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 10-11 and Tables 10-7 and 11-12 are
used to represent terrain, obstacles, and threat locations.
FPL
Threat Location
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Direct-To
Unlighted Obstacle
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
1000 ft
Proc
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Wpt Info
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Figure 10-34 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A
Map
Alert Level
Annunciator Text
Warning
White text on red
background
Weather
Caution
Black text on yellow
background
Nearest
Informational
Black text on white
background
Traffic
Terrain
Services/
Music
Threat Location
Indicator
Example Visual Annunciation
Not Applicable
Table 10-22 TAWS-A Alert Colors and Symbology
Utilities
Tower
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Power Line
System
Messages
Table 10-23 Obstacle Icon Types
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Grouped obstacles are shown with an asterisk (as shown in the Windmill in
Group example above). The color of the asterisks is tied to the relative altitude
of the highest obstacle in the group, not other obstacles within that group.
Obstacles are grouped when they would otherwise overlap.
10-52
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Threat
Location Terrain
< 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft < 1,000 ft Indicator Color
AGL
AGL
AGL
AGL
Obstacle Symbol
Red
Yellow
Terrain/
Obstacle
Location
Alert
Level
Terrain/
Obstacle
above or
WARNING
within 100 ft
(Red)
below current
aircraft
altitude
Terrain/
Obstacle
between
100 ft and
1,000 ft
below current
aircraft
altitude
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
CAUTION
(Yellow)
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Table 10-24 TAWS-A Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
10.8.4
Foreword
Traffic
TAWS-A Page
The TAWS-A page shows terrain, obstacle, and threat location data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation
data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If
an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display
automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-A
page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid
heading. Two views are available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360°
default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range is adjustable
with the In and Out keys from 1 to 200 NM, as indicated by the map range rings
(or arcs).
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-53
Terrain Page Title
Foreword
Getting
Started
Terrain
Menu Key
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain
Scale
Com/Nav
FPL
Alert
Annunciation
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Heading Annunciation
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Yellow Terrain is
Between 100 ft and
1,000 ft Below the
Aircraft Altitude
Range Arc
TAWS Annunciations
(all annunciations
shown on Terrain
page)
Ownship Position
Terrain Type
Red Terrain is Above or
Within 100 ft Below the
Aircraft Altitude
Figure 10-35 TAWS-A Page with Arc View
Yellow Terrain is Between
100 ft and 1,000 ft Below
the Aircraft Altitude
Terrain Page
Title
Aircraft GSL Value
(GPS Derived)
Heading
Annunciation
Map
Terrain
Menu Key
Traffic
Terrain
Range Arcs
An Asterisk
Indicates
Grouped
Obstacles
Terrain Type
Red Terrain is Above
or Within 100 ft Below
the Aircraft Altitude
Weather
Terrain Scale
Nearest
Ownship
TAWS Annunciations (shown on all displays)
Position
(+ indicates there are more annunciations
and will show each one for five seconds)
Figure 10-36 TAWS-A Page with 360° View
Services/
Music
Utilities
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
System
Messages
2. Selections are grouped by function: the Terrain Menu and Map
Setup.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-54
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Glideslope Alert Inhibit
Foreword
Map Setup
Flap Override
Selection
Ground Proximity
Warning System
Inhibit
Test TAWS Only Available
on Ground
TAWS Alerts Inhibit
Figure 10-37 TAWS-A Menu
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
3. Touch the Map Setup key and make the desired selections
for the Terrain map display.
Selected View
Getting
Started
Direct-To
Proc
Flight Plan Selected to Show
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
Terrain or
Obstacle Legend
Map
Traffic
Figure 10-38 TAWS-A Map Setup Menu
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Flap Override
G/S Inhibit
GPWS Inhibit
TAWS Inhibit
Test TAWS
Map Setup
Utilities
System
Messages
360
Arc
Flight Plan
Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 10-39 TAWS-A Page Functional Diagram
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
10-55
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
10.8.5
TAWS-A Alerts
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set
within TAWS-A software algorithms. TAWS-A alerts employ a CAUTION or a
WARNING alert severity level. When an alert is issued, visual annunciations are
displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. TAWS-A alert types with
corresponding annunciations and aural messages are shown in Table 10-9.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the display. The TAWS-A
Alert Annunciation is shown on the lower left part of the display. If the TAWS-A
Page is not already displayed, a pop-up alert appears while an alert is active.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Terrain
Touch to Display
Terrain Page
TAWS Annunciation
Figure 10-40 Terrain Alert Pop-Up
Map
Traffic
Blinking Alert
Touch to Remove
Pop-Up and Remain
on Current Page
To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
Touch the Close key (returns to the currently viewed page)
OR
Touch the Go to Terrain key (accesses the TAWS-A Page)
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
10.8.5.1 TAWS-A Alert Types
TAWS-A provides the following alert types:
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting, which consists of:
Utilities
- Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Line Clearance (RLC) /
Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) Alerting
System
- Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Line Impact (ILI) /
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
Messages
Symbols
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) Alerting, which consists of:
- Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) Alerting
Appendix
- Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) to Terrain Alerting
Index
10-56
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
- Flight Into Terrain (FIT) Alerting
Foreword
- Negative Climb Rate (NCR) after takeoff Alerting
- Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD) Alerting
- Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) Alerting
10.8.5.2
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
TAWS-A Alerts Summary
Alert Type
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
Imminent Terrain
Impact Warning (ITI)
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Warning (IOI)
Alert
Annunciation
Getting
Started
Com/Nav
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
or
or
or
*
*
*
Aural
Message
“Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up” *
or
“Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up; Terrain
Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain;
Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
"Terrain Ahead,
Pull Up; Terrain
Ahead, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull
Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up; Obstacle
Ahead, Pull Up”
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull
Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead,
Pull Up; Obstacle
Ahead, Pull Up”
Messages
Excessive Descent
Rate Warning (EDR)
“<whoop>
<whoop> Pull Up”
Symbols
Excessive Closure
Rate Warning (ECR)
“<whoop>
<whoop> Pull Up”
Appendix
or
*
Utilities
System
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-57
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Imminent Line
Impact Warning
(ILI)
"Wire Ahead, Pull
Up; Wire Ahead,
Pull Up"
or
"Wire, Wire; Pull
Up, Pull Up"
Reduced Line
Clearance Warning
(RLC)
"Wire Ahead, Pull
Up; Wire Ahead,
Pull Up"
or
"Wire, Wire; Pull
Up, Pull Up"
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Reduced Required
Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
or
*
“Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead”
*
“Caution, Terrain;
Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead;
Terrain Ahead”
Map
Traffic
Imminent Terrain
Impact Caution (ITI)
or
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Reduced Required
Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
or
Utilities
System
Imminent Obstacle
Impact Caution (IOI)
or
Messages
Symbols
Aural
Message
*
*
“Caution,
Obstacle; Caution,
Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead”
“Obstacle Ahead;
Obstacle Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle;
Caution, Obstacle”
"Wire Ahead; Wire
Ahead"*
or
"Caution, Wire;
Caution, Wire"
Imminent Line
Impact Caution (ILI)
Appendix
Index
10-58
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Aural
Message
"Wire Ahead; Wire
Ahead"*
or
"Caution, Wire;
Caution, Wire"
Reduced Line
Clearance Caution
(RLC)
Premature Descent
Alert Caution (PDA)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Excessive Descent
Rate Caution (EDR)
“Sink Rate”
Excessive Closure
Rate Caution (ECR)
“Terrain, Terrain”
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Negative Climb
Rate Caution (NCR)
or
*
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain
High Speed Caution
(FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain
Gear Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Gear”
Flight Into Terrain
Flaps Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Flaps”
Flight Into Terrain
Takeoff Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Glide Slope Deviation Caution (GSD)
“Glideslope”
Services/
Music
Utilities
Altitude Voice
Call Out (VCO)
None
None
“Five-Hundred,”
“Four-Hundred,”*
“Three-Hundred,”*
“Two-Hundred,”*
“One-Hundred”*
TAWS Available
None
N/A
“TAWS Available”
Messages
None
Symbols
“TAWS System
Test OK”
Appendix
TAWS System Test
in Progress
TAWS System Test
Pass
N/A
None
N/A
System
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-59
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Aural
Message
TAWS N/A
N/A
TAWS Not
Available
TAWS Alerting is
Disabled
N/A
Com/Nav
TAWS System Test
Fail
N/A
FPL
Incorrect TAWS
configuration,
invalid/missing
terrain, airport, or
obstacle database,
or TAWS audio
fault.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Alert Type
Alert
Annunciation
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
**
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Incorrect TAWS
configuration,
radar altimeter
unavailable,
GPS position
unavailable/
degraded, TAWS
audio fault
GPWS Inhibit
N/A
N/A
GPS position
unavailable/
degraded, outside
of terrain database
coverage
Sufficient GPS
signal reception
restored
“TAWS System
Failure”
“TAWS System
Failure”
No GPS position
Map
None
N/A
None
N/A
“TAWS Not
Available”
“TAWS Not
Available”
“TAWS Available”
(aural message
only in flight)
“GPWS System
Failure”
*
N/A
N/A
Messages
“GPWS System
Failure”
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-60
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Alert Type
GPWS Not
Available.
Incorrect TAWS
configuration,
radar altimeter
unavailable,
GPS position
unavailable/
degraded, TAWS
audio fault.
Alert
Annunciation
Pop-Up Alert
(Except TAWS-A Page)
Aural
Message
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
N/A
None
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Glideslope Inhibit
N/A
None
FLAP Override
N/A
None
Wpt Info
Map
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable. Alerts for the default configuration are indicated with
asterisks.
** VCO alerts are not issued if both TAWS and GPWS systems have failed or are not available
† GSD alert will be available if a valid ILS is being used for navigation, even in no valid GPS signal is
being received.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Table 10-25 TAWS-A Alerts Summary
10.8.5.3 Excessive Descent Rate Alert
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide
notification when the aircraft is determined to be descending upon terrain at an
excessive rate. The parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151c are shown
below.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-61
6000
Foreword
5500
Getting
Started
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
5000
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
4500
E"
4000
K
IN
"S
3500
T
RA
3000
2500
2000
1500
"PULL UP"
1000
500
Wpt Info
0
Map
2000
4000
6000
8000
Descent Rate
10000
12000
Figure 10-41 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
Traffic
10.8.5.4
Terrain
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) Reduced Required Line
Clearance (RLC), and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) alerts
are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come
within the minimum clearance values in the FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and
Obstacle Clearance Values table. When an RTC, RLC, and/or a ROC alert is
issued, a threat location indicator is displayed on the TAWS Page.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI), Imminent Line Impact (ILI), and
Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the aircraft is below
the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI, ILI,
and IOI alerts are accompanied by a threat location indicator displayed on the
TAWS Page. The alert is annunciated when the projected vertical flight path is
calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in the following table.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-62
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Minimum Clearance Altitude (feet)
Level Flight
Descending
700
500
350
300
150
100
100
100
Flight Phase
En Route
Terminal
Approach
Departure
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Table 10-26 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FPL
During final approach, FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the
aircraft is below 200 feet AGL while within 0.5 NM of the approach runway or
below 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the runway threshold.
10.8.5.5
Proc
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the
aircraft is significantly below the normal approach path to a runway.
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 NM of the destination
airport and ends when the aircraft is either 0.5 NM from the runway threshold
or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 NM of the threshold. During
the final descent, algorithms set a threshold for alerting based on speed, distance,
and other parameters.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
700
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Direct-To
600
Nearest
500
Services/
Music
400
300
Utilities
PDA Alerting Area
200
100
System
Runway 1
Threshold
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Distance From Destination Airport (nm)
Messages
Figure 10-42 PDA Alerting Threshold
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion
should be used when inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when
appropriate. When TAWS is inhibited, the alert annunciation “TER INHB” is
shown.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-63
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.8.5.6
Inhibiting/Enabling TAWS-A PDA/FLTA Alerting
TAWS-A also has an inhibit mode that deactivates the PDA/FLTA aural and
visual alerts. Pilots should use discretion when inhibiting TAWS-A and always
remember to enable the system when appropriate. Only the PDA and FLTA
alerts are disabled in the inhibit mode. After cycling power, TAWS-A will no
longer be inhibited.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Terrain (TAWS)
Inhibited
Annunciation
"+" Indicates Multiple Annunciations
Figure 10-43 TAWS-A Alerting Disabled (TAWS Inhibited) Annunciation
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the Terrain page, touch the Menu key.
Map
Traffic
2. Touch the TAWS Inhibit key to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice
is dependent on current state). A green bar in the key indicates
the TAWS is inhibited.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch to Toggle
TAWS Inhibit
TAWS Inhibited is
Shown
10.8.5.7
Excessive Closure Rate Alert
The Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) alert provides suitable notification
when the aircraft is determined to be closing upon terrain at an excessive speed
for a given aircraft gear and flap configuration.
The following figures show the ECR alerting criteria for flaps in the landing
configuration and for all other flight phases respectively.
ECR alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is 5 NM from the
nearest airport, except when FLTA is not available (causing the TAWS N/A or
TAWS FAIL annunciation to be displayed), in which case ECR alerting will
remain active until landing.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-64
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 10-44 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps Up or Takeoff Configuration)
Map
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Closure Rate (FPM)
Messages
Figure 10-45 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps in Landing Configuration)
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-65
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
10.8.5.8
Flight Into Terrain Alert
Flight Into Terrain (FIT) alerts occur when the aircraft is too low with
respect to terrain based on landing gear status, flap position, and ground speed.
FIT caution alerts are issued when flight conditions meet the criteria shown
below.
Com/Nav
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
FPL
Traffic
Terrain
Altitude Change Rate (FPM)
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled; refer to the discussion below.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 10-46 Flight Into Terrain Caution Alert Criteria
To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where flap extension is not
desired (or is intentionally delayed), the pilot may override FIT alerting based
on the flap position, while all other FIT alerting remains in effect.
Utilities
Flap Override
Selection
System
Flap Override
Annunciation
"+" Indicates Multiple Annunciations
Figure 10-47 TAWS-A Page Menu and FIT Flap Override Annunciation
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-66
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.8.5.8.1 Overriding Flaps-based FIT alerting
1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
2. Touch the Flap Override key to toggle the override state.
When the Flaps Override option is enabled, the annunciation “FLAP O/R”
is annunciated on the TAWS-A Page. If GPWS alerts are also inhibited (which
include FIT), the “FLAP O/R” annunciation is not shown.
FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircraft’s height
above ground level (as determined by the radar altimeter) is too close to rising
terrain. TAWS-A will issue the aural message “Too Low - Terrain” and visual
annunciations when conditions enter the caution alert area.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Radio Altitude Loss (Feet)
System
Figure 10-48 FIT Alerting After Takeoff
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-67
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
10.8.5.9
Negative Climb Rate After Take-Off Alert (NCR)
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Take-Off alert (also referred to as
“Altitude Loss After Take-Off”) provides alerts when the system determines the
aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff. The aural message
“Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a
pop-up terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing
from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 NM or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110º
The NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151c are shown below.
Wpt Info
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Nearest
Services/
Music
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 10-49 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-68
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Sink Rate (FPM)
Wpt Info
Figure 10-50 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
Map
10.8.5.10 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert
A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert
is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly below the
glidepath for the selected approach.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Radio Altitude (Feet)
Services/
Music
Utilities
“GLIDESLOPE”
System
Messages
Symbols
Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath
Appendix
Figure 10-51 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert Criteria
GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-69
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
met:
• An ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active and vertical
navigation indications are being displayed.
• Aircraft is below 1,000 feet AGL.
• Gear is configured for landing.
When a GSD caution alert occurs on an ILS approach, the aural and visual
annunciation “GLIDESLOPE” is issued. If a GSD caution alert occurs on an
LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach, the aural and visual annunciation
“GLIDESLOPE” is issued.
10.8.5.10.1
Inhibiting Glideslope Deviation (GSD) Alerts
NOTE: The G/S Inhibit function should be activated when flying a localizer
backcourse approach to prevents nuisance GSD alerts. GSD alerts are
inhibited independent from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS alerts.
Proc
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key.
Map
2. Touch the G/S Inhibit key to inhibit or enable glideslope or
glidepath alerts (choice dependent on current state).
Traffic
Terrain
NOTE: The G/S Inhibit function will only be active for a single approach
and the inhibit function will not remain active for subsequent approaches.
When G/S alerts are inhibited, they are only inhibited for a single approach.
To inhibit G/S alerts on the next approach, the G/S Inhibit function must
be activated again between the first and second approaches.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
NOTE: Glidslope Deviation alerts will not be available if the G/S INHB
function is activated.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
10-70
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
10.8.5.11 Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)
Foreword
NOTE: The "Inhibit GPWS" function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR, NCR,
and FIT). Alerting for FLTA, PDA, and GSD is controlled independently from the
GPWS alerts listed below.
EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited as
a group. Discretion should be used when inhibiting alerts and the GPWS system
should be enabled when appropriate. When these alerts are inhibited, the alert
annunciation “GPWS INH” is shown on the TAWS-A Page annunciation window.
1. While viewing the TAWS-A Page, touch the MENU key.
2. Touch the GPWS INH key to inhibit or enable GPWS alerts
(choice dependent on current state).
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
10.8.6
GPWS Inhibit
Selection
Traffic
GPWS Inhibit
Annunciation
Terrain
"+" Indicates Multiple Annunciations
Figure 10-52 GPWS Inhibit Annunciation
Weather
Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO)
Nearest
TAWS-A provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at
500 feet above the terrain, as determined by the radar altimeter (if greater than
5 NM from the nearest airport) or 500 feet above the nearest runway threshold
elevation (if less than 5 NM from the nearest airport). Upon descent to this
altitude, TAWS-A issues the aural alert message “Five-hundred.”
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
10-71
Foreword
10.8.7
TAWS-A System Status
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
During power-up, TAWS-A conducts a self-test of its aural and visual
annunciations. The system test can also be manually initiated. An aural alert
is issued at test completion. TAWS-A System Testing is disabled when ground
speed exceeds 30 knots.
Com/Nav
10.8.8
Getting
Started
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
TAWS-A Abnormal Operations
TAWS-A continually monitors several system-critical items such as database
validity, flap and landing gear position, radar altimeter input, and GPS status.
If the GTN does not contain Terrain, Airport Terrain, and Obstacle databases
(or the databases are invalid), the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the “TAWS FAIL” alert annunciation.
TAWS-A requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical
accuracy minimums. Should the navigation solution become degraded or if
the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation “TAWS N/A”
is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A page, the aural
message “TAWS Not Available” is generated if airborne, some TAWS-A terrain
alerts will not be issued, and GPWS alerting (which are not dependent on GPS
position) will continue to operate. When the GPS signal is re-established and the
aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available”
is generated.
TAWS-A also requires radar altimeter input. Should the radar altimeter input
fail or become degraded, the annunciation “GPWS FAIL” is generated in the
annunciation window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural message “GPWS
System Failure” is also generated. The “GPWS FAIL” annunciation will also occur
if both GPS altitude and barometric altitude are unavailable. If only the GPWS
system has failed, GPWS-based alerts will not be available, while other TAWS-A
alerting remains unaffected.
Multiple TAWS or GPWS annunciations cannot be displayed at the same
time. When multiple annunciations exist, an asterisk will be present next to the
annunciation. The display of each annunciation will alternate with each being
displayed for approximately five seconds.
Appendix
Index
10-72
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11
WEATHER
Foreword
Weather data are displayed by the Weather function when an optional
weather source is installed. The Wx Weather pages may be oriented to Track Up,
Heading Up, or North Up.
When more weather products are installed, a key for each product will be
shown. Touch the key for the desired weather product. When a single weather
product is installed, touching the Weather key will go directly to the Weather
page.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Select
Desired Weather
Product
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 11-1 Weather Page
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-2 Weather Page Functional Diagram
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in,
near, or around areas of hazardous weather. Information contained within
data link weather products may not accurately depict current weather
conditions.
Utilities
System
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight
Restriction (TFR) information. Always confirm TFR information through
official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
Messages
NOTE: In data link weather, Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) and Notices
to Airmen (NOTAMs) that do not have geographical locations cannot be
viewed on the GTN.
Appendix
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-1
Symbols
Index
NOTE: Stormscope and XM Lightning are mutually exclusive.
Foreword
Getting
Started
11.1
SiriusXM Weather Products (Optional)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
NEXRAD
Off
Direct-To
Composite (CONUS)
Base
Echo Tops
Cloud Tops
Icing
Turbulence
Winds Aloft
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Surface
3000 ft
Forecast Period
Current
Traffic
Terrain
45,000 ft
12 Hour
24 Hour
36 Hour
48 Hour
City Forecast
Surface Analysis
Lightning
METAR
Cell Movement
AIREP/PIREP
County Warnings
SIGMET/AIRMET
Freezing Level
Cyclone
Orientation
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Track Up
Heading Up
North Up
Legend
Messages
Figure 11-3 SiriusXM Weather Page Functional Diagram
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.1
Displaying SiriusXM Weather
To display SiriusXM weather touch the following sequence of keys starting
from the Home page.
1. Touch the Weather key on the Home page and then touch
the Data Link key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Age of Selected
Weather
Products
Selected
Altitude
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch + or - to
Select Altitude
Figure 11-4 SiriusXM Weather Page
Wpt Info
2. While viewing the Data Link weather page, touch the Menu
key to configure the Data Link Weather page.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather Overlay
Map Orientation
Weather
Touch Keys to
Select Weather
Product
Green Bar
Indicates
Selected Product
Touch Legend Key
to Display Legend
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-5 Weather Data Link Menu
3. Once you have selected what items you want to display, touch
BACK to return to the Data Link Weather page.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-3
4. Touch the SiriusXM timestamp to view the age of all selected
weather products.
Foreword
Getting
Started
The Timestamp is
Collapsed When All
Weather Products are
Current (Software
v6.30 and Later).
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 11-6 Timestamp Display
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
11.1.2
Weather Legend
The Legend key displays a pop-up legend of the currently used weather
products.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Legend
key.
Traffic
Legend of Selected
Weather Products
Terrain
Touch to Select
Close Legend
Touch Legend and
Slide Finger Up and
Down to Scroll Legend
Touch Up and Down
Keys To Scroll Legend
Figure 11-7 Weather Legend Display
Weather
Services/
Music
2. Touch the Legend area of the display and while maintaining
light pressure against the display, drag your finger up or down
to scroll through the legend display for the selected weather
products, or use the Up/Down keys.
Utilities
3. Touch the Back key to remove the Legend.
Nearest
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
NEXRAD
Surface-Fronts
Cloud Tops
Echo Tops
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
City Forecast
SIGMET/AIRMET
Freezing Levels
FPL
METAR
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Icing Potential
Winds Aloft
County Warnings
Map
Turbulence
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Cell Movement
AIREPS
PIREPS
Lightning
Nearest
Cyclone
Services/
Music
TFR
Utilities
System
Figure 11-8 Available Weather Legends
11.1.3
Weather Map Orientation
Messages
1. While viewing the Weather Data Link function, touch the Menu
key.
Symbols
2. Touch the Orientation key to toggle the map view orientation
choices of North Up, Track Up, and Heading Up.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
11.1.4
When a weather product is active on the Map function or the Weather Data
Link function is selected, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age
of the data may not indicate the time between the current GPS time and the time
when the data is assembled, but rather a general indication of the time elapsed
from when the data is received by the GTN.
Updated weather data may or may not contain new weather data. Weather
data is refreshed at intervals that are defined and controlled by SiriusXM Radio
Inc. and its data vendors.
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the designated
intervals, the data is considered expired and is removed from the display.
This ensures that the displayed data is consistent with what is currently being
broadcast by SiriusXM Radio. If more than half of the designated time has
elapsed from the time the data is received, the color of the product age displayed
changes to yellow.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
SiriusXM Product Age
The expiration time is an elapsed time after which the data is considered
expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data
is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by SiriusXM Radio. If more
than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the data is received,
the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
The SiriusXM Weather broadcast interval is the time interval when SiriusXM
Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new weather
data. Weather data is broadcast at intervals that are defined and controlled by
SiriusXM Radio.
NOTE: SiriusXM Weather does not provide a timestamp for AIRMETs,
SIGMETs, City Forecasts, County Warnings, Cell Movement and TFR
products. Therefore, the unit does not display a product age indication for
these products.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
NOTE: The unit displays valid times on the weather map in lieu of product
age indications for SiriusXM Weather Icing Potential, Winds Aloft, and
Turbulence weather products.
NOTE: The unit displays product age for SiriusXM Weather Freezing Level
and Canada Winds Aloft weather products. The product age indication
represents the number of minutes that have elapsed since the weather
product was provided by SiriusXM Weather. The unit does not display the
valid times assigned to the information within these products.
11.1.5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
NEXRAD
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158
high-resolution Doppler radar systems that are operated by the National Weather
Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized meteorological information
for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 NM. The NEXRAD network provides
important information about severe weather for air traffic safety.
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection,
processing, and dissemination of NEXRAD images can be significant and may
not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays and the relative
age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never
use NEXRAD data for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Instead, use it in an early-warning capacity of pre-departure and en
route evaluation.
NEXRAD weather radar displays a mosaic of precipitation data, colored
according to reflectivity. Composite reflectivity images depict the highest radar
energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. Base
reflectivity images depict returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle.
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops cannot
be shown with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-7
1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather menu, touch the NEXRAD
key to display the NEXRAD selections.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 11-9 SiriusXM NEXRAD Weather Selection
Direct-To
NOTE: Depending on the SXM service and installed GDL hardware, radar
base reflectivity imaging may have broader coverage within North America
or be limited to only Canada.
Proc
Wpt Info
2. Touch the desired NEXRAD source selection and then the
Back key to view the weather information.
Map
Traffic
Age of Selected
Weather Products
Terrain
Weather
NEXRAD
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-10 NEXRAD Weather
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 11-11 NEXRAD Weather Legend
Index
11-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.5.1
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver.
Colors on the NEXRAD display directly correlate to the level of detected
reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather can be very complex.
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply
put, certain types of weather reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a
radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the weather hazard level. For
instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative
to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy
reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the letter Z). The value of Z
increases as the returned signal strength increases.
11.1.5.2 NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to
determine cloud layers or precipitation characteristics. For example, it is
not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet hail, and rain.
Traffic
Terrain
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation
angle. An individual NEXRAD site cannot depict high altitude storms at
close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over the site.
Weather
• In the Cell Movement function, “Base” height is actually the height of
maximum radar reflection and that the “Base” and “Top” heights are based
on radar height and not MSL or AGL.
Services/
Music
• Each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers (2.15 NM). The intensity level reflected by each square
represents the highest level of NEXRAD data sampled within the area.
Nearest
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-9
Foreword
Block Area Is 4
km2 (2.15 NM2)
Getting
Started
Block Area Is 4
km2 (2.15 NM2)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 11-12 NEXRAD Data Blocks
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar
scans
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
Terrain
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
Weather
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as
mixed because it is unknown.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Utilities
System
Figure 11-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.5.3
Animating NEXRAD
Foreword
NOTE: Animated NEXRAD functionality is available in software v6.00 and
later.
When US or Canada NEXRAD is enabled for display and more than two
NEXRAD images have been received by the GTN, the NEXRAD display can be
animated on the SiriusXM Weather page. As new NEXRAD images are received,
the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN can
animate up to six NEXRAD images from oldest to newest, showing each for one
second and the newest for two seconds.
Touch to Start
NEXRAD Animation
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Stop
NEXRAD Animation
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 11-14 Animating NEXRAD
1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather page with NEXRAD
enabled for display, touch Menu and press the Play NXRD
key to start the NEXRAD animation.
NOTE: Weather Forecast, Cloud Tops, and Cell Movement will automatically
be turned off while NEXRAD is animating.
2. Touch Menu and then touch the Stop NXRD key to stop the
NEXRAD animation. The animation will also stop when leaving
the page or turning off NEXRAD on the SiriusXM weather page.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.1.6
Echo Tops
Echo Tops data shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or
clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at which precipitation is detected.
This information is determined from NEXRAD data.
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, the display of Echo Tops cannot
be shown with Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Echo
Tops key.
FPL
Direct-To
Product Age
Proc
Present Position
Wpt Info
Map
Echo Tops
Figure 11-15 Echo Tops
Traffic
2. Touch the Echo Tops key again to turn it off.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 11-16 Echo Tops Legend
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.7
Cloud Tops
Foreword
NOTE: Due to similarities in color schemes, it is not possible to display
Echo Tops and Cloud Tops at the same time.
Cloud tops data depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cloud
Tops key.
Product Age
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Cloud Tops
Present Position
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 11-17 Cloud Tops
2. Touch the Cloud Tops key again to turn it off.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-18 Cloud Tops Legend
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.1.8
Cell Movement
Cell Movement data shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by a ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares,
with direction of movement indicated with short, orange arrows.
NOTE: In the Cell Movement function, “Base” height is actually the height
of maximum radar reflection and that the “Base” and “Top” heights are
based on radar height and not MSL or AGL.
Com/Nav
FPL
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cell
Movement key.
Direct-To
Cell Movement (Position and
Direction of Movement)
Proc
Wpt Info
Product Age
Present Position
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-19 Cell Movement
Terrain
2. Touch a Cell Movement icon to view cell details.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Cell Speed
and Direction
Top Height Reported as
Maximum Altitude of
Reflected Precipitation
Base Height Reported as Altitude
of Maximum Reflectivity
Figure 11-20 Cell Movement Detail
Utilities
3. Touch the Cell Movement key again to turn it off.
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 11-21 Cell Movement Legend
Appendix
Index
11-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.9
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Foreword
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METerological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen's
METerological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
SIGMET/AIRMET key.
IFR Line
SIGMET Line
Present Position
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Turbulence Line
Proc
Figure 11-22 SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Wpt Info
2. Touch the SIGMET/AIRMET key again to turn it off.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-23 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-15
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.1.10 County Warnings
County Warnings data provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service. This can include
information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms, flood conditions, and
other natural disasters.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the County
Warnings key.
Com/Nav
FPL
County Warning Symbol
- Touch to Display Detail
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
County Warning Detail
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 11-24 County Warnings Data
Weather
2. After viewing the County Warning detail, touch the Back key
to return to the Map view.
Nearest
3. Touch the County Warnings key again to turn it off.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 11-25 County Warnings Legend
Appendix
Index
11-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.11 Freezing Level
Foreword
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and
location at which the Freezing Level is found. When no data is displayed for a
given altitude, the data for that altitude has not been received, or is out of date
and has been removed from the display. New data appears on the next update.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Freezing Level key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Freezing Level Line
Direct-To
Product Age
Present Position
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 11-26 Freezing Level
Map
2. Touch the Freezing Level key again to turn it off.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-27 Freezing Level Legend
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
11.1.12 METARs
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are updated hourly and are considered current. METARs typically
contain information about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation,
cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also
contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the METAR
key.
Direct-To
Proc
Product Age
Present Position
Wpt Info
Map
METAR Flags - Touch For Detail
Traffic
Figure 11-28 METARs
Terrain
2. Touch a METAR to show detailed information. Touch the Back
key to return to the Weather display.
Weather
Slider Shows More
Detail Available Touch and Drag
Display to View
Nearest
Services/
Music
METAR Detail
Utilities
Figure 11-29 METARs Detail
System
3. Touch the METAR key again to turn it off.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
METAR Symbol
Description
Foreword
VFR (ceiling greater than 3,000 ft. AGL and visibility greater than
five miles)
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1,000–3,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility three
to five miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility one mile
to less than three miles)
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility less than one mile)
Unknown
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Table 11-1 METAR Symbols
Proc
11.1.13 Cyclone
The current location of the cyclone is shown along with its projected path
with the date and time.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the Cyclone
key.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Projected Path with
Date and Time
Weather
Name, Date, Time,
and Current Position
of Cyclone
Nearest
Figure 11-30 Cyclone
2. Touch the Cyclone key again to turn it off.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-31 Cyclone Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-19
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.1.14 Lightning
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A yellow cross icon represents a strike that has occurred within a 2 kilometer
region. The exact location of the lightning is not displayed.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Lightning key.
Com/Nav
FPL
Lightning Strikes
Product Age
Direct-To
Proc
Present Position
Wpt Info
Figure 11-32 Lightning
2. Touch the Lightning key again to turn it off.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 11-33 Lightning Legend
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.15 City Forecast
City Forecast shows the current and future weather conditions for
various cities. The forecast period can be selected in the menu by pressing
Forecast Period.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the City
Forecast key.
City Forecast
Symbol
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 11-34 City Forecast
2. Touch the desired forecast time period (Current, 12 Hour, 24
Hour, 36 Hour, or 48 Hour) to display the desired information.
Touch and Drag Slider
to Scroll Selections
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Select Time
Terrain
Weather
Figure 11-35 Select Forecast Time Period
3. Touch any City Forecast symbol to show detailed information.
Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display.
Nearest
Services/
Music
City Forecast
Symbol
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-36 City Forecast Conditions Detail
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-21
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 11-37 City Forecast Legend
FPL
Direct-To
11.1.16 Surface Analysis
NOTE: In software v6.21 and earlier, Surface Analysis and City Forecast
are combined features of the Weather Forecast product.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
The Surface Analysis map shows regional weather forecasts for a selected
time period. The map shows high and low pressure centers and their associated
frontal movement.
1. While viewing the SiriusXM Weather Menu, touch the
Surface Analysis key.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-38 Surface Analysis and Map Legend
2. Touch the Forecast Period key to select the desired time
increment.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 11-39 Select Forecast Time Period
11-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.17 Winds Aloft
Foreword
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3,000 foot increments from
the surface up to 45,000 feet.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Winds Aloft key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Wind Symbols
Selected
Wind Altitude
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Select
Wind Altitude
Wpt Info
Figure 11-40 Winds Aloft
2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT – or + keys to increase or
decrease the reporting altitude of the winds aloft in 3,000
foot increments. The selected altitude is shown in a window
above the altitude keys.
3. Touch the Winds Aloft key again to turn it off.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 11-41 Winds Aloft Legend
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
11.1.18 Icing
The Icing product provides information about the current icing environment
and where it may occur between 1,000 feet and 30,000 feet in 3,000 foot
increments. Supercooled Large Droplets (SLD) Icing provides an alert to the
potential for freezing rain due to the presence of large, supercooled water
droplets. SLD data is shown between 1,000 feet and 30,000 feet in 3,000 foot
increments.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Icing key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Icing Potential
Shading
Wpt Info
Selected
Icing Altitude
Map
SLD Threat
Present Position
Touch to Select
Icing Altitude
Traffic
Figure 11-42 Icing
2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT – or + keys to increase or decrease
the reporting altitude of icing in 3,000 foot increments. The
selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Terrain
Weather
3. Touch the Icing key again to turn it off.
Nearest
G3 SiriusXM
Services/
Music
G4 SiriusXM
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-43 Icing Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.1.19 Turbulence
Foreword
The Turbulence product provides information about the potential for erratic
movement of air at high altitudes. Conditions are reported at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet in 3,000 foot increments.
1. While viewing the Weather Data Link menu, touch the
Turbulence key.
Product Age
Turbulence Shading
Present Position
Selected
Turbulence
Altitude
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Select
Turbulence Altitude
Wpt Info
Figure 11-44 Turbulence
2. Touch the WX Aloft ALT – or + keys to increase or decrease
the reporting altitude for turbulence in 3,000 foot increments.
The selected altitude is shown in a window above the altitude
keys.
3. Touch the Turbulence key again to turn it off.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-45 Turbulence Legend
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-25
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
11.1.20 AIREP/PIREP
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for
a particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported
or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low
in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are
issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
AIREP/PIREP key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Touch
Weather Info
Icon to View
AIREP Details
Touch Weather
Info Icon to View
PIREP/Details
Touch TFR
Icon to View
TFR Details
Figure 11-46 Weather Display With AIREP/PIREP Information Active
Traffic
2. Touch a weather information icon to view details for that item.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-47 AIREP and PIREP Detail
Utilities
3. Touch the Back key to remove the detailed information.
System
4. Touch the AIREP/PIREP key again to turn it off.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.2
Stormscope® Weather
11.2.1
Stormscope (Optional)
Foreword
NOTE: Refer to the WX-500 Pilot’s Guide for a detailed description of the
WX-500 Stormscope.
The Stormscope WX-500 Weather Mapping Sensor is a passive weather
avoidance system that detects electrical discharges associated with thunderstorms
within a 200 NM radius of the aircraft. The Stormscope measures relative
bearing and distance of thunderstorm-related electrical activity and reports
the information to the display. Interfaces are currently only available for the
WX-500 Stormscope System.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
View
360
Arc
Cell
Strike
Weather
Mode
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-48 Stormscope Functional Diagram
For lightning display interpretation, study the examples located in the
WX-500 Stormscope Pilot's Guide that are designed to help you relate the cell or
strike patterns shown on the display to the size and location of thunderstorms
that may be near your aircraft.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-27
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Getting
Started
6
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
60
Com/Nav
120
FPL
180
Table 11-2 Stormscope Symbols
Direct-To
1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key (and then the
Stormscope key if present) to reach the Stormscope function.
Proc
Orientation Annunciation
HDG N/A - Heading is
Not Available
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Range Ring
Lightning Strikes
Touch
to Clear
Lightning
Strikes
Weather
Lightning Display Mode
(Cell or Strike)
Lightning Strike Rate
Figure 11-49 Stormscope Display (360º Display View Shown)
Nearest
2. Touch the Menu key to setup the Stormscope display.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Lightning
Display Mode
(Cell) Selected
360º View
Selected
Figure 11-50 Stormscope Menu
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.2.2
Clearing the Stormscope Page
Foreword
Routinely clearing the Stormscope page of all discharge points is a
good way to determine if a storm is building or dissipating. In a building
storm, discharge points reappear faster and in larger numbers. In a dissipating storm, discharge points appear slower and in smaller numbers.
1. While viewing the Weather Stormscope page, touch MENU.
2. Touch the Clear Strikes key to clear lightning strikes.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: The GTN displays Stormscope data with or without a heading source.
If no heading source is available, the "HDG N/A" annunciation appears in
the upper right corner of the page. When flying without a heading source,
the pilot must clear all strikes following each heading change.
11.2.3
Proc
Wpt Info
Changing the Stormscope Display View
Map
The Lightning page displays either a 360° or a 120° viewing angle.
1. While viewing the Weather Stormscope page, touch MENU.
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the 360° or Arc to select the display view.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-51 Stormscope 360º and Arc Display Views
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-29
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
11.2.4
Changing the Stormscope Data Mode
Cell display mode uses a clustering program to locate storm cells instead of
individual discharge points. This mode is most useful during periods of heavy
storm activity. Strike display mode is used during periods of light electrical
activity. It is useful in plotting initial lightning discharges associated with a
building thunderstorm.
1. While viewing the Weather Stormscope page, touch MENU.
FPL
2. Touch the Cell or Strike key to select the display mode.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
11.2.5
Changing the Stormscope Data Display Range
Stormscope data can be displayed on the Map page 2,000 NM zoom scale,
but the data only goes out as far as the Stormscope can report (200 NM). The
500 NM zoom scale will display all lightning data. Scales greater than 500 NM
do not display any additional Stormscope data.
1. While viewing the Stormscope page, touch the In and Out
keys to display a larger or smaller area.
11.2.6
Displaying Stormscope Data on the Map Page
The Map page displays cell or strike information using yellow lightning strike
symbology overlaid on a moving map. This added capability improves situational
awareness, which in turn makes it much easier for the pilot to relate storm activity
to airports, NAVAIDs, obstacles and other ground references. Refer to section
8.1.1.6 for details about viewing Stormscope data on the Map.
NOTE: The selected lightning display type, cell or strike, will be shown the
same on both the Stormscope and the Map pages.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-30
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.3
Connext Weather
Connext Weather is an optional feature available with the Iridium® satellite
system that is interfaced through the optional Garmin GSR 56. Connext Weather
may be viewed in the Weather and Map functions. The Weather pages may
be oriented to either Track Up, Heading, or North Up. Both Connext and XM
Weather may be installed and selected individually.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
PRECIP
Lightning
IR Satellite
METAR
PIREP
Winds Aloft
Surface
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
3,000 ft ... 45,000 ft
Terrain
SIGMET/AIRMET
Connext Settings
Coverage Region
Present Position
Destination
Flight Plan
Distance
Waypoint
Waypoint Ident
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Data Request
Request Data
Auto Request
Cov Diameter
Datalink Status
Utilities
System
Messages
Orientation
Legend
Symbols
Figure 11-52 Connext Weather Functional Diagram
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-31
Foreword
Getting
Started
Connext Weather coverage is available throughout most of Europe, Canada, and
the U.S. Additional radar coverage areas are added continuously. For the latest radar
information, visit https://fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/connext/worldwide-weather/.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Various world-wide weather subscription package options provide weather
reporting for most of Europe, Canada, Australia, and the U.S.
Com/Nav
11.3.1
NOTE: A system can be configured for multiple weather products, but only
one may be selected for viewing in the Weather or Map pages at a given
time.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Using Connext Satellite Weather Products
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link page or the
Navigation Map page, the age of the data is displayed on the screen. The age of
the product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled
on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
selectable intervals.
Weather products expire at intervals based on each product. When the data
expires, it is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data is
consistent with what is currently being broadcast by Connext Satellite Radio
services. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed from the time the
data is received, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-32
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.3.2
Connext Weather Menu
Foreword
The Connext Weather page is customized by selecting options from the
Connext Weather and the Connext Settings Menus. The Connext Weather Menu
options include choices for Weather Setup and displaying selected weather
products. The Connext Settings Menu makes settings for the Coverage Region
and Data Request frequency.
1. While viewing the Connext Weather page, touch the MENU
key to display the Connext Weather Menu. Touch the desired
keys to toggle the weather product.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 11-53 Connext Weather Menu
Traffic
2. Touch and slide the display to view the complete menu.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-54 More Connext Weather Menu
3. Touch the Connext Settings key to make detailed settings
for the Connext Weather display.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-33
Foreword
11.3.3
Getting
Started
Connext Settings
Touch to
Manually
Request Data
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Auto Request
Setting
Com/Nav
FPL
Coverage
Region Settings
Datalink
Status
Coverage
Diameter
Direct-To
Figure 11-55 Connext Settings Menu
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
11.3.3.1
Connext Data Request
It is necessary to request the downloading of weather products. Requests can
be sent manually or set to automatically update at a selected rate. The Connext
weather data may be updated at any time regardless of the automatic update
timing by selecting a Manual Request. When multiple requests are made, some
products are merged with the old data (SIGMETs/AIRMETs, TAFs, TFRs, and
METARs), but the old data of other products is discarded.
Weather
1. While viewing the Connext Settings Menu, touch the
Request Data key to manually request data.
Nearest
2. Touch the Auto Request key to set the Auto Request Period.
Services/
Music
NOTE: The Auto Request function is only enabled if the GTN is connected
directly to GSR 56 (software v6.30 and later).
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch to Select
Request Period
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 11-56 Select Auto Request Period
Index
11-34
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the Cancel Request key to cancel a request in progress.
Touch to Cancel
Request
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
Request Period
Time Remaining Until
Next Request
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 11-57 Cancelling A Request
11.3.3.2
Connext Data Request Coverage Region
1. While viewing the Connext Settings Menu, touch the
Coverage Region key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-58 Connext Weather Coverage Region Menu
Terrain
2. Touch the desired settings to customize the Connext Weather
display.
Present Position Data Request
Nearest
Touch the Present Position key to request that weather
information will be shown around your present position.
Destination Connext Data Request
Touch the Destination key to request that weather information
will be shown around the destination waypoint in the flight plan.
Flight Plan Data Request
Touch the Flight Plan key to request that weather information
will be shown around the active flight plan.
Flight Plan Distance Data Request
Touch the Distance key to request that weather information will
be shown for the selected distance along the active flight plan.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Weather
11-35
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Waypoint Connext Data Request
1.
Getting
Started
2. Select the waypoint and then press ENT.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Diameter/Route Width Connext Data Request
FPL
Direct-To
Touch the Waypoint key to request that weather information
will be shown around the selected waypoint.
11.3.3.3
After selecting a coverage option in the previous section, select
the desired Diameter and then press ENT.
Connext Weather Map Orientation
1. While viewing the Connext Weather Menu, touch the
Orientation key.
Proc
2. Touch the orientation choices of North Up, Track Up, and
Heading Up and to accept the displayed value and return to
the Connext Weather Menu.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Touch to Select
Map Orientation
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 11-59 Connext Weather Map Orientation
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
11.3.4
Register with Connext
To access Connext Weather, visit flyGarmin.com and create a Connext
Satellite Services account. Be ready to provide the GTN system ID, airframe
information (model, tail number), and Iridium serial number. Garmin will issue
an access code for entry on the Connext Registration page. If access code and
system ID are correct, the airframe registration details will display.
1. While viewing Connext Settings Menu, touch the Datalink
Status key.
Appendix
Index
11-36
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Current
Registration Info
Iridium
Signal Level
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to
Register
Phone and
Datalink Status
Getting
Started
Com/Nav
Figure 11-60 GSR 56 Status
FPL
2. Touch the Connext Registration key to display the Connext
Registration page.
Touch to Enter
Access Code
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to
Register
Wpt Info
Current
Registration Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-61 Connext Registration Page
Terrain
3. Touch the Access Code key to enter the appropriate code
and then touch the Enter key.
Weather
4. Touch the Register key to complete the process. The GTN will
contact the Connext servers using the GSR 56 transceiver.
Nearest
Deactivate Unit Registration with Connext
Registration of the GTN unit with Connext can be deactivated so that the unit
can no longer make requests to Connext. This does not cancel the subscription.
1. While viewing the Connext Registration page, touch the Access
Code field and press CLR to remove the access code.
2. Any weather requests will now fail and the system will no
longer be linked to the Connext account.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-37
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.3.5
Connext Weather Product Age
The weather product refresh rate represents the interval at which Connext
Satellites broadcast new signals that may or may not contain new weather data.
It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is
received by the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is refreshed at intervals that are
defined and controlled by Connext and its data vendors.
Com/Nav
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
11.3.6
TFRs
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions.
Traffic
Figure 11-62 Connext TFR Legend
Terrain
1. Touch a TFR symbol on the Weather page to view details.
Weather
Nearest
TFR Detail
Services/
Music
Touch TFR Symbol
to View Details
Utilities
Figure 11-63 Connext TFR Detail
System
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-38
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.3.7
Precipitation (PRECIP) Data
Graphical data is overlaid on the map indicating the rainfall detected by
ground based radar for a specific area. The colors indicating increasing levels
of rainfall progresses from light green for light rainfall to red for heavy rainfall.
Review the Limitations section in the front of this guide for the limitations that
apply to the Connext data. Rainfall data is color coded as follows:
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 11-64 Connext PRECIP Weather Map Display and Legend
Traffic
Product Age
Terrain
Precipitation
Weather
Nearest
Figure 11-65 Connext Precipitation Data
The "No Coverage" color indicates that no data is available for that area, and
rainfall in that area is unknown.
When weather data is received, the airborne system will display that data for
20 minutes. If no new data has been received for a given area, the rainfall will
be removed after 20 minutes and the area will revert back to the "No Coverage"
color.
The Connext Weather Function is based on a ground-to-air data link and
requires that the appropriate ground systems are broadcasting weather data and
the aircraft is within reception range of the Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT).
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-39
Foreword
11.3.7.1
NOTE: Animated Precipitation functionality is available in software v6.00
and later.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Animating Precipitation Data
When Precipitation Data is enabled for display and more than two
Precipitation images have been received by the GTN, the Precipitation display
can be animated on the Connext Weather page. As new Precipitation images are
received, the GTN will automatically store them for future animation. The GTN
can animate up to six Precipitation images from oldest to newest, showing each
for one second and the newest for two seconds.
1. While viewing the Connext Weather page with Precipitation
enabled for display, touch Menu and then press the
Play PRCP key to start the Precipitation animation.
2. Touch Menu and then touch the Stop PRCP key to stop the
Precipitation animation. The animation will also stop when
leaving the page or turning off Precipitation on the Connext
weather page.
11.3.8
Lightning
Lightning data shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning
strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two kilometer
(1.08 NM) region. The exact location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
Only cloud to ground strikes are reported in the US and extreme southern
Canada (cloud to cloud strikes are not reported).
Services/
Music
Lightning
Symbol
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-66 Connext Data Link Lightning and Legend
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-40
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.3.9
Infrared Satellite Data
Infrared Satellite data is available over North America and Europe and depicts
cloud top temperatures from satellite imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate
cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes. Information is updated every
half hour.
IR Satellite
Product Age
IR Satellite
Coverage
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-67 Connext Infrared Satellite Data Map Display and Legend
Terrain
11.3.10 METARs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa),
except in the United States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Weather
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation database
service area.
Services/
Music
METAR (METeorological Aerodrome Report), known as an Aviation Routine
Weather Report, is the standard format for current weather observations.
METARs are generally updated hourly, but some site are more frequent. Special
updates are done as conditions warrant. METARs typically contain information
about the temperature, dew point, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud
heights, visibility, and barometric pressure. They can also contain information
on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical data. METARs are shown
as colored flags at airports that provide them.
Nearest
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-41
Foreword
METAR Symbol
Description
VFR (ceiling greater than 3,000 ft. AGL and visibility greater than
five miles)
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1,000–3,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility three
to five miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility one mile
to less than three miles)
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility less than one mile)
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Unknown
Direct-To
Table 11-3 METAR Symbols
1. While viewing the Connext Weather page, touch the airport
with a METAR flag.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
METAR Detail
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-68 Connext Weather - Graphic METARs and Legend
Utilities
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather page.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-42
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.3.11 PIREPs
Foreword
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information for
a particular route of flight. When significant weather conditions are reported
or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain non-forecast adverse weather conditions, such as low
in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are
issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
1. While viewing the Connext Weather page, touch a PIREP
symbol.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
PIREP Detail
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-69 Connext Weather - PIREPs and Legend
Terrain
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather page.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-43
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.3.12 Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in 3,000 foot increments from
the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL. Pressing the WX Aloft ALT + or – soft keys
steps down or up in 3,000 foot increments.
Product Age
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Winds Aloft
Altitude Selection
Proc
Winds Aloft Symbol
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-70 Connext Weather - Winds Aloft and Legend
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Winds Aloft Altitude
The Winds Aloft Altitude option allows you to select the altitude for the
Winds Aloft weather product. Altitude can be selected in 3,000 foot increments
from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Pressing the WX Aloft ALT + or – soft keys steps down or up in 3,000 foot
increments. In the figure shown above, 6,000 feet is selected and Winds Aloft
data is shown for winds reported at an altitude of 6,000 feet.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-44
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.3.13 SIGMETs and AIRMETs
Foreword
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s
METeorological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft. A Convective SIGMET is issued for
hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather
condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
SIGMET/AIRMET
Detail
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 11-71 Connext Weather Page - AIRMETs/SIGMETs
When enabled, SIGMET/AIRMETs advise the pilot of potentially hazardous
weather. SIGMETs are directed to all aircraft. AIRMETs are intended for light
aircraft. SIGMET/AIRMET data covers icing, turbulence, dust, and volcanic ash
as issued by the National Weather Service. The update rate is selected in the
Connext Settings Menu.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 11-72 Connext Weather - AIRMETs/SIGMETs Detail and Legend
Services/
Music
When enabled, the following AIRMETs are available for display:
• Icing
Utilities
• Turbulence
System
• IFR conditions
• Mountain obscuration
Messages
• Surface winds
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-45
Foreword
11.4
NOTE: FIS-B information is to be used for pilot planning decisions and pilot nearterm decisions focused on avoiding areas of inclement weather that are beyond
visual range or where poor visibility precludes visual acquisition of inclement
weather. FIS-B weather and NAS status information may be used as follows:
(a) To promote pilot awareness of own ship location with respect to
reported weather, including hazardous meteorological conditions,
NAS status indicators, and enhance pilot planning decisions and pilot
near-term decision-making. (b) To cue the pilot to communicate with the Air Traffic Control controller,
Flight Service Station specialist, operator dispatch, or airline operations
control center for general and mission critical meteorological information,
NAS status conditions, or both.
FIS-B information, including, weather information, NOTAMs, and TFR areas,
are intended for the sole purpose of assisting in long- and near-term planning
decision making. The system lacks sufficient resolution and updating
capability necessary for aerial maneuvering associated with immediate
decisions.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
FIS-B Weather
The Flight Information Services (FIS-B) function is capable of displaying text
and graphic weather information with GDL 88 and GTX 345 installations. No
subscription for FIS-B services is required.
The FIS-B Function is a graphic weather display capable of displaying
graphical weather information on UAT equipped installations. Graphical data is
overlaid on the map indicating the rainfall detected by ground based radar for a
specific area. The colors indicating increasing levels of rainfall progresses from
light green for light rainfall to magenta for heavy rainfall. Review the Limitations
section in the front of this guide for the limitations that apply to the FIS-B data.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-46
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Rainfall data is color coded as follows:
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 11-73 FIS-B Weather Precipitation Legend
Gray shaded areas indicate that data is not available or that no data has been
received for a requested area. Gray shades may also indicate that the rainfall rate
for a given area is undetermined.
The FIS-B Function is based on a ground-to-air data link and requires that
the appropriate ground systems are broadcasting weather data and the aircraft is
within reception range of the Ground Broadcast Transceiver (GBT).
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-47
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
NEXRAD
FPL
Off
CONUS
Regional
Combined
Cloud Tops
Icing
Turbulence
Wind/Temp Aloft
Direct-To
Proc
1,000 ft ... 45,000 ft
Wpt Info
Lightning
METAR
PIREP
SIGMET
Center WX Advisory
G-AIRMET
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Off
Weather
Current (Auto)
All Forecasts
G-AIRMET Filters
Orientation
Nearest
Track Up
Services/
Music
Datalink Status
Legend
Utilities
Heading Up
North Up
Figure 11-74 FIS-B Weather Functional Diagram
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to
determine the age of the weather information shown by the data link
weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by
the data link weather product may be significantly older than the indicated
weather product age.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-48
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.1
FIS-B Operation
Weather data reception time is shown in the upper right corner of the screen.
An indicated time shows if the aircraft is currently within reception coverage
of a ground station with weather broadcast capabilities. The ground system
determines the weather coverage area and extent of data that is transmitted by
each ground station.
Due to similarities in depiction, the following FIS-B Weather products are
mutually exclusive: NEXRAD, Cloud Tops, Icing, Turbulence, Winds and
Temperatures Aloft, and Lightning.
1. From the Home page, touch the Weather key on the Home
page and then touch the FIS-B Weather key (if necessary).
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Age of Selected
Weather Products
NEXRAD
Selection
Touch + or - to
Select Map Range
Figure 11-75 FIS-B Weather Page (NEXRAD Key Shown)
2. While viewing the FIS-B Weather page, touch the Menu key
to configure the Data Link Weather page.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch Keys to
Select Weather
Product
Green Bar
Indicates Selected
Product
Weather Overlay
Map Orientation
Touch to View
Datalink Status
Touch Legend Key
to Display Legend
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-76 FIS-B Weather Data Link Menu
3. Once you selected what items you want to display, touch BACK
to return to the FIS-B Weather page.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-49
Foreword
11.4.2
FIS-B NEXRAD
WARNING: Never use NEXRAD weather for maneuvering in, near, or
around areas of hazardous weather. NEXRAD images are snapshots of past
weather data. They are not safe for use as real time depictions of nearby
weather activity.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
CONUS NEXRAD
Coverage Shown
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 11-77 FIS-B CONUS NEXRAD
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Out of CONUS
NEXRAD
Coverage
CONUS Selected
on NEXRAD Key
NEXRAD weather radar displays a mosaic of precipitation data, colored
according to reflectivity. Composite reflectivity images depict the highest radar
energy received from multiple antenna tilt angles at various altitudes. Base
reflectivity images depict radar returns from the lowest antenna tilt angle.
Per AC 00-63A, FIS-B CONUS and Regional NEXRAD are composite reflectivity
images.
The precipitation intensity level reflected by each pixel represents the highest
level of composite radar reflectivity data sampled in that location.
Out of Regional
NEXRAD
Coverage
Nearest
Within Regional
NEXRAD Area
but Coverage
Not Available
Services/
Music
Utilities
Regional Selected
on NEXRAD Key
Figure 11-78 Regional NEXRAD
System
Messages
Symbols
A clear understanding of ground-based Doppler weather radar capabilities will
allow you to interpret the NEXRAD weather imagery in the safest way possible.
The National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration hosts a description of
the technology on its website: https://www.weather.gov/jetstream/doppler_intro
Appendix
Index
11-50
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.2.1
Radar Data Animations
Foreword
NOTE: Animated NEXRAD functionality is available in software v6.00 and
later.
To depict trending weather movements over time, an animation
function stitches the last three to six received radar images
together in sequence, from oldest to newest, and replays them on
a continuous loop.
Play and stop controls are active when three or more NEXRAD
images are available for playback.
11.4.2.2
CONUS and Regional NEXRAD
To depict trending weather movements over time, an animation function
stitches the last three to six received radar images together in sequence, from
oldest to newest, and replays them on a continuous loop.
Regional NEXRAD
Boundary Shown
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Out Of CONUS
NEXRAD Coverage
Traffic
Terrain
CONUS &
Regional
Selected on
NEXRAD Key
NEXRAD Weather
Shown
Weather
Nearest
Figure 11-79 FIS-B CONUS and Regional NEXRAD Combined
Depending on the locations of received FIS-B ground stations, Regional
NEXRAD coverage can extend as far as 250 nm around an aircraft’s position.
Aircraft flying at higher altitudes typically receive data from more ground
stations than aircraft flying at low altitudes.
FIS-B NEXRAD does not differentiate between liquid and frozen precipitation
types.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-51
Foreword
Getting
Started
Source options are selectable from the weather setup menu or the NEXRAD
key at the bottom left of the FIS-B Weather page. The key label changes to reflect
the active source.
CONUS
Regional
Combined
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Type
Description
CONUS
• Large, low-resolution weather image for the entire continental
U.S.
Proc
Wpt Info
Regional
Map
• Pixels are 7.5 min (7.5 nm = 13.89 km) wide by 5 min
(5 nm = 9.26 km) wide
• High-resolution weather image with limited range, centered
around each broadcasting ground station
• Pixels are 1.5 min (1.5 nm = 2.78 km) wide by 1 min
(1 nm = 1.852 km) tall
Traffic
• Each weather pixel varies with latitude. Above 60º latitude,
pixel block width doubles to 3 min/nm for regional maps
Combined • Both CONUS and Regional NEXRAD images display
simultaneously
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
• White hash mark indicates regional boundary
Services/
Music
• Animation functionality not available
Table 11-4 FIS-B NEXRAD Types
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-52
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.2.3
NEXRAD Abnormalities
There are possible abnormalities regarding displayed NEXRAD images. Some,
but not all, causes of abnormal displayed information include:
• Ground Clutter
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes, when the radar antenna points directly at the sun
Com/Nav
• Military aircraft deploy metallic dust which can cause alterations in radar
scans
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Scheduled maintenance may put a radar off-line
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Affected Areas
Wpt Info
Any area in the continental United States (CONUS) or Alaska where the
distance from ADS-B ground stations, or the combined effect of distance and
low altitude, is sufficiently great may cause poor reception. To find the latest
ground station coverage, visit faa.gov.
Reception will improve in some affected areas as the FAA completes the
NextGen ADS-B ground station infrastructure. However, due to line-of-sight
broadcast characteristics, operators with properly installed and functioning
equipment may still receive incomplete FIS-B data when signal reception is
limited by the distance from ground stations combined with a low altitude.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-53
Foreword
The example below displays an area where FIS-B data is degraded due to
poor reception:
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
No Coverage
No Coverage
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 11-80 FIS-B Reception Unavailable
Proc
NOTE: No coverage areas are semi-transparent in software v6.60
and later.
Wpt Info
Map
Selecting NEXRAD in the FIS-B Weather Menu
Traffic
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather page, touch the Menu key
to select the NEXRAD choice.
Terrain
2. Touch the NEXRAD key to select Off, Regional, CONUS, or
Combined NEXRAD.
Weather
Nearest
Touch the Desired
NEXRAD Source
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-81 NEXRAD Source Selection
System
3. Touch the Back key to return to the FIS-B Weather Menu.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-54
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.3
FIS-B TFRs
Foreword
Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) provide detailed information for local
short term restrictions. The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 11-82 FIS-B TFR Legend
1. Touch a TFR symbol on the Weather page to view details.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch TFR Symbol
to View Details
Map
Traffic
Terrain
TFR Detail
Weather
Nearest
Figure 11-83 FIS-B TFR Detail
Services/
Music
2. Touch the Back key to return to the Weather display.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-55
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.4.4
Cloud Tops
Cloud tops indicate the altitude of the highest visible portions of a cloud at
the time of measurement.
FIS-B cloud top data is generated by a computer model and has limited
accuracy compared to actual conditions.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 11-84 FIS-B Cloud Tops
Map
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the
Cloud Tops key.
Traffic
Terrain
11.4.5
Lightning
FIS-B lightning strikes display as a lightning bolt.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Figure 11-85 FIS-B Lightning
Messages
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the
Lightning key.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-56
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.6
FIS-B METARs
When enabled, graphic METARs (METeorological Aviation Reports) are shown
as colored flags at airports that provide METAR reports. Press the METARs key to
enable or disable METARs. Refer to the Legend for a description of the color code.
The update rate is every five minutes.
METAR Symbol
Description
VFR (ceiling greater than 3,000 ft. AGL and visibility greater than
five miles)
Marginal VFR (ceiling 1,000–3,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility three
to five miles)
IFR (ceiling 500 to below 1,000 ft. AGL and/or visibility one mile
to less than three miles)
Low IFR (ceiling below 500 ft. AGL or visibility less than one mile)
Unknown
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Table 11-5 METAR Symbols
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather page, touch the Menu key
to select the METAR choice. Touch an airport symbol for more
METAR detail.
Product Age
Touch Airport for
METAR Detail
METAR Flags
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
METAR Detail
System
Messages
Figure 11-86 METARS Map Symbols and Detail
Symbols
2. Touch the METAR key to toggle METARS on or off.
Appendix
3. Touch the Back key to return to the FIS-B Weather page.
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-57
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.4.7
FIS-B SIGMETs and Textual AIRMETs
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METerological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s
METerological Information) are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather
considered of importance to aircraft. The update rate is approximately every 20
minutes.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 11-87 FIS-B SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the SIGMET
AIRMET key.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Surface Winds
Turbulence Line
Weather
Mountain Obscured
Figure 11-88 FIS-B SIGMETs and AIRMETs Map
Nearest
2. Touch a SIGMET/AIRMET line to view details. Touch the Back
key to return to the Weather display.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-89 SIGMET and AIRMET Details
Symbols
3. Touch the SIGMET/AIRMET key again to turn it off.
Appendix
Index
11-58
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.8
Graphical AIRMETs
Foreword
Graphical AIRMETs (G-AIRMETs) display more weather phenomena than
textual AIRMETs, while eliminating the need to interpret raw text. Updates
occur four times daily. Filtering options allow you to mitigate page clutter.
Forecast Settings
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Current (Auto): Displays active graphical records based on the current
UTC. The function automatically switches from 0 hr to 3 hr forecasts.
Com/Nav
All Forecasts: Displays the most recent, non-expired graphical records.
FPL
Off: Turns the G-AIRMETs product off.
Direct-To
Forecast Periods are 0 hr, 3 hr, and 6 hr.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-90 FIS-B G-AIRMET Forecast Settings
Filter Settings
Terrain
Filters include: Freezing Level, Icing, IFR, Low-level Wind Shear, Mountain
Obscuration, Surface Winds, and Turbulence.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-91 FIS-B G-AIRMET Filters
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-59
Foreword
Viewing Graphical AIRMETs
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the
G-AIRMET key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 11-92 FIS-B G-AIRMETs
Wpt Info
2. Select between Current (Auto), All Forecasts, or Off.
Map
3. Select one or more filters.
Traffic
4. Touch a G-AIRMET line to view details. Touch the
Back key to return to the Weather display.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 11-93 G-AIRMET Details
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-60
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.9
Center Weather Advisory
Foreword
These advisories communicate en route and terminal weather conditions
expected to occur within the next two hours.
Information is valid for up to 2 hours.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 11-94 FIS-B Center Weather Advisory
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the
Center WX Advisory key.
4. To u c h a C WA l i n e t o v i e w d e t a i l s. To u c h t h e
Back key to return to the Weather display.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-61
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
11.4.10 FIS-B Winds and Temperatures Aloft
Winds and Temperatures Aloft data shows the forecast wind speed, direction,
and Temperature at selected altitudes. Altitudes can be selected in increments
from 1,000 feet up to 53,000 feet. The update rate is every 12 hours.
1. While viewing the Data Link Weather menu, touch the
Wind/Temp Aloft key.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 11-95 Winds Aloft
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the WX ALT – or + keys to increase or decrease the
reporting altitude of the winds aloft in increments. The selected
altitude is shown in a window above the altitude keys.
Weather
3. Touch the Wind/Temp Aloft key again to turn it off.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-62
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.11 Icing
Foreword
NOTE: Due to the incremental and overlapping nature of the FIS broadcast,
timestamps, regional coverage, and map data availability may vary with
altitude for computer generated icing forecasts.
Icing potential is not a forecast, but a presentation of icing potential at the
time of analysis. For FIS-B, the icing timestamp shows the valid time in UTC.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the
presence of relatively large, super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing
drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted as black and pink
blocks over the icing colors.
The icing potential shows a graphic view of the current icing conditions.
Categories vary depending on the configured weather source. For FIS-B, they
include: Trace, Light, Moderate, and Heavy.
Altitude Range: 2,000 to 24,000 ft.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 11-96 FIS-B Icing
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the
Icing key.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-63
Foreword
11.4.12 Turbulence
NOTE: Due to the incremental and overlapping nature of the FIS broadcast,
timestamps, regional coverage, and map data availability may vary with
altitude for FIS-B turbulence forecasts.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe, or extreme. Turbulence
data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
For FIS-B, the turbulence timestamp shows the valid time in UTC.
Altitude Range: 2,000 to 24,000 ft (at 2,000 ft intervals).
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Figure 11-97 FIS-B Turbulence
Terrain
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather menu, touch the
Turbulence key.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-64
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
11.4.13 FIS-B PIREPs
Foreword
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) provide timely weather information. When
significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC)
facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain non-forecast
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions,
wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent
(UUA). The update rate is approximately every 20 minutes.
1. While viewing the FIS-B Weather page, touch the Menu key
to select the PIREP choice.
2. Touch the PIREP key to toggle PIREPs on or off.
3. Touch a weather information symbol to view details for that
item.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Routine PIREP
Symbol (Blue).
Touch for Details.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
PIREP Details
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 11-98 PIREP Information Detail and Legend
4. Touch the Back key to remove the detailed information.
Symbols
Appendix
5. Touch the PIREP key again to turn it off.
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
11-65
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
11-66
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
12
NEAREST
Foreword
The Nearest function provides detailed information for the 25 nearest airports,
VORs, VRPs, NDBs, Intersections, and User waypoints within 200 NM of your
current position. In addition, the Nearest pages include the five nearest Flight
Service Station (FSS) and center (ARTCC/FIR) points of communication and alert
you to any Special Use (SUA) or Controlled Airspace you may be in or near.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Nearest Waypoint
Types
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 12-1 Nearest Page
Map
Traffic
Terrain
List
List
Nearest
Services/
Music
List
List
Wpt Info
Wpt Info
Frequency
Wpt Info
Wpt Info
Weather
List
List
List
Frequency
Wpt Info
Utilities
List
List
Wpt Info
Freq
List
Airspace Info
System
Wpt Info
Frequency
Messages
Figure 12-2 Nearest Page Functional Map
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
12-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
12.1
Select a Nearest Page
The available waypoint types are shown on the Nearest page. Touch the key
to display the nearest 25 waypoint types (FSS and ARTCC will display up to five
items). Not all 25 nearest waypoints can be displayed on the corresponding Nearest
page at one time. The Nearest page displays detailed information for five nearest
items.
1. On the Home page, touch the Nearest key.
FPL
2. Touch the desired waypoint type (Airport, VOR, etc.) and then
touch the Up and Down keys on the lower right of the display
to navigate through the list of available items. You can also
touch an item on the list and drag your finger to scroll the list.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
3. Touch the highlighted item to view more detailed information.
4. To navigate Direct-To the waypoint you're viewing, press the
Direct-To key. The waypoint will be loaded into the Waypoint
window of the Direct-To function.
Map
Traffic
5. Touch the Activate key to navigate directly to that waypoint.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
12.2
Nearest Airport
Foreword
The Nearest Airport page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing and distance,
and the length of the longest runway for the 25 nearest airports (within 200 NM
of your present position).
The Nearest Airport page can be configured to exclude shorter runways or
undesirable runway surface types, so that the corresponding airports do not
appear on the list. You may wish to use this feature to exclude seaplane bases,
heliports, or runway lengths which would be difficult or impossible to land
upon. Refer to System - Setup - Nearest Airport Criteria for information about
configuring the Nearest Airport display criteria.
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the Airport key. A
list of the nearest 25 airports within 200 NM will be listed.
Scroll Bar Indicates
More Items on the List
Airport
Identifier
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Airport Information
Up/Down Keys Indicate
More Items on the List
Figure 12-3 Nearest Airport
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
3. Touch the Airport Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info
page for the selected airport.
Airport Information
Referenced to
Current Position
Touch a Key for More
Airport Information
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-4 Nearest Airport Waypoint Info
4. Touch one of the keys (Map, Procedures, Runways, etc.) for
more information about the selected airport.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
12-3
Foreword
12.3
Nearest Intersection (INT)
Getting
Started
The Nearest Intersection page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing and
distance to the 25 nearest intersections (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the INT key. A list
of the nearest 25 Intersections within 200 NM will be listed.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Slider Indicates More
Items on the List
Com/Nav
FPL
Intersection
Identifier
Intersection
Information
Direct-To
Arrow Indicates More
Items on the List
Proc
Figure 12-5 Nearest Intersection List
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Map
Touch Screen and Drag
Finger to View More
Items on the List
Traffic
Touch Arrows to View
More Items on the List
Terrain
Figure 12-6 Scrolling Down the Nearest Intersection List
Weather
3. Touch the Intersection Identifier key to show the Waypoint
Info page for the selected Intersection.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Intersection
Information Referenced
to Current Position
Utilities
System
Touch to View
Intersection Map Detail
Messages
Figure 12-7 Nearest Intersection Waypoint Detail
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
12.4
Nearest VOR
Foreword
The Nearest VOR page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing and distance
to the 25 nearest VORs (within 200 NM of your present position). For each VOR
listed, the Nearest VOR page also indicates the frequency and may be used to
quickly tune the Nav radio to the nearby VOR (GTN 650 only).
Touch the VOR Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby field of
the Nav window. Touch the Nav Active window to flip/flop the Nav frequencies.
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the VOR key. A list
of the nearest 25 VORs within 200 NM will be listed.
Nearest VOR
Frequency
Nearest VOR
Identifier
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Distance
from Current
Position to VOR
Bearing
from Current
Position to VOR
Getting
Started
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-8 Nearest VOR List and Information
Traffic
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Terrain
3. Touch the VOR Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info
page for the selected VOR.
Touch to Select
New Waypoint
VOR Information
Referenced to
Current Position
Additional VOR
Information
Touch to Place
Freq in Standby
Touch to View
VOR Map Detail
Figure 12-9 Nearest VOR Waypoint Information
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
12-5
4. Touch the Frequency key on this page or from the Nearest
VOR List page to place the selected frequency into the Nav
Standby window. Touch the Preview key to view map detail.
Foreword
Getting
Started
VOR Frequency Inserted
into Standby Window.
Touch to Flip/Flop Freqs
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
VOR Map Preview
FPL
Figure 12-10 Nearest VOR Frequency Entry
Direct-To
12.5
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Nearest VRP
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 or later.
The nearest VRP page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing, and distance to
the 25 nearest VRPs (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the VRP key.
Traffic
Distance from
Current Position
to VRP
Nearest VRP
Identifier
Terrain
Weather
Bearing from
Current Position
to VRP
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 12-11 Nearest VRPs
Utilities
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
System
3. Touch the VRP Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info page
for the selected VRP.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
VRP Information
Referenced to
Current Position
Additional VRP
Information
Figure 12-12 Waypoint Info - Visual Reporting Point
12.6
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Nearest NDB
The Nearest NDB page displays the identifier, symbol, bearing, distance and
frequency to the 25 nearest NDBs (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the NDB key. A list
of the nearest 25 NDBs within 200 NM will be listed.
Touch NDB
Identifier for
More Detail
Foreword
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
NDB
Information
Traffic
Arrows Indicate
More Items on
the List
Weather
Figure 12-13 Nearest NDB
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Nearest
3. Touch the NDB Identifier key to show the Waypoint Info
page for the selected NDB.
Touch to Select
New Waypoint
NDB Information
Referenced to
Current Position
Additional NDB
Information
Terrain
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch to View
NDB Map Detail
Symbols
Figure 12-14 Nearest NDB Waypoint Information
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
12-7
Foreword
12.7
Getting
Started
The Nearest User Waypoint page displays the name, bearing and distance to
the 25 nearest user waypoints (within 200 NM of your present position).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the User WPT key.
A list of the nearest 25 User waypoints within 200 NM will be
listed.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Nearest User Waypoint
Nearest User
Wpt Identifier
Distance and
Bearing from
Current Position
to User Wpt
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 12-15 Nearest User Waypoint
Wpt Info
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Map
3. Touch the Nearest User Waypoint Identifier key to show
the Waypoint Info page for the selected User waypoint.
Traffic
Delete Wpt
Terrain
Weather
Identifier, Symbol,
& References
Distance & Bearing
to Wpt from
Current Position
Nearest
Edit Wpt
Distance & Bearing
to Wpt from
Reference Wpt
Services/
Music
Touch to View
Area Map
Utilities
View All Wpts
Wpts Used
Figure 12-16 Nearest User Waypoint Information
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
12.8
Nearest Airspace
Foreword
The Nearest Airspace page, alerts you to as many as nine controlled or special
use airspaces near or in your flight path. Alerts are provided according to the
following conditions:
•
•
•
•
If your projected course will take you inside an airspace within the
next ten minutes, the alert message “AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace entry
in less than 10 minutes” appears. The Nearest Airspace page shows the
airspace as “Airspace Ahead.”
If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current
course will take you inside, the message “AIRSPACE ALERT - Within
2nm of airspace” appears. The Nearest Airspace page shows the airspace as “Airspace Within 2 NM.”
If you are within two nautical miles of an airspace and your current
course will take you inside in less than 10 minutes, the message
“AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace within 2nm and entry in less than
10 minutes” appears. The Nearest Airspace page shows the airspace as
“Ahead < 2 NM.”
If you have entered an airspace, the message
“AIRSPACE ALERT - Inside Airspace” appears. The Nearest Airspace
page shows “Inside of airspace.”
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Note that the airspace alerts are based on three-dimensional data (latitude,
longitude and altitude) to avoid nuisance alerts. The alert boundaries for
controlled airspace are also sectorized to provide complete information on
any nearby airspace. Once one of the described conditions exists, the message
annunciator flashes, alerting you of an airspace message (if airspace alert
messages are enabled). Refer to System-Alerts to set the Arrival Alert Proximity,
Airspace Type, and Altitude Buffer values.
NOTE: The Airspace Alert setting does not alter the depiction of airspace,
or change the Smart Airspace setting for the main map page.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
12-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Map Pointer
Location Relative
to Present Position
Airspace
Sector Name
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Map Pointer
Selected
Airspace Sector
Current Position
Airspace
Boundary
Figure 12-17 Airspace Sectors
Com/Nav
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the Airspace key.
A list of the nearest 25 Airspaces within 200 NM along the
aircraft flight path will be listed, depending on the airspace
types and values set by the user.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Airspace
Proximity
Information
Airspace
Name
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-18 Nearest Airspace List
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list.
Traffic
3. Touch the Airspace Identifier key to show the Waypoint
Info page for the selected Airspace.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Airspace
Name
Airspace Contact
Name
Utilities
Touch to View Airspace
Frequency List
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Airspace
Information
Touch to View
Airspace Vicinity Map
Figure 12-19 Nearest Airspace Waypoint Information
Once you have been provided an airspace alert message, detailed information
concerning the specific airspace is provided on the Nearest Airspace page. The
Nearest Airspace page displays the airspace name, status (“AIRSPACE ALERT
- inside Airspace,” “AIRSPACE ALERT - Airspace entry in less than 10 minutes,”
etc.), and a time to entry (if applicable). By selecting any airspace name listed
on the Nearest Airspace page, additional details are provided — including
controlling agency, communication frequencies and floor/ceiling limits.
12-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
12.9
Nearest ARTCC
Foreword
The Nearest ARTCC page displays the facility name, bearing to, distance, and
frequency to the five nearest ARTCC points of communication (within 200 NM
of your present position). For each ARTCC listed, the Nearest ARTCC page also
indicates the frequency(s) and may be used to quickly tune the COM transceiver
to the center’s frequency.
Touch the ARTCC Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby
field of the COM window. Touch the COM Active window to flip/flop the Com
frequencies (GTN 650 only).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the ARTCC key. A
list of the nearest 25 ARTCCs within 200 NM will be listed.
ARTCC Frequency
Key with Multiple
Frequencies Available
ARTCC
Name and
Information
Touch ARTCC
Frequency Key to
Insert into Standby
Com
Figure 12-20 Nearest ARTCC
3. The Frequency category will show "Multiple" keys if multiple
frequencies are available. Touch the Multiple FREQ key to
display the frequencies.
Touch to Flip/Flop
Active and Standby
Frequencies
ARTCC Multiple
Frequency Key
Selected
ARTCC
Frequency Key
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list as
needed.
ARTCC
Multiple
Frequency List
Getting
Started
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 12-21 Nearest ARTCC Multiple Frequency List
Symbols
4. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected
frequency into the Com Standby window.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
12-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
12.10
Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS)
The Nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) page displays the facility name, bearing
to, distance, and frequency to the five nearest FSS points of communication
(within 200 NM of your present position). For each FSS listed, the Nearest FSS
page also indicates the frequency(s) and may be used to quickly tune the COM
transceiver to the FSS’s frequency.
Touch the FSS Frequency key to place the frequency in the standby field
of the COM window. Touch the COM Active window to flip/flop the Com
frequencies (GTN 650 only).
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the FSS key. A list
of the nearest 25 FSSs within 200 NM will be listed.
FSS Frequency Key
FSS Name and
Information
FSS Frequency
Key with Multiple
Frequencies
Available
Map
Traffic
Figure 12-22 Nearest FSS
Terrain
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list, if
necessary.
Weather
3. The Frequency key will show "Multiple" if multiple frequencies
are available. Touch the "Multiple" Frequency key to display
the frequencies.
Nearest
Services/
Music
4. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected
frequency into the Com Standby window.
Utilities
System
Selected FSS
Frequency
Inserted Into
Standby Window
FSS Multiple
Frequency List
Messages
FSS Multiple
Frequency Key
Symbols
Figure 12-23 Selected FSS Frequency From List
Appendix
Index
12-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
12.11
Nearest Weather Frequency (WX Freq)
Foreword
The Nearest WX FREQ function displays facility name, bearing to, distance,
and frequency for the nearest 25 Automatic Terminal Information Service (ATIS),
Automated Service Observing System (ASOS), and Automated Weather Observing
Station (AWOS) weather reporting stations within 200 NM.
1. While viewing the Nearest function, touch the WX FREQ key.
A list of the nearest 25 Weather stations within 200 NM will
be listed.
Reporting
Weather
Waypoint
Identifier
Distance and
Bearing from
Current Position
to User Wpt
AWOS Frequency
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
ATIS Frequency
Proc
Arrows Indicate
More Items on
the List
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 12-24 Nearest Weather Station
2. Touch the Up and Down keys to scroll through the list, as
needed.
3. Touch the key for the desired frequency to place the selected
frequency into the Com Standby window.
Selected Weather
Frequency Key
Selected Weather
Frequency Inserted
into Standby
Window
Figure 12-25 Nearest Weather Station Selected Frequency
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
4. Touch the Weather Station Identifier key to show the
Waypoint Info page for the selected Weather station.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
12-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
12-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13
SERVICES/MUSIC
Foreword
The Services function is available when certain optional features are installed
and enabled. The key will be labeled as Music when only the Music feature is
enabled. Music is provided through SiriusXM Satellite Radio. The GSR 56 is an
Iridium® satellite transceiver that supports voice telephone calls, aircraft position
reporting, and world wide weather products.
While viewing the Home page, touch the Services key to view
the Services page.
Touch to Use
Text Messaging
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Use
Phone Services
Touch to Access
SiriusXM Music
Touch to Setup
Position
Reporting
Touch to Access
Your Contact List
Figure 13-1 Services Page
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Status
Phone Number
Call/End Call
Inbox
Drafts
Outbox
Add
Automatic Reporting
Time Period
Name
Phone Number
Email Address
Save Contact
Existing Contact
Volume
Volume
Nearest
Status
Suppression
Call
Message
Edit
Delete
Off
On
On During
APR/MAPR/TERM
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 13-2 Services Functional Diagram
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-1
Foreword
13.1
NOTE: Refer to the "Stormscope® Weather" section for information about
SiriusXM Weather products.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Music
The optional SiriusXM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data
Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL
69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services at any altitude
throughout the Continental United States Entertainment audio is not available
on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long
distances without having to constantly search for new stations. Based on signals from
satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions. SiriusXM Satellite Radio
services are subscription-based. For more information on XM service packages,
visit flyGarmin.com.
Audio entertainment is available through the SiriusXM Satellite Radio Service
when activated in the optional installation of the GDL 69A. The GTN unit serves
as the display and control head for your remotely mounted GDL 69A. When
enabled, the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio entertainment is accessible in the
Music function.
The information on the SiriusXM Satellite Radio display is composed of
four areas: the Active Channel, Available Channels, Category of the highlighted
channel, and the Volume setting. The Active Channel window shows the
Channel Name and Number, Artist, Song Title, and Category.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Channel
Prev/Next
Channel
Messages
Select with
keypad
Symbols
Browse
Channel
Category
Volume
Up/Down
Mute
Presets
XM 1
XM 2
XM 3
Status
GDL 69A
Status
Figure 13-3 Music Functional Map
Appendix
Index
13-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.2
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either
one or two coded IDs, depending on the equipment. Either the Audio Radio
ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription. Activation Instructions are
included with the GDL 69A, P/N 190-00355-04. They are also available at
flyGarmin.com.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service
subscriptions with the GDL 69A. Either or both services can be activated.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an activation
signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment
programming.
These IDs are located:
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
Map
• On the Music Menu
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be
located.
NOTE: Refer to the GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Satellite Radio Activation
Instructions (P/N 190-00355-04) for further information.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
1. Contact SiriusXM Weather through the e-mail address listed
on their website (siriusxm.com) or by the customer service
phone number listed on the website (1-800-985-9200).
Services/
Music
2. Follow the instructions provided.
Utilities
If SiriusXM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product
boxes are cleared on the XM Information page and a yellow Activation Required
message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link page (Map Page
Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available
for subscription.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
13.3
Music Operation
The GTN 6XX provides control for enjoying SiriusXM Radio audio entertainment
in the aircraft. The Music function allows selecting music categories and specific
channels, as well as saving category and channel selections as presets for quick
recall. The music volume level may also be managed.
Touch
CH Number to
Select a Channel
Touch Step to
Previous or Next
Channel
Current Preset
Touch to Step
Through Presets
Name of
Current Channel
Current
Category
Signal
Level
Current Volume
Touch to Change
Volume
Touch to Select
Preset
Touch to Change Channels
or Categories
Figure 13-4 Music Menu
Map
Traffic
Navigate through the channels in a category by touching the
Previous and Next channel keys.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.3.1
Browsing Channels and Categories
The Category window displays the currently selected category of audio.
Categories of channels, such as Jazz, Rock, or News, can be selected to list the
available channels for a type of music or other contents.
1. While viewing the Music page, touch the Browse key and
then touch the desired channel to select it.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Channel List
FPL
Touch to Change
Categories
Current
Channel
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 13-5 Music Channels
2. Touch the Category key to activate Category selection and
then touch the desired Category to select it.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Selected
Category
Weather
Nearest
Touch to Select
Categories
Figure 13-6 Music Categories
Services/
Music
3. The current category will be shown at the top of the display.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
13.3.2
Selecting a SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel
by Number
Channels may be selected directly in the selected category using the numeric
keypad.
1. While viewing the main Music page, touch the Channel key.
The Channel Number selection page will appear.
Touch Channel Key
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 13-7 Selecting Music Channels
Wpt Info
2. Use the numeric keys to enter the number for the desired
channel and then touch the Enter key.
Map
Traffic
Channel Number
Window
Terrain
Numeric Keypad
for Channel
Number Selection
Weather
Touch to Clear
Channel Number
Window
Touch Enter or
Press Small Knob
to Save Number
Figure 13-8 Selecting Music Channels with the Numeric Keypad
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.3.3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Volume
Foreword
The Volume control allows you to set the audio volume level, as well as mute
the audio.
1. While viewing the Music page, touch the Volume key.
Bar Graph Showing Volume Level
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch Lower
the Volume
Touch Raise the Volume
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Toggle Mute
Proc
Figure 13-9 Music Volume Control
2. Touch the Up or Down Volume keys to adjust the radio volume.
Wpt Info
Map
3. Touch MUTE to mute the radio volume.
Traffic
4. Touch MUTE again or the Volume key to unmute the radio
volume.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-7
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
13.3.4
The Music page allows you to store the Active Channel into a selected preset
position for easy later recall. A delay of several seconds can occur when setting
or recalling a preset.
Touch to Select
Bank of Presets
(XM 1, XM 2,
or XM 3)
Direct-To
Proc
13.3.4.1
Map
Saving a Preset
1. While viewing the desired channel, select the preset bank
for saving the preset (XM 1, XM 2, or XM 3) by touching the
Presets key until the desire bank is shown.
2. Touch the desired preset key and hold it for three seconds.
Traffic
Weather
Touch to Recall
Selected Preset
Figure 13-10 Music Menu Presets
Wpt Info
Terrain
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Channel Presets
13.3.4.2
Recalling a Preset
1. Touch the Presets key to select the preset bank (XM 1,
XM 2, or XM 3).
Nearest
2. Touch the desired preset key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.4
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver
Troubleshooting
Foreword
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the
possible cause of a failure.
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is
installed has subscribed to SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
• Ensure the SiriusXM Satellite Radio subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied
to the Data Link Receiver
For troubleshooting purposes, check the Menu on the Music page or the
GDL 69 Box on the System - External LRUs page for Data Link Receiver
(GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. More
information about GDL Status is available in section 15.3.
It may take several minutes for all subscribed data to become available after
power-up.
1. Touch the Status key on the Music page to display the
GDL 69/69A Status.
Data Radio ID
& Signal Level
Touch to View
GDL Status Menu
Touch to View
Weather Products
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Audio Radio ID
& Signal Level
Weather
Software Version
and Serial Number
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 13-11 GDL 69/69A Status Page
2. Touch the Menu key to display the GDL Status Menu.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 13-12 GDL Status Menu
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-9
3. Touch the Lock Activation key if this is for the initial
subscription or a change in the subscription. Touch the
OK key to continue the operation.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Figure 13-13 Lock Activation
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.5
Iridium Phone Operation (Optional)
Optional satellite telephone operation is available through the Iridium®
satellite system that is interfaced through the Garmin GSR 56.
Phone Status
Touch to Select
Phone Number
to Call
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to End
Phone Call
Com/Nav
Figure 13-14 Services Phone Page
13.5.1
Getting
Started
Touch to Start
Phone Call
Touch to Select
Suppression
Option
Touch to Adjust
Phone Volume
Foreword
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Status
The Status section shows the Call Time, Phone Status, and Call Suppression
selected. The Call Time value shows the length of the call time for the current
call using the Iridium phone. Phone Status shows the current operating status
of the Iridium phone.
Status
Idle
Description
The Iridium phone is not using the GSR 56 for communicating
at this time.
Initializing
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
Connected
The GSR 56 is connected to the called number.
Connecting Call The GSR 56 is in the process of connecting to the called
number.
Changing Volume The volume level on the GSR 56 is changing.
Busy
The phone is in use by another service and the call may not be
made.
Dialing
The GSR 56 is dialing the called number.
Incoming Call A call is being made to the GSR 56.
Hanging Up
The GSR 56 is disconnecting from the current call.
Unavailable
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the Iridium phone system.
Table 13-1 Iridium Phone Status
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-11
Foreword
13.5.2
Making a Phone Call
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch Phone, select
a phone number, or select one from Contacts.
Getting
Started
Enter Phone Number
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Select
Phone Number
Direct-To
Figure 13-15 Making a Phone Call
Proc
2. Touch Enter to accept the selected number.
3. Touch the Call key.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Delete
Previous
Character
Touch to Select
Number from
Existing Contacts
Touch to Start
Phone Call
Phone Status
Touch to Select
Phone Number
to Call
Touch to End
Phone Call
Touch to Select
Suppression
Option
Touch to Adjust
Phone Volume
Figure 13-16 Phone Call In Progress
Nearest
4. To make a direct call with a keypad, touch the Touchtone Entry
key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 13-17 Touchtone Entry Pad
Symbols
5. After completing the call, touch the End Call key.
Appendix
Index
13-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.5.3
Answering a Phone Call
Foreword
An incoming phone call will generate a pop-up announcing the call. When
a call is accepted, the pop-up will show that the call is connected and the
cumulative call time will be shown.
1. When an incoming call is available, touch the Enter key or the
ANSWER key to answer the call. Or, press the Ignore key to
not answer the call and hang up.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Ignore
Phone Call
Touch to Answer
Phone Call
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 13-18 Incoming Call Display
2. After a called is accepted and connected, the connection
time will be shown on the pop-up. Touch the ATT soft key
to attenuate the call volume; touching it again will return to
normal volume. Touch the HANG UP soft key to end the call.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
13.5.4
Suppress Visuals
Call Suppression controls calling when use of the Iridium phone system is
allowed.
NOTE: The Suppress Visuals setting only affects the visual indication of an
incoming call/text. It does not inhibit the phone ringer or incoming SMS
chime. Garmin recommends that you inhibit the audio from the GSR 56
unless a phone call is active.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Status
Off
Direct-To
Proc
On
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
On During
APR/MAPR/
TERM
Description
Call Suppression is turned off. Calls may be transmitted and
received through the Iridium phone.
Call Suppression is turned on. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
Call Suppression is turned on during Approach, Missed Approach,
and Terminal operations. The incoming call pop-up will not
be shown. The call may still be answered on the phone page.
Outgoing calls are not affected.
Table 13-2 Call Suppression
Terrain
Weather
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch the Suppression
key.
Nearest
2. Touch the desired Call Suppression type.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch to Select the
Desired Suppression
Messages
Figure 13-19 Select Call/SMS Suppression
Symbols
OR
Appendix
3. Pess Back to return to the Phone page without making a
selection.
Index
13-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.5.5
Phone Volume
Foreword
Use the Phone Volume controls to adjust the loudness of the phone calls
you hear. Volume controls will only be available when the Idle, Connected, or
Changing Volume states are displayed.
Adjusting the Phone Volume with the Soft Keys
1. While viewing the Iridium Phone page, touch the VOL keys to
adjust the phone volume.
Touch to Increase
Volume
Touch to Reduce
Volume
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Phone Volume
Level Bar Graph
Wpt Info
Figure 13-20 Select Soft Keys for Phone Volume Adjustment
13.5.6
Getting
Started
2. The phone volume level is shown as a bar graph.
Map
SMS Text Operation
Traffic
Send and receive text messages through the GSR 56 phone connection.
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the SMS Text key.
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Compose
New Message
Nearest
Touch to View
SMS Text Menu
Services/
Music
Touch to Received
Messages
Utilities
Touch to View
Draft Messages
System
Touch to View
Sent Messages
Messages
Figure 13-21 SMS Text Page
2. Select Compose, Inbox, Drafts, or Outbox.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-15
Foreword
Getting
Started
13.5.6.1
SMS Text Messaging Menu
The SMS Text Messaging Menu allows you to sort, mark, or delete messages
and select call suppression.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Delete
All Messages
Touch to Sort
Messages by Time
Touch to Select
Suppression
Option
Touch to Sort
Messages by Address
Direct-To
Figure 13-22 SMS Text Messaging Menu
1. Touch the Time key to sort messages by Time or the Address
key to sort by Address.
Proc
Wpt Info
Traffic
2. Touch the Suppression key and then touch the call suppression
choice. The current choice will be shown on the Suppression
key.
Terrain
3. While viewing the Inbox, Drafts, or Outbox, touch the
Mark All As Read to tag the messages as having been read.
Map
4. Touch the Delete All Messages to delete the messages in
the viewed category.
Weather
Nearest
13.5.6.2
Services/
Music
Composing a SMS Text Message
1. While viewing the SMS Text page, touch the Compose key.
Utilities
Touch to Select
Recipient
System
Touch to Compose
New Message
Messages
Touch to Send
Message
Figure 13-23 Compose a New SMS Text Message
2. Touch the To window to select the recipient. Select either a
Phone Number or E-mail Address.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
Email Address
Touch to Select
Phone Number
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 13-24 Select Destination for the SMS Text Message
Com/Nav
3. Use either the keypad or select from the Contacts.
4. Touch the Message window to enter the text for the message.
Use the keypad to create the message.
5. Touch Send to send the message. Touch Save to save the
message as a draft. Touch Delete to delete this message.
13.5.6.3
A Failed SMS Text Message
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the SMS Text key and
touch the Outbox tab. A failed message is noted with an “x.”
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Message with
Failed Mark
Traffic
Terrain
Outbox Group
with Failed
Notation
Figure 13-25 SMS Text Message List Showing a Failed Message
Weather
2. Touch the failed message. Touch the Send Again key to resend
the message.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Failed
Message
Utilities
Message
Body
System
Touch Resend
Message
Figure 13-26 Resend a Failed SMS Text Message
Messages
Symbols
3. To delete the message, touch the Menu key and then the
Delete key.
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Delete
Message
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 13-27 Delete a Failed SMS Text Message
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
13.5.7
Position Reporting
Position Reporting is a system which collects system variables and transmits
them over the Iridium® satellite at a given interval through the GSR 56.
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the Position Reports
key.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Report Status
Touch to Manually
Send a Report
Touch to Enable
Automatic
Reporting
Touch to Set
Automatic Reporting Period
Weather
Figure 13-28 Services Position Reporting
Nearest
2. Touch the Automatic Reporting key to enable Automatic
Reporting.
Services/
Music
3. After Automatic Reporting is enabled, touch the Report Period
key to set the Reporting Period.
Utilities
4. Select the Report Period with the keypad and press Enter.
System
5. When Automatic Reporting is disabled, touch the Send Report
key to manually send a report.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
13-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
13.5.7.1
Status
The Status window shows the time until the next data transmission and the
status of the reporting system.
NOTE: The GSR 56 does not report its serial number until 90 seconds after
power up of the GTN. As a result, for that period, the product info for the
GSR 56 will show “Waiting.”
13.5.7.2
Position Reporting Status
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
The Time Until Transmit field is a countdown timer that shows the time until
the next data transmission. This field is blank when the aircraft is on the ground.
Position Reporting will be enabled when the aircraft is in the air.
Direct-To
Proc
Status
Idle
Initializing
Transferring
Unavailable
Description
The reporting system is not using the GSR 56 for reporting at
this time.
The GSR 56 and its driver are currently initializing.
A position report is currently being transmitted.
The GSR 56 is currently not usable by the reporting system.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Table 13-3 Position Reporting Status
Countdown Time Until Transmit
Reporting Status
Number of Reports in the Queue
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 13-29 Position Reporting Status
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
13-19
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
13.5.8
Contacts
The Phone Book may hold up to 128 entries. A phone number may be entered
and dialed without saving it to the Phone Book. Note that it is necessary to dial a
“1,” the area code, and then the number.
13.5.8.1
Com/Nav
FPL
Creating a Contact
1. While viewing the Services page, touch the Contacts key.
Touch to Add
Contact
Direct-To
Existing
Contacts
Proc
2. Touch the Add key to add a new contact.
Map
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Add
Contact Name
Touch to Add
Contact Phone
Number
Touch to Add
Contact Email
Address
Touch to Save
Contact
Figure 13-31 Add a New Contact
Nearest
3. Use the keypad to enter the information for each item and
then touch the Save Contact key.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Edit
Contact
Figure 13-30 Contact List
Wpt Info
Traffic
Touch to Search
Contact List
13.5.8.2
Using a Contact
1. While viewing the Contacts page, touch an existing contact.
System
Messages
Symbols
Touch to Send a Message to
the Contact Phone Number
Touch to Call
the Contact
Phone Number
Touch to Edit the
Contact
Appendix
Touch to Delete
the Contact
Figure 13-32 Using the Contact List
2. Touch the desired function for the selected Contact.
Index
13-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
14
UTILITIES
Foreword
The Utilities page provides a group of features that make flight planning easier
and more efficient.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 14-1 Utilities Home Page
Weather
Feature
VNAV 1
VCALC 1
Trip Planning
Fuel Planning 2
DALT/TAS/Winds
Description
• Enable en route vertical guidance
Nearest
• Specify a target vertical speed and flight path angle
Services/
Music
• View active constraint data
Calculate time to TOD and vertical speed required to
reach target altitude at the specified location.
View DTK, DIS, ETE, ESA and ETA information for
a direct-to, point-to-point between two specified
waypoints or for any programmed flight plan.
View fuel conditions along the active direct-to or flight
plan.
Calculate altitude, airspeed, and winds.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-1
Feature
Foreword
Getting
Started
RAIM Prediction
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Flight Timers
Scheduled Messages
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Checklists
Logs
Clean Screen
Description
Determine GPS coverage availability for the current
location or a specified waypoint at any time and date.
RAIM performs checks to ensure the GTN unit has
adequate satellite geometry during flight.
Monitor time in flight using three available timer types.
Create custom reminder messages and set when they
will display.
Review a built-in version of the aircraft checklist.
Export a flight data log.
Lock touchscreen controls to prevent accidental
activation while cleaning the display.
Table 14-1 Utilities Page Features
Wpt Info
Note 1: VCALC and VNAV functions are mutually exclusive.
Enabling one automatically disables the other.
Map
Note 2: Aircraft must be equipped with fuel flow and/or
fuel on board sensors.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
FPL
Leg
Point to Point
P.POS
From
To
Flight Plan
WAAS
Diagnostic Log
Flight Data Log
Depart Time
Depart Date
Ground Speed
Mode
*VCALC and VNAV functions are mutually exclusive..
VS Target
Flight Path
Angle
VNAV Enabled
*
Display Messages
Restore Defaults
Target Waypoint
VS Profile
Offset
Before/After
MSL
Above Wpt
Altitude Type
Target Altitude
*
FPL
Leg
Point to Point
P.POS
From
To
Flight Plan
Fuel on Board
Fuel Flow
Ground Speed
Mode
Compute
RAIM
Waypoint
Arrival Date
Arrival Time
RAIM Status
Indicated ALT
BARO
CAS
TAT
TRK
HDG
Ground Speed
Reset Time
Reset Timer
Departure Time
Criteria
Power On
In Air
Power On
In Air
Criteria
Trip Timer
Reset Timer
Start/Stop
Direction
Up
Down
Generic Timer
Menu
Group
Checklist
Clear Current
Checklist
Clear All
Checklists
Message
Type
Timer
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 14-2 Utilities Functional Diagram
14-3
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
14.1
NOTE: If VNAV is enabled, the VCALC page is replaced with the VNAV
Profile page. For more information, refer to section 4.3.3.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Vertical Calculator (VCALC)
The Vertical Calculator (VCALC) function allows you to create a threedimensional profile which guides you from your present position and altitude
to a final (target) altitude at a specified location. This is helpful when you’d
like to descend to a certain altitude near an airport. Once the profile is defined,
message alerts and additional data can be configured on the Default NAV and
Map pages to keep you informed of your progress.
Cruise Altitude
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Target
Waypoint
Target Altitude
Target Offset (Before)
Figure 14-3 VCALC Target
VCALC is inhibited in the following conditions:
• Ground speed is less than 35 knots
• No active flight plan or direct-to destination
• SUSP mode
Nearest
• Vectors-to-Final mode
Services/
Music
• VLOC mode
• After the FAF on an approach
Utilities
• OBS mode
System
WARNING: Do not use VCALC messages as the only means of either avoiding
terrain/obstacles or following ATC guidance. VCALC provides advisory
information only and must be used in concert with all other available navigation
data sources.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
Target Altitude
Altitude Type
MSL
Above Wpt
VS Profile
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Restore Defaults
Com/Nav
Display Messages
FPL
Offset
Direct-To
Before/After
Target Waypoint
Proc
Figure 14-4 VCALC Page Functional Diagram
Wpt Info
1. From the Utilities page, touch VCALC.
Altitude Type
Map
Target Waypoint
Traffic
Desired
Vertical Speed
Desired Target
Altitude
Vertical Speed
Required for
Target ALT at
Offset
Desired Distance
from Target Offset
VCALC Status
Message
Before/After Target Waypoint
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 14-5 VCALC Page
2. Select the VCALC items as necessary to set up parameters for
the next waypoint. Touch the Back key when finished.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
14.1.1
This sets the desired ending altitude for the VCALC setup.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Target ALT.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected
Altitude
Com/Nav
Backspace
Key
Numeric
Keypad
FPL
Direct-To
Touch Enter or
Press Small Knob
to Save Number
Figure 14-6 Select VCALC Target Altitude
Proc
2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Target Altitude
and then touch the Enter key.
Wpt Info
14.1.2
Map
Target Altitude
Altitude Type
This value selects the altitude reference that will be used for VCALC calculations.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Altitude Type.
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touching the Altitude Type key will toggle between MSL and
Above WPT. "Above WPT" is only available for waypoints that
are airports.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
14.1.3
Vertical Speed (VS) Profile
Foreword
This value sets the vertical speed.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the VS Profile key.
Backspace
Key
Selected
Vertical
Speed
Numeric
Keypad
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch Enter or
Press Small Knob
to Save Value
Figure 14-7 Select VCALC Vertical Speed
2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Vertical Speed
and then touch the Enter key.
14.1.4
Getting
Started
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Target Offset
The Target Offset is a pilot-selected distance value that represents the
geographical location where you wish to arrive at the target altitude. This
distance is measured from the Target Waypoint and, in a separate data field on
the VCALC page, designated as either before or after the Target Waypoint.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the Offset key.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Backspace
Key
Selected
Target
Offset
Numeric
Keypad
FPL
Nearest
Touch Enter
or Press Small
Knob to Save
Number
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 14-8 Select VCALC Target Offset
2. Use the numeric keypad to select the desired Target Offset and
then touch the Enter key.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-7
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
14.1.5
Before/After Target Waypoint
This setting designates whether the offset distance defines a point before you
reach the target reference waypoint or after you reach the waypoint. The “After”
selection is not available for the last waypoint in a flight plan.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the Before/After key.
Com/Nav
2. Touching the Before/After key will toggle between before
and after the Target Waypoint.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
14.1.6
Target Waypoint
Select the waypoint in the flight plan that will be used for planning a descent.
When using a flight plan, the target waypoint is a reference that can be specified
from the waypoints contained in the flight plan. By default, the last waypoint in
the flight plan is selected.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch Target Waypoint.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 14-9 Select VCALC Target Waypoint List
Nearest
Services/
Music
2. A list of the remaining waypoints in the flight plan will be
shown. Touch the desired waypoint to select it as the Target
Waypoint.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
14.1.7
Display VCALC Messages
Foreword
Selecting Display Messages will allow the display of messages about the
VCALC function when they occur. With Display Messages not selected,
VCALC messages will not be displayed.
1. While viewing the VCALC page, touch the Menu key and then
Display Messages to toggle the display of VCALC messages
in the Message function.
VCALC
Message
Touch to Toggle
Messages
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 14-10 VCALC Approaching Target Altitude Message
Wpt Info
2. Touch the MSG key to toggle the display of available messages.
Map
Traffic
14.1.8
Restore VCALC Defaults
Terrain
While viewing the VCALC page menu, touching the Restore Defaults key will
reset all of the VCALC values back to their default values. The Target Waypoint
will not be changed.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
14.2
Flight Timers
The Flight Timers function provides count up/down timers, plus automatic
recording of departure time, and total trip time. Departure and total trip time
recording can be configured to run either any time unit power is on, or only when
your ground speed exceeds the in-air threshold set by the installer (for example,
30 knots). A flexible Generic Timer is available for general timing needs.
NOTE: When a count up timer is used, the preset value has no function.
FPL
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Flight Timers key.
Direct-To
2. If the Generic Timer Direction counter is set to "Up," the Reset
Timer key will be shown and when touched will return the
timer to 00:00:00. If the Direction counter is set to "Down,"
the Preset Timer key will be shown and the key will return the
timer to the Preset time value.
Proc
Wpt Info
Start/Stop Generic Timer
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Selected
Counter
Direction
Select Preset
Time
Reset or
Preset Timer
Elapsed
Time
Touch to Toggle
Timers
Figure 14-11 Utility Flight Timers Page (Generic Timer)
Nearest
3. Touch the Trip/DEP Timers or Generic Timer keys to toggle
between the timer types.
Services/
Music
Utilities
Elapsed
Time
Departure Time
(Local Time)
Touch to Toggle
Timers
Reset Timer
Select
Criteria for
Timer Start
System
Messages
Set Departure Time to Current
Local Time of Timer Start
Symbols
Figure 14-12 Utility Flight Timers Page (Trip/DEP Timers)
Appendix
4. Touch each key as desired to set up timer operation.
Index
14-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
14.3
RAIM Prediction
Foreword
RAIM Prediction predicts if GPS coverage is available for your current location
or at a specified waypoint at any time and date. RAIM performs checks to ensure
that the GTN unit has adequate satellite geometry during your flight. RAIM
availability is near 100% in Oceanic, En Route and Terminal phases of flight.
Because the FAA’s TSO requirements for non-precision approaches specify
significantly better satellite coverage than other flight phases, RAIM may not be
available when flying some approaches. The GTN unit automatically monitors
RAIM during approach operations and warns you if RAIM is not available. In
such cases, use a non-GPS based approach. RAIM prediction helps you plan for
a pending flight to confirm GPS operation during an approach.
RAIM prediction only predicts the availability of Fault Detection (FD) integrity
in the absence of SBAS corrections. It cannot predict the availability of LPV or
L/VNAV approaches. The FAA provides a NOTAM service for LPV approach
availability.
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the RAIM Prediction
key.
Touch to Select
Destination
Waypoint
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Select
Local Arrival Date
Nearest
Touch to Select
Local Arrival Time
Services/
Music
Figure 14-13 Utility RAIM Prediction Page
2. Touch the Waypoint key and select the waypoint for RAIM
Prediction.
3. Touch the Arrival Date key and select the date of arrival at
the selected waypoint.
4. Touch the Arrival Time key and select the local time of
expected arrival at the selected waypoint.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-11
5. When the Waypoint, Arrival Date, and Arrival Time values have
been entered, touch the Compute RAIM key to determine if
RAIM is available.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Compute
RAIM
Com/Nav
RAIM Prediction
Result
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 14-14 RAIM Prediction Completed
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
14.4
Trip Planning
Foreword
The GTN 6XX allows the pilot to view desired track (DTK), distance (DIS),
estimated time en route (ETE), en route safe altitude (ESA) and estimated time of
arrival (ETA) information for a direct-to, point-to-point between two specified
waypoints or for any programmed flight plan. This item also displays the
sunrise/sunset times for your destination waypoint (for the selected departure
date). All times are based on the time set in System-Setup. For trip planning
inputs: departure time and date are manually entered, while ground speed can
be provided by sensor data, if selected.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending
waypoints and the trip planning inputs.
In Flight Plan mode with a stored flight plan selected, and the entire flight
plan (CUM) selected, the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the
selected flight plan.
In Flight Plan mode with a stored flight plan selected, and a specific leg
selected, the waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
In Point-To-Point mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an
active flight plan, these default to the endpoints of the active leg).
Traffic
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the
active flight plan has already been flown.
Terrain
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track
between the selected waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is
selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and
in whole units up to 9999.
• Estimated time en route (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less
than an hour, then it is shown as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is
the local time at the destination.
- If in Point-To-Point mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the
departure time.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-13
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the
ETA by adding to the departure time all of the ETEs of the legs up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then
the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position
of the aircraft and the current leg being flown. The ETA is calculated
by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to and
including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then
the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
• En Route safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times - These times are shown as
hours:minutes and are the local time at the destination.
NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data for the trip planning functions
is available in software versions 2.00, 4.10, and later.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
14.4.1
Point-To-Point Mode
The Trip Planning Point-to-Point mode shows trip calculations between two
selected points: either two waypoints from the database or from your present
position to a selected waypoint.
Weather
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Trip Planning key.
Nearest
2. Touch the Mode key to toggle to Point-to-Point.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch to Use
Present Position
as Departure
Point
Touch to Select
Departure Waypoint
Touch to Select
Arrival Waypoint
Touch to Select
P-to-P or Flight
Plan Mode
Touch to Toggle
Between Statistics
and Data Input
Touch to Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Touch to Select
Departure Time
Touch to Select
Departure Date
Figure 14-15 Utility Trip Planning Page To Edit Input Data (Point-To-Point Mode)
-Sensor Data Used
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. Touch the P.POS key to toggle between using your present
position as the From waypoint when selected or a waypoint
selected from the database when P.POS is deselected. If P.POS
is selected, the latitude/longitude of the present position will
be shown in the From position.
Touch to Select
Destination Wpt
Present Position
Selected as "From" Wpt
Latutude/Longitude of Present Position
Figure 14-16 Selecting Present Position as the From Waypoint
4. If P.POS is not selected for the From point, touch the From
key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the
database and touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Selected "From" Waypoint
Map
Touch to Select
Waypoint Search
Traffic
Terrain
Touch to Select "From" Waypoint
Figure 14-17 Selecting a From Waypoint
Weather
5. Touch the To key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint
from the database for the destination waypoint and touch Enter.
6. Touch the Depart Time key and then use the keypad to select
the departure time (local time at From waypoint) and touch
Enter.
Selected Departure Time
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Touch to Select Departure Time
Figure 14-18 Selecting Departure Time
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
14-15
7. Touch the Depart Date key and then use the Departure Date
page to select the departure year, month, and day and then
touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select
Departure Year
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Select
Departure Month
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to Select
Departure Day
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 14-19 Selecting Departure Date
8. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Weather
Nearest
Selected Ground Speed
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Touch to Select Ground Speed
Figure 14-20 Selecting Expected Average Ground Speed
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
9. After completing the Trip Planning selections, touch the
Compute Data key to display the trip statistics.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Trip Statistics
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Toggle
Between Statistics
and Data Input
Figure 14-21 Utility Trip Planning Page With Computed Data (Point-To-Point Mode)
Com/Nav
NOTE: When Local Time is selected in the Setup-Date/Time feature, Sunrise/
Sunset calculations in the Trip Planning feature are based on the From
waypoint time zone. For instance, a flight plan originating in the Pacific
time zone and ending in the Central time zone would show Sunset/Sunrise
times at the destination in Pacific time. This potential offset does not occur
when UTC time is used.
Direct-To
14.4.2
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Flight Plan Mode
1. Touch the Mode key to select Flight Plan mode, if required.
Touch to Select
Flight Plan Leg
Touch to Select
Flight Plan
From Catalog
FPL
Terrain
Touch to Select
P-to-P or Flight
Plan Mode
Touch to Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Touch to Select
Departure Time
Touch to Select
Departure Date
Traffic
Touch to Toggle
Between Statistics
and Data Input
Touch to Select
Expected Average
Ground Speed
Figure 14-22 Utility Trip Planning Page Edit Input Data View (Flight Plan Mode)
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to select the flight plan.
Messages
Touch to Select
Flight Plan (Active
FPL Shown)
Symbols
Appendix
Touch to Scroll List
Index
Figure 14-23 Select Flight Plan
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-17
3. Touch the Leg key to select the flight plan leg. If the
"Cumulative" selection is chosen, statistics will relate to the
entire flight plan.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Com/Nav
Touch to Select
Flight Plan Leg
(Cumulative
FPL Shown)
FPL
Touch to Scroll
List
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 14-24 Select Flight Plan Leg
Direct-To
4. Touch the Depart Time key and then use the keypad to select the
departure time (local time at From waypoint) and touch Enter.
Proc
5. Touch the Depart Date key and then use the Departure Date
page to select the departure year, month, and day and then
touch Enter.
Wpt Info
Map
6. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Traffic
7. Touch the Compute Data key to view statistics for the current
flight plan leg. The Cumulative flight plan is shown.
Terrain
Touch to View
Statistics For Next
FPL Leg
Weather
Trip Statistics
Touch to Toggle
Between Statistics
and Data Input
Figure 14-25 Utility Trip Planning Page Computed Data View (Flight Plan Mode)
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
8. Touch the Next key to view statistics for the next leg in the
flight plan.
System
Current FPL Leg
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Touch to View
Statistics for Next
FPL Leg
Trip Statistics
Touch to View
Statistics for
Previous FPL Leg
Touch to Toggle
Between Statistics
and Data Input
Figure 14-26 Utility Trip Planning Page Computed Data View Of Next Waypoint (Flight Plan Mode)
14-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
14.5
Fuel Planning
Fuel Planning — You may manually enter fuel flow, ground speed (GS)
and fuel on board figures for planning purposes. Fuel planning figures can be
displayed not only for the currently active flight plan or direct-to, but also pointto-point between two specified waypoints and for any programmed flight plan.
Fuel on board and fuel flow may be manually entered in the unit start-up
sequence and used to recalculate fuel on board as it is consumed. When fuel
flow or fuel on board is manually entered, the figures are retained the next time
you view the page (with fuel on board continuously recalculated).
NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data is available in software versions
2.00, 4.10, and later.
14.5.1
Point-To-Point Mode
The Fuel Planning Point-to-Point mode shows fuel calculations between two
selected points: either two waypoints from the database or from your present
position to a selected waypoint.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
1. While viewing the Utilities page, touch the Fuel Planning key.
Traffic
2. Touch the Mode key to toggle to Point-to-Point, if required.
Terrain
3. Touch the P.POS key to toggle between using your present
position as the From waypoint when selected or a waypoint
selected from the database when P.POS is deselected. If P.POS
is selected, the Lat/Lon of the present position will be shown
in the From position.
Weather
Touch to Use
Present Position
qs Departure
Point
Touch to Select
From Waypoint
Touch to Select
to Waypoint
Touch to Select
Fuel on Board
Touch to Select
Compute Fuel
Statistics
Touch to Select
Expected Average
Ground Speed
Figure 14-27 Utility Fuel Planning Page Showing Edit Input Data (Point-to-Point Mode)
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Touch to Select
Fuel Flow
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Select
P-to-P or Flight
Plan Mode
Touch to Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Nearest
14-19
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected
Distance
Measured
Fuel Required for
the Flight Plan
Flight Time
Available with
Remaining Fuel
at Destination
Range with
Existing Fuel
Com/Nav
FPL
Remaining Fuel
at Destination
Flight Time
Available with
Existing Fuel
Fuel Usage Rate
Figure 14-28 Utility Fuel Planning Page Showing Computed Data (Point-to-Point Mode)
4. If P.POS is not selected for the From point, touch the From
key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint from the
database and touch Enter.
Direct-To
Proc
Selected "From" Waypoint
Wpt Info
Map
Touch for
Waypoint Search
Traffic
Touch to Select
"From" Waypoint
Terrain
Figure 14-29 Selecting a "From" Waypoint
Weather
5. Touch the To key and then use the keypad to select a waypoint
from the database for the destination waypoint and touch
Enter.
Nearest
Services/
Music
6. Touch the Fuel on Board key and then use the keypad to
select the current amount of fuel on board and touch Enter.
Utilities
System
Selected Fuel on
Board Value
Messages
Touch to Select
Fuel Value
Symbols
Figure 14-30 Selecting Current Fuel On Board
Appendix
Index
14-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7. Touch the Fuel Flow key and then use the keypad to select
the average fuel flow and touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Selected Fuel Flow
Value
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Select
Fuel Value
Com/Nav
Figure 14-31 Selecting Fuel Flow
FPL
8. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Direct-To
Proc
Selected Ground
Speed Value
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
Ground Speed Value
Map
Figure 14-32 Selecting Ground Speed
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-21
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
14.5.2
Flight Plan Mode
The Fuel Planning Flight Plan mode shows fuel calculations between two legs
of the flight plan or the cumulative flight plan.
1. Touch the Mode key to select Flight Plan mode, if required.
Touch to
Toggle Sensor
Data Use
Touch to Compute
Data and View
Statistics
Figure 14-33 Utility Fuel Planning Page Showing Edit Input Data (Flight Plan Mode)
2. Touch the Flight Plan key to select the flight plan.
Proc
Touch to Select
Flight Plan (Active
FPL Shown)
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to Scroll
List
Traffic
Figure 14-34 Select Flight Plan
Terrain
3. Touch the Leg key to select the flight plan leg. If the
“Cumulative” selection is chosen, statistics will relate to the
entire flight plan.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Select
Flight Plan Leg
Utilities
System
Figure 14-35 Select Flight Plan Leg
Messages
4. If desired, touch the Fuel on Board key and then use the
keypad to select the Fuel on Board value and touch Enter.
Symbols
5. If desired, touch the Fuel Flow key and then use the keypad
to select the Fuel Flow value and touch Enter.
6. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and touch Enter.
Appendix
Index
14-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
7. Touch the Compute Data key to display Statistics for the
current flight plan leg.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 14-36 Utility Fuel Planning Page Showing Computed Data (Flight Plan Mode)
8. Touch the Previous and Next keys to view statistics for the
previous and next legs in the flight plan.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
9. Touch the Edit Input Data key to return to the display for
selecting Fuel Planning data.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
14.6
DALT/TAS/Winds
Density Alt / TAS / Winds — indicates the theoretical altitude at which
your aircraft performs depending upon several variables, including indicated
altitude (Indicated ALT), barometric pressure (BARO) and total air temperature
(TAT; the temperature, including the heating effect of speed, read on a standard
outside temperature gauge). This item computes true airspeed (TAS) and
density altitude, based upon the factors above. Also, this feature determines
winds aloft — the wind direction and speed — and a head wind/tail wind
component, based on true airspeed, aircraft heading (HDG) and ground
speed. When a FADC provides pressure altitude and the Use Sensor Data
option is selected, the Baro key will not be present in the edit mode and the
Baro indication will not be shown in computed results.
NOTE: The capability of using Sensor Data is available in software versions
2.00, 4.10, and later.
Proc
Wpt Info
DALT, TAS, and
Winds Statistics
Touch to
Compute Data
and View
Statistics
Map
Traffic
Touch to Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Terrain
Figure 14-37 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Sensor Data and Pressure Altitude
Weather
DALT, TAS, and
Winds Statistics
Touch to
Compute Data
and View
Statistics
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Toggle
Sensor Data Use
Utilities
Figure 14-38 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Sensor Data and Indicated Altitude
System
Touch to Select
Indicated Altitude
Touch to Select
Calibrated Air Speed
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Touch to Select
Track Value
Touch to Select
Baro Pressure
Touch to Select
Total Air Temp
Touch to Select
Ground Speed
Touch to Compute
Touch to Select
Data and View
Heading Value
Statistics
Figure 14-39 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page Using Manually Entered Data
14-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Computed
Statistics
Touch to Return
to Edit Input
Data Page
Figure 14-40 Utility DALT/TAS/Winds Page (Computed Data)
Selected
Indicated
Altitude Value
Direct-To
Touch to Select
Indicated
Altitude Value
Proc
Touch to Clear
Values
Touch to Select
Barometric
Pressure Value
3. Touch the CAS key and then the keypad to select the Calibrated
Air Speed and then touch Enter.
Touch to Clear
Values
Touch to Select
Calculated Air
Speed Value
Touch to Cancel
Selection
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 14-42 Select Barometric Pressure Value
Selected
Calculated Air
Speed Value
Wpt Info
Map
2. Touch the BARO key and then the keypad to select the
Barometric Pressure and then touch Enter.
Touch to Cancel
Selection
FPL
Touch to Clear
Values
Figure 14-41 Select Indicated Altitude Value
Selected
Barometric
Pressure Value
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. Touch the Indicated ALT key and then the keypad to select
the Indicated Altitude and then touch Enter.
Touch to Select
Above or Below
Sea Level
Getting
Started
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 14-43 Select Calculated Air Speed Value
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-25
4. Touch the TAT key and then the keypad to select the Total Air
Temperature and touch Enter.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected True Air Temperature Value
Touch to Select
Above or Below
0 Degrees
Touch to Clear
Values
Touch to Select
Total Air
Temperature
Value
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Cancel
Selection
Figure 14-44 Select Total Air Temperature Value
Direct-To
5. Touch the TRK key and then the keypad to select the Track
Angle and then touch Enter.
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch to Clear
Values
Selected Track
Angle Value
Touch to Select
Track Angle
Value
Map
Traffic
Touch to Cancel
Selection
Figure 14-45 Select Track Angle Value
Terrain
6. Touch the HDG key and then the keypad to select the Heading
value and then touch Enter.
Weather
Nearest
Touch to Clear
Values
Selected
Heading Value
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Select
Heading Value
Touch to Cancel
Selection
Figure 14-46 Select Heading Value
System
7. Touch the Ground Speed key and then the keypad to select
the average ground speed for the trip and then touch Enter.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
14.7
Clean Screen Mode
Foreword
The Clean Screen mode makes the touchscreen inactive so the display can
be manually cleaned. The front bezel, keypad, and display can be cleaned
with a microfiber cloth or with a soft cotton cloth dampened with clean water.
DO NOT use any chemical cleaning agents. Care should be taken to avoid scratching
the surface of the display.
1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Clean
Screen key to start Screen Cleaning Mode.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Clean
Screen
Wpt Info
Figure 14-47 Utilities Home Page
Map
2. Touch the HOME key to exit Screen Cleaning Mode.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 14-48 Screen Cleaning Mode
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-27
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
14.8
The Scheduled Messages utility displays reminder messages (such as “Change
oil,” “Switch fuel tanks,” “Overhaul,” etc.). One-time, periodic, and event-based
messages are allowed. One-time messages appear once the timer expires and
reappear each time the GTN-series unit is powered on, until the message is
deleted. Periodic messages automatically reset to the original timer value, once
the message is displayed. Event-based messages do not use a timer, but rather a
specific date and time.
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.00, and later.
Direct-To
1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Scheduled
Messages key to start the Scheduled Messages function.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Scheduled Messages
Touch to Add
a Scheduled
Message
Traffic
Figure 14-49 Scheduled Messages Page
Terrain
2. Touch the Message selection and enter the desired message to
be displayed. Touch the Type selection to choose the message
type. Touch the Timer selection to set the countdown time for
the message to be displayed.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Enter
Message Text
System
Touch to Enter
Message
Countdown Timer
Messages
Touch to Select
Message Type
Figure 14-50 Create a Scheduled Message
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
3. After completing the selections, touch the Enter key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 14-51 Sample Scheduled Message
14.9
FPL
Checklists
The Checklists function provides a built-in method of reviewing your aircraft
checklist. Checklists are created using the Garmin Checklist Editor software
(available online) and stored on the datacard as “chklist.ace.” As each Checklist
is completed, you can advance to the next one in order. In the Checklist Menu,
you can access any Checklist, or group of Checklists, and clear the current or
all Checklists.
NOTE: This feature is available in software v5.10, and later. In software
v6.00 and later, the installer may configure the title of this feature to be
Task Lists or Checklists.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
14.9.1
Checklists Menu
1. While viewing the Utilities page group, touch the Checklists
key to start the Checklists function.
2. Touch the Menu key to select an option from the Checklist
Menu.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Select a
Checklist Group
System
Touch to Select
a Checklist
Touch to Clear
Current Checklist
Touch to Clear
All Checklists
Messages
Symbols
Figure 14-52 Utility Checklist Menu
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
14-29
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Select
a Checklist
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 14-53 Select a Checklist from the Checklist Menu
Com/Nav
FPL
14.9.2
1. While viewing the Utilities function, touch the Checklist key.
Use the existing Checklists in the order provided or touch the
Menu key to select another checklist.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Viewing Checklists
Completed
Checklist Item
Map
Checklist
Status
Touch to Advance
to Next Checklist
Traffic
Figure 14-54 Checklist Completion
Terrain
2. After completing the Checklist, touch Go to Next Checklist,
Menu, or Back to exit the Checklist function.
Weather
NOTE: All checklists are cleared after a power cycle.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
14-30
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15
SYSTEM
Foreword
The System function allows you to change unit settings, customize operation
to your preferences, and check on the operation of your unit. The System pages
cover System Status, Database Info and transfer, GPS Status, External LRUs,
Setup, Alerts, Units, Audio, Backlight control function, and Connext Setup.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
1. From the Home page, touch the System key.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 15-1 System Home Page
Weather
2. Touch the Up and Down Arrow keys to view the features
available in the System function.
3. Touch the desired key to reach that function. To return to the
System page, touch the Back key.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-1
Serial No. & System ID
Software/Hardware Version Info
Database Info
Foreword
Getting
Started
SBAS
WAAS
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
CDI
Date/Time
Com/Nav
Nearest Airport
Keyboard
Crossfill
FPL
Direct-To
Arrival
Destination Proximity
Class B/TMA
Class C/TCA
Class D
Restricted
MOA (Military)
Other
Airspace Altitude Buffer
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
User Fields
Terrain
Nav Angle
Mag Var
Temp
Fuel
Position Format
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Volume
TAWS Alert Voice
Utilities
Manual Offset
System
Connext Setup *
Messages
Voice Commands *
Command History *
Symbols
Appendix
* Optional
Index
Figure 15-2 System Function Summary
15-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.1
System Status
Foreword
The System Status page of the System function provides information about
the GTN unit and the equipment attached to it. This information is useful if it
is necessary to contact Customer Service. The System Status page shows the
System ID and serial number for the GTN unit, hardware and software versions,
as well as a list of the installed databases.
Serial No., System ID,
and Internal Software
Versions
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Database Conflicts
Proc
Active Database
Information
Database Not Active
and On Standby
Wpt Info
Figure 15-3 System Status Page Description
Map
Traffic
Terrain
System Info
System Status Menu
Database Info
Weather
Serial # & System ID
Software Versions
Database SYNC
Current
Standby
Conflicts
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 15-4 System Status Functional Diagram
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
15.1.1
Serial Number and System ID
The System Info section shows the unit serial number and the system ID.
1. While viewing the System Status page, touch System Info.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
2. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
15.1.2
Version Information
The software versions of the GTN unit are displayed. This information is
useful when contacting Customer Support.
1. While viewing the System Status page, touch the System
Info key to view more detailed information about the software
versions inside the GTN unit.
Serial Number
and System ID
Map
Internal Software
Versions
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 15-5 System Status Version Information
Weather
2. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
15.1.3
Database Information
The Database Information section lists the name of the database, its version,
and expiration date for the currently used databases, and also contains the
Database SYNC function. Standby databases are listed for databases not currently
used, but available on the datacard. Database conflicts will be shown in the
Conflicts section. For more information on GTN databases and how to update
them refer to section 18.2.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.2
GPS Status
15.2.1
GPS Status Page
Foreword
The GPS Status page provides a visual reference of GPS receiver functions,
including current satellite coverage, GPS receiver status, position accuracy, and
displays your present position (in latitude and longitude) and altitude.
The Satellite Status page is helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal
levels due to poor satellite coverage or installation problems. You may wish to
refer to this page occasionally to monitor GPS receiver performance and establish
a normal pattern for system operation. Should problems occur at a later date,
you may find it helpful to have an established baseline from which to compare.
Lat/Lon
Position
Touch to Select
SBAS Provider
Estimated Position
Uncertainty
Horizontal Dilution
of Precision
Vertical Figure
of Merit
Horizontal Figure
of Merit
Sky View of
Satellite
Positions
Phase of Flight
Acquiring Satellite,
Not Ready for Use
Signal
Strength Bars
Satellite Acquired
and Used for
Position Fix
Satellite Acquired,
Used for Position
Fix, has Differential
Corrections
Tracked
Satellite,
Not Used
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
1. While viewing the System page, touch GPS Status.
GPS Receiver Status
Getting
Started
Satellite Numbers
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 15-6 GPS Status Page
2. If desired, touch the SBAS key to select an SBAS provider.
The SBAS list is based on the Aviation database. Refer to the
Satellite-Based Augmentation System section later in this
chapter for details.
3. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar appears for each
satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite number (01-32, SBAS satellites will
have higher numbers) underneath each bar. The progress of satellite acquisition
is shown in the following stages:
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Graph Symbol
Description
Com/Nav
No signal strength bars
The receiver is looking for the satellites indicated.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
The receiver has found the satellite(s) and is collecting
data.
The receiver has collected the necessary data but the
Yellow signal strength bars satellite is not being used in the position solution as it
has been excluded.
Cross-hatch cyan signal
The receiver has found the satellite(s) but it has been
strength bars
excluded by the FDE program as a faulty satellite.
Solid cyan signal strength The receiver has collected the necessary data, but is
bars
not using the satellite in the position solution.
Solid green signal strength The receiver has collected the necessary data and the
bars
satellite is being used in the position solution.
The “D” character inside the bars indicates differential
D
corrections (e.g., WAAS) are being used for that
satellite.
Gray signal strength bars
Table 15-1 Signal Strength Bar Graph Description
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired
enough satellites for a fix.
The sky view display at the left of the page shows the satellites currently in view
as well as their respective positions. The outer circle of the sky view represents
the horizon (with north at the top of the circle); the inner circle represents 45°
above the horizon and the center point shows the position directly overhead.
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected
(hollow signal strength bar) before the satellite may be used for navigation (solid
signal strength bar). Once the GPS receiver has determined your position, the
GTN unit indicates your position, altitude, track and ground speed. The GPS
receiver status field also displays the following messages under the appropriate
conditions:
Index
15-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GPS Signal Message
Acquiring
3D Nav
3D Diff Nav
LOI
Description
Foreword
The GPS receiver is acquiring satellites for navigation. In
this mode, the receiver uses satellite orbital data (collected
continuously from the satellites) and last known position to
determine the satellites that should be in view.
The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and computes
altitude using satellite data.
The GPS receiver is in 3D navigation mode and differential
corrections are being used.
The “LOI” (Loss Of Integrity) annunciator (bottom left corner
of the screen) indicates that satellite coverage is insufficient
to pass built-in integrity monitoring tests.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Table 15-2 GPS Signal Messages
The GPS Status page also indicates the accuracy of the position fix, using
Horizontal Figure of Merit (HFOM), Vertical Figure of Merit (VFOM), and
Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU). HFOM and VFOM represent the 95%
confidence levels in horizontal and vertical accuracy. The lowest numbers are
the best accuracy and the highest numbers are worse. EPU is the horizontal
position error estimated by the Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) algorithm,
in feet or meters.
NOTE: Operating outside of an SBAS service area with SBAS enabled
may cause elevated EPU values to be displayed on the satellite status
page. Regardless of the EPU value displayed, the LOI annunciation is the
controlling indication for determining the integrity of the GPS navigation
solution.
NOTE: The FDE Prediction program is used to predict FDE availability.
This program must be used prior to all oceanic or remote area flights for
all operators using the GTN as a primary means of navigation under FAR
parts 91, 121, 125, and 135. The FDE program is part of the GTN trainer,
available for download from the GTN product information page on Garmin’s
website, flyGarmin.com.
If the GTN has not been operated for a period of six months or more,
acquiring satellite data to establish almanac and satellite orbit information can
take 5 to 10 minutes.
The Time and other data may not be displayed until the unit has acquired
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-7
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
enough satellites for a fix.
15.2.2
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
SBAS is a system that supports wide area, or regional, augmentation through
the use of additional satellite broadcast messages. WAAS, EGNOS, MSAS, and
GAGAN are known SBAS providers.
At the time of printing, SBAS providers support the following areas:
• WAAS provides SBAS service for Alaska, Canada, the 48 contiguous
states, and most of Central America.
FPL
• EGNOS provides SBAS service for most of Europe and parts of North
Africa.
Direct-To
Proc
• MSAS provides SBAS service for Japan only.
• GAGAN provides SBAS service for India. Available with GPS software
v5.2 and later.
Wpt Info
Map
1. While viewing the System page, touch GPS Status.
Traffic
2. If desired, touch the SBAS key to select an SBAS provider. The
SBAS list is based on the Aviation database.
Terrain
3. Touch the key for the desired SBAS provider.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 15-7 SBAS Selection Page
System
4. Touch the Back key to return to the System Status page.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.2.3
Circle of Uncertainty
Foreword
The Circle of Uncertainty depicts an area where the ownship location is
guaranteed to be when the aircraft location cannot be accurately determined.
The area of the Circle of Uncertainty becomes larger as GPS horizontal accuracy
degrades and smaller as it improves. The Circle of Uncertainty is shown only
when the aircraft is on the ground. The Circle of Uncertainty area is transparent
so that features within it may still be seen.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Area Within the
Circle of Uncertainty
Direct-To
Ownship Symbol
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 15-8 Circle of Uncertainty
15.2.4
GPS Faults
Map
The GTN communicates various fault conditions that can affect the accuracy
of the GPS. These include loss of integrity, loss of navigation, and a loss of
position.
Loss of Integrity
A loss of integrity is when the integrity of the GPS position does not meet the
requirements for the current phase of flight. This only occurs before the final
approach fix (if an approach is active).
The GTN indicates a loss of integrity by displaying the amber "LOI"
annunciation at the bottom of the screen.
Loss of Navigation
A loss of navigation can be caused by any of the following conditions:
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
• Aircraft is after the final approach fix and GPS integrity does not meet the
active approach requirements
Messages
• Insufficient number of satellites supporting aircraft position (i.e., more
than 5 seconds pass without adequate satellites to compute a position)
Symbols
• GPS sensor detects an excessive position error or failure that cannot be
excluded within the time to alert
Appendix
• On-board hardware failure
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-9
Index
Foreword
The GTN indicates a loss of navigation by invalidating the active course
guidance, and issuing a system message describing the cause.
Getting
Started
Loss of Position
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
If the GTN cannot determine a GPS position solution, the ownship icon
disappears and the amber "No GPS Position" annunciation appears across the
map pages. For information about managing limited navigation features, refer
to section 1.10.
15.3
External LRUs
The External LRU page displays the external equipment connected to the
GTN and their connection status.
Proc
1. While viewing the System page, touch the External LRUs key.
Wpt Info
LRU Available and
Communicating
LRU Not Available
or Communicating
Touch for More
Information
Map
Traffic
Figure 15-9 External LRU Page
Terrain
2. When more information is available about the listed units,
touch the More Info key to view the information.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.3.1
GDL 69 (and GDL 69A) Status
Foreword
The GDL 69 Status page displays the serial numbers for the Data Radio for the
GDL 69/69A and the Audio Radio for the GDL 69A. Subscription status displays
the level of service available for your particular subscription. The Weather
Products section lists the products available for your particular subscription.
1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for
the GDL LRU.
Audio Radio ID
& Signal Level
Software
Version and
Serial Number
Touch to View
Weather Products
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Data Radio ID
& Signal Level
Touch to View
GDL Status Menu
Getting
Started
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 15-10 GDL 69 Status Page
2. Touch the Menu key to display the GDL 69 Status Menu.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Figure 15-11 GDL Status Menu
3. Touch the Lock Activation key if this is for the initial
subscription or a change in the subscription. Touch the OK
key to continue the operation.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 15-12 Lock Activation
Appendix
4. Touch the Back key to return to the GDL Status page.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
15-11
5. Touch the Weather Products key to display the weather
products subscription status.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Weather
Product List
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Weather Product
Legend
Figure 15-13 GDL 69/69A Status
FPL
6. Touch the Back key to return to the System page.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
15.3.2
GDL 88 or GTX 345 Status
The GDL 88 or GTX 345 Status pages display information about the status of
the GDL 88 or GTX 345.
Map
Status
Traffic
On
Terrain
Weather
Available to Run
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Unavailable – Fault
Unavailable to Run
System
Description
Application is on/running. Required ownship input data is
available and meets the performance criteria.
Application is configured. Required input data is available
and meets the performance criteria. This state represents
that the ASA Application is manually or automatically
selected off.
Required Input data is not available due to a failure or the
ASA Application process is failed.
Required Input data is available but does not meet the
performance criteria or is not available due to
Non-Computed Data (NCD) conditions.
Table 15-3 Traffic Application Status
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for
the GDL 88 or GTX 345 LRU.
Foreword
Getting
Started
GPS Software
Version and
Serial Number
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
GPS Status
Touch to View
FIS-B Weather
Products
Com/Nav
Touch to View
Traffic Status
FPL
Figure 15-14 GDL 88 Status
2. Touch the FIS-B Weather key to view the FIS-B Weather
information.
FIS-B
Weather
Products
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to
Enable/Disable
FIS-B Weather
Weather Product
Legend
Traffic
Figure 15-15 GDL 88 FIS-B Weather Information
3. Touch the Enabled key to toggle whether FIS-B Weather is
enabled/disabled for use. Touch the Back key to return to the
Status page.
4. Touch the Traffic App Status key to view the Traffic
Application information.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Traffic Status
System
Messages
Figure 15-16 GDL 88 Traffic Information
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
15.3.3
GSR 56 Status
The GSR 56 Status page displays information about the status of the GSR 56.
1. While viewing the External LRUs page, touch More Info for
the GSR 56 LRU.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Iridium Signal
Level
Current
Registration Info
FPL
Touch to
Register
Phone and
Datalink Status
Direct-To
Figure 15-17 GSR 56 Status
Proc
2. Touch the Connext Registration key to display the Connext
Registration display.
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to
Register
Touch to Enter
Access Code
Traffic
Current
Registration Info
Terrain
Weather
Figure 15-18 Connext Registration Page
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.4
Setup
Foreword
The System Setup page allows you to:
Getting
Started
• Select CDI scale and ILS CDI capture type
• Specify time format and local offset
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• Access nearest airport search filtering options
Com/Nav
• Access COM/NAV radio settings
• Select keyboard format
FPL
• Enable crossfilling to a second GTN or GNS unit
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
CDI
CDI Scale
ILS CDI Capture
Traffic
Date/Time
Terrain
Local Offset
Time Format
Weather
Nearest Airport
Runway Surface
Min Rwy Length
Nearest
Com/Nav
Services/
Music
Com Channel Spacing
25.0 kHz
8.33 kHz
Reverse Frequency Lookup
COM Sidetone Control
Utilities
System
Messages
Keyboard
Symbols
Crossfill
Appendix
Figure 15-19 System Setup Functions
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-15
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Setup key.
Foreword
Touch to Set Time
Format And Offset
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Select
CDI and ILS CDI
Capture
Touch to Select
Nearest Airport
Criteria
Touch to Set Up
Com and Nav
Radios
Touch to Select
Keyboard
Format
Touch to Enable Crossfill
with Dual GTN Units
Proc
Figure 15-20 System Setup Page
Wpt Info
2. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to
return to the Setup page.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
15.4.1
CDI Scale Selection
The CDI source and ILS CDI Capture type may be selected manually or
automatically. The selected CDI Scale will be reflected in the annunciation bar at
the bottom of the display.
CDI Scale Selection allows you to define the scale for the course deviation
indicator (both on the GTN unit's on-screen CDI and the external CDI). The
scale values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side. The default
setting is “Auto.” At this setting, the CDI scale is set to 2.0 NM during the
“en route” phase of flight. Within 31 NM (terminal area) of your destination
airport, the CDI scale linearly ramps down to 1.0 NM over a distance of 1 NM.
Likewise, when leaving your departure airport the CDI scale is set to 1.0 NM
and gradually ramps up to 2 NM beyond 30 NM (from the departure airport).
During GPS approach operations the CDI scale gradually transitions down to an
angular CDI scale. At 2.0 NM before the final approach fix (FAF), CDI scaling is
tightened from 1.0 NM to the angular full scale deflection (typically the angular
full-scale deflection is 2.0°, but will be as defined for the approach).
Appendix
Index
15-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 NM), the higher scale
settings are not selected during ANY phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 NM is
selected, the GTN unit uses this for en route and terminal phases and ramps down
further during an approach. Note that the Horizontal Alarm (HAL) protection
limits listed below follow the selected CDI scale, unless corresponding flight
phases call for lower HAL. For example, if the 1.0 NM CDI setting is selected, fullscale deflection during approach will still follow the approach CDI scale settings.
CDI Scale
Auto (oceanic)
±2.0 NM or Auto (en route)
±1.0 NM or Auto (terminal)
±0.3 NM or Auto (approach)
Horizontal Alarm Limit
2.0 NM
2.0 NM
1.0 NM
0.3 NM
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Table 15-4 CDI Scale and Horizontal Alarm Limits
An “auto” ILS CDI selection allows the GTN unit to automatically switch the
external CDI from the GPS receiver to the VLOC receiver, when intercepting
the final approach course. Or, select “manual” to manually switch the external
CDI connection, as needed (using the CDI key). If the unit is installed with a
KAP140/KFC225 autopilot, automatic switching will not take place.
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the CDI key.
Touch to Choose Auto or
Manual CDI Scale Selection
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Select ILS
CDI Capture Type
Utilities
Figure 15-21 CDI Selection
2. Touch the CDI Scale key to toggle between automatic selection
or to choose the CDI scale manually.
System
Messages
Touch to Select
CDI Scale
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Figure 15-22 CDI Scale Selection
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-17
3. Touch the ILS CDI Capture key to select Auto Switch or Manual
Selection. This feature enables the unit to automatically switch
from GPS to VLOC on an ILS approach. Refer to Procedures-ILS
Approaches for more detail on ILS approaches.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
NOTE: The ILS CDI Capture key may be disabled in certain GTN installations.
15.4.2
Date/Time
The Date/Time setting provides selection of time format (local or UTC;
12- or 24-hour). UTC (also called “GMT” or “Zulu”) date and time are calculated
directly from the GPS satellites’ signals and cannot be changed.
Proc
Current Selected
Date and Time
Wpt Info
Touch to Select
Local Time Offset
Map
Touch to Select
Time Format
Traffic
Figure 15-23 System Date and Time Setup
Terrain
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Date/Time
key.
Weather
2. While viewing the System Setup page, touch Local Offset to
set the time offset for local time.
Nearest
3. Use the keypad to select the desired local offset and then
touch Enter.
Services/
Music
Utilities
4. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Time Format
key to select local 12 hour, local 24 hour, or UTC time.
System
Touch Key to Select
Time Format
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 15-24 Select System Time Format
5. Touch the key for the desired time format.
Index
15-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.4.3
Nearest Airport Criteria
Nearest Airport Criteria defines the surface type and minimum runway
length used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the Nearest
Airport page. A minimum runway length and/or surface type may be entered
to prevent the display of airports with small runways, or runways that do not
have an appropriate surface. Deselecting Include User Airports excludes
user-defined airports from the nearest airport search.
Default settings are “0 feet (or meters)” for runway length and “any” for
runway surface type.
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the
Nearest Airport key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Touch to Select
Runway Surface Type
Wpt Info
Touch to Select Minimum
Runway Length
Map
Touch to Include
User Airports
Traffic
Figure 15-25 Select Nearest Airport Criteria
2. Touch the Runway Surface key to display the options.
Select the desired surface type.
Terrain
Weather
Touch to Select Any
Runway Surface
Touch to Select Hard
Runway Surfaces Only
Touch to Select Hard or
Soft Runway Surfaces
Touch to Select Water
Surfaces Only
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 15-26 Nearest Airport Runway Surface Type
System
3. Touch Minimum Runway Length to display the keypad
for selecting the minimum runway length. Select the desired
minimum runway length with the numeric keypad. A selection
of "0" will allow any length.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-19
Touch to Delete
Values
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to
Set Values
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Figure 15-27 Nearest Airport Minimum Runway Length
Com/Nav
4. After selecting the minimum runway length, touch the Enter
key to save the entered values, or touch the Cancel key to
return to the System Setup page without saving a value.
FPL
5. Touch Include User Airports to include or exclude user
created airports
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
15.4.4
Com/Nav Setup
15.4.4.1 Com Channel Spacing
Com transceiver channel spacing may be selected between 8.33 kHz and
25.0 kHz.
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Com/Nav
key.
2. Touch COM Channel Spacing to toggle between 8.33 kHz
and 25.0 kHz channel spacing.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.4.4.2
Reverse Frequency Lookup
The identifier and frequency type will be shown for the selected Com and
Nav frequencies for the nearest stations that are in the database when the unit is
receiving a valid position input. Station Identifiers with a “+” sign will have more
stations associated with this frequency than just the type displayed.
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Com/Nav
key.
2. Touch the Reverse Frequency Lookup key to toggle the
function.
Identifier and Type
Shown for Freqs in
Database
The “+” Sign
Indicates More
Stations Associated
With this
Frequency
Reverse Frequency
Lookup Selected
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 15-28 Reverse Frequency Lookup Selected
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-21
Foreword
15.4.4.3
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.50 and later. It requires
enablement by the installer.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
COM Sidetone Control
COM sidetone is audio spoken into the COM microphone that is played back
in real-time over the headset. An offset setting determines sidetone volume for
the COM during radio transmission. Controls allow adjustment of the amount
that the COM sidetone volume level is offset from the COM receiver volume or
the configured sidetone volume.
Offset Adjustment
Controls
Direct-To
Range: +/-10%
Default Value: 0
Proc
Wpt Info
Enables Link to
COM Receiver
Volume
Figure 15-29 COM Sidetone Controls
Map
To adjust the offset from the COM receiver volume:
Traffic
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Com/Nav
key.
Terrain
2. Select Link to COM VOL.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
3. Adjust offset as necessary.
To adjust the offset from the configured sidetone volume, deselect
Link to COM VOL and then adjust the offset as necessary.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.4.5
Keyboard Format
Foreword
NOTE: QWERTY and ABC keyboard formats are available in software v6.50
and later.
The GTN 6XX employs three keypad types to serve specific settings and
functions.
Tapping Keyboard changes the format between ABC and
QWERTY.
Displays Letters A Through M
Displays Letters
N Through Z
Swiping Right or Left
Switches Between the
Available Keysets
(A-M, N-Z, 123)
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Displays Numeric
Keys
Wpt Info
ABC
Displays Alphabetical Keys
Map
Displays Numeric
Keys
Traffic
Terrain
QWERTY
Weather
Swiping Right to Left
Scrolls Through All
Available Keys
Nearest
Services/
Music
Active Selection
Utilities
Key Selector
System
Slider
Figure 15-30 Keyboard Formats
Keyboard
ABC
QWERTY
Slider
Messages
Description
Symbols
Alphabetical layout
U.S. standard keyboard layout
Key selector on bottom bar displays five keys at any given time
Appendix
Table 15-5 Keyboard Formats
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
15-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
15.4.6
Dual units may be interfaced to crossfill information between the two units.
This option will not be available unless dual units are configured.
When Crossfill is turned on with one GTN, it is automatically turned on in the
other GTN. Some items are always crossfilled regardless of the crossfill setting;
others are dependent on the crossfill setting.
The GTN can be can also be interfaced with the GNS 400W/500W units. The
GTN can automatically send the Active Flight Plan and active Direct-To course to
the GNS unit. The GTN User Waypoints can be manually sent to the GNS unit. The
GNS unit can manually send its User Waypoints to the GTN unit. Waypoint names
longer than six characters, or duplicates, sent from the GTN unit to the GNS unit
will replace some characters with a "+" sign, while leaving significant characters to
aid in identification (such as, USR003 becomes US+003).
NOTE: Upon crossfill being activated, the GTNs may take up to 10 seconds
to crossfill the flight plans. The pilot must verify the flight plan in each unit
prior to use. The GTN and GNS units must have databases with the same cycle.
Wpt Info
Map
NOTE: When GPS navigation is lost in either unit, crossfilling may not be
available until GPS is restored in both units. Crossfilling will resume once the
flightplan is changed on one of the units or crossfill is re-enabled.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Crossfill
15.4.6.1 GTN-to-GTN Crossfilling
This data is always crossfilled:
• User waypoints
• Flight plan catalog
• Alerts (traffic pop-up acknowledgement, missed approach waypoint
pop-up acknowledgement, altitude leg pop-up acknowledgement)
• External sensors (transponder status and commands, synchro heading)
• System setup:
- User-defined NAV frequencies to store favorites
- Date/Time convention
- Nearest airport criteria
- Units (Nav angle, Fuel, and Temperature)
- User-defined COM frequencies to store favorites
- CDI Scale setting
- ILS CDI Capture setting
15-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
This data is crossfilled only if crossfill is turned on by the pilot:
Foreword
• Active navigation (flight plan)
NOTE: There is an installer option to turn on a system message that will
be provided anytime crossfill is turned off to alert the pilot that flight plans
are not being crossfilled.
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the Crossfill key
to toggle between Enabled and Disabled Crossfill.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Touch Key to Enable
Crossfill With Dual
GTN Units
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 15-31 Selecting Crossfill
or
2. When Crossfill is about to be enabled, you will be prompted
to note that data will be overwritten in the other unit. Touch
OK to enable Crossfill or touch Cancel to return to the System
Setup page without enabling Crossfill.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch OK to Enable
Crossfill With Dual
Units
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 15-32 Confirming Crossfill Selection
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-25
Foreword
15.4.6.2
NOTE: When the active flight plan on the GTN contains legs or features
that are not supported by the GNS, those legs will not be crossfilled and
will not be present in the active flight plan on the GNS.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
GTN-GNS Crossfilling
• GTN to GNS – Active flight plans, active direct-to, User waypoints
• GNS to GTN – User waypoints
1. While viewing the System Setup page, touch the GNS Crossfill
Settings key to reach the GNS Crossfill settings.
FPL
Direct-To
Touch OK to Enable Auto
Crossfill With Dual Units
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch OK to Manually
Transfer User Waypoints
Map
Figure 15-33 GTN-GNS Crossfill Selection
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch Auto GNS Crossfill to enable Crossfill and send the
Active Flight Plans and the active Direct-To course to the GNS
unit.
Weather
Nearest
3. Touch the Transfer User Waypoints key to transfer the User
Waypoints from the GTN unit to the connected GNS unit.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Transfer of User
Waypoints In Progress
Messages
Symbols
Figure 15-34 GTN-GNS Crossfill
Appendix
Index
15-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.4.6.3
GTN-G3X Touch Crossfilling
Foreword
NOTE: Requires pilot activation on both the GTN and the G3X Touch.
This feature is available in software v6.60 and later.
When this function is enabled by the pilot, active flight plan navigation is crossfilled
with the G3X Touch. It is recommended that all flight plan edits be made using the
G3X Touch when this function is active.
1. W h i l e v i e w i n g t h e S y s t e m S e t u p p a g e, t o u c h
External FPL XFILL to toggle between Enabled and Disabled
Crossfill with the G3X Touch.
2. Ensure that the crossfilling function on G3X Touch is active.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-27
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
15.5
Alerts Settings
The Alerts Setup page controls two functions: Arrival Alerts and Airspace
Alerts. Arrival Alerts, when active, will generate a message when the aircraft
is within the selected proximity of the destination. Airspace Alerts generate a
message and filtering of the Nearest Airspace list. The altitude component of
Airspace Alerts are dependent on both aircraft and airspace altitude and the
values set for the Altitude Buffer.
15.5.1
Arrival
1. While viewing the Setup page under the Systems heading,
touch the Alerts key.
Direct-To
Touch to Select
Distance Values
Proc
Wpt Info
Arrival
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Select Airspace
Types
Figure 15-35 Alerts Setup Page
Weather
2. Touch the Arrival key to toggle activation. A green bar will
appear when it is active.
Nearest
Services/
Music
15.5.2
Proximity
Touch the Proximity key to set the Destination Proximity
distance values. A numeric keypad will appear. Select the
desired values and then touch Enter.
Utilities
System
Selected Proximity Value
Messages
Touch Key to
Delete Values
Symbols
Use the Numeric
Keypad to Select
Proximity Value
Appendix
Figure 15-36 Arrival Alert Proximity Selection
Index
15-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.5.3
Airspace Alert Options
1. While viewing the Setup Alerts page, touch Airspace Alert
Options.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Selected Airspace
Type (green bar)
Com/Nav
Airspace
Altitude Buffer
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 15-37 Airspace Alert Selections
2. Touch the Airspace Altitude Buffer key to set the buffer
altitude value. A numeric keypad will appear. Select the desired
value and then touch Enter.
Selected Altitude
Buffer Value
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Touch Key to
Delete Values
Traffic
Use the Numeric
Keypad to Select
Altitude Buffer Value
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Touch Enter or Press Small
Knob to Save Values
Figure 15-38 Altitude Buffer Selection
Services/
Music
3. Touch the Airspace type keys to toggle activation. A green bar
will appear when it is active.
NOTE: The Airspace Alert setting does not alter the depiction of airspace,
or change the Smart Airspace setting for the main map page.
NOTE: Airspace alerts for Prohibited airspace cannot be disabled.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-29
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
15.6
User Fields
The User Fields selection allows you to configure the data field type shown at
the right of the display when it is not occupied by the control for a transponder.
The data shown in the field may be selected from a list after touching the desired
field.
NOTE: Data Field Types that use the term "Destination" refer to the final
destination in the flight plan.
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: ETE to Destination is not available when a procedure is loaded and
there are waypoints in the Enroute section of the flight plan.
Direct-To
1. While viewing the System page, touch the User Fields key,
then touch an available field on the side of the display.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Touch to Select
Data Type
Traffic
Touch to Restore
Defaults
Figure 15-39 User Fields Selection
Terrain
2. Touch the Data, Function, or Page tab to display a list
of available selections. A list of information types will be
displayed.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Field Type List
Touch to Select
Data Field
Selected Field
Type
Slider Indicates More
Selections Available
Press Finger and
Slide To View More
Selections
Figure 15-40 Map Data Field Type Selections
Utilities
System
Messages
3. Touch the Up or Down keys or touch the display and drag
your finger to scroll through the list. Touch the desired item
to select it or touch the Back key to cancel selection.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-30
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Data Field Type
ACTV WPT - Active Waypoint
B/D APT - BRG/DIS from Dest APT 1
BRG - Bearing to Current Waypoint
DIS - Distance to Current Waypoint
DIS to Dest - Distance to Destination 2
DTK - Desired Track
ESA - Enroute Safe Altitude
ETA - Estimated Time of Arrival
ETA at Dest - ETA at Destination
ETE - Estimated Time Enroute
ETE to Dest - ETE to Destination
Fuel Flow - Total Fuel Flow
GS - GPS Ground Speed
GSL - GPS Altitude
Generic Timer - Timer Display
Foreword
MSA - Minimum Safe Altitude
NAV/COM - Active NAV/COM FREQ
OAT (static) - Static Air Temperature
OAT (total) - Total Air Temperature
RAD ALT - Radar Altimeter
Time - Current Time
Time to TOD - Time to Top of Descent
TKE - Track Angle Error
TRK - Track
Trip Timer - Timer Display
VOR/LOC - Tuned VOR/LOC Info
VSR - Vertical Speed Required
Wind - Wind Speed and Direction
XTK - Cross Track Error
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Table 15-6 Data Field Types of Information
Terrain
Note 1:
B/D APT is the straight line distance.
Note 2:
Dist to DEST is the distance along the flight plan.
Function Field Type
CDI - Course Deviation Indicator
Flap Override - Flap Override 1
GPWS Inhibit - GPWS Inhibit 1
G/S Inhibit - G/S Inhibit 1
HTAWS RP Mode - HTAWS RP Mode 2
Weather
Nearest
OBS/Suspend/Unsuspend Button
On Scene - "On Scene" Mode Toggle
TAWS Inhibit - TAWS Inhibit
Gen Timer - Generic Timer Control
OFF - Do Not Display Data Field
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Table 15-7 Function Field Types of Information
Note 1:
With TAWS-A enabled
Note 2:
With HTAWS enabled
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-31
Page Field Type
Foreword
Blackout Mode
DFLT NAV - Default Navigation
Flight Plan - Flight Plan Page
Map - Map Page
Nearest - Nearest Page
NEAR APT - Nearest Airport Page
PROC - Procedures Page
Approach - Approach Page
Arrival - Arrival Page
Departure - Departure Page
Backlight - Backlight Page
Services - Services Page
Traffic - Traffic Page
Terrain - Terrain Page
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Utilities - Utilities Page
Checklist - Checklist Page
Fuel PLAN - Fuel Planning Page
SCHED MSG - Scheduled Messages
Trip PLAN - Trip Planning Page
VCALC - VCALC Page
User FREQ - User Frequencies
WPT INFO - Waypoint Information
Weather - Weather Page
CNXT WX - Connext WX Page
FIS-B WX - FIS-B Weather Page
Stormscope - Stormscope Page
SiriusXM WX - Sirius XM WX Page
OFF - Do Not Display Page Field
Table 15-8 Page Field Types of Information
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-32
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.7
Units Settings
The Units Setup page allows you to select the conventions for the various
units that are displayed.
Units Type
Units Values
Altitude/Vertical Speed Feet(FT/FPM), Meters (M/MPS)
Nautical Miles (NM/KT), Kilometers (KM/KPH),
Distance/Speed
Statue Miles (SM/MPH)
Gallons (GAL), Imperial Gallons (IG), Kilograms (KG),
Fuel1
Liters (LT), or Pounds (LB)
Magnetic (°), True (°T), User (°u)
Nav Angle1
Magnetic Variation
Position Format
Pressure
Temperature1
Enter numeric value, E or W
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
LAT/LON DD.D°, LAT/LON DD° MM.M', LAT/TON DD°
MM'SS", MGRS, UTM, Swiss Grid, Irish Grid,
British National Grid
Inches of Mercury (IN), Hectopascals (HPA), Millibars (MB)
Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F)
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Table 15-9 System Units Setup
Terrain
Note 1: Only these unit types will be crossfilled in dual GTN installations.
15.7.1
Foreword
Setup Units
Use these settings to set the units for values displayed in the unit operation.
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Units key.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Set Units
Utilities
System
Messages
Figure 15-41 System Units Page
2. Touch the key for the desired units. A window with a list of
unit values will appear. Touch the desired value on the list.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-33
Foreword
Getting
Started
Figure 15-42 System Units Selection Windows
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
3. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to
return to the Setup page.
15.7.2
Setting a User-Configured (Manual) Nav Angle
There are three variation (heading) options: Magnetic, True, and User. If
“Magnetic” is selected, all track, course and heading information is corrected
to the magnetic variation computed by the GPS receiver. The “True” setting
references all information to true north. The “User” selection allows the pilot
to enter values between 0º and 179º E or W. When configured by the installer,
there may also be a fourth option: External. If “External” is selected, the GTN
Nav Angle will be synchronized with the on-side MFD.
NOTE: When changing the Nav angle, the DTK on the Flight Plan page
for an approach does not change until that approach is reloaded.
Map
Traffic
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Units key.
Terrain
2. Touch the Nav Angle key and then the User key.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch to Select User
(manual) Mag Var
System
Figure 15-43 Nav Angle Selections
Messages
3. After User is selected, touch the Magnetic Variation key to
set the value.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-34
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Touch to Set
Manual Mag Var
User Nav
Angle Selected
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Figure 15-44 Magnetic Variation is Available for Editing
4. Touch the keys on the numeric keypad to set the Magnetic
Variation and then touch Enter.
FPL
Direct-To
Touch to Toggle
E/W Hemispheres
Proc
Touch to
Delete Values
Wpt Info
Touch Enter or Press
Small Knob to Save
Values
Use Numeric Keypad to Select
User (manual) Magnetic Variation
Map
Traffic
Figure 15-45 Numeric Keypad for Setting Manual Magnetic Variation
Terrain
5. The User Nav Angle value will be used for all angular values.
Remember to change the value when traveling to an area
requiring another value.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-35
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
15.7.3
Position Format Selection
There are multiple position formats available.
LAT/LON DD.D° **
British National Grid **
MGRS *
LAT/LON DD°MM.M'
Irish National Grid **
UTM *
LAT/LON DD°MM'SS" ** Swiss National Grid **
* Software v4.10 and later.
** Software v6.50 and later.
The selected format is used in all locations where position information is
available.
Proc
Grid Designator
100 km Square
Identifier
Easting Value
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Northing Value
Figure 15-46 MGRS Position Format Detail
Terrain
Grid Zone
Weather
Latitude Band
Easting Value
Nearest
Services/
Music
Northing Value
Figure 15-47 UTM Position Format Detail
Utilities
System
In the case of regional position formats (e.g., Swiss National Grid), the GTN
defaults to displaying LAT/LON for any positions outside of the grid region.
Grid Designator
Messages
Easting Value
Symbols
Appendix
Northing Value
Figure 15-48 British National Grid Position Format Detail
Index
15-36
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Grid Designator
Easting Value
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Northing Value
Figure 15-49 Irish National Grid Position Format Detail
Com/Nav
Easting Value
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Northing Value
Figure 15-50 Swiss National Grid Position Format Detail
Wpt Info
1. While viewing the System page, touch Units key.
Map
2. Touch the Position Format key.
Traffic
Touch to Select
Position Format
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Figure 15-51 Position Format Selection
Services/
Music
3. Touch the desired Position format.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-37
Foreword
Getting
Started
15.8
Audio
The Audio Settings allows the adjustment of the volume the click sound
when controls are touched.
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Audio key.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Volume Level
Com/Nav
Touch the Arrow
Keys to Adjust
Click Volume
FPL
Touch to Select
Voice Callouts
(Optional)
Touch to Select
Voice (TAWS Only)
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 15-52 Audio Setup Selection
2. Touch the Arrow keys to adjust the Key Click Volume.
Wpt Info
3. Touch the Male or Female key to select the audio voice type.
Map
Traffic
4. When HTAWS is installed, a Voice Callouts option may be
available. Touch the Voice Callouts key to select the Max
Voice Callout value.
Terrain
NOTE: VCOs are available down to 100 feet above terrain when HTAWS is
installed and use GSL above terrain to generate callouts (no radar altimeter
required). If a radar altimeter is interfaced to the GTN, alerts are available
down to 50 feet and the height above terrain from the radar altimeter is
used to generate the callouts.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
5. Touch the MAX Voice Callout key to select the value.
Utilities
Touch to Select
Max Voice Callout
System
Messages
Symbols
Touch to Select
Voice Callout Value
Figure 15-53 Select Voice Callout Value
Appendix
6. Touch Back when complete.
Index
15-38
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.9
Backlight Settings
Foreword
The backlighting of the display and bezel keys can be adjusted automatically
or manually. The default setting (automatic backlighting adjustment) uses
photocell technology to automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions.
Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance
through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. A manual offset creates
a deviation form the normal curve. Manual adjustments may be made from
+100% to -10%. The negative adjustment is limited to prevent the backlight
from being accidently decreasing the backlight to the point where the display of
information could not be seen.
The backlight offset function is not available when a dimmer input is active.
The GTN is capable of accepting lighting inputs from the built-in photocell,
aircraft dimmer bus, or both. If the lighting is not satisfactory, contact the
installer to adjust the curves.
Manual backlighting adjustment can be accomplished using the existing
instrument panel dimmer bus or the following procedures.
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Backlight key.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Backlight Level
Weather
Nearest
Touch Arrows to Set
Manual Offset
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 15-54 Backlight Level Setting
System
2. Touch the Manual Offset Arrow keys to set the Manual
Offset level.
3. After making the desired selections, touch the Back key to
return to the Setup page.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-39
Foreword
15.10
Getting
Started
This page provides information about the GSR 56 and the Connext Registration
page. Refer to section 15.3.3 for more details.
1. While viewing the System page, touch Connext Setup to
access the GSR 56 LRU Status page.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
2. Touch Connext Registration to set up the Connext account.
Follow the information provided in section 15.3.3.
FPL
Direct-To
15.11
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Connext Setup - Flight Stream 210 and 510
NOTE: Refer to the Flight Stream product page on the Garmin website for
portable device compatibility.
Proc
Wpt Info
Connext Setup - GSR 56
The GTN interfaces with the Flight Stream 210 Bluetooth transceiver and
Flight Stream 510 wireless datacard. Using a Flight Stream and the GTN, flight
plans are sent and received over Bluetooth. In addition, GPS position is provided
from the GTN and attitude is forwarded from a connected GDU. The GTN can
also configure the Flight Stream's Bluetooth.
The Flight Stream 510 also includes a Wi-Fi transceiver for updating
databases. For more information on updating databases with Flight Stream 510,
refer to section 18.2. The GTN can configure the Flight Stream 510's Wi-Fi.
When setting up Wi-Fi, use a password contains letters in mixed case and
numbers.
1. While viewing the System page, touch Connext Setup and
then the Flight Stream 210 or Flight Stream 510 key.
Utilities
System
Messages
Touch to Configure
Flight Stream
Features
Touch to Configure
Bluetooth
Touch to Configure Wi-Fi
(Flight Stream 510 Only)
Figure 15-55 Connext Setup for Flight Stream 510
Symbols
NOTE: Turning Flight Plan imports off will remove the ability of the GTN
to receive flight plans from the Flight Stream. This could be used if there
are repeated erroneous attempts by a portable device application to send
flight plans to the GTN.
Appendix
Index
15-40
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
2. Touch the Bluetooth Setup key to manage the Bluetooth
connection.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Touch to Set
the Bluetooth
Name
Touch to Manage
Paired Devices
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 15-56 Bluetooth Setup for Flight Stream
3. Touch the Wi-Fi Setup key to manage the Wi-Fi connection.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Figure 15-57 Flight Stream 510 - Wi-Fi Setup
4. Touch the Features key to manage Flight Stream Features.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Figure 15-58 Flight Stream 510 - Features Setup
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-41
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
15.11.1 Operation
Data output from the GTN and Flight Stream occurs automatically and
requires no pilot action (such as, flight plan, GPS position, and attitude).
Additionally, ADS-B traffic and weather can be output from the Flight Stream
when connected to a GDL 88 or GTX 345 and XM WX and SiriusXM satellite
radio information can output when connected a GDL 69. From the Connext
Setup page, the pilot can enable/disable flight plan importing, change the Flight
Stream Bluetooth name, and manage paired devices. The Flight Stream 210 and
510 also support sending and receiving GSR 56 SMS messages and controlling
the GSR 56 Iridium phone when used with a compatible portable application.
From the Connext Setup page, the pilot can enable/disable Flight Stream
features (flight plan importing, phone/SMS, and database transfers), setup Flight
Stream Bluetooth and Wi-Fi, and manage paired Bluetooth devices.
On the GTN's Paired Devices page, the device status indicates if the
portable device is connected and communicating with the Flight Stream. The
“Auto-Reconnect” setting determines if the Flight Stream will automatically
connect to up to four devices when in range. When this setting is disabled,
the pilot must initiate the connection from the device. For devices that always
reconnect automatically, this setting will not be shown. Removing a device from
this page by pressing “Remove” will require the device to be paired again before
transferring data.
Weather
NOTE: If the pairing is removed from either device (portable device or
GTN) it must be removed on the other device before a new pairing to that
same device is established again. Essentially, pairing must be removed on
both devices before repairing.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Touch to Automatically
Connect to the Device
When in Range
Utilities
Touch to Remove
the Device
System
Device is Connected
and Communicating
Messages
Symbols
Figure 15-59 Managing Paired Devices
Appendix
Index
15-42
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.11.2 Pairing a Device
New devices can only be paired with the Flight Stream when it is in “Pairing
Mode.” The Flight Stream will be in pairing mode when the GTN is navigated
to the Connext Setup page and/or the Manage Paired Devices page. The pairing
must be initiated by the portable device. Pop-ups display on both the portable
device and GTN to confirm the pairing. Verify the passkey displayed on the
GTN matches that on the portable device.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Figure 15-60 Confirm Pairing With A New Device
Wpt Info
Selecting “Manage Paired Devices” opens a page that lists all of devices paired
to the Flight Stream.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-43
Foreword
15.12
Connext Setup - Other Bluetooth Devices
Getting
Started
The GTN can also configure the Bluetooth transceiver in other units, such as
the GTX 345.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch to Enable
Bluetooth
Com/Nav
FPL
Touch to Set
the Bluetooth
Name
Touch to Manage
Paired Devices
Direct-To
Figure 15-61 Connext Setup for GTX 345
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
From the Connext Setup page, the pilot can enable/disable Bluetooth, change
the Bluetooth name, and manage paired devices. On the Paired Devices page,
the device status indicates if the portable device is paired and connected. To
connect a different device when the maximum number are already connected,
the existing connection must be ended by removing the portable device pairing
or by disconnecting or disabling Bluetooth on the portable device. Removing a
device from this page by pressing “Remove” will require the device to be paired
again before reconnecting.
Weather
NOTE: If the pairing is removed from either device (portable device or
installed avionics) it must be removed on the other device before a new
pairing to that same device is established again. Essentially, the pairing
must be removed on both devices before re-pairing.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
New devices can only be paired while the unit is in “Pairing Mode.” Pairing
mode is active while on the Connext Setup page or the Manage Paired Devices
page. The pairing must be initiated by the portable device. A pop-up will be
displayed on the portable device to confirm the pairing.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-44
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
15.13
Voice Command
Foreword
NOTE: This feature is available in software v6.20 and later.
The Voice Command page allows controlling the voice command function
and viewing the voice command status and recent commands. Voice Commands
are only available when connected to a compatible Garmin audio panel and
when enabled by the installer.
Touch to Activate
Voice Commands
Touch to View
Recently Spoken
Commands
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Installed Voice
Command
Grammar Version
Direct-To
Voice Command
Tone Status
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 15-62 Voice Command Setup
1. While viewing the System page, touch the Voice Commands
key.
2. Touch the Voice Command key to toggle activation. A green
bar will appear when voice commands are active.
3. Touch the Command History key to open a list of recently
spoken commands.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Command Name
Time Command
was Issued
Command Status
Crew Member
Who Issued
Command
Figure 15-63 Voice Command History
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
15-45
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
15-46
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
16
MESSAGES
Foreword
When an Message has been issued by the unit, the MSG (Message)
key/annunciator on the left side of the display will blink. Touch the MSG key to
view the messages. After viewing the messages, touch the Back key to return to
the previously viewed page.
System messages are not crossfilled between GTN units. Each GTN will display
messages based on data received by that unit. This may result in duplication of
messages between units, however the pilot should view messages on both GTN
units when more than one is installed to ensure all messages are received.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Message List
Message Key Touch To Toggle
Message Display
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 16-1 Message Display
Traffic
Terrain
Message
ABORT
APPROACH GPS approach no
longer available.
Description
This message is triggered
outside the MAP if
the GTN system can
no longer provide
approach level of service.
Vertical guidance will
be removed from the
external CDI/HSI display.
AIRSPACE ALERT - The aircraft is predicted
to enter an airspace
Airspace entry
type, within 10 minutes,
in less than 10
for which alerts are
minutes.
configured.
Action
Initiate a climb to the MSA or other
published safe altitude, abort the
approach, and execute a non-GPS
based approach.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Message
Description
AIRSPACE ALERT Airspace within
2 nm and entry
in less than 10
minutes.
Action
The aircraft is within 2
nm and predicted to
enter an airspace type,
within 10 minutes,
for which alerts are
configured.
AIRSPACE ALERT - The aircraft inside an
airspace type for which
Inside airspace.
alerts are configured.
AIRSPACE ALERT - The aircraft is within
2nm of an airspace
Within 2 nm of
type for which alerts
airspace.
are configured.
Approach has been
APPROACH
DOWNGRADE - downgraded from
LPV or LNAV/VNAV,
Approach
downgraded. Use to an LNAV approach.
Vertical guidance
LNAV minima.
will be removed from
the external CDI/HSI
display.
APPROACH NOT GPS approach could
not transition to active
ACTIVE (e.g., the GTN is on
Do not continue
an approach and did
GPS approach.
not have the required
HPL/VPL to get into at
least LNAV, so is still in
TERM).
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
APR GUIDANCE
AVAILABLE Press “Enable APR
Output” before
selecting APR on
autopilot.
Press the “Enable APR Output”
key on the GTN, this will cause the
autopilot to go into ROL mode.
Engage the autopilot into approach
mode. Refer to section 6.15 for
additional information.
The GTN is configured
for KAP140/KFC225
autopilot, and approach
guidance is now
available.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Continue to fly the approach using
published LNAV minimums.
Abort the approach, and execute a
non-GPS based approach.
Index
16-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
Action
CDI/HSI FLAG Main lateral/
vertical flag
on CDI/HSI is
inoperative.
The Main Lateral
Superflag or Main
Vertical Superflag
output has been turned
off due to an overcurrent condition.
Aircraft is on a GPS
approach but CDI is set
to VLOC, or aircraft is
on VLOC approach and
CDI is set to GPS and
aircraft is less than 2
nm from the FAF.
Com radio is locked to
121.5 MHz.
Verify course guidance is valid
and correct by crosschecking with
the GTN on-screen CDI and other
navigational equipment. Contact
dealer for service.
CDI SOURCE Select appropriate
CDI source for
approach.
COM RADIO Com locked to
121.5 MHz. Hold
remote com
transfer key to exit.
COM RADIO Com overtemp
or undervoltage.
Reducing
transmitter power.
COM RADIO Com radio may be
inoperative.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Select the appropriate CDI source
for approach.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
The external com remote transfer
(COM RMT XFR) switch has been
held and the com radio is tuned to
121.5. To exit this mode, hold the
com remote transfer (COM RMT
XFR) switch for two seconds.
Decrease length of com
Com radio is
in overtemp or
transmissions, decrease cabin
undervoltage mode
temperature and increase cabin
and transmitting power airflow (especially near the GTN).
has been reduced to
Check aircraft voltage and reduce
prevent damage to the electrical load as necessary.
com radio. Radio range Contact dealer for service if
will be reduced.
message persists.
Press and hold the volume knob or
The com radio is not
communicating properly the external com remote transfer
with the system.
(COM RMT XFR) switch, if installed
– this will force the com radio to
121.5 MHz. Contact dealer for
service.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-3
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Message
Description
COM RADIO Com radio needs
service.
The com radio is
reporting that it needs
service. The com radio
may continue to
function.
CONFIGURATION TAWS is inoperative
due to a configuration
- Terrain/TAWS
problem with the GTN.
configuration is
invalid. GTN needs This message will be
accompanied by a TER
service.
FAIL annunciation.
CONFIGURATION The GTN cannot
communicate with its
MODULE GTN configuration configuration module.
The GTN may still have
module needs
a valid configuration.
service.
Backlight brightness
COOLING has been reduced
GTN overtemp.
Reducing backlight due to high display
temperatures. The
brightness.
backlight level will
remain high enough to
be visible in daylight
conditions.
COOLING FAN - The GTN cooling fan is
The cooling fan has powered, but it is not
turning at the desired
failed.
RPM.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
CROSSFILL
ERROR Crossfill is
inoperative. See
CRG for crossfilled
items.
Crossfill is not
working due to loss
of communication
with other GTN or due
to one GTN needing
service.
Action
Cycle the power to the COM radio.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Decrease cabin temperature and
increase cabin airflow (especially
near the GTN). Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Decrease cabin temperature and
increase cabin airflow (especially
near the GTN) to prevent damage
to the unit. Contact dealer for
service.
Refer to section 15.4.6 for a list of
crossfilled items that will no longer
be crossfilled. Contact dealer for
service.
Index
16-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
CROSSFILL
ERROR - GTN
Navigation DB
mismatch. See
CRG for crossfilled
items.
CROSSFILL
ERROR GTN software
mismatch. See
CRG for crossfilled
items.
CROSSFILL
STATUS - Crossfill
is turned off.
DATABASE A procedure has
been modified in
a cataloged flight
plan.
DATABASE Terrain database
is not installed,
is corrupt, or is
not valid for this
system.
DATABASE Terrain display
unavailable for
current location.
Description
Action
Foreword
The navigation
databases do not
match between GTNs
resulting in a loss
of communication
between two units.
Check the specified database
version of both GTNs and ensure it
is up-to-date. Update the specified
database if needed.
Crossfill is configured
“on” but is not working
due to software
mismatch.
Refer to section 15.4.6 for a list of
crossfilled items that will no longer
be crossfilled. Contact dealer to
have software versions updated.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Crossfill is turned off.
Wpt Info
No action.
Map
A new database update
caused a procedure to
be truncated because
the flight plan now has
too many waypoints or
removed a procedure
because it no longer
exists in the database.
The terrain database
is not available and
terrain information
alerts will not be
displayed.
Verify stored cataloged flight plans
and procedures. Modify stored
flight plans and procedures as
necessary to include the current
procedures by re-loading those
procedures to the stored flight plan
routes.
The aircraft is outside
the terrain database
coverage area.
Terrain and TAWS functions will
be unavailable. If terrain coverage
is desired in the area, load
appropriate coverage area on the
external datacard.
Re-load this database on the
external datacard.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Message
Description
DATABASE Terrain or Obstacle
database not
available.
DATABASE Verify airways in
stored flight plans
are correct.
The terrain or obstacle
database is missing or
corrupt.
Re-load these databases on the
external datacard.
A stored flight plan
contains an airway that
is no longer consistent
with the current
navigation database.
DATABASE Verify usermodified
procedures in
stored flight plans
are correct.
DATACARD
ERROR SD card is invalid
or failed.
DATACARD
REMOVED Reinsert SD card.
DATALINK ADS-B In fault: UAT
receiver.
DATALINK ADS-B In fault:
1090 receiver.
DATALINK - FIS-B
weather has failed.
A stored flight plan
contains procedures
that have been
manually updated, and
a navigation database
update has occurred.
Verify that the airways in stored
flight plans are correct. Modify
stored flight plans as necessary to
include the current airways by
re-loading those airways to the
stored flight plan routes.
Verify that the user-modified
procedures in stored flight plans
are correct.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-6
Action
External datacard has
an error and the unit
is not able to read the
databases.
ChartView, FlightCharts, and Terrain
databases will not be accessible by
the unit. Contact dealer for service.
External datacard was
removed.
Reinsert datacard.
The ADS-B In source
has detected a UAT
receiver fault.
Contact dealer for service.
The ADS-B In source
has detected a 1090
receiver fault.
Contact dealer for service.
The FIS-B receiver is
reporting that it has
failed. The display of
FIS-B products may be
unavailable.
Contact dealer for service.
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
DATALINK GDL 69 is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
DATALINK GDL 88 ADS-B
failure. Unable to
transmit ADS-B
messages.
DATALINK GDL 88 ADS-B
fault.
DATALINK GDL 88 ADS-B
fault. Pressure
altitude input is
invalid.
DATALINK GDL 88 ADS-B is
not transmitting
position. Check
GPS devices.
DATALINK GDL 88
configuration
module needs
service.
Description
Action
Foreword
The GTN is configured Contact dealer for service.
for a Garmin datalink
(GDL 69 or 69A)
and the GTN cannot
communicate with the
datalink. Data from
the datalink will not be
available.
GDL 88 is not able
Contact dealer for service.
to transmit an ADS-B
message due to a
failure with the GDL 88
system or antenna(s).
The GDL 88 has
detected a fault with
one of the GDL 88
UAT/1090 antennas.
The GDL 88 has lost
communication with
the pressure altitude
source.
Contact dealer for service.
The GDL 88 has
detected a position
input fault.
Contact dealer for service.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Contact dealer for service.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
The GDL 88
has detected a
configuration module
fault.
System
Contact dealer for service.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-7
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Message
DATALINK GDL 88 control
input fault. Check
transponder is in
correct mode.
DATALINK GDL 88 is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
DATALINK GDL 88 needs
service.
DATALINK GSR 56 data
services
inoperative;
registration
required.
DATALINK GSR 56 is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
DATA LOST Pilot stored data
was lost. Recheck
settings.
Description
Action
The GDL 88 has lost
communication with
the transponder.
Contact dealer for service.
The GTN is configured
for a Garmin datalink
(GDL 88) and the GTN
cannot communicate
with the datalink. Data
from the datalink will
not be available.
GDL 88 has detected
an internal fault.
Contact dealer for service.
The GSR 56 is not
registered. GSR
Weather, Position
Reporting, and Phone
Services will be
unavailable.
Contact dealer for service.
The GTN is configured
for a Garmin GSR 56
and the GTN cannot
communicate with the
GSR 56. GSR Weather,
Position Reporting, and
Phone Services will be
unavailable.
User settings such as
map detail level, nav
range ring on/off, traffic
overlay on/off, and alert
settings have been lost.
Close the GSR 56 circuit breaker
and ensure the GSR 56 is receiving
power. Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Recheck settings.
Index
16-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
DATA SOURCE Heading source
inoperative or
connection to GTN
lost.
DATA SOURCE Pressure altitude
source inoperative
or connection to
GTN lost.
DATA SOURCE Radar Altimeter
source inoperative
or connection to
GTN lost.
DEMO MODE Demo mode is
active. Do not use
for navigation.
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT - Flight
plan import failed.
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT - Flight
plan import failed.
Catalog is full.
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT - New
imported flight
plan(s) available
for preview.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Description
The GTN is configured
to receive heading
information but is not
receiving it from any
source.
Action
Foreword
Heading up map displays will not
be available. Contact dealer for
service.
If the GTN is being used to forward
pressure altitude to a transponder,
the transponder will not be
receiving pressure altitude from the
GTN while that message is present.
Contact dealer for service.
The GTN is configured 50 foot aural annunciation
to receive radio altitude is unavailable for HTAWS
information but is not installations. Contact dealer for
receiving it from any
service.
source.
The GTN is configured
to receive pressure
altitude but is not
receiving it from any
source.
The GTN is in Demo
Mode and must not
be used for actual
navigation.
Do not use for navigation. Power
cycle the GTN to exit demo mode.
Also ensure that the Direct-To key
is not stuck.
The requested flight
plan could not be
imported because the
GTN was unable to
decode the contents of
the flight plan.
The flight plan
catalog is full and the
requested flight plan
could not be imported.
Check for proper operation of
the needed components. Contact
dealer for service if problem
persists.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Edit the flight plan catalog to
remove unneeded flight plans.
System
Messages
The GTN has received a No action is necessary; message is
new flight plan that is informational only.
available for preview by
the pilot.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Message
Description
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT Changes to the
active route are
disabled.
FLIGHT PLAN
IMPORT - GDU
disconnected.
External flight
plan crossfill
inoperative.
FPL WAYPOINT
LOCKED Stored flight plan
waypoint is not in
current navigation
database.
FPL WPT MOVED Stored flight plan
waypoint has
changed location.
Unit receives a flight
plan from G3X Touch,
but the External FPL
Crossfill function is off.
Enable the External FPL Crossfill
function.
Home > System > Setup >
External FPL Xfill.
Communication with
the G3X Touch is lost.
Verify that the GDU is on.
Contact dealer for service.
A stored flight plan
waypoint is no longer in
the current navigation
database.
Verify stored cataloged flight plans
and procedures. Modify stored
flight plans as necessary to include
waypoints that are in the current
navigation database.
A stored flight plan
waypoint has moved
by more than 0.33 arc
minutes from where
previously positioned.
Verify stored cataloged flight plans
and procedures. Modify stored
flight plans as necessary to include
waypoints that are in the current
navigation database.
Fly an approach that does not use
the glideslope receiver (VOR, LOC,
GPS). Contact dealer for service.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
The glideslope board
GLIDESLOPE Glideslope receiver is not communicating
property with the
has failed.
system.
The glideslope board is
GLIDESLOPE Glideslope receiver indicating that it needs
service. The glideslope
needs service.
board may continue to
function.
Appendix
Action
Verify glideslope deviation
indications with another source
and crosscheck final approach
fix crossing altitude. If another
glideslope source is not available
for verification, fly a GPS based
approach. Contact dealer for
service.
Index
16-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
GNS CROSSFILL Catalog full; not all
GNS waypoint(s)
transferred.
Description
A user waypoint from
the GNS could not be
created because the
user waypoint catalog
is full.
GNS CROSSFILL - A user waypoint from
the GNS replaced one or
GTN user
more existing waypoints
waypoint(s)
replaced with GNS on the GTN.
user waypoints.
GNS CROSSFILL - Waypoint transfer
Waypoint transfer failed/incomplete.
failed.
GPS position has been
GPS
lost due to erroneous
NAVIGATION
position.
LOST Erroneous
position. Use other
navigation source.
GPS position has been
GPS
lost due to lack of
NAVIGATION
satellites.
LOST Insufficient
satellites. Use other
navigation source.
GPS RECEIVER - Internal communication
to the SBAS board is
GPS receiver has
failed. Check GPS inoperative.
coax for electrical
short.
GPS RECEIVER - The GPS module
GPS receiver needs is reporting that it
needs service. The GPS
service.
module may continue
to function.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Action
Foreword
Remove some of the waypoints
from the catalog to make room for
the waypoints from the GNS.
Ensure that the waypoints on the
GNS have unique names before
transferring to the GTN to avoid
overwriting existing waypoints.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
The data transfer should be
reattempted.
Proc
Wpt Info
Use a different GPS receiver
or a non-GPS based source of
navigation. Contact dealer for
service.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Wait for GPS satellite geometry
to improve. Ensure the aircraft
has a clear view of the sky. Use a
different GPS receiver or a non-GPS
based source of navigation.
Contact dealer for service.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Use a different GPS receiver
or a non-GPS based source of
navigation. Contact dealer for
service.
System
Messages
Use a different GPS receiver
or a non-GPS based source of
navigation. Contact dealer for
service.
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Weather
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-11
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Message
GPS RECEIVER Low internal clock
battery.
Description
The GPS module
indicates that its clock
battery is low. Almanac
data may have been
lost. The unit will
function normally, but
may take a longer
than normal period to
acquire a GPS position.
GPS SEARCHING The GPS module is
acquiring position and
SKY may take longer than
Ensure GPS
normal. This message
antenna has an
unobstructed view normally occurs after
initial installation or if
of the sky.
the unit has not been
powered for several
weeks.
The GTN has lost
GTN GTN needs service. calibration data that
was set by Garmin
during manufacturing.
HOLD EXPIRED - The selected Expect
Holding EFC time Further Clearance (EFC)
time for a user-defined
has expired.
hold has passed.
The terrain database is
HTAWS of insufficient resolution
Invalid Terrain
for use with HTAWS.
Database.
GAD 42 indicates a
INTERFACE
configuration error.
ADAPTER GAD 42
configuration
needs service.
Action
Contact dealer for service.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Contact dealer for service.
No action is necessary; message is
information only.
Load HTAWS specific terrain
database on the external SD card.
Verify all input/output data from/
to the GAD 42 Interface Adapter.
Contact dealer for service.
Appendix
Index
16-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
INTERFACE
ADAPTER GAD 42 needs
service.
INTERNAL SD
CARD ERROR GTN needs service.
INTERNAL SD
CARD REMOVED GTN needs service.
Description
Action
Foreword
Verify all input/output data from/
GAD 42 indicates it
needs service. The GAD to the GAD 42 Interface Adapter.
42 may continue to
Contact dealer for service.
function.
Internal SD card has an Contact dealer for service.
error. This card is not
accessible by the user.
Internal SD card was
removed or failed. This
card is not accessible by
the user.
The Direct-To key
KEY STUCK has been in pressed
Direct-To key is
position for at least 30
stuck.
seconds. This key will
now be ignored.
The HOME key has
KEY STUCK HOME key is stuck. been in pressed
position for at least 30
seconds. This key will
now be ignored.
The dual concentric
KNOB STUCK inner knob has been in
Dual concentric
inner knob is stuck pressed position for at
least 30 seconds. This
in the pressed
knob press will now be
position.
ignored.
The Volume knob
KNOB STUCK has been in pressed
Volume knob
position for at least
is stuck in the
pressed position. 30 seconds. This knob
press will now be
ignored.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Contact dealer for service.
Direct-To
Proc
Verify the Direct-To key is not
pressed. Contact dealer for service
if message persists.
Wpt Info
Map
Verify the HOME key is not pressed.
Press the Home key again to cycle
its operation. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Verify the dual concentric knob
is not pressed. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Verify the volume knob is not
pressed. Contact dealer for service
if message persists.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-13
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Message
LOCKED FLIGHT
PLAN
Cannot activate
a flight plan
containing a locked
waypoint.
LOSS OF
INTEGRITY (LOI)Verify GPS
position with
other navigation
equipment.
MAGNETIC
NORTH
APPROACH Verify NAV angles
are referenced
to magnetic
north (magnetic
variation).
MAGNETIC
VARIATION Aircraft in area
with large mag var.
Verify all course
angles.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
MARK ON
TARGET Waypoint creation
has failed. MOT
requires GPS
position.
Description
Action
The user is trying to
activate a flight plan
that contains a locked
waypoint.
Unlock the flight plan by modifying
stored flight plans as necessary
to include waypoints, procedures,
and airways that are in the current
navigation database.
Antenna may be
shaded from satellites.
The GPS module has
reported a loss of
integrity.
Make sure the aircraft is clear of
hangars, buildings, trees, etc. Use
a different GPS receiver or a nonGPS based source of navigation.
Contact dealer for service if
message persists.
The NAV angle is not
set to Magnetic and a
magnetic approach is
loaded.
Change NAV angle setting to
Magnetic.
MagVar is flagged
as unreliable in the
MagVar database.
This normally occurs
when operating at high
latitudes that do not
support a Nav Angle of
Magnetic.
Mark on target
waypoint creation
has failed because of
missing GPS position.
Verify that the geographical region
supports navigation based on
magnetic variation.
Wait for GPS satellite geometry to
improve. Ensure the aircraft has a
clear view of the sky. Reattempt
waypoint creation. Contact dealer
for service.
Index
16-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
NAV ANGLE NAV Angles are
referenced to a
User set value (U).
NAV ANGLE NAV Angles are
referenced to True
North (T).
NON-WGS84
WAYPOINT See CRG. Location
may be different
than where
surveyed for [WPT].
OBS OBS is not
available due to
dead reckoning or
no active waypoint.
PARALLEL TRACK Parallel track not
supported for leg
type.
PARALLEL TRACK Parallel track not
supported for turns
greater than 120
degrees.
PARALLEL TRACK Parallel track not
supported past IAF.
Description
Action
Foreword
Nav angle is set to User. No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Nav angle is set to True. No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Com/Nav
FPL
The active waypoint is not No action is necessary; message is
referenced to the WGS84 informational only.
datum.
Refer to Note 1 at the
end of the table.
OBS requires an active
waypoint and is not
supported in dead
reckoning mode.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Parallel track is not
supported on current
leg type.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Parallel track is not
supported for turns
greater than 120
degrees due to the
acute angle.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Parallel track is not
supported on
approaches.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-15
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Message
Description
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Alert Acknowledge
key is stuck.
The remote TAWS
alert acknowledge
(ALRT ACK) key/switch
has been in pressed
position for at least 30
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
The Push-To-Talk
key/switch has been
in pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now be
ignored and the com
radio will no longer
transmit.
The remote com
frequency decrement
(COM CHAN DN)
key/switch has been
in pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The remote com
frequency increment
(COM CHAN UP)
key/switch has been
in pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com push-to-talk
key is stuck.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com remote
frequency
decrement key is
stuck.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com remote
frequency
increment key is
stuck.
Appendix
Action
Verify the ALRT ACK key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Verify the Push-To-Talk key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Verify the COM CHAN DN key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Verify the COM CHAN UP
key/switch is not stuck. Contact
dealer for service if message
persists.
Index
16-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Com remote
transfer key is
stuck.
Description
The remote com
transfer (COM RMT
XFR) key/switch has
been in pressed
position for at least 30
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
The remote nav transfer
REMOTE KEY
(NAV RMT XFR)
STUCK key/switch has been
Nav remote
in pressed position for
transfer key is
at least 30 seconds.
stuck.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The remote
REMOTE KEY
push-to-command
STUCK Pilot/Co-Pilot voice key/switch has been
in pressed position for
command pushto-command key is at least 30 seconds.
This input will now
stuck.
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The remote CDI (CDI
REMOTE KEY
SRC SEL) key/switch
STUCK Remote CDI key is has been in pressed
position for at least 30
stuck.
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
Action
Foreword
Verify the COM RMT XFR
key/switch is not stuck. Contact
dealer for service if message
persists.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Verify the NAV RMT XFR
key/switch is not stuck. Contact
dealer for service if message
persists.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Verify the push-to-command
key/switch is not stuck. Contact
dealer for service if message
persists.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Verify the CDI SRC SEL key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Message
REMOTE KEY
STUCK Remote go around
key is stuck.
Description
The remote go around
(RMT GO ARND)
key/switch has been
in pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The remote OBS (OBS
REMOTE KEY
MODE SEL) key/switch
STUCK Remote OBS key is has been in pressed
position for at least 30
stuck.
seconds. This input will
now be ignored. This
input is not available in
all installations.
The remote RP MODE
REMOTE KEY
key/switch has been
STUCK in pressed position for
RP Mode key is
at least 30 seconds.
stuck.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
The TAWS INHIBIT
REMOTE KEY
discrete input has been
STUCK TAWS inhibit key is in pressed position for
at least 30 seconds.
stuck.
This input will now
be ignored. This input
is not available in all
installations.
Action
Verify the RMT GO ARND
key/switch is not stuck. Contact
dealer for service if message
persists.
Verify the OBS MODE SEL
key/switch is not stuck. Contact
dealer for service if message
persists.
Verify the RP MODE key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Verify the TAWS INHIBIT key/switch
is not stuck. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
Description
SELECT
FREQUENCY Select appropriate
NAV frequency for
approach.
SET COURSE Set course on
CDI/HSI to [current
DTK].
STEEP TURN Aircraft may
overshoot course
during turn.
Correct NAV frequency
is not set in the active
NAV frequency for the
approach procedure.
Insert the correct frequency into
the active navigation frequency
window.
The selected course
on the CDI/HSI does
not match the current
desired track.
Set the CDI/HSI selected course to
the current desired track.
Flight plan contains an
acute course change
ahead which will
require a bank in excess
of normal to follow the
guidance. If coupled
to the autopilot, the
autopilot may not be
able to execute the
steep turn needed
to follow the course
guidance.
The WX-500
Stormscope reports
that it has an invalid
heading source.
No action is necessary; message is
informational only. If desired, slow
the aircraft to shallow the turn.
The GTN is configured
for a WX-500
Stormscope but is not
receiving data from it.
Close the Stormscope circuit
breaker and ensure Stormscope is
receiving power. Contact dealer for
service.
STORMSCOPE Invalid heading
received from
Stormscope.
STORMSCOPE Stormscope is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
Action
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
GTN Stormscope data is correct
and may be used. Contact dealer
for service.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-19
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Message
TAWS AUDIO
INHIBITED TAWS audio inhibit
input is stuck.
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Description
Action
Contact dealer for service.
The TAWS Audio
Inhibit discrete input
has been active for
at least 30 seconds.
This input is active in
all installations. TAWS
audio may be heard at
the same time as other
audio alerts.
A user-configured timer No action is necessary; message is
has expired.
informational only.
TIMER Timer has expired.
The ADS-B traffic
TRAFFIC system is reporting
ADS-B In traffic
alerting has failed. to the GTN that the
CSA application has
failed. Traffic alerting
on ADS-B traffic is
unavailable.
The ADS-B traffic
TRAFFIC ADS-B In traffic has system may have
lost GPS position or
failed.
detected an internal
fault.
The GDL 88 is reporting
TRAFFIC that the external traffic
TCAD has a low
system has a low
battery.
battery.
The TCAD system
TRAFFIC has indicated that its
Traffic device
battery low. Traffic battery is low.
device user config
settings not saved.
Ensure the aircraft has a clear
view of the sky. Contact dealer for
service if problem persists.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Contact dealer for service.
Appendix
Index
16-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
TRAFFIC Traffic device has
been in standby
for more than 60
seconds.
TRAFFIC Traffic device is
inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
Description
Action
Foreword
The GTN is airborne
Set the traffic device to “operate”
and the traffic device
on the traffic page if traffic alerts
has been in standby for are desired.
more than 60 seconds.
The GTN is configured
for a traffic device but
is not receiving data
from it. Traffic will not
be displayed on the
GTN.
TRANSPONDER - The GTN is configured
for two transponders
Transponder 1
and their Mode S
and 2 Mode S
addresses do not addresses do not
match. This message
match.
is intended to assist
installers and will not
occur in a properly
configured system.
TRANSPONDER The transponder has
insufficient data to
1 OR 2 support ADS-B.
ADS-B is not
transmitting
position.
TRANSPONDER The transponder has
lost communication
1 OR 2 ADS-B Out system with the pressure
altitude source.
fault. Pressure
altitude source
inoperative or
connection lost.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Contact dealer for service.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Contact dealer for service.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Ensure the aircraft has a clear
view of the sky. Contact dealer for
service.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Contact dealer for service.
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-21
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Message
Description
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder 1 or
2 is inoperative or
connection to GTN
is lost.
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder 1 or 2
needs service.
The GTN is configured
for transponder 1 or
2 but is not able to
communicate with the
transponder.
Verify squawk code and altitude
with ATC. Contact dealer for
service.
The transponder is
reporting to the GTN
that it needs service.
The transponder may
continue to function.
The transponder has
detected an internal
fault and transponder
functionality may be
unavailable.
Verify squawk code and altitude
with ATC. Contact dealer for
service.
The transponder is
operating in a mode
intended for ground
testing.
Cycle the power to the
transponder.
The transponder is
reporting that its
internal temperature
has exceeded upper
operating limits.
The transponder is
reporting that its
internal temperature
has exceeded lower
operating limits.
Decrease temperature and increase
airflow near the transponder, if
possible. Monitor aircraft electrical
indications. Contact dealer for
service if message persists.
Contact dealer for service if
message persists.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder has
failed.
Action
Contact dealer for service.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder is in
ground test mode.
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder
overtemp.
TRANSPONDER
1 OR 2 Transponder
undertemp.
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
TRUE NORTH
APPROACH Verify NAV Angles
are referenced to
True North (T).
Description
A procedure is loaded
that is referenced
to true north and
the active leg has a
published true north
reference.
USER WAYPOINT All user waypoints
IMPORT - User
were imported
waypoints
successfully.
were imported
successfully.
USER WAYPOINT User Waypoint import
failed due to improper
IMPORT - User
file format.
waypoint import
failed.
USER WAYPOINT User Waypoint catalog
is full and the requested
IMPORT - User
user waypoints could
waypoint import
not be imported.
failed. User
waypoint database
is full.
USER WAYPOINT User waypoints
imported and existing
IMPORT - User
waypoints are used
waypoints
instead of creating
imported
duplicate waypoints.
successfully existing waypoints
reused.
User has configured
VCALC Approaching top of a vertical descent
calculation, and the
descent.
aircraft is within
60 seconds of the
calculated top of
descent.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Action
Foreword
Verify the Nav Angle is set to True
North.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Ensure the media has the correct
file format. Contact dealer for
service if problem persists.
Wpt Info
Map
Edit the User Waypoint catalog to
remove unneeded user waypoints.
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-23
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Message
VCALC Arriving at VCALC
target altitude.
Description
User has configured
a vertical descent
calculation, and the
aircraft is approaching
the target altitude.
Visual approach could
VISUAL
APPROACH NOT not transition to
active. Guidance is not
ACTIVE Approach guidance available.
not available when
requesting
direct-to runway.
VLOC RECEIVER - The nav radio is
Navigation receiver not communicating
property with the
has failed.
system.
VLOC RECEIVER - The nav radio is
Navigation receiver reporting to the GTN
that it needs service.
needs service.
The nav radio may
continue to function.
Current altitude
VNAV constraint cannot be
Unable to reach
vertical waypoint. reached based on
current ground and
vertical speeds.
The lateral flight plan
VNAV contains a procedure
Unavailable.
turn, vector, or other
Upcoming flight
unsupported leg type
plan leg not
prior to the active
supported.
vertical waypoint.
Action
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Reactivate the approach or cancel
the Direct-To course.
Use GPS based navigation. Contact
dealer for service.
Use GPS based navigation. Contact
dealer for service.
Attempt to intercept vertical path
by adjusting aircraft altitude.
Treat the flight plan segments
before and after the affected leg as
separate vertical profiles. The GTN
cannot provide automatic guidance
between the two segments.
Appendix
Index
16-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Message
VNAV Unavailable.
Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNAV Unavailable.
Excessive track
angle error.
VNAV Unavailable.
Parallel course
selected.
VNAV Unavailable.
Barometric altitude
lost.
WAYPOINT Arriving at [wpt
name].
Description
Action
Foreword
Current crosstrack
exceeds limit, causing
vertical path guidance
to become invalid.
Navigate within 10 nm of flight
plan centerline, or edit flight plan
to allow for vertical navigation.
Current track angle
error exceeds limit,
causing vertical path
guidance to become
invalid.
Selecting a parallel
course causes vertical
path guidance to
become invalid.
Navigate within 70° of active flight
plan course.
A loss of data from
the barometric altitude
sensor causes vertical
path guidance to
become invalid.
User has configured
the arrival alarm and
is within the specified
distance.
Contact dealer for service.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Disable parallel track if vertical
path guidance is desired.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
No action is necessary; message is
informational only.
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Table 16-1 Messages
Note 1:
Getting
Started
There are several reference datums that waypoints can be surveyed against.
TSO-C146 normally requires that all waypoints be referenced to the WGS84
datum, but allows for navigation to waypoints that are not referenced to the
WGS84 datum so long as the pilot is notified. Certain waypoints in the navigation
database are not referenced to the WGS84 datum, or their reference datum is
unknown. If this is the case, this message is displayed. Garmin cannot determine
exactly how close the non-WGS84 referenced waypoint will be to the WGS84
datum that the GTN uses. Typically, the distance is within two nautical miles.
The majority of non-WGS84 waypoints are located outside of the United States.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
16-25
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
16-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
17
SYMBOLS
Foreword
The following tables describe the symbols that are found on the Map display.
17.1
Symbol
Map Page Symbols
Description
Airport with hard surface
runway(s); Non-Serviced,
Primary runway shown
Airport with soft surface
runway(s) only, Non-Serviced
Restricted (Private) Airfield
Symbol
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Description
Airport with hard surface
runway(s); Serviced, Primary
runway shown
Airport with soft surface
runway(s) only, Serviced
Unknown Airport
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Heliport
NDB
Intersection
Locator Outer Marker
Map
VOR
VOR/DME
Traffic
VORTAC
DME
TACAN
TOD/BOD
Wpt Info
Terrain
Weather
User Waypoint
User Airport
ATK
VRP
Nearest
Table 17-1 Map Page Symbols
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
17-1
Foreword
Getting
Started
17.2
SafeTaxi™ Symbols
Symbol
Description
Helipad
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Airport Beacon
Com/Nav
Under Construction Zones
FPL
Direct-To
Unpaved Parking Areas
Proc
Hot Spot
Table 17-2 SafeTaxi Symbols
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
17.3
Traffic Symbols
TIS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
Terrain
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Weather
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Nearest
Table 17-3 TIS Symbols
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
TAS Symbol
Description
Foreword
Non-Threat Traffic
(intruder is beyond 5 NM and greater than 1,200 ft vertical
separation)
Proximity Advisory (PA)
(intruder is within 5 NM and less than 1,200 ft vertical separation)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
(closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria)
Com/Nav
Direct-To
Table 17-4 TAS Symbols
Symbol
Imminent Traffic
Non-Imminent
Traffic
(Traffic within ±500 feet
AND 1.0 NM; OR no altitude
AND within 1.0 NM)
Proc
Description
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Traffic Closing Vertically
Terrain
Traffic Diverging Vertically
Weather
Traffic not Closing or Diverging
Vertically
Nearest
Table 17-5 9900B TCAD Symbols
Services/
Music
Description
Utilities
Traffic Advisory
System
Proximity Advisory
(color may be configured as cyan)
Other Traffic
(color may be configured as cyan)
Out-of-Range Traffic Advisory
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Table 17-6 9900BX (TCAS) Symbols
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
FPL
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Symbol
Getting
Started
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
17-3
Symbol
Foreword
Getting
Started
Description
Basic Non-Directional Traffic
Basic Directional Traffic
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Basic Off-scale Selected Traffic
Com/Nav
Proximate Non-Directional Traffic
Proximate Directional Traffic
FPL
Proximate Off-scale Selected Traffic
Direct-To
Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Proc
Off-Scale Non-Directional Alerted Traffic
Wpt Info
Directional Alerted Traffic
Map
Off-Scale Directional Alerted Traffic
Traffic
Non-Directional Surface Vehicle
Terrain
Directional Surface Vehicle
Weather
Table 17-7 ADS-B Traffic Symbols
Nearest
NOTE: Color of basic and proximate traffic is dependent on configuration
(cyan or white) and airborne/on-ground status of target (target is brown
when on the ground, see the surface vehicles).
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
17.4
Terrain Obstacle Symbols
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is less than
1,000 ft AGL)
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is less
than 1,000 ft AGL)
Unlighted Obstacle
(Height is greater
than 1,000 ft AGL)
Foreword
Lighted Obstacle
(Height is greater than
1,000 ft AGL)
Windmill
Windmill in Group
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Table 17-8 Obstacle Altitude/Color Correlation
Tower
Getting
Started
Power Line
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Table 17-9 Obstacle Icon Types
Wpt Info
Projected Flight Path
100 ft Threshold
Threat Location
Unlighted Obstacle
Terrain above or
within 100 ft
below the aircraft
altitude (Red)
Map
Traffic
1000 ft
Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the
aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Terrain
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Weather
Figure 17-1 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
17-5
Foreword
17.5
HTAWS Obstacle Symbols
Getting
Started
Obstacle is at or above the aircraft altitude (Red)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Obstacle is between 250 ft and 0 ft
below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
250 ft
Com/Nav
Obstacle is 250 ft, or more,
below the aircraft altitude (White)
FPL
Figure 17-2 HTAWS Obstacle Altitude Correlation
Direct-To
Terrain is more than 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude (Red)
Proc
Terrain is between
0 ft and 250 ft above
the aircraft altitude
(Orange)
250 ft
Wpt Info
250 ft
Map
500 ft
Traffic
Terrain is between 0 ft and 250 ft below the aircraft altitude (Yellow)
Terrain is between 250 ft and 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Green)
Terrain more than 500 ft below the aircraft altitude (Black)
Terrain
Figure 17-3 HTAWS Altitude/Color Correlation
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
17.6
Basemap Symbols
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Getting
Started
Interstate Highway
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
State Highway
Com/Nav
US Highway
FPL
National Highway - 2-digit drawn inside
Direct-To
Small City or Town
Proc
Wpt Info
Medium City
Map
Large City
Traffic
Table 17-10 Basemap Symbols
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
17-7
Foreword
17.7
Symbol
Getting
Started
Map Tool Bar Symbols
Description
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Available Indicator
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Terrain Proximity Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Point Obstacle Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
Point Obstacle Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
Wire Obstacles Enabled and Not Available Indicator
(Software v5.12 and later)
Stormscope Enabled
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Weather
Ownship is receiving TIS-B and ADS-R services
(Software v5.11 or earlier)
Possible incomplete traffic picture – ownship is not receiving one (or both)
of the TIS-B or ADS-R services (Software v5.11 or earlier)
Traffic Enabled and Available Indicator
Nearest
Traffic Enabled and Not Available Indicator
Traffic
Terrain
Table 17-11 Map Tool Bar Symbols
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
17.8
Miscellaneous Symbols
Symbol
Foreword
Description
Getting
Started
Low-Wing Prop (Default Ownship)
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
High-Wing Prop
Com/Nav
Kit Plane
FPL
Turboprop
Direct-To
Twin-Engine Prop
Proc
Single-Engine Jet
Wpt Info
Business Jet
Map
2-Blade Rotorcraft
Traffic
3-Blade Rotorcraft
Terrain
4-Blade Rotorcraft
Weather
High Visibility Arrow
Nearest
Basic Aircraft
Services/
Music
Non-directional ownship is shown if there is no heading or ground
track. This typically only occurs during start-up. In helicopters without
a heading source, the non-directional ownship symbol will also appear
below 15 kts.
Parallel Track Waypoint
Messages
Restricted/Prohibited/Warning/Alert
Symbols
TFR (Temporary Flight Restrictions)
System
Appendix
MOA
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Utilities
Index
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
17-9
Foreword
Symbol
Class B Airspace
Class C Airspace
Getting
Started
Class D Airspace
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
User Waypoint
Com/Nav
Table 17-12 Miscellaneous Symbols
FPL
NOTE: Ownship icons are configured by the installer and can be colored
magenta for enhanced visibility (software v5.12 or later).
Direct-To
Proc
Description
17.9
Symbol
Stormscope Symbols
Description
6
Wpt Info
Map
60
Traffic
120
Terrain
180
Weather
Table 17-13 Stormscope Symbols
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
17-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18
APPENDIX
Foreword
Glossary
Getting
Started
18.1
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
AFM
AFMS
AGL
AIM
AIRMET
ALT
AP
APR
APT
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
AS
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
AUX
AWOS
active, activate
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Above Ground Level
Airman’s Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
altitude
autopilot
approach
airport, aerodrome
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
airspeed
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
auxiliary
Automated Weather Observing System
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
BARO
BC
Bearing
BRG
barometric setting
backcourse
The compass direction from the present position to a
destination waypoint
bearing
C
ºC
CDI
CHNL
CLD
center runway
degrees Celsius
Course Deviation Indicator
channel
cloud
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-1
Getting
Started
CLR
CNXT
CONFIG
Course
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Crosstrack Error
Foreword
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
CRS
CRSR
CTA
CTAF
CTRL
CUM
clear
Connext
configuration
The line between two points to be followed by the
aircraft
The distance the aircraft is off a desired course in either
direction, left or right
course
cursor
Control Area
Common Traffic Advisory Frequency
control
The total of all legs in a flight plan
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
DALT
DB, DBASE
DCLTR, DECLTR
deg
DEP
Desired Track (DTK)
DEST
DFLT
DIS
Distance
DME
DP
DPRT
DSBL
DTK
EDR
EGNOS
ELEV
EMI
ENR
density altitude
database
declutter
degree
departure
The desired course between the active “from” and
“to” waypoints
destination
default
distance
The "great circle" distance from the present position
to a destination waypoint
Distance Measuring Equipment
Departure Procedure
departure
disabled
Desired Track
Excessive Descent Rate
Provides SBAS service for most of Europe and parts of
North Africa
elevation
Electromagnetic Interference
en route
Index
18-2
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
En Route Safe Altitude
ERR
ESA
ETA
ETE
The recommended minimum altitude within ten miles
left or right of the desired course on an active flight
plan or direct-to
error
En route Safe Altitude
Estimated Time of Arrival
Estimated Time En Route
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
ºF
FAA
FCC
FCST
FD
FIR
FIS-B
FISDL
FLTA
FPL
FREQ
FRZ
FSS
ft
degrees Fahrenheit
Federal Aviation Administration
Federal Communication Commission
forecast
flight director
Flight Information Region
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
Flight Information Service Data Link
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
flight plan
frequency
freezing
Flight Service Station
foot/feet
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
GAGAN
G/S, GS
GDC
GDL
GEO
GLS
GMA
GMT
GMU
GPS
GPSS
Ground Speed
Ground Track
GRS
GS
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Provides SBAS service for India
glideslope
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Satellite Data Link
geographic
Global Navigation Satellite Landing System
Garmin Audio Panel System
Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Global Positioning System
GPS Roll Steering
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling relative to a
ground position
refer to Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-3
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
GTX
Garmin Transponder
HDG
Heading
HFOM
Hg
hPa
HPL
HSDB
HSI
HTAWS
Hz
heading
The direction an aircraft is pointed, based upon
indications from a magnetic compass or a properly set
directional gyro
Horizontal Figure of Merit
mercury
hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
Helicopter Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Hertz
IAF
ICAO
IFR
IGRF
ILI
ILS
IMC
IOI
INFO
in HG
INT
INTEG
ITI
Initial Approach Fix
International Civil Aviation Organization
Instrument Flight Rules
International Geomagnetic Reference Field
Imminent Line Impact
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Imminent Obstacle Impact
information
inches of mercury
intersection(s)
integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Imminent Terrain Impact
L
LAT
LCD
LCL
LED
Leg
LIFR
LNAV
LOC
left, left runway
latitude
Liquid Crystal Display
local
Light Emitting Diode
The portion of a flight plan between two waypoints
Low Instrument Flight Rules
Lateral Navigation
localizer
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-4
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
LOI
LON
LPV
LRU
LT
LTNG
loss of integrity (GPS)
longitude
Localizer Performance with Vertical guidance
Line Replacement Unit
left
lightning
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
MAG
MAG VAR
MapMX
MKR
MOA
MOT
MOV
mpm
MSA
MSAS
MSG
MSL
MT
mV
MVFR
Magnetic
Magnetic Variation
A proprietary data format used to forward navigation
information between Garmin units
maximum
maximum speed (overspeed)
barometric minimum descent altitude
Aviation Routine Weather Report
MIlitary Grid Reference System
minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe altitude within
ten miles of the aircraft present position
marker beacon
Military Operations Area
Mark On Target
movement
meters per minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Provides SBAS service for Japan only
message
Mean Sea Level
meter
millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules
NAV
NAVAID
NCR
NDB
NEXRAD
navigation
NAVigation AID
Negative Climb Rate
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
METAR
MGRS
MIN
Minimum Safe Altitude
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-5
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
OAT
OBS
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
PA
PC
PDA
P. POS
PTK
Proximity Advisory
personal computer
Premature Descent Alert
Present Position
parallel track
QTY
quantity
R
RA
RAIM
RAM
REF
REQ
REV
RLC
RMI
RNG
RNWY
ROC
RT
RTC
right, right runway
Resolution Advisory
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
random access memory
reference
required
reverse, revision, revise
Reduce Required Line Clearance
Radio Magnetic Indicator
range
runway
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
right
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
SAR
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SFC
SIAP
SID
SIGMET
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPD
SRVC, SVC
Search and Rescue
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
Significant Meteorological Information
slip/skid
symbol
speed
service
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-6
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
SUA
SUSP
SW
SYS
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
statistics
standby
standard
Special Use Airspace
suspend
software
system
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAS
TAT
TAWS
TCA
TCAS
TEMP
TERM
TFR
T HDG
TIS
TMA
Topo
Track
TRK
TRSA
true
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed
Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
Terminal Control Area
Traffic Collision Avoidance System
temperature
terminal
Temporary Flight Restriction
True Heading
Traffic Information System
Terminal Maneuvering Area
topographic
Direction of aircraft movement relative to a ground
position; also ‘Ground Track’
track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
UNAVAIL
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS
unavailable
user
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal Polar
Stereographic Grid
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-7
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
V, Vspeed
VAR
VFR
VHF
VLOC
VMC
VNAV
VOR
VORTAC
VRP
VS
VSI
velocity (airspeed)
variation
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Visual Meteorological Conditions
vertical navigation
VHF Omni-directional Range
very high frequency omnidirectional range station and
tactical air navigation
Visual Reporting Point
Vertical speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
WAAS
WGS-84
WPT
WX
Wide Area Augmentation System
World Geodetic System - 1984
waypoint(s)
weather
XPDR
XTK
transponder
cross-track
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-8
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18.2
Database Information and Updates
Foreword
The GTN uses several databases to provide up-to-date aviation information.
GTN databases can be updated by the pilot using an SD card or Flight Stream
510 wireless database card. The GTN can also synchronize databases in the
cockpit with other displays using Database SYNC and Chart Streaming.
Information about the installed and standby databases can be viewed on the
System Status page. Database SYNC and Chart Streaming can be configured in
the menu on the System Status page.
The database card should not be removed except to update the databases
stored on the card. For basic flight operations, a database card is required for
database storage. The database cards cannot be shared between units.
18.2.1
•
GTN Databases
Navigation - The navigation database contains information for waypoints
and airports, such as procedures, runways, airways, airspaces, frequencies,
and visual reporting points. For helicopter applications, a navigation
database that includes additional heliports is available.
•
Basemap - The Basemap database contains land and water data, such as
roads, boundaries, rivers, and lakes.
•
SafeTaxi - The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams
for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following ground control
instructions by displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to
taxiways, ramps, runways, terminals, and services.
•
Obstacles - The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as
towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft. Obstacles 200 feet and
higher are included in the fixed-wing obstacle database. The rotorcraft
database includes all reported obstacles regardless of height. It is important
to note that not all obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not
be contained in the obstacle database. Several obstacle database options
are available. Obstacle databases created for GTN software v5.10 or later
include all power lines or only Hazardous Obstacle Transmission (HOT)
lines depending on the type of obstacle database installed. HOT lines are
those power lines that are co-located with other FAA-identified obstacles.
The obstacle database is required for the TAWS and HTAWS functions.
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-9
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
•
Terrain - The terrain database contains terrain mapping data. The terrain
database is required for the TAWS and HTAWS functions. Systems using
HTAWS require a 2.5 arc second database while non-HTAWS applications
can use a 9 arc-second database.
•
FliteCharts - FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services
(Formerly named National Aeronautical Charting Office) terminal
procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in
color for applicable charts. The GTN depiction shows the aircraft position
on the moving map in the plan view of the approach charts and on airport
diagrams.
•
Chartview - ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal
procedure charts. The charts are displayed in full color with high-resolution.
The GTN depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the
plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Database
Name
Where Stored
Update Cycle
Provider
Notes
Navigation
Internal memory
28 days
flyGarmin.com
Basemap
Internal memory
As required
flyGarmin.com
SafeTaxi
Internal memory
56 days
flyGarmin.com
Obstacle
Internal memory
56 days
flyGarmin.com
Terrain
Database card
As required
flyGarmin.com
FliteCharts
Database card
28 days
flyGarmin.com
Disables 180 days after
expiration date.
Chartview
Database card
14 days
Contact Jeppesen
Disables 70 days after
expiration date.
Table 18-1 Database List
Utilities
NOTE: Garmin requests that the flight crew report any observed
discrepancies related to database information. These discrepancies could
come in the form of an incorrect procedure, incorrectly identified terrain,
obstacles and fixes, or any other displayed item used for navigation or
communication in the air or on the ground. To report a database error,
visit flyGarmin.com.
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-10
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18.2.2
Updating Databases with a SD Card
Foreword
To update the GTN database use an SD card. Instructions on updating the
GTN database and the required equipment is found at flyGarmin.com.
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Contact
Jeppesen (jeppesen.com) for ChartView subscription and update information.
An enablement card that is purchased from Garmin is separate from the Jeppesen
database and is required to enable ChartView.
1. Download the database updates to the Garmin Database Card
from the appropriate website.
2. Insert the database card into the slot of the GTN.
3. Apply power to the GTN.
4. The database update page will be displayed, listing all effective
database updates on the database card. Databases cycles
that are not effective or already installed will be kept on the
Garmin Database Card as standby databases until they become
effective. Hold down the dual-concentric knob while applying
power to the GTN to force the update of these databases.
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 18-1 Updated Databases
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-11
5. Select the desired database updates and press the Update
key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
NOTE: Do not remove power to the GTN while updating databases.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
6. The GTN will begin the update process and then verify the
integrity of the installed databases.
Com/Nav
7. Check that all databases are current and there are no errors.
If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or
missing.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Figure 18-2 Currently Installed Software/Databases
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-12
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18.2.3
Updating Databases with a Flight Stream 510
GTN databases can also be updated using the Flight Stream 510 wireless
database card with a portable device and the Garmin Pilot application.
1. Follow the instructions within the app to purchase and
download the database updates.
2. Ensure the Flight Stream 510 is inserted into the database
card slot and apply power to the GTN.
3. When prompted on the database verification screen, connect
the portable device to the Flight Stream 510 Wi-Fi network.
The network name and password can be displayed by pressing
the Show WiFi Info key.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Figure 18-3 Connect to Flight Stream Wi-Fi Network Prompt
Map
4. Once connected, open Garmin Pilot on the portable device.
Traffic
Terrain
Figure 18-4 Open Portable Application Prompt
Weather
5. The Flight Stream 510 will check for database updates on the
portable device and display the database update page or notify
the pilot that no database updates are available.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 18-5 Checking for Database Updates Message
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Figure 18-6 Database Update Page
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index
18-13
6. Select the desired database updates. All selected databases
will be transferred to the GTN, but the GTN may choose to not
install all databases. Database cycles that are not yet effective
will be preloaded and kept as standby databases until they
become effective. Databases that are not supported by this
GTN may be transferred and then SYNC’d to other Garmin
displays.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
7. Press the Update key.
FPL
NOTE: Do not remove power to the GTN while updating databases.
Direct-To
8. The GTN will begin the transfer, update, and verification process.
The terrain and charts databases can take up to 5 minutes
each to transfer over Wi-Fi to the Flight Stream 510.
Proc
Wpt Info
9. Check that all databases are current and there are no errors.
If a database is highlighted in yellow, it is either expired or
missing.
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-14
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18.2.4
Database SYNC
Foreword
Database SYNC allows the GTN to synchronize databases from a single unit
to other Garmin avionics. The pilot only needs to update a single database card
(SD card or Flight Stream 510) and the new databases are automatically SYNC'd
through the units connected in the cockpit and configured for Database SYNC.
Databases must be purchased for all avionics in the cockpit.
Database SYNC is supported by these database types:
• Navigation
• Basemap
• SafeTaxi
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
The database SYNC process may take several minutes, depending on how
many databases have been updated. The status of the database transfers to a
unit can be viewed on the System Status page under the “Standby” tab. The
GTN will display the source of the received databases (for example: “Database
SYNC - GTN #2”). If a database SYNC is pending, completed, or not authorized,
the status will also be indicated.
When the SYNC is complete, if the aircraft is stopped and has yet to takeoff,
the pilot will be prompted with the option to restart and update to the newly
transferred databases.
NOTE: Restarting the GTN must only be performed when the aircraft is
on the ground as navigation and communication from the restarted unit
will be lost for a period of time.
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-15
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
18.2.4.1
Resolving Database SYNC Conflicts
Database conflicts must be resolved for synchronization to occur. Conflicts
exist when multiple LRUs have a database of the same cycle, but with different
regions or types (e.g., fixed wing vs. rotorcraft navigation database, different
regions of the navigation database, or different obstacle database types).
The GTN attempts to resolve these by automatically synchronizing the most
recently installed database across all other LRUs (software v6.30 and later). Pilot
intervention is required when conflicts cannot be resolved automatically. Conflicts
occurring with earlier software versions also require manual intervention.
To manually resolve database conflicts, touch the Resolve Conflicts key on
the display containing the desired database version. This key is located on the
Conflicts tab of the System Information page.
18.2.5
Chart Streaming
While the Chart database is SYNCing in the background, the GTN will
stream individual charts to other compatible displays. This enables all Garmin
displays to use the latest chart database information even though the database
is currently installed only on a single unit. Chart Streaming will begin after the
chart database has begun SYNCing.
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-16
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18.2.6
Database Troubleshooting Tips
Problem
Unable to download
databases to the SD card
Database update fails
Foreword
Action
Getting
Started
• Ensure you have a high capacity SD card programmer
• Ensure that your card programmer is plugged directly into your computer
and not into a USB hub, computer screen, or keyboard
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• Ensure the sliding lock tab is in the unlocked position (up, when viewing
the card label-side up)
Com/Nav
• Restart the GTN and retry the update
FPL
• Download the databases to the database card again
Database SYNC fails
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
Direct-To
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for all the GTNs and GDUs in
the cockpit
Proc
Wpt Info
• Ensure that all conflicts have been resolved (section 18.2.4.1)
Database cannot be
selected for update
Database cannot be
transferred to
Flight Stream 510
• Restart the GTN while pressing the dual-concentric knob until the Garmin
logo is fully illuminated to veiw all database updates on the database
card, regardless of effectivity
Map
• Download the databases to the database card again
Traffic
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
Terrain
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
Weather
• Ensure that the database transfers are enabled for the
Flight Stream 510 (section 18.2.3)
Nearest
• Ensure that all database updates have been downloaded to the Garmin
Pilot application
• Press the Show All DBs key on the database verification page to veiw all
database updates on the portable device, regardless of effectivity
Database is transferred
to Flight Stream 510 but
cannot be selected for
update
• Ensure that the databases were purchased for the system ID of the GTN
that the database card is being used to update
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
• Ensure that the transferred database is currently effective
• Restart the GTN while pressing the dual-concentric knob until the Garmin
logo is fully illuminated to view all database updates on the
Flight Stream 510, regardless of effectivity
Table 18-2 Database Troubleshooting Tips
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-17
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
18.3
Demo Mode
The GTN product contains a “Demo” mode that allows simulation of all
operations of the product to allow practice and familiarization while staying on
the ground.
WARNING: Do not use the GTN to navigate while Demo mode is active.
Do not use or enter Demo mode while airborne.
Com/Nav
1. Press in and hold the Direct-To key and then apply power to
the unit.
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch To Continue
Map
Figure 18-7 Demo Mode Start Up Display
Traffic
Terrain
2. Touch the Continue key and Fuel keys as normally needed to
start operations.
Weather
3. Touch the Demo key in the lower part of the display to reach
the Demo Setup functions.
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Touch For Advanced
GPS Settings
System
Touch For Advanced
NAV Settings
Messages
Symbols
Touch For Advanced Date
And Time Settings
Figure 18-8 Demo Mode Setup
Appendix
Index
18-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
4. Touch the GPS key to reach the Demo GPS Settings page.
The Position Error values (Horizontal Protection Level Fault
Detection [HPL FD], HPL SBAS, and Vertical Protection Level
[VPL] SBAS) may be adjusted to reflect errors induced by
naturally occurring conditions, but are normally not adjusted
for most Demo mode operations.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
Touch To Select GPS
Solution
Touch To Select
Current Position
From A Wpt In
The Database
Touch To Select Lat/
Lon Coordinates For
Current Position
Touch To Select
HPL FD Values, If
Desired
Touch For VPL
SBAS Settings
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Touch For HPL
SBAS Settings
Map
Figure 18-9 Demo Mode GPS Settings
5. Touch the Nav key to reach the Demo Navigation Settings
page.
Touch To Select
Vertical Speed
Touch To Select
Altitude
Touch To Select
Airspeed
Touch To Select
Track Mode
Touch To Select
Time Scale
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Figure 18-10 Demo Mode Navigation Settings
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-19
6. Touch the Date/Time key to reach the Demo Date/Time
Settings page.
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Touch To Set Date
Com/Nav
Touch To Set Time
FPL
Direct-To
Figure 18-11 Demo Mode Date/Time Settings
7. After completing the settings for Demo mode, touch the HOME
key or Back key to get started with operating the GTN.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-20
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18.4
Glove Qualification Procedure
Foreword
NOTE: This procedure is not authorized for completion during flight.
Perform all tasks while the aircraft is on the ground.
The touchscreen uses capacitive touch technology to sense the proximity of
skin to the display. A glove creates a barrier between the skin and the display
glass, potentially reducing the ability of the display to detect touches.
This procedure qualifies a specific glove for use with the touchscreen. Due
to differences in finger size, glove size, and touchscreen between the GTN 6XX
and GTN 7XX units, the qualification procedure is specific to the pilot/glove and
GTN combination. Multiple units must be evaluated individually.
Glove Selection Considerations
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
• Thinner gloves perform better than thicker gloves
• Leather gloves, and gloves designed specifically for use with capacitive
touchscreen devices, are often found to be acceptable
• To improve touchscreen sensitivity while wearing gloves, use the pad of
your finger instead of the tip during touch interactions
Glove Qualification Guidance
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
• Table 18-3 contains the tasks required to qualify a glove
• Table 18-4 contains tasks that are not required to qualify a glove, but may
limit how some functions are accessed while wearing a glove
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-21
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Glove Qualification Steps
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Direct-To
6.
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
7.
Complete only the tasks for the capabilities relevant to the installed GTN(s).
Sit in the pilot’s seat.
Start the GTN in demo mode by pressing and holding the Direct To key during
power up.
Perform the tasks listed in Table 18-3 and Table 18-4, tapping each key with a
non-gloved finger. It is not necessary to record any results for this step.
Repeat step 3 using a gloved hand.
For each task, determine whether the touchscreen response is the same or worse
than without the glove.
Record the results in the applicable table. Items that may cause the operation to be
worse include, but are not limited to:
a. Multiple attempts to select a key
b. Unintentional selection of adjacent key(s)
c. Excessive force on the touchscreen to select a key
If all applicable tasks produce the same response with and without a glove, the
pilot may use the glove in flight.
Glove Qualification Procedure
Pilot:
Glove Description:
Circle the applicable GTN.
6XX
Task
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
7XX
Operation With Glove
(circle one)
Starting from the Home page:
Demo
GPS
Waypoint
Type the airport identifier“KSLE.”
Enter
Return to the Home page.
18-22
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Task
Operation With Glove
(circle one)
Flight Plan
Add Waypoint
Type the airport identifier“KSLE.”
Enter
Add each of the following waypoints in the same manner.
KMMV
KONP
BTG
Select BTG.
Load Airway
V23
ALFOR
Load
Scroll the list of flight plan waypoints up and down
using the arrow keys.
Back
GTN 635/650/750 only
Select the COM STBY frequency field.
Type a valid frequency.
Enter
Select the active COM frequency field. Observe the two
frequency values swap positions.
GTN 750 only
Select the active NAV frequency field. Observe the two
frequency values swap positions.
GTN 650 only
Menu
Same
Same
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Same
Worse
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Same
Same
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
Same
Worse
System
Messages
Same
Worse
Symbols
Table 18-3 Tests Required for Glove Qualification
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-23
Task
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Operation With Glove
(circle one)
Open the Active Flight Plan page.
With one finger on the page, drag the waypoint list up
and down.
With one finger, tap and swipe the list up or down.
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Same
Worse
Back
Open the Map page.
Graphically Edit FPL
Tap and drag KONP to an empty area of the map,
panning and zooming as necessary. Observe that KONP
is removed from the flight plan.
Drag the leg between KMMV and BTG to KSPB.
Observe that KSPB is added to the flight plan.
Same
Same
Same
Same
Worse
Worse
Worse
Worse
Same
Worse
Table 18-4 Tests Not Required for Glove Qualification
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-24
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
18.5 Telligence Voice Command Qualification
Procedure
Foreword
In order to enable voice command functionality crew members must
successfully perform and complete 17/20 (85%) voice commands in the
Telligence aircraft qualification procedure. Crew members must be comfortable
speaking into an aviation headset and proficient in English.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Voice Command Guidelines
Getting
Started
Com/Nav
FPL
NOTE: If a voice command is uninterpretable, verify the system is
performing the intended action or displaying the desired data. If the system
does not recognize a command, use the touchscreen to execute the function.
The GTN Voice Command History details all commands performed.
• Position the headset MIC approximately 1/8-inch from mouth, align with
bottom lip to avoid breath sounds in the microphone.
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
• Speak conversationally.
Map
• Enunciate.
Traffic
• Speak in a normal tone and volume.
Terrain
• Speak at a normal cadence (not too quickly or slowly).
• Pause briefly between activation of the PTC switch and when speaking the
voice command.
Weather
Nearest
• Review the commands prior to performing the qualification.
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-25
Foreword
Voice Command Instructions
1. Press and hold the Push to Command (PTC) switch.
Getting
Started
2. Speak the entire command into the headset MIC.
3. Release the "PTC" switch.
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
• A positive tone (low-to-high) indicates the command has been
recognized and executed. (i.e., page changed, radio tuned, MIC
selected, etc.)
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
• A negative tone (high-to-low) indicates the command is either
unrecognizable or invalid.
Successful Command Example
"Show approaches page” is spoken, the approach selection page displays
immediately, and a positive tone sounds.
Unsuccessful Command Examples
"Show map page” is spoken and the traffic page displays.
"Show map page" is spoken and a negative tone sounds.
Qualification Procedure
Speak the non-bold phrase if the voice command for a procedure is not
applicable to the aircraft’s configuration. If the total number of successful
commands is less than 17, the voice commands must be disabled. For instructions
on how to activate and deactivate voice commands, refer to section 15.13.
Example: If the requirement states a COM radio is required, but your GTN
does not a have a COM radio, use the unbold command.
1. Start the GTN and acquire a GPS position.
2. Conduct the voice commands in sequential order while wearing
an aviation headset. If necessary, a command can be attempted
twice.
3. When the command is successful check the box next to the
command.
Appendix
Index
18-26
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
SHOW Flight Plan PAGE
Foreword
*** Manually enter a flight plan with a towered airport as the destination ***
SHOW Trip Planning PAGE
* TUNE Nearest Ground or SHOW Nearest Airport PAGE
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
* TUNE Nearest ATIS or SHOW Nearest Weather Frequency PAGE
† TOGGLE COM 2 or SAY Distance
SHOW Map PAGE
Com/Nav
FPL
ZOOM OUT
Direct-To
SAY Distance to Destination
Proc
SHOW Flight Timers PAGE
† SELECT COM 2 or SAY ETA at Destination
Wpt Info
SAY Active Waypoint
Map
CREATE Waypoint Here
* TUNE Destination Tower or SHOW Destination Runways PAGE
‡ SHOW Traffic PAGE or SHOW Nearest PAGE
Traffic
Terrain
SHOW Procedures PAGE
SHOW V-CALC PAGE
Weather
SHOW Current Time
Nearest
SAY Desired Track
BACK
Services/
Music
SHOW Voice Command History Page
Utilities
* A GTN COM radio is required.
System
† Two COM radios connected to the GMA are required.
‡ Traffic capability is required on the GTN.
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
190-01004-03 Rev. P
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
18-27
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
This page intentionally left blank
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
18-28
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
INDEX
Symbols
3D navigation 15-7
A
About this guide xxv
Above Ground Level 10-11, 10-22
Acquiring satellites 15-5, 15-7
Activate flight plan 4-37
Activate leg 4-5
Activating XM 13-3
Active flight plan page 4-4
Active leg 4-5, 6-14, 6-16, 6-24
Add User frequency 3-9
ADF 18-1
ADIZ 8-33
ADS-B 2-7, 9-17
Age 11-38
Aircraft symbol 8-1
AIREP 11-26
AIRMETs 11-15, 11-45, 11-58
Airport beacon 17-2
Airport frequencies 7-8
Airports 11-57
Airspace 12-9
Airspace altitude buffer 15-29
Airways 4-11, 8-5, 8-27, 8-33
Alerts 1-12, 9-9, 10-6, 10-16, 10-19, 1026, 10-27, 15-28, 10-29, 10-33,
10-61, 10-15
ALT 14-24
Altimeter ii
Altitude 6-15, 10-6, 15-5, 15-6
Altitude buffer 15-28
Altitude Display Mode 9-6, 9-15, 9-22
Altitude mode 9-25
Altitude reporting 2-5
Altitude type 14-6
Annunciations 1-6, 1-19, 6-2, 9-10, 9-11,
9-16, 10-10, 10-15, 10-20, 10-21,
10-26, 10-33, 10-72
Anonymous mode 2-7
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Answering a phone call 13-13
Antenna 11-53
Approach
Channel 6-11
Approaches 10-30, 10-63, 10-17
Select 1-18
Approach operations 6-2
Approach shield 9-31
Approach with hold 6-14
Arc 10-8, 10-13, 10-14, 10-24, 10-25
ARTCC 12-1, 12-11
ASOS 12-13
ATCRBS 9-7
ATIS 12-13
Attitude 18-1
Aural message 10-11, 10-15, 10-16, 1020, 10-22, 10-26, 10-28, 10-31,
10-33, 10-68
Automatic CDI switching 6-25
Autopilot 6-13, 6-18, 6-24, 6-25, 6-26
Auto-pilot output 6-26
Auto zoom 8-13
AUX - System Status Page 15-3
Aviation map data 8-22
AWOS 12-13
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
B
Backcourse 6-25
Backlighting 15-39
Baro-corrected altitude 6-1
Barometric pressure 9-30, 14-24
Basemap symbols 17-7
Basic approach operation 6-2
Beacon 17-2
Bluetooth 15-40
Bluetooth setup 15-41
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
C
Call suppression 13-14
Catalog 4-3, 4-23, 4-36
Category 13-5
Cautions iv, 8-33, 10-11, 10-12, 10-16,
10-22, 10-23, 10-27, 10-52,
10-53
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Foreword
Index-1
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
CDI 1-23, 8-41
Ceiling 12-10
Cell movement 11-14
Change user fields 8-29
Channel 13-2, 13-5, 13-8
Channel spacing 1-11
Checklists 14-29
Circle of uncertainty 15-9
City 8-33
City Forecast 11-21
Class B airspace 8-33, 17-10
Class C airspace 8-33, 17-10
Class D airspace 8-33, 17-10
Clean screen 14-27
Cloud tops 11-13
Com 1-15, 3-1
Channel spacing 1-11, 15-20
Frequency monitoring 3-13
Tuning 3-3
Window 3-3
Connext 4-44, 15-40
Connext weather 11-31
Contacts 13-20
Controlled airspace 8-43, 12-9
Controls 1-4
Conventions xxvi, 1-2
Copy flight plan 4-39
Corrective Resolution Advisory 9-42, 9-43
County warnings 11-16
Creating a flight plan 1-17, 4-2
Creating user waypoints 7-18, 8-36
Crossfill 1-12, 1-13, 15-24
CTAF 7-8
Customer service 13-3
Customizing maps 8-10
Cycle number 1-6, 8-45
Cyclone 11-19
D
Database 1-6, 3-5, 8-45, 8-43, 10-6, 1033, 11-41, 11-44, 15-3, 10-19
Database SYNC 15-4
Database verification 1-7
Data link 9-3, 11-38
Index-2
Data Link Receiver troubleshooting 13-9
Data request 11-34
Date 8-45, 14-11, 14-13, 15-18
Date/Time 18-20
Dead reckoning 1-19
Dead Reckoning 1-19
Declutter 8-28
Default navigation 1-20
Delete flight plan 4-40, 4-41
Demo mode 18-18
Density altitude 14-24
Departures 6-3, 10-17, 10-30, 10-63
Departure time 14-10
Destination proximity 15-28
Direct-To 1-5, 1-14, 5-1
Direct-To Fpl Wpt 5-3
Direct-To Nrst Airport 5-4
Distance 8-13
DME Arc 6-15
Don't sink 10-28, 10-31, 10-68
Dual installation 1-13
E
Echo tops 11-12
Edit flight plan 4-38, 8-37
Edit FPL data fields 4-35
EGNOS 15-8
Emergency frequency 3-11
ENR 6-3
EPU 15-5, 15-7
European airways 8-26
Excessive Closure Rate 10-64
Excessive descent rate alert 10-28, 10-29,
10-61
External LRU 15-10
F
Facility name 12-11, 12-12, 12-13
Failed text message 13-17
FastFind 1-23
FDE 15-7
Field elevation 9-27
Find Com frequency 3-5
FIR 12-1
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
FIS-B 11-46
Five-hundred aural alert 10-17, 10-28
Flap Override 10-67
Flight ID 2-8, 2-9
Flight Into Terrain 10-66
Flight phase 10-17, 10-30, 10-63
Flight plan 1-17, 4-1, 8-13, 14-22
Flight plan frequency 3-7
Flight plan import 4-44, 4-48
Flight plan menu 4-23
Flight Stream 4-44, 15-40
Flight Stream 510
Using to update database 18-13
Flight timers 14-10
Forward looking terrain avoidance 10-17,
10-29, 10-44, 10-62
Freezing level 11-17
Frequency
Flight plan 3-7
Monitoring 3-13
Nearest 3-6
New user 3-9
Recent 3-5
Frequency finding 3-5, 3-16
FSS 12-1, 12-12
Fuel planning 14-19
Fuel settings 1-7, 15-33
Function user field 15-31
G
GAGAN 15-8
GBT 11-39, 11-47
GDC 74A ii
GDL 69/69A 13-2, 13-3, 13-9, 15-11
GDL 69/69A status 15-11
GDL 69 troubleshooting 13-9
GDL 88 2-7, 15-12
Getting started 1-1
Glideslope 3-14
Glossary 18-1
GMT 15-18
GPS 18-19
GPS altitude ii, 10-6
GPS status 15-5
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Graphically editing flight plan 4-44, 5-7,
8-37
Graphical Weather 11-46
Ground 2-4
Ground speed 10-20, 10-33, 10-72
GSL 10-6
GSR 56 11-31, 13-1, 13-11, 13-19, 15-14
GTX 2-1, 2-4, 2-9, 8-7, 9-3, 9-23, 9-24,
11-46, 15-12, 15-42, 15-44, 18-4
H
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Hail 11-9
HDOP 15-5
Heading 9-5, 9-14, 10-13, 10-24
Helipad 7-10, 17-2
HFOM 15-5, 15-7
Hold 6-14
Home page 1-4
Hot spots 8-44, 8-45
HSI 8-41
HSI annunciation 6-18
HTAWS 10-34, 17-6
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
I
Terrain
Icing 11-24, 11-45
Ident 2-3, 3-14
IFR 1-18, 11-19, 11-42, 11-45, 11-57
ILS Approach 6-17
ILS CDI Selection 6-25
Imminent Line Impact 10-17, 10-29,
10-62
Imminent obstacle impact 10-17, 10-29,
10-57, 10-58, 10-62
Imminent terrain impact 10-17, 10-29,
10-62
Import user waypoints 7-23
Infrared 11-41
Insert after 4-7
Insert before 4-6
Intersection 7-11, 8-22, 8-33, 12-4
Invert flight plan 4-24, 4-37
Iridium 11-31, 13-1, 13-11, 13-18
K
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Foreword
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Index-3
Foreword
King autopilot 6-26
Knobs 1-2, 1-4
Getting
Started
L
Terrain
Land data 8-5, 8-23
Legend 11-4, 11-44
Level 10-16, 10-17, 10-27, 10-30, 10-63
Lighting 15-39
Lightning 8-33, 11-20, 11-40, 11-41
Limitations 9-7, 11-9, 10-21, 10-10
LNAV 6-17, 6-18
LNAV+V 6-17, 6-18
LNAV/VNAV Approach 6-3
Load hold at waypoint 4-14
Load procedures in FPL 4-10
Localizer 3-14, 6-25
Local offset 15-18
Lock activation 15-11
Locking screw 1-3
Low alt 6-3
LP +V 6-18
LP approach 6-3, 6-18
LPV Approach 6-3, 6-18
L/VNAV 6-18
Weather
M
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Magnetic variation 15-33, 15-34
Making a phone call 13-12
Manual mag var 15-34
Map
Symbols 8-43
Map controls 8-36
Map Detail 8-32
Map menu 8-3
Map orientation 8-12, 11-36
Map overlay 8-4
Map page 8-1
Map panning 8-34
MAPR 6-3
Map range 8-12, 8-44, 9-15, 10-13,
10-24
Map setup 8-9
Map symbols 17-1, 17-7
Map toolbar symbols 17-8
Index-4
Mark on target 7-19
Mean Sea Level 10-6
Message 10-28, 10-16, 10-22, 4-28, 1033, 10-20
METARs 11-18, 11-41, 11-57
MGRS 15-36
Minimum runway length 1-12
Miscellaneous symbols 17-9
Missed Approach 6-13
MOA 8-33, 17-9
Model descriptions 1-1
Monitoring frequency 3-13
Morse code 3-15
Motion vector 9-20, 9-21, 9-25
Mountains 11-53
Moving map 1-3
MSAS 15-8
Music 13-1, 13-4
Mute 13-7
N
National Weather Service 11-7, 11-45
Nav angle 15-33, 15-34
Navigation map 8-44
Navigation source iii
Nav range ring 8-16
NDB 7-14, 8-22, 8-33, 12-7
Nearest airport 1-12, 1-14, 12-3, 15-19
Nearest airspace 12-9
Nearest ARTCC 12-11
Nearest frequency 3-6
Nearest FSS 12-12
Nearest intersection 12-4
Nearest NDB 12-7
Nearest User Wpt 12-8
Nearest VOR 12-5
Nearest waypoint 12-1
Nearest weather 12-13
Negative climb rate 10-28, 10-31, 10-68
NEXRAD 8-7, 11-7
Limitations 11-9
NEXRAD Canada 11-10
Next airspace 8-34
Non-directional ownship 17-9
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Product Support viii
Proximate Traffic 9-38
Proximity advisory 9-5, 9-17
North up 8-12, 11-1
NOTAM , 7-2, 7-9
O
OBS 8-42, 18-6
Obstacle data 10-6, 10-19, 10-33
Obstacles 8-5, 8-17, 8-23, 9-9, 10-1,
10-6, 10-9, 10-10, 10-21, 10-22,
10-11
Obstructions 10-9, 10-21
OCN 6-3
On scene mode 9-23
Overview 1-3
Ownship 17-9
P
Page menus 8-10, 8-22, 8-28
Pairing a device 15-42, 15-43
Panning 8-34
Parallel track 4-33, 17-9
Parking area 17-2
Phone call 13-12
Phone volume 13-15
Photocell 15-39
Pilot controls 1-4
PIREP 11-26, 11-43, 11-65
Point obstacle 8-17
Point-to-Point 14-14, 14-19
Position format 15-36
Position reporting 13-18
Position reporting status 13-19
Power-up 8-45, 9-10, 10-1, 10-11, 10-20,
10-22, 10-33, 10-61, 10-72
Precipitation 11-9, 11-39, 11-41
Premature descent alerting 10-18, 10-30,
10-63
Preset 13-8
Preventive Resolution Advisory 9-42,
9-43, 9-44
Preview flight plan 4-38, 4-43
Procedures 1-18, 6-1
Procedure turn 6-13
Product age 11-38
Product description 1-3
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Foreword
Getting
Started
R
Radar 9-7, 9-9, 11-7, 11-9, 11-39, 11-46
RAIM 14-11
Rain 11-39, 11-46
Range ring 8-16, 9-15, 10-24, 9-25, 1013, 9-17
Recent frequency 3-5
Record of Revisions viii
Reduced protection 10-39
Reduced required obstacle clearance 1017, 10-29, 10-62
Reduced required terrain clearance 10-17,
10-29, 10-62
Reflectivity 11-7, 11-9
Register with GFDS 11-36
Registration viii
Remote frequency control 1-16, 3-12
Remove FPL waypoint 4-9
Resolution Advisories 9-37, 9-42
Resolution Advisory 9-38, 9-39
Reverse frequency look-up 3-12, 15-21,
15-22
Revisions viii
RLC 10-17, 10-29, 10-62
RNAV 6-18
ROC 10-57, 10-58
Roll steering 6-13, 6-24
Rotorcraft traffic page orientation 9-23
Route options 4-36
Runway 15-19
Runway extension 8-22
Runway length 1-12, 15-19
Runways 7-7
Runway surface 1-12, 15-19
Ryan TCAD 9-24
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
S
SafeTaxi 8-13, 8-22, 8-44, 8-45, 17-2
SafeTaxi symbols 17-2
Satellite telephone 13-11
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
Index-5
Appendix
Index
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Services/
Music
Utilities
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
SBAS 15-8
Scale 8-17, 9-13, 17-3
Scheduled messages 14-28
SD card 1-3
Search and rescue (SAR) 4-16
Select approach 6-9
Select arrival 6-6
Select departure 6-3
Selected Altitude 11-44
Self-test 1-7
Sensor data 14-14, 14-19, 14-24
Serial numbers 13-9, 15-4
Service Class 13-3
Services 11-46, 13-1
Setup 1-10, 15-15
Shield setup 9-31, 9-35
SIGMET 11-15, 11-45, 11-58
Smart Airspace 8-25
SMS 13-15
Snow 11-9
Software version 13-9, 15-3
Special Use Airspace 12-1
Speed 10-18, 10-30, 10-63
Squawk code 2-6
Squelch 1-4, 3-2
Standby 2-3
Standby database 15-4
STAR 6-6
Start-up 1-6
Status 13-19, 15-5, 15-11
Store flight plan 4-24
Stormscope 8-7, 11-27, 17-10
Stuck microphone 3-12
Sunrise/Sunset 14-13
Support viii
Suppress Visuals 13-14
Surface Analysis 11-22
Surface winds 11-45
Symbols 8-43, 9-4, 9-13, 10-27, 10-52,
11-6, 17-1, 10-16
System ID 15-4
System power 1-6
System settings 1-10
System status 9-10, 9-16, 10-33, 10-72,
Index-6
15-3, 10-20
T
TAF 11-41
Target altitude 14-6
Target offset 14-7
Target waypoint 14-8
TAS 9-3, 9-12, 9-13, 14-24
TAWS-A 10-51
TAWS-A alerts 10-56
TAWS-B 10-10, 10-21, 10-51
TAWS-B alerts 10-16, 10-27, 10-52
TAWS failure alert 10-19, 10-33
TAWS system test 10-11, 10-20, 10-22,
10-33, 10-72
TCAD 9-24
TCAD 9900B 9-29
TCAD 9900BX 9-24, 9-33
TCAS 9-4, 9-20
TCAS II 9-37, 9-39, 9-45
TCAS II alerts 9-40
TCAS II system test 9-44
Telligence 2-11
Telligence Voice Command Qualification
Procedure 18-25
Temperature 15-33
Temporary 7-19
TERM 6-3
Terrain 8-5, 8-23, 9-9, 10-1, 10-21, 1057, 10-58, 10-59, 17-5, 10-10
Terrain alerts 10-31, 10-68
Terrain Awareness and Warning System
10-51
Terrain data 8-6, 10-9, 10-10, 10-21
Terrain limitations 10-9
Terrain obstacle symbols 10-23, 10-53,
10-12
Terrain proximity ii, 10-6, 10-23, 10-12
Text 11-46
Text messaging 13-16
TFR 8-22, 11-55, 17-9
Time 15-6, 15-7, 15-18
Time until transmit 13-19
TIS 9-3, 9-4, 9-7, 9-9
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Topo data 8-5
Topo scale 8-17
Touchscreen 1-2, 1-5
Track vector 9-8
Traffic 8-8, 9-1
Traffic Advisory 8-28, 9-3, 9-4, 9-38
Traffic audio 9-27, 9-30, 9-35
Traffic Pop-Up 9-1
Traffic symbols 9-4, 9-13, 9-18, 17-2
Traffic test 9-2
Transponder 2-1, 9-3, 9-7, 9-9, 9-10, 9-13
Trip planning 14-13
Trip planning flight plan mode 14-13,
14-17
Trip planning point-to-point mode 14-14
Turbulence 11-25, 11-45
U
Under construction 17-2
Units 1-12, 15-33
User-defined hold 4-14, 5-8
User fields 1-20, 8-29, 15-30
User frequency 3-9
User waypoint 7-15, 7-18, 8-36, 12-8
UTC
Utilities 14-1
UTM 15-36
V
VCALC 14-4, 14-5
Vector duration 9-22
Vector motion 9-17, 9-25
Vector-To-Final 6-16
Version 1-6, 8-45, 10-1, 10-11, 10-22
Vertical Calculator 14-4
Vertical speed 14-7
VFOM 15-5, 15-7
VFR 2-5, 11-19, 11-42, 11-57
View catalog 4-36
VNAV 4-25, 8-15, 18-8
Voice alert 9-9
Voice call out 10-17, 10-19, 10-28, 1033, 15-38, 10-45, 10-59, 10-71,
10-57
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Volume 1-4, 3-2, 13-2, 13-7
VOR 3-14, 7-12, 8-22, 8-33, 10-24, 12-5,
10-13
VOR-based approach 6-25
VRP 7-2, 7-13, 8-9
Foreword
Getting
Started
Audio &
Xpdr Ctrl
W
WAAS 15-8
Warnings ii
Warranty i
Waypoint information 4-11, 7-1
Waypoint options 4-4
Weather 7-9, 8-28, 11-1, 11-31
Weather legend 11-4
Weather product 11-38, 13-3
Wind 11-41, 8-1, 11-44, 11-45
Winds 14-24
Winds aloft 11-23, 11-44, 11-62
Winds aloft altitude 11-44
Wire obstacle 8-20
WX-500 8-7, 11-27
Com/Nav
FPL
Direct-To
Proc
Wpt Info
Map
Traffic
X
XM channel categories 13-5
XM radio activation 13-3
XM radio channel presets 13-8
XM radio channels 13-6
XM radio volume 13-7
XM Satellite Radio 13-2
XM troubleshooting 13-9
XM weather 13-3
Services/
Music
Z
Utilities
Terrain
Weather
Nearest
Zulu 15-18
GTN 625/635/650 Pilot’s Guide
System
Messages
Symbols
Appendix
Index
Index-7
This page intentionally left blank
190-01004-03 Rev. P
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising